diff options
| author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2020-07-17 21:49:00 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2020-07-17 21:49:00 +0000 |
| commit | 561ef7b2d217276bf876a1b3fb4443dcd6372865 (patch) | |
| tree | 5a3a863f871a8b504ba47749928832806a34079e /Master | |
| parent | c1dc4e84bda67085800d01c72a163f059a896c0b (diff) | |
zztex (17jul20)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@55862 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master')
62 files changed, 24528 insertions, 1 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/plain/zztex/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/plain/zztex/README new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..dedbd028967 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/plain/zztex/README @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +ZzTeX Macro Package, version 17.7 + +The ZzTeX macro package is a full-featured TeX macro package specially +designed for producing books, journals, and manuals. Development of the +package began in 1989. Since then, about 500 textbooks and journals have +been produced with it for a variety of publishers. Numerous authors have +used the package to produce subsequent editions of their books. + +I provide the TeX files for ZzTeX under The MIT License. You may use any or +all of the code for whatever purpose you desire. ZzTeX runs under Plain TeX. +The only documentation available for the package is contained in the zz*.dat +files that accompany the TeX files. + +I hope you find some of the code useful for your TeX projects. + +Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/plain/zztex/zzbuiltin.dat b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/plain/zztex/zzbuiltin.dat new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..09599a8a483 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/plain/zztex/zzbuiltin.dat @@ -0,0 +1,325 @@ +\@catcodes %~ Establish INITEX catcode defaults. +\@markdef \botmark %~ Last mark on the current page. +\@markdef \firstmark %~ First mark on the current page. +\@markdef \splitbotmark %~ Last mark in material split off by |\vsplit.| +\@markdef \splitfirstmark %~ First mark in material split off by |\vsplit.| +\@markdef \topmark %~ Last mark from previous page. +\@prefix \global %~ Establishes a global definition. +\@prefix \immediate %~ Performs the I/O operation immediately. +\@prefix \long %~ Allows command arguments to be multiple paragraphs. +\@prefix \outer %~ Restricts command to appear at top level. +\@suffix \displaylimits %~ Limits are set above/below in display style, as scripts otherwise. +\@suffix \limits %~ Limits are set above and below symbols. +\@suffix \nolimits %~ Limits are set next to symbol like scripts. +\countdef \adjdemerits = 0 %~ Demerits for adjacent incompatible lines. +\countdef \badness = 0 +\countdef \binoppenalty = 0 %~ Penalty for line break after binary operator. +\countdef \brokenpenalty = 0 +\countdef \clubpenalty = 0 +\countdef \day = 0 +\countdef \deadcycles = 0 +\countdef \defaulthyphenchar = 0 +\countdef \defaultskewchar = 0 +\countdef \delimiterfactor = 0 +\countdef \displaywidowpenalty = 0 +\countdef \doublehyphendemerits = 0 +\countdef \endlinechar = 0 +\countdef \errorcontextlines = 0 +\countdef \escapechar = 0 +\countdef \exhyphenpenalty = 0 +\countdef \fam = 0 +\countdef \finalhyphendemerits = 0 +\countdef \floatingpenalty = 0 +\countdef \globaldefs = 0 +\countdef \hangafter = 0 +\countdef \hbadness = 0 +\countdef \holdinginserts = 0 +\countdef \hypenchar = 0 +\countdef \hyphenpenalty = 0 +\countdef \insertpenalties = 0 +\countdef \interlinepenalty = 0 +\countdef \language = 0 +\countdef \lastpenalty = 0 +\countdef \lefthyphenmin = 0 +\countdef \linepenalty = 0 +\countdef \looseness = 0 +\countdef \mag = 0 +\countdef \maxdeadcycles = 0 +\countdef \month = 0 +\countdef \newlinechar = 0 +\countdef \outputpenalty = 0 +\countdef \pausing = 0 +\countdef \postdisplaypenalty = 0 +\countdef \predisplaypenalty = 0 +\countdef \pretolerance = 0 +\countdef \pretolerand = 0 +\countdef \prevgraf = 0 +\countdef \relpenalty = 0 +\countdef \righthyphenmin = 0 +\countdef \showboxbreadth = 0 +\countdef \showboxdepth = 0 +\countdef \skewchar = 0 +\countdef \spacefactor = 0 +\countdef \time = 0 +\countdef \tolerance = 0 +\countdef \tracingcommands = 0 +\countdef \tracinglostchars = 0 +\countdef \tracinglostchars = 0 +\countdef \tracingmacros = 0 +\countdef \tracingonline = 0 +\countdef \tracingoutput = 0 +\countdef \tracingpages = 0 +\countdef \tracingparagraphs = 0 +\countdef \tracingrestores = 0 +\countdef \tracingstats = 0 +\countdef \uchyph = 0 +\countdef \vbadness = 0 +\countdef \widowpenalty = 0 +\countdef \year = 0 +\def \ { %~ Command space. +\def \"{ % {char} %~ Umlaut accent %^accent +\def \'{ % {char} %~ Accute accent %^accent +\def \-{ +\def \.{ % {char} %~ Dot accent %^accent +\def \/{ +\def \={ % {char} %~ Macron accent %^accent +\def \AA { %~ Scandinavian A with circle +\def \aa { %~ Scandinavian a with circle +\def \above { % dimen +\def \abovewithdelims { % delim delim dimen +\def \accent { % nnn +\def \advance { % \name by value +\def \AE { %~ Scandinavian ligature OE +\def \ae { %~ Scandinavian ligature oe +\def \afterassignment { % token +\def \aftergroup { % token +\def \atop +\def \atopwithdelims { % delim delim +\def \batchmode +\def \begingroup +\def \bgroup +\def \box { % nnn +\def \b{ % {char} %~ Bar-under accent %^accent +\def \catcode { % char = nn +\def \char +\def \chardef { % \name = nn +\def \cleaders +\def \closein { % nn +\def \closeout { % nn +\def \copy { % nnn +\def \count { % nnn = integer +\def \countdef { % \name +\def \cr +\def \crcr +\def \c{ % {char} %~ Cedilla accent %^accent +\def \dag { %~ Dagger +\def \ddag { %~ Double dagger +\def \def +\def \delcode +\def \delimiter +\def \dimendef { % \name +\def \diment { % nnn +\def \discretionary{text}{text}{text} +\def \displaystyle +\def \divide { % \name by number +\def \dp +\def \dump +\def \d{ % {char} %~ Dot-under accent %^accent +\def \edef +\def \egroup +\def \end +\def \endgroup +\def \errmessage{text} +\def \errorstopmode +\def \font { % \name = file-name [at size] +\def \fontdiment { % nn \font = dimen +\def \futurelet { % \name token token +\def \gdef +\def \halign{material} +\def \hbox { % [to dimen] {text} +\def \hfil +\def \hfill +\def \hfilneg +\def \hrule { % width dimen height dimen depth dimen +\def \hskip { % skip +\def \hss +\def \ht +\def \hyphenation{text} +\def \hyphenchar { % \font = nn +\def \H{ % {char} %~ Long Hungarian umlaut accent %^accent +\def \ignorespaces +\def \indent +\def \insert { % nnn {text} +\def \kern { % dimen +\def \L { %~ Polish suppressed L +\def \l { %~ Polish suppressed l +\def \lastbox +\def \lccode { % char = char +\def \leaders +\def \left { % delim math \right delim +\def \let { % \name = token +\def \lower { % dimen box +\def \lowercase { % {text} +\def \mark { % {text} +\def \mathaccent { % nnnnn math +\def \mathbin { % {expression} %~ Binary operator class (2) %^math_class +\def \mathchar { % "cfnn +\def \mathchardef { % \name = nnnnn +\def \mathchoice{text}{text}{text}{text} +\def \mathclose { % {expression} %~ Closing fence class (5) %^math_class +\def \mathcode +\def \mathinner { % {expression} %~ Inner subexpression +\def \mathop { % {expression} %~Large operator class (1) %^math_class +\def \mathopen { % {expression} %~ Opening fence class (4) %^math_class +\def \mathord { % {expression} %~ Ordinary symbol class (0) %^math_class +\def \mathpunct { % {expression} %~ Punctuation class (6) %^math_class +\def \mathrel { % {expression} %~ Relation class (3) %^math_class +\def \message { % {text} +\def \moveleft { % dimen box +\def \moveright { % dimen box +\def \mukern { % mudimen +\def \multiply { % \name by number +\def \muskip { % nnn = mu-glue +\def \muskipdef { % \name +\def \noalign { % {text} +\def \noboundary +\def \noboundary +\def \noindent +\def \nonscript +\def \nonstopmode +\def \number { % {number} %~ This command formats an integer as Arabic numerals. +\def \O { %~ Scandinavian O with slash +\def \o { %~ Scandinavian o with slash +\def \OE { %~ French ligature OE +\def \oe { %~ French ligature oe +\def \omit +\def \openin { % nn = file-name +\def \openout { % nn = file-name +\def \over +\def \overline{text} +\def \overwithdelims { % delim delim +\def \P { %~ Paragraph sign (pilcrow) +\def \par +\def \parshape { % = nn dimen ... +\def \patterns{text} +\def \penalty { % nnnnn +\def \radical { % nnnnn math +\def \raise { % dimen box +\def \read { % n to \name +\def \relax +\def \romannumeral { % {number} %~ This command formats an integer as uppercase Roman numerals. +\def \S { %~ Section sign +\def \scriptfont +\def \scriptscriptfont +\def \scriptscriptstyle +\def \scriptstyle +\def \scrollmode +\def \setbox { % nnn = box +\def \setlanguage { % nnn +\def \sfcode +\def \shipout { % box +\def \show { % token +\def \showbox { % nnn +\def \showlists +\def \showthe { % internal-quantity +\def \skewchar { % \font = nn +\def \skip { % nnn = glue +\def \skipdef { % \name +\def \span +\def \special { % {text} +\def \ss { %~ German es-zet +\def \t { % {char} %~ Tie-after accent %^accent +\def \textfont +\def \textstylestyle +\def \toks { % nnn +\def \toksdef { % \name +\def \uccode { % char = char +\def \underline{text} +\def \unhbox { % nnn +\def \unhcopy { % nnn +\def \unkern +\def \unpenalty +\def \unskip +\def \unvbox { % nnn +\def \unvcopy { % nnn +\def \uppercase { % {text} +\def \u{ % {char} %~ Breve accent %^accent +\def \vadjust{text} +\def \valign{text} +\def \vbox { % [to dimen] {text} +\def \vcenter{text} +\def \vfil +\def \vfill +\def \vfilneg +\def \vrule { % width dimen height dimen depth dimen +\def \vskip { % dimen +\def \vsplit { % nnn to dimen +\def \vss +\def \vtop { % [to dimen] {text} +\def \v{ % {char} %~ Hacek accent %^accent +\def \wd +\def \write { % nn {text} +\def \xdef +\def \xleaders +\def \^{ % {char} %~ Circumflex accent %^accent +\def \`{ % {char} %~ Grave accent %^accent +\def \~{ % {char} %~ Tilde accent %^accent +\dimendef \boxmaxdepth = 0 +\dimendef \delimitershortfall = 0 +\dimendef \displayindent = 0 +\dimendef \displaywidth = 0 +\dimendef \emergencystretch = 0 +\dimendef \hangindent = 0 +\dimendef \hfuzz = 0 +\dimendef \hoffset = 0 +\dimendef \hsize = 0 +\dimendef \lastkern = 0 +\dimendef \lineskiplimit = 0 +\dimendef \mathsurround = 0 +\dimendef \maxdepth = 0 +\dimendef \nulldelimiterspace = 0 +\dimendef \overfullrule = 0 +\dimendef \pagedepth = 0 +\dimendef \pagefilllstretch = 0 +\dimendef \pagefillstretch = 0 +\dimendef \pagefilstretch = 0 +\dimendef \pagegoal = 0 +\dimendef \pageshrink = 0 +\dimendef \pagestretch = 0 +\dimendef \pagetotal = 0 +\dimendef \parindent = 0 +\dimendef \predisplaysize = 0 +\dimendef \prevdepth = 0 +\dimendef \scriptspace = 0 +\dimendef \splitmaxdepth = 0 +\dimendef \vfuzz = 0 +\dimendef \voffset = 0 +\dimendef \vsize = 0 +\muskipdef \medmuskip = 0 +\muskipdef \thickmuskip = 0 +\muskipdef \thinmuskip = 0 +\skipdef \abovedisplayshortskip = 0 +\skipdef \abovedisplayskip = 0 +\skipdef \baselineskip = 0 +\skipdef \belowdisplayshortskip = 0 +\skipdef \belowdisplayskip = 0 +\skipdef \lastskip = 0 +\skipdef \leftskip = 0 +\skipdef \lineskip = 0 +\skipdef \parfillskip = 0 +\skipdef \parskip = 0 +\skipdef \rightskip = 0 +\skipdef \spaceskip = 0 +\skipdef \splittopskip = 0 +\skipdef \tabskip = 0 +\skipdef \topskip = 0 +\skipdef \xspaceskip = 0 +\toksdef \errhelp = 0 +\toksdef \everycr = 0 +\toksdef \everydisplay = 0 +\toksdef \everyhbox = 0 +\toksdef \everyjob = 0 +\toksdef \everymath = 0 +\toksdef \everypar = 0 +\toksdef \everyvbox = 0 +\toksdef \output = 0 diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/plain/zztex/zzdetails.dat b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/plain/zztex/zzdetails.dat new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c1ef6d0b8f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/plain/zztex/zzdetails.dat @@ -0,0 +1,1597 @@ +//--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// +// Copyright (c) 2012--2018 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +// +// This software may be used on your own computer systems and may +// be distributed freely to other people. It may not be sold or +// incorporated into any commercial products. +// +// Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +// Windfall Software +// 978 371-2316 +// paul@windfall.com +// +//--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// +// ZzExplore: Describe built-in TeX, Plain TeX, ZzTeX, and design +// file entities for compositors. +// +// This is the details phrase file. +// +// Created: 7 May 2016 + +// \art Block +// ---- ----- + +.details art_details \art +.template art_details +== The |\art| Block + +This tutorial describes the ZzTeX |\art| block, which is used to place +Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files on the page. EPS files can be created +with many different applications, the most common being Adobe Illustrator +and PhotoShop. + +=== The |\art| Command + +The format of the |\art| command is: + +| \art{*type*}{*file*,*width*,*height*,*scale*[,*gutter*,*file*,*width*,*height*,*scale*,...]} + +The *type* argument specifies the type of the code block and thus its +design. Common examples are |figure| for art in floating figures and +|text| for art in text. + +A single piece of art is described by four values in the second argument: + +& *file*& The name of the EPS file. See below. +& *width*& The width of the art, usually specified in picas. +& *height*& The height of the art. +& *scale*& The scale factor for the art. See below. +&. + +You can place multiple pieces of art, or panels, side-by-side by including +additional values in the second argument. The *gutter* specifies the +horizontal distance between the adjacent panels. The next four arguments specify +the second art file, in the same manner as the first. This sequence can be +continued to place three or four panels side-by-side. + +=== File Name + +The file name specified in the |\art| command is the name of an EPS file to be +placed on the page. There is no need to specify the extension |.eps|. The +file is assumed to reside in the directory specifed by the |\setartroot| +command in the book's root file. If the name is preceded by an exclamation +point (|!|), then the file is located in the main project directory (this +feature is used for design art). + +Occasionally, a piece of art will include spurious whitespace on the edges +of the art, but within its bounding box. This whitespace is called *slop*, +and will result in the art appearing out of position. ZzTeX can compensate +for the slops if you specify them with the file name, as follows: + + \art{figure}{{smi01f01,0pt,5pt,0pt,3pt},...} + +Note the extra set of braces around the file name and slops. All four slops +must be specified, in this order: left side, right side, top, bottom. If all +the slops are less than 1.5 points or so, there is no need to include them. +We haven't used slops much in the past decade or so; we simply ask the +illustrator to eliminate the whitespace. + +=== Width and Height + +If both the width and height are specified as zero (i.e., |0pc,0pc|), then the +art will be dynamically sized when the file is processed. ZzTeX inspects the +EPS file to determine the art size. If it cannot find the |%%BoundingBox| +comment that specifies the size, an error results. We use this feature +only for design art. + +The ZzSizeArt utility can automatically size the art in a chapter file. +Try |~.facility; sizing art| for more details. + +=== Scale Factor + +The scale factor specifies the scale at which the piece of art should be +placed, relative to its natural size. The scale factor must always be +specified, even if it is 100. There are three ways to specify it: + +* *percentage*&_A number that specifes the percentage of scaling. +The number may include decimal places. + +* |=|&_An equal sign specifies that the art should be scaled +to fit in the prevailing width. The width is usually the +text measure or the type area width. + +* |=*width*|&_An equal sign and a width specifies that the art should +be scaled to the specified width. +*. + +=== Aligning Side-by-Side Panels + +The |\art| command aligns side-by-side panels along their top edges. Sometimes +you want them aligned differently. To shift a panel vertically, specify a +top slop that is positive to shift the panel up or negative to shift the panel +down. + +Note that the slops are scaled by the scale factor, so the exact slop +required to shift the panel correctly may not be obvious. + +// Art Sizing +// --- ------ + + +.phrase art_sizing art sizing : text +.synonym sizing art +.synonym zzsizeart +.template += ZzSizeArt Art Sizing Utility + +The ZzSizeArt utility allows you to manipulate the art sizes specified in +|\art| commands in ZzTeX source files. Its two primary capabilities are to set +the sizes of art files by inspecting the Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files +and to replace existing EPS files with new versions. + +The ZzSizeArt facility relies on the following conventions for art files: + +* The bulk of the art files for a book are stored in the art/ +subdirectory under the primary project directory. + +* Replacement art files are loaded into the new/ subdirectory under +the art/ directory before eventually being hoisted into the +art/ directory. + +* Before an art file in an |\art| command is sized, its width and height are +coded as |20pc,10pc|. This special combination signals that the art has not +been sized. + +* ZzTeX supports dynamic sizing by setting the |\art| size +to |0pc,0pc|. In this case, the size is determined by inspecting the +EPS file every time the chapter is processed, rather than being set +statically. Most ZzSizeArt commands ignore dynamically sized files. +*. + +== zzsizeart Command + +The zzsizeart command has the following syntax: + +| zzsizeart *root* *command* *additional-items* + +The *root* parameter specifies the root name of the book. It is usually +specified as a period (|.|), which causes ZzSizeArt to figure out the root +name. The command parameter is a keyword that determines which function +ZzSizeArt performs. Its functions are described in alphabetical order +in the following paragraphs. + +* |zzsizeart *root* reset *source-file*| + +This command resets all the art sizes in the specified ZzTeX source file to +|20pc,10pc|. Dynamically sized art files are ignored unless the |-all| option is +included, in which case they are reset also. + +If the |-scale| option is specified, then ZzSizeArt also resets the scale of +the art files to 100. + +* |zzsizeart *root* replace *optional-file-spec*| + +This command analyzes the replacement art files in the art/new/ subdirectory +to determine whether they are the same size as the existing art files and +can safely replace them. If a *file-spec* parameter is provided, only the +replacement files that match the file spec are analyzed. The command +generates a report about the replacement art files and displays it on the +screen. This reports tells you whether the replacement art files are the +same size or a different size. + +If the |-hoist| option is included, then any replacement art files that are the +same size as the existing files are hoisted from the new/ subdirectory up to +the art/ directory, replacing the old art files of the same names. The rest of +the replacement art files are left in the new/ subdirectory. You can use the +PrintEPS utility to generate a proof of the remaining art files, from which +you can read the sizes of those files. Also see the |tell| command below. + +If the |-all| option is also specified, then all replacement art files are +hoisted, including those that are a different size from the existing art +files. + +The |-epsilon=*w*,*h*| option specifies the epsilon values for the width (*w*) and +height (*h*). If the difference in size is within these epsilons, the +replacement file is considered the same size as the existing file. The +default width and heigh epsilons are both 1.5 points. + +* |zzsizeart *root* size *source-file*| + +This command sizes the |\art| commands in the specified ZzTeX source file by +analyzing the EPS files named in those |\art| commands. Every art file must have +the size |20pc,10pc|, except for dynamically-sized art files, which are +ignored. Every named art file must exist in the art/ subdirectory. The +source file is modified so that the art files have their actual sizes. + +If the |-ifexists| option is specified, then ZzSizeArt will size those art +files that exist in the art/ subdirectory and ignore any other files named +in |\art| commands. *All* art files must still have the size |20pc,10pc|, but any +files that do not exist will not be set to their actual sizes. + +If the |-partial| option is specified, then ZzSizeArt will size those art +files whose sizes are |20pc,10pc| and ignore any other art files named in |\art| +commands. This allows you to size art files that were not sized previously +for whatever reason, possibly due to a prior use of the |-ifexists| option. + +If both |-ifexists| and |-partial| are specified, then ZzTeX will size any +art file who size is |20pc,10pc| and that exists in the art/ subdirectory. + +* |zzsizeart *root* tell *eps-file* ...| + +This command analyzes the specified EPS files and displays a report giving +their sizes. This is useful when you need to know the sizes of a few EPS +files in order to update their |\art| commands by hand. +*. +---- +For more details on the |\art| command, try |~.facility; \art|. + +// Cleanup Report +// ------- ------ + + +.phrase cleanup_report cleanup report +.synonym clean-up report +.synonym clean up report +.template += Cleanup Report for ~.project; + +This report describes the chapter cleanup activities for books +in general and ~.project; in particular. + +Before reading this report, it's a good idea to read the design +report for ~.project;. Try |~.facility; design report|. + +== General Cleanup + +=== Clean Up Headings + +The heads in sectioning commands (e.g., |\chapter|, |\section|) and +tables, along with the titles in captions, must be formatted according +to the design. This involves + +* Captitalizing them correctly + +* Adding or removing trailing punctuation + +* Ensuring that run-in heads have no blank lines after them + +* Adding |\noindent| commands where they might be missing + +* Once the chapter is processed, turning multi-line heads with +|\titlenl;| or |\titletl;| +*. + +Here are the styles of the various heads and titles. + +&= Command& Style +---- +~foreach cmd, style_table; +& ~.cmd;& ~.style_table[cmd]; +~end; +&. + +=== Clean Up Floats + +The cleanup for floats involves + +* Making sure there is a blank line on either side + +* Determining whether the author embedded floats in the middle of +paragraphs and merging the broken paragraph segments + +* Moving floats after the first paragraph of reference (this may be +easier during page make-up) + +* Placing the correct file names in |\art| commands. + +* Checking captions to see if they need a |\legend| marker. +*. + +// \code Block +// ----- ----- + +.details code_details \code +.template code_details subclass_set command code +== Code Facilities + +This tutorial describes the ZzTeX code facilities. These facilities are +used to produce computer program code examples. + +=== The |\code| Block + +The |\code| command has the following syntax: + +| \code{*type*} +| *line of code* +| ... +| *line of code* +| \endcode + +The *type* argument specifies the type of the code block and thus its +design. Each line of code is set more or less verbatim and line breaks +are preserved as they are. Code blocks are almost always set in a monospaced +font so that indentation can be accomplished with spaces at the beginnings +of lines. + +=== Verbatim Lines + +The degree to which the code lines are taken verbatim is determined +by certain block design parameters. To investigate the design +parameters for a code block, try |~.facility; \code*type* details|. + +* |\allowTeXcommands|&_If this flag is on, ZzTeX commands can be +included in the code, as long as they use only backslash and +braces (|\|, |{|, |}|). This flag is on in most code blocks. +To include those characters in the code itself, you must use: +|\\|, |\{|, |\}|. + +* |\allowTeXmath|&_If this flag is on, math expressions can be +included in the code, using dollar sign, underscore, and hat (|$|, +|_|, |^|). This flag is off in most code blocks. To include those +character in the code itself, you must use: |\$|, |\_|, |\hat|. +(See |\codemath| for another way to include math in code.) + +* |\allowatsigncommands|&_If this flag is on, at-sign commands +can be included in the code and would probably be provided by +the code design. This flag is off in most code blocks. To include an +at-sign in the code itself, you must use: |\@|. + +=== |\code| Tools + +The following list includes all the tools that can be used within a |\code| +block. You can explore these various commands to learn what they do. + +~foreach name, name_set; +* |~.name;| +~end; +*. + +// \enunciation Block +// ------------ ----- + +.details enunciation_details \enunciation +.template enunciation_details +== The |\enunciation| Block + +This tutorial describes the ZzTeX |\enunciation| block, which produces +mathematical "enunciations" such as theorems, corollaries, and proofs. +Using the |\enunciation| command is reasonably straightforward, +but defining the various types of enunciations is a bit trickier. + +The format is the |\enunciation| command is: + +| \enunciation{*type*}{*optional-attribution*} + +The *type* argument specifies the type of the code block and thus its +design. The *optional-attribution* argument can have one of three +formats. Note that the second set of braces is required in *all* cases. + +# |{}|&_If empty, there is no attribution for the enunciation. +& Theorem 1.1.&_There exist irrational numbers ... +&. + +# |{Smith's Conjecture}|&_The specified text is the attribution for the +enunciation. +& Conjecture 1.2 (Smith's Conjecture).&_Let *K* be the *n*th cyclotomic field ... +&. + +# |{\title Kleene's Theorem}|&_The text specified after the |\title| marker +is the complete title for the enunciation. +& Kleene's Theorem.&_Every language definable with a regular expression ... +&. +#. + +=== Defining an Enunciation Type + +Prior to ZzTeX v5.8, each enunciation type had to be defined by +writing a complete design macro, as with other block types. There +are some subtle issues that make this difficult. In v5.8, the +|\definenunciation| command was added. + +| \defineenunciation{*type*}{*association*}{*design*} + +The first argument is the enunciation's type. The second argument +can be empty or specify the type of another enunciation whose +number counter is to be shared. Both types of enunciation will be +numbered sequentially with the same counter. + +The third argument specifies a design macro for the base design +that is to be used for this new enunciation type. Multiple enunciations +can share the same base design. For example, + + \defineenunciation{conjecture}{}{\enunciationtheoremlikedesign{Conjecture}} + \defineenunciation{corollary}{}{\enunciationtheoremlikedesign{Corollary}} + \defineenunciation{definition}{}{\enunciationtheoremlikedesign{Definition}} + \defineenunciation{lemma}{}{\enunciationtheoremlikedesign{Lemma}} + \defineenunciation{proof}{}{\enunciationprooflikedesign{Proof}} + \defineenunciation{proposition}{}{\enunciationtheoremlikedesign{Proposition}} + +There are two base designs for these enunciations: |\enunciationtheoremlikedesign| +for enunciations formatted like theorems, and |\enunciationprooflikedesign| +for enunciations formatted like proofs. Note that the two design macros expect +an argument that is the word to appear in the title of the enunciation (e.g., +"Conjecture", "Proof"). + +So defining a set of related enunciations boils down to writing one +base design macro. + +=== Base Enunciation Design + +Most of the details about enunciation design macros are the same +as other design macros. There are two interesting additions. + + \def \enunciationtheoremlikedesign #1{% + \aboveskip = \standardskip + ... + \def \labelformat ##1{% + \noindent + \attributiontypecase + {\llap{\colortext{darkblue}{\enunnumbersize\dbf #1 \the\enunciationcomptext}% + \hspace{10pt}}}% no attribution + {\llap{\colortext{darkblue}{\enunnumbersize\dbf #1 \the\enunciationcomptext}% + \hspace{10pt}}##1.\quad}% normal attribution + {\llap{\colortext{darkblue}{\enunnumbersize\dbf ##1}% + \hspace{10pt}}}% title override + \ignorespaces}% + +The first addition is that the design macro accepts an argument that is +the word to be set in the title. The |#1| in the first line represents +that argument. + +The second addition is the |\attributiontypecase| command in the +label formatter. It takes three arguments, each of which formats the +title (label) of the enunciation. The three arguments correspond to the +three title argument formats described above. + +# The attribution argument is empty. +# The attribution argument specifies an attribution. +# The attribution argument includes the |\title| marker. +#. + +=== The |\defineeoedingbat| Command + +The |\enunciation| block includes a design parameter named |\autoqed|. +This parameter can specify the name of an "end-of-enunciation dingbat" +that should appear at the end of the enunciation. + + \def \enunciationprooflikedesign #1{% + ... + \autoqed = {\qed}% + +The |\qed| command, which typesets a dingbat, is automatically performed +at the end of enunciations based on the |\enunciationprooflikedesign| +design. To override the position of the resulting dingbat, you can +specify the |\qed| command explicitly in the text of the enunciation. + +An end-of-enunciation dingbat is defined with + +| \defineeoedingbat{*name*}{*text*}{*space*} + +The first argument is the name of the dingbat command. The second argument +is the text of the dingbat. The third argument specifies how to +separate the dingbat from the final word of the enunciation. + +* |{10pt}|&_The dingbat is set 10 points from the final word. + +* |{\flushright 8pt}|&_The dingbat is set flush right, but a minimum +of 8 points must separate it from the final word. +*. + +So the |\qed| dingbat used above could be defined with + + \defineeoedingbat{\qed}{\colortext{darkblue}{\slug{5pt}{5pt}}}{\flushright 8pt} + +// Environments +// ------------ + + +.phrase environments environments : text +.synonym LaTeX environments +.template += LaTeX Environments + +A LaTeX *environment* is the equivalent of a ZzTeX *block*. +The term environment is not used in ZzTeX. + +// \eqno Marker +// ----- ------ + +.details eqno_details \eqno +.template eqno_details +== Equation Numbers + +This tutorial describes the ZzTeX facilities for setting equation numbers on +math displays. An equation number is set with the |\eqno| marker, which can +appear in three places: + +# At the end of a single-line math display, before the closing |$$|. + +# At the end of an aligned math display, *after* the close brace of the +|\eqaligned| and before the closing |$$|. In this case, the number pertains +to the entire display. + +# At the end of a row of an aligned display, just *before* the |\cr| or +close brace of the |\eqaligned|. In this case, the number pertains to +the row in which it appears. +#. + +Almost all book designs call for one of two formats of equation number. In +most cases, the number consists of the chapter composite text and a sequence +number within the chapter, as in "3.17". In a few cases, only a sequence +number is used, as in "17". In the descriptions below, *chap* stands for the +chapter composite text, while *num* stands for the equation sequence number. The +sequence number is derived from the math display counter, in the same manner +as section numbers are derived from the section counter. + +You can code an equation number in one of four ways: + +| \eqno +| \eqno \tag{*xyz*} +| \eqno *override* +| \eqno *override* \tag{*xyz*} + +The optional *override* text is used to override the normal numbering sequence. +A space or line break can be placed before and/or after the |\tag| command to +aid readability. The |\tag| command must appear immediately following its +paired |\eqno| in order to associate the tag with the correct equation +number. + +The following paragraphs present the various forms of the *override* text for +overriding the numbering sequence. Each case includes two examples, the +first where the equations are numbered in the common (*chap*.*num*) format, and +the second where the equations are numbered with only a sequence number, as +in (*num*). The examples assume that the chapter number is 2 and the +math display counter is at 4 prior to the display +and also show the counter *after* the equation number is typeset. + +* |\eqno|&_&_&_Next sequence number + +The math display counter is incremented and its arabic form is used as +the *num* text. This is the common case. + +&= Result when& Result when +&= (*chap*.*num*) style& (*num*) style& Counter After +---- +& (2.5)& (5)& 5 +&. + +* |\eqno +a|&_&_&_Next sequence number; use with suffix + +The math display counter is incremented and its arabic form is joined +with the suffix following the plus sign to make up the *num* text. + +&= Result when& Result when +&= (*chap*.*num*) style& (*num*) style& Counter After +---- +& (2.6a)& (6a)& 5 +&. + +* |\eqno ,b|&_&_&_Same sequence number with suffix + +The math display counter is *not* incremented. Its arabic form is joined +with the suffix following the comma to make up the *num* text. + +&= Result when& Result when +&= (*chap*.*num*) style& (*num*) style& Counter After +---- +& (2.4b)& (4b)& 4 +&. + +* |\eqno ,$'$|&_&_&_Same sequence number with suffix + +This is another example of the preceding case, showing the common use +of a prime after the *num* text. + +&= Result when& Result when +&= (*chap*.*num*) style& (*num*) style& Counter After +---- +& (2.4′)& (4′)& 4 +&. + +* |\eqno A1|&_&_&_Ignore sequence number; use specified *num* + +The math display counter is ignored. The specified text is used as the +complete *num* text. + +&= Result when& Result when +&= (*chap*.*num*) style& (*num*) style& Counter After +---- +& (2.A1)& (A1)& 4 +&. + +* |\eqno :A1|&_&_&_Next sequence number; use specified *num* + +The math display counter is incremented *but then ignored*. The specified +text is used as the complete *num* text. + +&= Result when& Result when +&= (*chap*.*num*) style& (*num*) style& Counter After +---- +& (2.A1)& (A1)& 5 +&. + +* |\eqno =12;a|&_&_&_Set sequence number; use with suffix + +The math display counter is set to 12 and its arabic form is joined +with the suffix following the semicolon to make up the *num* text. Note that +the suffix (|a| here) is optional but the semicolon is required. + +&= Result when& Result when +&= (*chap*.*num*) style& (*num*) style& Counter After +---- +& (2.12a)& (12a)& 12 +&. + +* |\eqno !2B.1|&_&_&_Use specified text for number + +The chapter composite text and math display counter are ignored. The text +following the exclamation point is the complete equation number. This +feature is useful when you need to set an out-of-sequence equation number +in something like a sidebar or a chapter appendix. + +&= Result when& Result when +&= (*chap*.*num*) style& (*num*) style& Counter After +---- +& (2B.1)& (2B.1)& 4 +&. + +* |\eqno >{*tag*}|&_&_&_Use equation number associated with tag + +The chapter composite text and math display counter are ignored. The equation +number associated with the tag is duplicated for the equation number +of this display. +*. + +If you ever need to reset the math display counter, the following command +will do it: + +| \setmathdisplaynumber{*num*} + +// Indexing +// -------- + +.phrase indexing indexing : text +.template += Indexing Facilities, version 2 + +This tutorial describes the second generation ZzTeX indexing facilities. +These facilities are used to index a document with embedded indexing commands and +then generate one or more indexes for typesetting. + +First, some definitions. + +* Locator.&_An item followng a heading that refers the reader to related +information in the book. This is usually a page number or range, +but sometimes a "See" or "See also." The term *locator* is also used +for the commands that are inserted in the text to create index entries. + +* Main heading.&_The heading of a top-level entry in an index. + +* Raw index entry.&_A locator command such as |\xpage| generates +a raw index entry in the raw index entry files. The entry contains +unformatted information about the locator. + +* Sort override.&_An alternate heading used in place of a regular heading +to specify how it should be sorted, For example, the heading "3-D" +might have a sort heading of "three D". + +* Subheading.&_The heading of a second- or third-level entry in an index, +subordinate to a main heading. +*. + +== Indexing Locators + +Indexing locators are commands that are inserted in the text to produce raw index +entries that ultimately make up the index. This section describes typical +indexing locators. For another overview of locators, try |~.facility; +locators|. + +Most locator commands produce a raw index entry that identifies a page or range of +pages relevant to the headings. + + \xpage{Automobiles} + \xpage{Automobiles|muscle cars} + +Locator commands begin with an |x| and include a type word that identifies +the type of locator produced. The argument specifies one to three +headings, separated by vertical bars (|&||). The first heading is the main heading +and any remaining headings are subheadings. + +If the locator allows a page range, then the commands |\x*type*begin| and +|\x*type*end| identify the beginning and ending positions of the range. + + \xpagebegin{Automobiles} + ... + \xpageend{Automobiles} + +Some locators require an additional argument called the "text." This provides +more information about the locator. + + \xsee{Cars}{Automobiles} + \xseealso{Automobiles|muscle cars}{Automobiles|pony cars} + +Such locator commands produce locators that do not include a page number +but rather text that refers the reader to other entries. The additional +text argument is always the first argument of the locator command. + +=== Sort Overrides + +(To be supplied.) + +== Design File + +This section describes the commands that appear in the design file to define +locators and their formatting and specify the design of the indexes in the +book. The commands are described in the order in which they must appear in +the design file. + + \indexversion{2} + +This command must appear at the beginning of the Index section of the design +file. It specifies that version 2 of the indexing facility is being used. + +=== Generating Indexes + +Multiple indexes can be generated from the raw index entries of a book. Each +index is assigned a name and declared using the following command. + +| \generateindex{*name*} + +Typical names are |subject|, |author|, and |symbol|. For each generated +index, ZzTeX produces an "index parameter file" with the same name as the +index and the extension |zzp|. A parameter file contains information about +the defined locators and information taken from the design definition for +the named index. This information is used by the index generator to build +the final index file. (See below for a description of index parameter files.) + +=== Defining Locators + +| \definelocator{*type*}{*attributes*}{*optional-format*} + +This command defines an index locator and establishes the indexing commands +used to include the locator in the index. The first argument is the type word that +identifies the type of locator. Typical examples are |page|, |figure|, and +|see|. + +The second argument gives the attributes of the locator. It is a series +of keywords: + +* |\page|, |\nopage|&_Indicates whether the locator includes a page number. + +* |\range|, |\norange|&_Indicates whether the locator may be used to specify +a range of pages in addition to a single page. + +* |\text|, |\notext|&_Indicates whether the locator includes additional text. +*. + +Assume that the type is |thing|. In all cases, the following locator command +is defined: + +| \xthing{*headings*} + +If a range is allowed, then two additional commands are defined: + +| \xthingbegin{*headings*} +| \xthingend{*headings*} + +If the locator includes additional text, then all commands take a first +argument specifying the text: + +| \xthing{*text*}{*headings*} +| \xthingbegin{*text*}{*headings*} +| \xthingend{*text*}{*headings*} + +The third argument to |\definelocator| is optional and specifies the format +of the locator in the final index. If the braces are empty, then the +separetely defined format with the same name as the locator is used. To +provide the format, use three sets of braces to specify the second, third, +and fourth arguments for the |\definelocatorformat| command (below). The new +format will be given the same name as the locator. + +=== Defining Formats + +| \definelocatorformat{*name*}{*rank*.*order*}{*level-1-items*}{*level-2-items*} + +This command defines a locator format with the given name for the final index. +The third and fourth arguments specify items that are needed to format +the locator. The level-1-items are used for locators associated with main +headings, while the level-2-items include overrides that pertain to +subheadings (both second- and third-level). + +The second argument specifies the rank and order of this locator. The *rank* +determines this locator's position in the overall sequence of locators for a +heading. Typically, the page locators appear first, then the "see" locator, +then any "see also" locators. + +The *order* determines the order of the locator within a series of locators +all with the same page number. Typically, plain page numbers appear first, +then pages with suffix 'f' for figure, then pages with suffix 't' for table, +etc. + +& Mustang, 13, 44--49, 45*f*, 45*t* +&. + +Each item list argument is in the following format: + +| {*item*:*text*&|*item*:*text*&|...} + +There is a sequence of items separated by bars (|&||). Each item consists of +an item tag, a colon (|:|), and some text. The following item tags are +available. + +* |prefix1|&_Text to precede all locators of this rank, when this is +the first locator after the heading. Defaults to empty. + +* |prefix2|&_Text to precede all locators of this rank, when this is +not the first locator after the heading. Defaults to |prefix1|. + +* |tmplt|&_Template for this locator when there is a single page +or no page (only text). No default. + +* |rtmplt|&_Template for this locator when there is a range of pages. +No default. + +* |sep|&_Separator between locators of this rank. Defaults to empty. + +* |suffix|&_Text to follow all locators of this rank. Defaults to empty. + +* |term|&_Text to terminate the entire sequence of locators. Defaults to empty. +*. + +The templates |tmplt| and |rtmplt| may include the following substitutors. + +&= Substitutor& What is substituted +---- +& |?P|& Single page or first page of range. +& |?Q|& Second page of range. +& |?T|& Text (e.g., for |see| or |seealso| locators). +& |??|& Single question mark (|?|). +&. + +The builtin locators can be found in the ZzTeX file zzindexv2.tex. They +are good examples of how locator formats are defined. + +== Index Design + +Each index of a book is typeset inside an index block whose design is +specified, as usual, with a design macro. The parameters of the design macro +include many common ones, but also a few that are special for index designs. +The following paragraphs describe the special parameters. + +* |\def \alphaformat ##1{*text*}| + +This parameter specifies how to format the break between letters produced by +the |\alphbreak{...}| command. The macro is passed the argument text from the +|\alphabreak|. + +* |\divisions = {*div1*,*div2*,...}| + +This parameter specifies the book divisions to be included in the index. +The value can be |\all|; a list of division names; or |\allbut| followed by a +list of division names. + +* |\locators = {*loc1*,*loc2*,...}| + +This parameter specifies the locators to be included in the index. The value +can be |\all|; a list of locators; or |\allbut| followed by a list of locators. +Each locator consists of the locator type followed by an optional colon and +format name. If a format name is not included, then the locator is formatted +according to the format with the same name as the locator. + +* |\indexparams = {...}| + +This parameter specifies index parameter statements to be included in the +index parameter file. See below for a description of the parameter +statements. + +* |\position = {*options*}| + +This parameter specifies the overall format of the index. It consists of a +sequence of the following options: + +&= Option& Meaning +---- +& |\oneup|& Run index in one column. +& |\outline|& Format entries in outline style. +& |\runin|& Format entries in run-in (paragraph) style. +& |\threeup|& Run index in three columns. +& |\twoup|& Run index in two columns. +& |\usetextmeasure|& Use the text measure for the columns. +& |\usetextwidth|& Synonym for |\usetextmeasure|. +& |\usetypewidth|& Use the type area width for the columns. +&. +*. + +=== Entry Formatters + +(To be supplied.) + +== Raw Index Entry Files + +ZzTeX populates raw index entry files as it encounters indexing locator +commands in the book files. Each indexing locator generates one raw entry +record in the file whose name is the same as the division with an extension +of |.zzi|. A raw entry record has the following format. The semicolon (|;|) +represents the field separator character hex B8, chosen because it cannot +appear in an index heading. + +| *type*;*code*;*folio*;*main-head*;*subhead*;*sub-subhead*;*text* + +The *code* is |S| for a single page entry, |B| for a begin page range entry, +or |E| for an end range entry. + +== Index Parameter Files + +(This material is highly technical and incomplete.) + +An index parameter file contains a series of statements that specify +parameters for the index generator (zzindex2.exe). Each time an index is +generated, at least two parameter files are read: + +* *index-name*.zzp&_The parameter file generated by the |\generateindex| +command for the specific index being generated. + +* zzindex2.zzp&_A generic parameter file included with ZzTeX. +*. + +Each statement in a parameter file has the following format: + +| [*mode*] *keyword* *item* ... ; + +The optional mode is enclosed in brackets and specifies the mode to which +the statement pertains. If the mode is not specified, the statement is used +in all modes. The items are separated by spaces. The statement ends with a +semicolon. + +A parameter file may also contain blank lines and comment lines beginning +with |//|. Comment lines are ignored. + +Statements that specify actions for tokens in headings include the token for +which the action is to be performed. A token can be one of the following: + +&= Token& Meaning +---- +& |SP|& space +& |\SP|& TeX \<space> command +& |\*name*|& TeX |\*name*| command +& |\*c*|& TeX |\*c*| character command +& *x*& any other character +&. + +The following statements can appear in an index parameter file. + +* |begin-group *token* ;| + +The token begins a group and is discarded. The mode stack is pushed with the +current mode. + +* |define-format *format-text* ;| + +(To be supplied.) + +* |define-locator *definition-text* ;| + +(To be supplied.) + +* |[mode] discard *token* ;| + +The token is discarded and does not appear in the canonicalized heading. + +* |[mode] discard/u *token* ;| + +The token is removed from the heading but suffixed to the canonicalized +heading. + +* |divisions *divisions-text* ;| + +This statement specifies the required divisions from the |\divisions| parameter +of the index design. + +* |end-group *token* ;| + +The token ends a group and is discarded. The mode stack is popped. + +* |include-param *file* ;| + +This statement requests that the named index parameter file be loaded. + +* |include-raw *file* ;| + +This statement requests that the named raw index entry file be included in +the set of raw index entry files. + +* |index "*name*" ;| + +This statement specifies the name of the index to be generated. + +* |[mode] invalid *token* ;| + +The token is invalid and an error message is produced. + +* |[mode] keep *token* ;| + +The token is preserved as is on the canonicalized heading. + +* |locators *locators-text* ;| + +This statement specifies the required locators from the |\locators| parameter +of the index design. + +* |math/u *token* ;| + +The token begins or ends math mode. The mode stack is pushed or popped as +appropriate. The token is suffixed to the canonicalized heading. + +* |noise/u "*word*" ;| + +If the word appears at the beginning of a subheading or sub-subheading, it +is removed but suffixed to the canonicalized heading. + +* |[mode] replace *token* "*text*" ;| + +The token is discarded and replaced with the specified text, which is not +rescanned. + +* |[mode] replace/u *token* "*text*" ;| + +The token is discarded and replaced with the specified text, which is not +rescanned. The token is, however, suffixed to the canonicalized heading. + +* |root "*name*" ;| + +This statement specifies the name of the book's root file. + +* |sort *mode* ;| + +(To be supplied.) + +* |[mode] synonym *token* "*text*" ;| + +The token is discarded and replaced with the specified text, which is then +rescanned. +*. + +// Letterspacing +// ------------- + +.details letterspace_details \letterspace +.template letterspace_details +== Letterspacing + +This tutorial describes the letterspacing facility in ZzTeX. All letterspacing +is accomplished with the \letterspace command, which comes in two flavors: + +| \letterspace{*amount*}{*text*} + +This command letterspaces the specified text. The amount of letterspace is +specified by the first argument, usually in ems. + +| \letterspace{*amount*,*space*}{*text*} + +This command operates like the first variant, except that the width of a +space is specified explicitly after the letterspace amount. + +Note that |\letterspace| commands are usually embedded in design macros in +the design file. Rarely does one appear directly in book files. However, to +code titles that will be letterspaced, the compositor needs to understand +the behavior of the |\letterspace| command. + +=== What Happens Automatically + +What a title or other text is letterspaced, the |\letterspace| command does +the following things automatically: + +* Inserts the letterspace amount between adjacent pairs of keyboarded +characters (e.g, |AB|, |01|, |l.|). A "keyboarded character" is one that +is typed on the keyboard, not coded like |\copyright| or |\alpha|. + +* Replaces explicit spaces and tie characters (|~~|) with the space width +derived from the first argument to the |\letterspace| command. + +* Recognizes en dashes (|--|), em dashes (|---|), and double quotes (|``...''|) +and does not break them apart with letterspace. + +* Does *not* letterspace before or after ZzTeX commands, open braces (|{|), or +close braces (|}|). This means that there will be no letterspacing around +|\copyright|, |\ellipsis|, |\alpha|, |\times|, etc. +*. + +=== Explicit Control of Letterspacing + +The automatic rules take care of many letterspacing problems. However, +sometimes you need explicit control over letterspacing, so the following +commands can be used within a title that is letterspaced. If the same +title is carried elsewhere (such as into a running head) +but is not letterspaced there, these commands have no effect. + +& |\lsp|& Insert a letterspace amount here. +& |\lspspace|& Insert a letterspaced space here. +& |\lspoff|& Turn off letterspacing completely. +& |\lspon|& Restore letterspacing. +&. + +=== An Example + +The following diabolical example shows the power of the letterspacing +facility. Here is a chapter title that is letterspaced: + + \chapter{Text Access\titlenl; ``Methods''\titlenl; + \lspoff$a-b'\times c$\lspon\lsp---Why~~Isn't It?} + +This produces the following title, where the vertical bar represents a +letterspace and the underscore represents a space: + +& T&|e&|x&|t_A&|c&|c&|e&|s&|s +& "&|M&|e&|t&|h&|o&|d&|s&|" +& *a* - *b*′ × *c*&|---&|W&|h&|y_I&|s&|n&|'&|t_I&|t&|? +&. + +If this title is used in a running head or table of contents, the control +commands |\lspoff|, |\lspon|, and |\lsp| are ignored (as well as |\titlenl|, +of course). Note that the |\lsp| command is necessary to produce a +letterspace before the em-dash, since letterspacing is automatically +supressed after the |\lspon| command. + +// Runners +// ------- + +.phrase runners runners +.synonym running heads +.synonym running feet +.template += Running Heads and Feet + +Running heads and feet are collectively called *runners*. A design file can +make use of multiple styles of runners. One is built into ZzTeX: + +* |blind|&_A style with empty running heads and feet. +*. + +ZzTeX assumes the existence of two styles that must be defined in the +design file: + +* |normal|&_The style for normal body pages. +* |chapter|&_the style for chapter opener pages. +*. + +Specific designs may use additional styles defined in the design file, +for example: + +* |part|&_The style for part opener pages. +*. + +For each style (except |blind|), the design file contains two definitions, +one for the running head and one for the foot. These macros are responsible +for formatting the header and footer, often using mark information to +obtain chapter numbers, section titles, etc., and using |\folio| to obtain +the page number: + + \def \headernormalformat {...} + + \def \footernormalformat {...} + + \def \headerchapterformat {...} + + \def \footerchapterformat {...} + +== Runner Commands + +The following commands are used to establish the runner styles +for subsequent pages in the book. + +~foreach cmd, command_set; +* |~.cmd;| +~end; +*. + +Those commands are lovely but rarely used explicitly, except in +the front matter. Instead, runners are established using the |\runners| +parameter of certain blocks. + +== |\runners| Parameter + +The |\runners| parameter is a design parameter for certain blocks in ZzTeX. +It is usually specified in the design macros for those blocks in the design +file, but you can override the normal styles by using the |\with| modifier on +such blocks. + +The following list specifies the blocks that use the |\runner| parameter to +perform an implicit |\setrunners| command. Each entry shows the standard +value of the parameter: + +& |\part|& | \runners={blind,normal}| +& |\quasipart|& |\runners={blind,normal}| +& |\chapter|& |\runners={chapter,normal}| +& |\quasichapter|& |\runners={chapter,normal}| +& |\appendix|& |\runners={chapter,normal}| +& |\float|& |\runners={normal}| +&. + +Imagine you had a quasichapter and you wanted to suppress the drop folio +normally set by the chapter runners. You simply do the following: + + \with{\runners={blind,normal}} + \quasichapter{Weird Back Matter} + +You must remember to specify a second style of |normal| for the remaining +pages of the quasichapter or they will all have blind runners. + +You can accomplish the same goal as follows: + + \quasichapter{Weird Back Matter} + \overriderunners{blind} + +The |\float| block uses the |\runner| parameter to perform an implicit +|\overriderunners| command. +The float mechanism arranges to perform an |\overriderunners| with the +style specified by the |\runner| parameter when it is about set a page +containing *only floats*. If you want to suppress the running head on such a +page: + + \with{\runners={blind}} + \float{figure} + +However, see the |\userharea| block modifier for the best way to +accomplish this. + +== Some Examples + +A book with a two-page-spread chapter opener could use the |\runners| +parameter in the chapter design to set the correct runners for both +opener pages: + + \def \chapterdesign {% + ... + \def \paging {\freshpage{\short\floats\even}}% + ... + \runners = {blind,chapter,normal}% + ...} + +Some books have part pages but Chapter 1 occurs before Part I. If the +running heads include the part number and title, that will probably fail in +Chapter 1 because no part has been established. If the design file provides +a special runners style |normalnopart| for such "part-less" chapters, you +can use it quite easily: + + \with{\runners={chapter,normalnopart}} + \chapter{The First Chapter} + +// \tabbing Block +// -------- ----- + +.details tabbing_details \tabbing +.template tabbing_details +== Tabbing Facilities + +This tutorial describes the ZzTeX tabbing facilities. The primary +tabbing feature is the |\tabbing| block, which replaced the tabbing +capability of the |\text| block in ZzTeX v17.2. + +=== The |\tabbing| Block + +The |\tabbing| command has the following syntax: + +| \tabbing{*type*} +| *line of text*\nl +| *another line* +| &_*of text*\nl +| ... +| *last line of text*\nl +| \endtabbing + +The *type* argument specifies the type of the tabbing block and thus its +design. A line in the typeset block can occupy multiple lines in the +TeX file but must end with an |\nl| command. Line breaks in the file are +not taken verbatim. The |\nl| after the final line is optional. + +=== Setting Tab Stops + +There are two ways to set tab stops for the lines in a tabbing block. +The first is to set uniform tab stops across the line. The distance +between tab stops is specified by the |\defaulttabwidth| design +parameter. If this parameter is a positive dimension, say, |14pt|, +then tab stops are set every 14 points across the line. + +The second method of setting tab stops is to include a *template line* +at the beginning of the tabbing block. For example, + + \tabbing{algorithm} + @Cxxxxx@.xxxxx@.xxxxx@.xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx@.@D + +The |@C| command clears any existing tab stops. Each |@.| command +sets a tab stop at the current width of the line. In this example, +there will be a tab stop at the width of 5 |x| letters, 10 letters, +15 letters, and 30 letters. The |@D| command discards the line +so it doesn't show up on the page. The line exists only for the +purpose of setting the stops. + +=== Tabbing + +The |@>| command is used to tab from one tab stop to the next. In this +example, assume that tab stops are set every 14 points. + + \tabbing{algorithm} + $\mvar{scores} = \{\}$\qquad // score accumulator maps doc IDs to scores\nl + \For $w\in q$ \Do\nl + @>\For $d, \mvar{count}\in \mvar{Idx}.\mvar{fetch}\_\mvar{docs}(w)$ \Do\nl + @>@>$\mvar{scores}[d] = \mvar{scores}[d] + \mvar{score}\_\mvar{term}(\mvar{count})$ + @>\EndFor\nl + \EndFor\nl + \Return top $k$ documents from $\mvar{scores}$\nl + \endtabbing + +The third line is indented 14 points, the fourth line is indented 28 points, etc. + +Note that each |@>| command tabs to the next tab stop in the sequence of stops, +regardless of whether the width of the text is beyond that stop. If the width +of the text is beyond the next stop, the text following that stop will overprint +the preceding text. + +=== Vertical Adjustments + +The are two ways to make vertical adjustments between lines of text. +The first is to code a blank line: + + \tabbing{algorithm} + $\mvar{scores} = \{\}$\qquad // score accumulator maps doc IDs to scores\nl + \nl + \For $w\in q$ \Do\nl + +A blank line produces the amount of vertical space specified by the +|\tabbinggapskip| design parameter. This vertical space is usually +less than a full line. + +The second method of performaing a vertical adjustment is to use the +|\adjusttabbing| command in between two lines. Try |~.facility; \adjusttabbing| +for more information. + +=== Line Numbers + +[To be supplied.] + +// \tabular Block +// -------- ----- + +.details tabular_details \tabular +.template tabular_details subclass_set command tabular +== Tabular Facilities, version 3 + +This tutorial describes the third generation of the ZzTeX tabular +facilities. These facilities are used to produce tabular material in +text or in a floating table. + +First, some definitions: + +* Cell.&_The intersection of each row and column is called a cell. +The cell contains the text at that row/column intersection. + +* Column.&_Tabular material is organized into vertical columns. +Each column has a particular format, specified in the template. + +* Gutter.&_The gutter is the horizontal space between columns. It is +typically 1 pica and can stretch or shrink if tables are +to be forced to a particular width. The gutter between two +columns can be changed on a case-by-case basis. + +* Interrow space.&_An extra amount of vertical space that is placed between +rows of tabular material. + +* Picture.&_A sequence of characters used to determine the alignment +of decimal-aligned numeric columns. + +* Row.&_Tabular material is organized into horizontal rows, with + +* Ruled table.&_Tabular material that includes vertical rules. + +* Template.&_An argument to the \tabular command that specifies the +number of columns and the format for each column. +*. + +=== The |\tabular| Command + +The |\tabular| command has the following syntax: + +| \tabular{*type*}{*template*} +| *row* ... \cr +| *row* ... \cr +| ... +| *row* ... \cr +| \endtabular + +The *type* argument specifies the type of the tabular block and thus its +design. The *template* argument specifies the number of columns and their +associated formats (see below). + +Each row consists of a series of cells and is terminated by the |\cr| command +("carriage return" or "complete row"). The cells are specified as follows: + +| *cell-1*&& *cell-2*&&&& *cell-4*&& ...&& *cell-n*\cr + +There is one cell for each column and they are separated by ampersands +(|&&|). It is important to eliminate any spaces *preceding* the ampersands, +although spaces following them are fine. An empty cell is allowed, as with +the third cell above. + +In a ruled table, every cell in a row must be specified, although some may +be empty (the cells corresponding to rule columns usually are). In a table +that is not ruled, rightmost cells that are empty need not be specified. + +=== How ZzTeX Formats Tabular Material + +ZzTeX goes through the following steps to format tabular material. + +# The template is analyzed to check it, count the columns, and prepare the +individual column formats. + +# All rows are read and each cell is formatted in its own box. + +# The maximum width of the cells in each column is determined, and all the +cell boxes in that column are set to the maximum width. (See |\hidewidth| for +an exception.) + +# All the boxes in each row are set side by side, with the column gutter +between them. The widths of the rows are forced to the specified overall +table width, if required by the design. The extra space is placed in the +gutters. + +# The rows are butted together vertically, with no extra space between +them. +#. + +There are some interesting implications of this scheme: + +* Because every cell box in a column, except the widest, will not be filled +with text, the template for each column must include at least one |\hfil| +command to take up the slack. These |\hfil| commands are included in the +builtin templates described below. + +* Because there is no extra space between the rows, each row must occupy the +full height and depth of the tabular body font, plus any interrow space. +Otherwise the rows will not be spaced uniformly. It is this requirement that +makes ruled tables tricky. +*. + +=== The Template + +The template argument to the |\tabular| command is coded as a sequence of +format specifications, one for each column, in the desired order. + +| \tabular{*type*}{@*x* @*y* ... @*z*} + +The available column formats are specified as follows. Spaces and line +breaks may appear in the template for readability. + +* |@l|&_Single line; text flush left. + +* |@c|&_Single line; text centered. + +* |@r|&_Single line; text flush right. + +* |@L{*picture*}|&_Decimal-aligned number; text flush left. See below. + +* |@C{*picture*}|&_Decimal-aligned number; text centered. + +* |@R{*picture*}|&_Decimal-aligned number; text flush right. + +* |@p{*width*}|&_Text set in multiple lines as one or more +paragraphs. The width of the line is specified. +The raggedness, hang, and paragraph skip is +determined by the design. + +* |@e{*width*}|&_Empty column of the specified width. + +* |@s{*sequence*}|&_Special custom column. See below. + +* |@&||&_Column contains a vertical rule whose color and +width are determined by the design. This is a real +column that must be included in each row, but is +normally empty. + +* |@!{*color*}{*width*}|&_Column contains a vertical rule whose color and +width are specified. + +* |@>{*width*}|&_This template may appear following any of the +above templates. It specifies the exact width of +the gutter between the current column and the next, +in place of the standard gutter determined by the +design. Rule columns are surrounded by gutters half +as wide as the standard, unless overridden with |@>|. +If the width is follow by an asterisk (|&*|), then +the gutter can vary in width according to the +|\columngutter| parameter of the design. +*. + +=== Decimal-Aligned Columns + +Decimal-aligned column templates include a picture that determines how the +cells are aligned. The picture is composed of the following characters: + +& |0|& Represents a digit. +& |.|& Specifies the position of the decimal point. +& |,|& Indicates a comma in the number. +& |$-$|& Indicates that the number may be preceded by a negative sign. +& |(...)|& Indicates that the number may be surrounded by parentheses. +&. + +If there is no decimal point in the picture, the cells are aligned on the +right. If there is a decimal point, they are aligned on the point. The +difference between left-, center-, and right-aligned number columns is +irrelevant unless a nonnumeric cell in the column is wider than the widest +numeric cell. In this case the numeric cells are set flush left, center, or +right on those wider cells. This happens when the column heads are wider +than the numbers. + +Because ZzTeX splits decimal-aligned numbers at their decimal points, it is +necessary that both halves of the picture and of all the cell numbers +be balanced with respect to braces and dollar signs. + +=== Special Custom Columns + +A special custom column can be used to construct a complex column that +contains boilerplate material. For example, imagine a left column in which +all entries should be in italic and enclosed in parentheses. This column +could be specified as follows: + +| \tabular{table}{... @s{\emph{(#)}\hfil} ...} +| ...& special& ...\cr +| ...& critical& ...\cr + +The two cells would appear in italic in this format: + +| ... *(special)* ... +| ... *(critical)* ... + +Each cell is formatted by replacing the template sequence's sharp sign (|#|) +with the text specified in the row cell, then using the resulting sequence as +the final text of the cell. In the first row above, the final text would be +|\emph{(special)}\hfil|. Note that the template includes an |\hfil| command to +take up the slack and left-align the text. Don't forget the sharp sign and +at least one |\hfil|. + +=== |\tabular| Tools + +The following list includes all the tools that can be used with a |\tabular| +block. You can explore these various commands to learn what they do. + +~foreach name, name_set; +* |~.name;| +~end; +*. + +// \todo Block +// ----- ----- + +.details todo_details \todo +.template todo_details +== To-Do Facility + +The to-do facility allows you to place a +reminder in a book file and optionally to typeset '???' to represent text +that is still to come. + +The \todo command has three forms. The first form is used most frequently. + +| \todo{This math display needs to be cleaned up later.} + +This command displays the message on your console and includes it in the log +file. Processing continues without interruption. A summary of the number of +to-do reminders is displayed at the end of the run. + +| \todo{!Cannot continue until this table is formatted correctly.} + +This variant includes the message in the log file, but then generates a +warning message and halts execution. You can continue processing by +pressing Enter. Use this variant to force a halt when the division is +processed. + +| \todo{?cover image credit} + +This command is similar to the first variant, but also typesets a triple +question mark (|???|) where the |\todo| appears. You can use this variant to set +the standard triple question mark where text will be supplied later. + +To obtain a list of all the outstanding to-dos, try |~.facility; to-dos|. + +.end diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/plain/zztex/zzphrase.dat b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/plain/zztex/zzphrase.dat new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5265a533721 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/plain/zztex/zzphrase.dat @@ -0,0 +1,3085 @@ +//--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// +// Copyright (c) 2012--2018 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +// +// This software may be used on your own computer systems and may +// be distributed freely to other people. It may not be sold or +// incorporated into any commercial products. +// +// Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +// Windfall Software +// 978 371-2316 +// paul@windfall.com +// +//--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// +// ZzExplore: Describe built-in TeX, Plain TeX, ZzTeX, and design +// file entities for compositors. +// +// This is the main phrase file. +// +// Created: 3 March 2016 + + +// The following three templates are used to produce helpful explanations +// for phrases that do not match. + +// No match to phrase + +.template no_match += No Match +Your request: ~.phrase; + +There is no match for "~.word;". + +~if not empty? choice; +Some possibilities are: +~foreach ph, choice; +* ~.ph; +~end; +*. +~fi; +---- +If you think your request is reasonable, please inform Paul. + +// Ambiguous match to phrase + +.template ambiguous_match += Ambiguous Match +Your request: ~.phrase; + +The word "~.word;" is ambiguous. + +Some possibilities are: +~foreach ph, choice; +* ~.ph; +~end; +*. +---- +If you think your request is unambiguous, please inform Paul. + +// Partial phrase + +.template partial_phrase += Partial Phrase +Your request: ~.phrase; + +These words match the beginning of a phrase, but additional +words are needed. + +~if not empty? choice; +Some possibilities are: +~foreach ph, choice; +* ~.ph; +~end; +*. +~fi; + +If you are looking for a concept instead of specific examples, +it might help to try the plural of the word. +---- +If you think your request is complete enough to produce +a description, please inform Paul. + +// Help Text +// ---- ---- + + +// Help + +.phrase help help : text +.template += ~.facility; v~.version; + +~.facility; allows you to view descriptions of characters, commands, +block designs, and other entities that are defined by built-in TeX, +Plain TeX, ZzTeX, and book design files. It can also present more +detailed reports on concepts such as tags and tabular material. + +Invoke ~.facility; as follows: + +| > ~.facility; *word* *word* ... + +The *word* parameters form a phrase that ~.facility; uses to determine +which information you want to see. If you don't include any words, this +help text is displayed. Do *not* include question words and verbs in your +request (e.g., "what is"). + +~include command_line_chars; + +Without any options, the description is displayed on your terminal. If you +want to view a more stylish description in your browser, enter + +| > ~.facility; -browser *word* *word* ... + +The browser starts up in an independent window, allowing you to work and +read the description at the same time. Remember that you can close the +browser window with Alt+F4. + +It is recommended that you add the following +alias to your 4NT/Take Command alias file: + + exp*lore=~.facility; -browser %$ + +For a list of interesting examples of ~.facility;, enter + +| > ~.facility; examples + +For a list of what's new in version ~.version; and earlier versions, enter + +| > ~.facility; what's new + +.phrase examples examples : text +.template += Examples + +Here are some examples of things you can do with ~.facility;. + +* To see an overview of the current project: + + ~.facility; overview + +* To learn about a particular command: + + ~.facility; \overrideparlength + +* To find out whether a command is available for the current book: + + ~.facility; \separatefloat + +* To get information about a particular math character: + + ~.facility; \beta + +* To find out which types of enunciations or lists are available: + + ~.facility; enunciations + ~.facility; lists + +* To see some details about a particular enunciation: + + ~.facility; \enunciation theorem + +* To learn the names of the zzd design macros for enunciations: + + ~.facility; enunciation designs + +* To see all the details about the design of a particular enunciation: + + ~.facility; \enunciationtheoremdesign details + +* To learn what a count register is: + + ~.facility; counts + +* To get a list of all count registers or learn about a particular one: + + ~.facility; all counts + ~.facility; \sectionnumber + +* To see which type styles are available in the current book: + + ~.facility; type styles + +* To find out which type relationship commands are available +for a particular style: + + ~.facility; \tt + +* To find out which styles are established for a particular type +size and whether they can be used in math: + + ~.facility; \footnotesize + +.phrase whats_new what's new : text +.synonym what is new +.template += What's New in ~.facility; v~.version; + +* Complete description of the |\enunciation| block. +* Complete description of the indexing facility. +* Report of all bibliography entries for the project. +* Report of missing art files. +* List of commands for bibliography citations. +* Improved word matching for design elements that are not blocks. +* Improved report on at-sign commands. +* Complete documentation on the ZzSizeArt utility. +* Complete documentation on the new |\tabbing| block. +*. + +== What's New in ~.facility; v1.1 + +* This "what's new" report. +* Improved report on math classes. +* Improved report on individual characters. +* Improved report on Greek letter commands. +* Report on the new |\immediatemathdisplay| modifier. +* Improved report on the |\immediatesublist| modifier. +* Reports on the new |\breakabove| and |\breakbelow| modifiers. +* Improved reports on the |\bottomfloat| et al. modifiers. +* New page make-up report. +* Complete documentation on the |\tabular| block and related commands. +* Lists of commands for horizontal spacing and vertical spacing. +* Report on penalties. +* Complete documentation on the |\todo| command. +* Complete documentation on the title adjustment commands. +* Report on block modifiers. +* Complete documentation on the |\code| block and related commands. +* Improved documentation on tags. +* Complete documentation on the various forms of |\eqno|. +* Complete documentation on the |\letterspace| command. +* Complete documentation on the |\art| block. +* Complete documentation on running heads and feet (runners). +*. + +// ZzTeX et al Phrases +// ----- -- -- ------- + + +// Accents + +.phrase accents accents +.synonym text accents +.template += Accent Commands + +An accent command produces an accent over a character. +For example, + + Ha\v{c}ek na\"{\i}vet\'e, anyone? + +produces + +& Haček naïveté, anyone? +&. + +Here is a list of all the accent commands. + +&= Command& Description +---- +~foreach acc, accent_table; +& |~.acc;|& ~.accent_table[acc]; +~end; +&. +---- +For information on a specific accent, try |~.facility; \*name*|. + +// (Assumes that the 'one_command' group will also be populated.) +.phrase one_accent <name> accent +.synonym accent <name> +.synonym <name> text accent +.synonym text accent <name> +.template += |~.name;| Accent Command + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +An accent command produces an accent over a character. +---- +For a list of all accents, try |~.facility; accents|. + +// Attributes + +.phrase attributes attributes : text +.synonym command attributes +.template += Attributes + +When ~.facility; reports information about commands, math characters, and +other entities, it includes an item called *attributes*. An attribute +specifies special behavior of the command or character. Here is a list +of all the attributes. + +* internal: The command is internal to Plain TeX or ZzTeX and is never +used directly in design or book files. +* long: The argument to the command can include multiple paragraphs. +* outer: The command can only be used directly in a book file; it cannot +be used by another command. +* limits: The large operator (e.g., |\sum|) sets its limits above and below. +* no limits: The large operator sets its limit as sub- and +superscripts. +* display limits: The large operator set its limits above and below when +used in a math display; as scripts when used in text. +*. + +// Blocks + +.phrase blocks blocks : text +.synonym elements +.template += Blocks + +The block is the primary design element provided by ZzTeX design +files. A block generally spans a large amount of text that must +be formatted in a special way. Examples are lists, footnotes, +and framed text. + +Most blocks are started and ended with specific commands: + + \list{bullet} + \item ... + ... + \endlist + +A few blocks, however, are started and ended with the same command: + + \footnote{This is a footnote that will appear at the bottom.} + +A footnote has only one design style, or *type*. However, there can be an +arbitrary number of different types of lists, such as bullet, number, +label, and dialog. If a block requires a type, the type name is the first +argument to the block command, as with |\list{bullet}| above. + +Two blocks, |\text| and |\list|, can also be nested to produce, say, +multi-level lists. ZzTeX maintains the level counter automatically. + +Each block type and level has its own design. The designs are +embodied in design macros in the design file. For example, +the name of the design macro for a second-level bullet list is +|\listbulletiidesign|. A design macro is essentially a list of +assignments to *parameters* that control the formatting of the +block's text. + +There are two ways to modify the design of a specific block. +The first is to use a variant modifier, which produces predetermined +changes to the design. Try |~.facility; variants| for more information. +The second method is the |\with| modifier, which alters specified +design parameters for the block. Try |~.facility; \with| for +more information. +---- +For a list of all the available blocks, try |~.facility; all blocks|.&/ +For details on a specific block, try |~.facility; \*name*|. + +.phrase all_blocks all blocks +.template += List of Blocks + +This is the list of all the block elements available in ZzTeX. + +&= & Multiple& Can be& Used in +&= Block command& types?& nested?& ~.project; design? +---- +~foreach blk, type_table; +& |~.blk;|& ~.type_table[blk];& ~.nest_table[blk];& ~.used_table[blk]; +~end; +&. +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; blocks|&/ +For information on a particular block, try |~.facility; \*name*| + +// (Assumes that the 'one_command' group will also be populated.) +.phrase one_block <name> block +.synonym block <name> +.synonym <name> element +.synonym element <name> +.synonym <name> types +.synonym <nb-name> +.synonym <nb-name> blocks +.synonym <nb-name> elements +.synonym <nb-name> types +.synonym <nb-name-s> +.template += |~.name;| Block + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +The ~.name; block is one of the primary elements supported +by ZzTeX. + +~if not used?; +This block is not used in the ~.project; book. +~elsif empty? level_table; +This block is used in the ~.project; book. +A ~.name; does not have multiple design types. Its single +design is defined in ~.design_where;. +~else; +This table presents all the different +types of |~.name;| blocks available in the ~.project; design. + +&= Type& Levels& Defined +---- +~foreach type, level_table; +& |~.type;|& ~.level_table[type];& ~.where_table[type]; +~end; +&. +~fi; +---- +To see a description of this block's design parameters, +try |~.facility; ~.name; parameters|.&/ +~if used?;~ +To see some details about the |~.name;| design~* not empty? level_table; for the ~.project; +book, try |~.facility; ~.name; design|.&/~ +~fi; +For more information about blocks in general, try |~.facility; blocks|.&/ +For a list of all available blocks, try |~.facility; all blocks|.&/ + +.phrase block_params <name> parameters +.synonym <name>=\mathdisplay:$$ parameters +.synonym <name> design parameters +.synonym <name>=\mathdisplay:$$ design parameters +.template += |~.name;| Block Design Parameters + +Here is a list of all the design parameters for the |~.name;| +block. + +&= Parameter& Type& Description +---- +~foreach param, type_table; +& |~.param;|& ~.type_table[param];& ~.desc_table[param]; +~end; +&. + +// Block variants + +.phrase block_variants block variants : text +.synonym variants +.synonym design variants +.template += Block Variants + +A block variant is a modifier that can be applied to a block +command to alter the design of the block. Variants may only +be applied to block commands. + +For example, the |\widefigure| variant might be applicable +to a |\float| command to select a wider style for the figure. + + \widefigure \float{figure} + +Often there is a group of variants that all vary the design +of a block is related ways. For example, in addition to +|\widefigure| we might have + +* |\sidebysidefigure| +* |\widefigure| +* |\broadsidefigure| +*. + +Each of these modifiers applies to a figure float and vary its +design in specific ways. The three variants are mutually exclusive: +only one may be specified on any given |\float| command. +---- +For more information about a specific variant, try |~.facility; \*name*|.&/ +To see a list of variants for a specific block, try |~.facility; \*block*|. + +.phrase one_block_variant <name> +.synonym <name> variant +.synonym variant <name> +.synonym <name> block variant +.synonym block variant <name> +.synonym <name> design variant +.synonym design variant <name> +.template += |~.name;| Block Variant + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +A block variant is a modifier that can be applied to a block +command to alter the design of the block. This variant +applies to the |~.block;| block. It is a member of a group +of variants: + +~foreach i, variant_list; +* |~.variant_list[i];| +~end; +*. + +---- +For more information on block variants, try |~.facility; variants|. + +// Block modifiers + +.phrase block_modifiers block modifiers +.synonym modifiers +.template += Block Modifiers + +A block modifier is a command that can be applied to a block +to alter the design of the block. Modifiers may only +be applied to block commands. + +For example, the |\bottomfloat| modifier can be applied to +a |\float| command to place the float at the bottom of the page. + + \bottomfloat \float{figure} + +Note that block variants are another type of block modifier. + +Here is a list of all the block modifiers provided by ZzTeX and +the ~.project; design. It does not include block variants. + +&= Modifier& Where defined +---- +~foreach mod, where_table; +& |~.mod;|& ~.where_table[mod]; +~end; +&. +---- +For more information about a specific modifier, try |~.facility; \*name*|.&/ +For more information on block variants, a type of modifier, +try |~.facility; variants|. + +.phrase one_block_modifier <name> +.synonym <name> modifier +.synonym modifier <name> +.synonym <name> block modifier +.synonym block modifier <name> +.template += |~.name;| Block Modifier + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +A block modifier is a command that can be applied to a block +to alter the design of the block. +---- +For more information on block modifiers, try |~.facility; modifiers|. + +// Box registers + +.phrase boxes box registers : text +.synonym boxes +.template += Box Registers + +A box register contains a box that has horizontal or vertical material +in it. A box can contain a paragraph, a vertical sequence of paragraphs, +a short text fragment for measuring, etc. + +A box register is accessed and set as follows: + +| \box \*name* +| \setbox \*name* = \hbox {*horizontal material*} +| \setbox \*name* = \vbox {*vertical material*} +| \setbox \*name* = \vtop {*vertical material*} + +Boxes are never used directly in book files. +---- +For a list of all boxes, try |~.facility; all boxes|.&/ +For information on a particular box, try |~.facility; \*name*| + +.phrase all_boxes all box registers +.synonym all boxes +.template += List of Box Registers + +This is the list of all box registers available in ZzTeX. + +&= Register& Description +---- +~foreach reg, reg_table; +& |~.reg;|& ~.reg_table[reg]; +~end; +&. +~include internal_note; +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; boxes| + +.phrase one_box <name> +.synonym <name> box +.synonym box <name> +.synonym <name> register +.synonym register <name> +.synonym <name> box register +.synonym box register <name> +.template += |~.name;| Box Register + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +Default: |~.default;| + +A box register contains a box that has horizontal or vertical material +in it. A box can contain a paragraph, a vertical sequence of paragraphs, +a short text fragment for measuring, etc. +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; boxes| + +// Catcodes + +.phrase catcodes catcodes +.synonym category codes +.synonym character categories +.synonym character category codes +.template += Catcodes (Category Codes) + +A category code is assigned to every character read by TeX as it +processes files. A character's category code determines how TeX handles +that character. + +Here is a list of all the category codes. + +&= Number& Name& Meaning (example) +---- +~foreach i, name_table; +& ~.i;& |~.name_table[i];|& ~.meaning_table[i]; +~end; +&. + +.phrase one_catcode <name> +.synonym <name> catcode +.synonym catcode <name> +.synonym <name> category code +.synonym category code <name> +.template += |~.name;| Category Code + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +Value: ~.value; + +A category code is assigned to every character read by TeX as it +processes files. A character's category code determines how TeX handles +that character. +---- +For more information and list of all catcodes, try |~.facility; catcodes| + +// Characters + +.phrase characters characters + +.phrase one_character <name> +.synonym <name>=`T:tab +.synonym <name>=`F:formfeed +.synonym <name>=`R:newline +.synonym <name>=`_:space +.synonym <name>=":quote +.synonym <name>=%:percent +.synonym <name>=&:ampersand +.synonym <name>=':apostrophe +.synonym <name>=(:lparen +.synonym <name>=,:comma +.synonym <name>=<:less +.synonym <name>=>:greater +.synonym <name>=^:hat +.synonym <name>=`=:equal +.synonym <name>=``:backquote +.synonym <name>=|:bar +.template += ~.name; Character + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +& Catcode:& |~.catcode;| +& Font position:& |~.position;| +& Math class:& |~.math_class;| +& Math family:& |~.math_family;| +&. +---- +For information on catcodes, try |~.facility; catcodes|.&/ +For information on math classes, try |~.facility; classes|.&/ +For information on math families, try |~.facility; families|. + +// Citation commands + +.phrase citations citations +.synonym citation commands +.template += Citation Commands + +A citation command is a command that accepts a bibliography item tag and produces +a citation (reference) to that item. For example + + As \citenoun{smith16} describes, the widget ... + +might produce + +& As Smith [2016] describes, the widget ... +&. + +The following table lists all the citation commands available +for the ~.project; book. Be careful to read about the commands +defined in the design file (~.project;.zzd) first; some of +them might specify that certain other citation commands should +not be used. + +&= Command& Defined +---- +~foreach cmd, where_table; +& |~.cmd;|& ~.where_table[cmd]; +~end; +&. + +// Command line + +.phrase command_line command line : text +.template += Command Line + +Some characters are difficult or impossible to specify on the +4NT/Take Command command line. The following table shows how to +specify such characters by themselves or as the second +character of a character command. + +& & How to Specify& How to Specify +& Character& Character& Character Command +---- +& <newline>& |newline|& |\.newline| +& <formfeed>& |formfeed|& |\.formfeed| +& <space>& |space|& |\.space| +& |"|& |quote|& |\.quote| +& |%|& |percent|& |\.percent| +& |&&|& |ampersand|& |\.ampersand| +& |'|& |apostrophe|& |\.apostrophe| +& |(|& |lparen|& |\.lparen| +& |,|& |comma|& |\.comma| +& |<|& |less|& |\.less| +& |&=|& |equal|& |\.equal| +& |>|& |greater|& |\.greater| +& |^|& |hat|& |\.hat| +& |`|& |backquote|& |\.backquote| +& |&||& |bar|& |\.bar| +&. + +// Commands + +.phrase commands commands +.synonym macros +.template += Commands + +Commands are the primary entity with which TeX files are coded +to produce beautiful text. A command name consists of a backslash +(|\|) followed by + +* A sequence of upper- and lowercase letters (e.g., |\sin|), or +* A single non-letter character (e.g., |\,|) +*. + +Command names are *case-sensitive;* that is, an uppercase letter +is different from the same lowercase letter. So |\big| and |\Big| +are two different commands. + +A command name can operate by itself or it can require *arguments,* +which are pieces of text that the command uses to perform its +function. Arguments are usually enclosing in braces (|{|...|}|). +However, if there is a single argument composed of a single Roman +or Greek letter, then no braces are necessary. + + For example, you can set an acute accent on a character using + braces, as in \'{a}, but the braces aren't necessary: \'a. + +When scanning a command, TeX has one rule that can cause trouble. +Spaces and a single line break following a letter command are ignored. +So the text + + Don't you love the text that \TeX can produce? + +will result in the following: + +& Don't you love the text that TeXcan produce? +&. + +There are two solutions, the first of which is preferred. + + Don't you love the text that \TeX\ can produce? + Don't you love the text that \TeX{} can produce? + +Command names containing an at-sign (|@|) or beginning with '|z|' +are internal to TeX and ZzTeX. +---- +For information on a specific command, try |~.facility; \*name*|.&/ +For information on the attributes item included with individual +command descriptions, try |~.facility; attributes|.&/ +~include command_line_chars; + +== Command Counts + +For your edification, this table presents the number of commands +defined by TeX and ZzTeX. + +&= Count& Origin of command +---- +& ~.builtin_count;& Built-in TeX +& ~.plain_count;& Plain TeX macro package (many superceded by ZzTeX) +& ~.zztex_count;& ZzTeX macro package +& ~.zzd_count;& Design file(s) +&. + +.phrase one_command <name> +.synonym <name>=\`R:\.newline +.synonym <name>=\`_:\.space +.synonym <name>=\":\.quote +.synonym <name>=\':\.apostrophe +.synonym <name>=\,:\.comma +.synonym <name>=\^:\.hat +.synonym <name>=\`=:\.equal +.synonym <name>=\``:\.backquote +.synonym <name>=\mathdisplay:$$ +.synonym <name> command +.synonym <name>=\`R:\.newline command +.synonym <name>=\`_:\.space command +.synonym <name>=\":\.quote command +.synonym <name>=\':\.apostrophe command +.synonym <name>=\,:\.comma command +.synonym <name>=\^:\.hat command +.synonym <name>=\`=:\.equal command +.synonym <name>=\``:\.backquote command +.synonym command <name> +.synonym <name> macro +.synonym macro <name> +.template += |~.name;| Command + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; +---- +~include command_info; + +// Count registers + +.phrase counts count registers : text +.synonym counts +.template += Count Registers + +A count register contains an integer that can be used as a counter, +to number elements, to hold an integer parameter value, etc. + +A count register is accessed and set as follows: + +| \*name* +| \*name* = *integer* + +Counts are rarely used directly in book files. +---- +For a list of all count registers, try |~.facility; all counts|.&/ +For information on a particular count register, try |~.facility; \*name*|. + +.phrase all_counts all count registers +.synonym all counts +.template += List of Count Registers + +This is the list of all count registers available in ZzTeX. + +&= Register& Description +---- +~foreach reg, reg_table; +& |~.reg;|& ~.reg_table[reg]; +~end; +&. +~include internal_note; +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; count registers| + +.phrase one_count <name> +.synonym <name> count +.synonym count <name> +.synonym <name> register +.synonym register <name> +.synonym <name> count register +.synonym count register <name> +.template += |~.name;| Count Register + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +Default: |~.default;| + +A count register contains an integer that can be used as a counter, +to number elements, to hold an integer parameter value, etc. +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; counts| + +// Declarations + +.phrase declarations declarations : text +.template += Declarations + +A TeX declaration has a name like a command, but it does not +take any arguments. Instead, it pertains to the following text in +the current brace group. + +Example: |{\it *text*}| + +The *text* is set in italic style, but text following the close brace +is not. The braces limit the scope of the declaration. + +Declarations are used in design files but rarely in book files. +There is almost always a command that should be used instead. + +Example: |\emph{*text*}| +---- +For information on commands, try |~.facility; commands| + +.phrase one_declaration <name> +.synonym <name> declaration +.synonym declaration <name> + +// Designs + +.phrase designs designs : text +.synonym block designs +.template += Block Designs + +A block design is embodied in a macro usually located in a +book's design file. There are a few block designs built into +ZzTeX. The block design macro contains a list of block +parameter assignments that together specify the features +and format of the block. + +The block design macro name comes in three flavors. + +& |\def \footnotedesign|& The block does not have multiple types +& |\def \floatfiguredesign|& The block has multiple types +& |\def \listbulletidesign|& The block has multiple types and levels +&. + +Within the design macro definition is a sequence of parameter +assignments and other TeX coding to establish the design for +that particular block, block type, or block type/level. Each +time ZzTeX encounters a block in a book file, it executes the +design macro to establish the design, then processes the contents +of the block. +---- +To see details about a design, try things like: + +| ~.facility; \listbulletidesign +| ~.facility; \float{figure} +| ~.facility; list bullet i + +// The phrases for a block with no type; e.g., \footnotedesign. + +.phrase one_design_notype <name> +.synonym <name> macro +.synonym <block> design +.synonym <block>=\mathdisplay:$$ design +.synonym <block> design macro +.synonym <nb-block> design +.synonym <nb-block> design macro +.template += |~.name;| Design Macro + +~include common_info; + +~include design_info; + +~.comment; +---- +~include gory_details; + +// The phrases for a block with a type, but no type specified. + +.phrase-dups one_design_type_general <block> designs +.synonym <block> design macros +.synonym <nb-block> designs +.synonym <nb-block> design macros +.template += |~.block;| Design Macros + +The following table shows a list of all the design macros +available in the ~.project; book for the various types of |~.block;|. + +&= Design Macro& Element +---- +~foreach des, design_table; +& |~.des;|& ~.design_table[des]; +~end; +&. +---- +For information on a specific type, try |~.facility; ~.block; *type*|. + +// The phrases for a block with a specified type. + +.phrase one_design_type_specific <name> +.synonym <name> macro +.synonym <block> <type> +.synonym <block> <type> design +.synonym <block> <type> design macro +.synonym <nb-block> <type> +.synonym <nb-block> <type> design +.synonym <nb-block> <type> design macro +.synonym <type> <nb-block-s> +.synonym <type> <nb-block> designs +.synonym <type> <nb-block> design macros +.template += |~.name;| Design Macro + +~include common_info; + +~include design_info; + +~.comment; +---- +~include gory_details; + +// The phrases for a block with a type and level, but no type or level specified. + +.phrase-dups one_design_level_general <block> designs +.synonym <block> design macros +.synonym <nb-block> designs +.synonym <nb-block> design macros +.synonym <block> <type> designs +.synonym <block> <type> design macros +.synonym <nb-block> <type> designs +.synonym <nb-block> <type> design macros +.synonym <type> <nb-block-s> +.synonym <type> <nb-block> designs +.synonym <type> <nb-block> design macros +.template += |~.block;| Design Macros + +The following table shows a list of all the design macros +available in the ~.project; book for the various types of |~.block;|. + +&= Design Macro& Element +---- +~foreach des, design_table; +& |~.des;|& ~.design_table[des]; +~end; +&. +---- +For information on a specific type and level, +try |~.facility; ~.block; *type* *level*|. + +// The phrases for a block with a specified type and level. + +.phrase one_design_level_specific <name> +.synonym <name> macro +.synonym <block> <type> <level> +.synonym <block> <type> <level> design +.synonym <block> <type> <level> design macro +.synonym <nb-block> <type> <level> +.synonym <nb-block> <type> <level> design +.synonym <nb-block> <type> <level> design macro +.template += |~.name;| Design Macro + +~include common_info; + +~include design_info; + +~.comment; +---- +~include gory_details; + +.phrase design_details <name> details +.template += ~.name; Design Details + +~include common_info; + +~include design_info; + +~if not empty? inblock_set; +The design is modified when the block appears inside these surrounding blocks: +~foreach blk,inblock_set,iter;~,blk,iter /= 1;~end; +~fi; + +Here is a table of all the parameter values set by this design macro. + +&= Parameter& Type& Value& Note +---- +~foreach param, type_table; +& |~.param;|& ~.type_table[param];& |~.value_table[param];|& ~.note_table[param]; +~end; +&. + +~if affected?; +(Some parameters may be missing due to design changes caused by variants +or nesting inside outer blocks.) +~fi; +---- +For the complete story on this design, see ~.where;. + +// Dimen registers + +.phrase dimens dimension registers : text +.synonym dimensions +.template += Dimen(sion) Registers + +A dimen register contains a dimension that can be used as the width, +height, or depth of a box, an indentation amount, a page dimension, etc. + +A dimen register is accessed and set as follows: + +| \*name* +| \*name* = *dimension* + +Dimensions are rarely used directly in book files. +---- +For a list of all dimen registers, try |~.facility; all dimens|.&/ +For information on a particular dimen register, try |~.facility; \*name*|. + +.phrase all_dimens all dimension registers +.synonym all dimensions +.template += List of Dimen(sion) Registers + +This is the list of all dimen registers available in ZzTeX. + +&= Register& Description +---- +~foreach reg, reg_table; +& |~.reg;|& ~.reg_table[reg]; +~end; +&. +~include internal_note; +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; dimen registers| + +.phrase one_dimen <name> +.synonym <name> dimension +.synonym dimension <name> +.synonym <name> register +.synonym register <name> +.synonym <name> dimension register +.synonym dimension register <name> +.template += |~.name;| Dimen(sion) Register + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +Default: |~.default;| + +A dimen(sion) register contains a dimension that can be used as the width, +height, or depth of a box, an indentation amount, a page dimension, etc. +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; dimens| + +// Encodings + +.phrase encodings style encodings +.synonym encodings +.synonym font encodings +.template += Style Encodings + +A style encoding is an integer value that specifies the overall organization +of the fonts associated with that style. For example: + +* \encoderoman is the encoding for typical Roman text fonts. +* \encodeitalic is the encoding for typical italic text fonts. +* \encodemathitalic is the encoding for math fonts containing +italic letters for use as variables. +*. + +The encoding for a type style is specified in the |\definetypestyle| +command for that style. + +Here are all the style encodings supported by ZzTeX. + +&= Encoding& Value& Meaning +---- +~foreach val, value_set; +& ~.encoding_table[val];& ~.val;& ~.meaning_table[val]; +~end; +&. +---- +For a list of type styles and their encodings, try |~.facility; type styles|. + +.phrase one_encoding <name> +.synonym <name> encoding +.synonym encoding <name> +.synonym <name> style encoding +.synonym style encoding <name> +.synonym <name> font encoding +.synonym font encoding <name> +.template += |~.name;| Style Encoding + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +Value: ~.value; + +A style encoding is an integer value that specifies the overall organization +of the fonts associated with that style. +---- +For more information and list of all encodings, try |~.facility; style encodings| + +// End-of-enunciation dingbats + +.phrase eoe_dingbats end-of-enunciation dingbats : text +.synonym dingbats +.synonym eoe dingbats +.synonym enunciation dingbats +.template += End-of-Enunciation Dingbats + +An end-of-enunciation dingbat (eoe dingbat) is an icon that is set +at the end of an enunciation. A mathemtical proof, for example, almost +always has a dingbat at the end. The command for the dingbat would be +|\qed|. + +The dingbat is set automatically at the end of the enunciation, or you +can specify it explicitly using its command name. +---- +For information on a specific dingbat, try |~.facility; \*name*| + +// (Assumes that the 'one_command' group will also be populated.) +.phrase one_eoe_dingbat <name> dingbat +.synonym dingbat <name> +.synonym <name> eoe dingbat +.synonym eoe dingbat <name> +.synonym <name> enunciation dingbat +.synonym enunciation dingbat <name> +.synonym <name> end-of-enunciation dingbat +.synonym end-of-enunciation dingbat <name> +.template += |~.name;| End-of-Enunciation Dingbat Command + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +& Text of dingbat:& |~.text;| +& Position:& |~.position;| +&. + +An end-of-enunciation dingbat (eoe dingbat) is an icon that is set +at the end of an enunciation. +---- +For information on dingbats in general, try |~.facility; dingbats| + +// Enumerated Names + +.phrase one_chardef_enum <name> +.template += ~.name; Symbolic Number + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +Value: ~.value; + +A symbolic number is a name assigned to a number to make it easier +to refer to the number without having to remember its value. A symbolic +number is often referred to as an *enumerated value.* + +~include internal_note; + +// Flags + +.phrase flags flags : text +.synonym booleans +.template += Flags + +A flag is a true/false (boolean) value stored in a TeX macro +(not a register). It can be used to specify a yes/no option, +the state of some binary choice, the result of a test, etc. + +A flag is accessed and set as follows: + +| \*name* +| \setflag \*name* = \true +| \setflag \*name* = \false + +Flags are rarely used directly in book files. +---- +For a list of all flags, try |~.facility; all flags|.&/ +For information on a particular flag, try |~.facility; \*name*|. + +.phrase all_flags all flags +.synonym all booleans +.template += List of Flags + +This is the list of all flags available in ZzTeX. + +&= Name& Description +---- +~foreach flag, flag_table; +& |~.flag;|& ~.flag_table[flag]; +~end; +&. +~include internal_note; +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; flags| + +.phrase one_flag <name> +.synonym <name> flag +.synonym flag <name> +.synonym <name> boolean +.synonym boolean <name> +.template += |~.name;| Flag + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +Default: |~.default;| + +A flag is a true/false (boolean) value stored in a TeX macro +(not a register). It can be used to specify a yes/no option, +the state of some binary choice, the result of a test, etc. +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; flags| + +// Fonts + +.phrase fonts fonts : text +.synonym type fonts +.template += Font Declarations + +A font declaration establishes the type font for the current brace +group. In TeX, a font is a specific type family and style set at a +particular size. Some common examples: + +&= Font Declaration& Family, Style, Size +---- +& |\tenhalfrm|& morg at 10.5pt& (|morg| is Minion-Regular) +& |\tenhalfmit|& mtmiz at 10.5pt& (|mtmiz| is MathTime Math Italic) +& |\tenhalfit|& moi at 10.5pt& (|moi| is Minion-Italic) +& |\twelvedbf|& Flama-Bold at 12pt +&. + +Font declarations are never used directly in design or book files, instead +operating behind the scenes when font sizes and styles are selected. +---- +For a list of all fonts in the ~.project; book, try |~.facility; all fonts|.&/ +For information about a particular font, try |~.facility; \*name*|.&/ +For information on type sizes or styles, try |~.facility; sizes| or +|~.facility; styles|. + +.phrase all_fonts all fonts +.template += List of Fonts + +This is the list of all the fonts used in the ~.project; book. + +&= Fonts& Family, style, size +---- +~foreach font, font_table; +& |~.font;|& ~.font_table[font]; +~end; +&. +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; fonts|. + +// (Assumes that the 'one_declaration' group will also be populated.) +.phrase one_font <name> font +.synonym font <name> +.synonym <name> type font +.synonym type font <name> +.template += |~.name;| Font Declaration + +~include common_info; + +Font: ~.font_size;. + +A font declaration establishes the type font for the current brace group. +Font declarations are never used directly in design or book files, instead +operating behind the scenes when font sizes or styles are selected. +---- +For more information on fonts, try |~.facility; fonts|.&/ +~include declaration_info; + +// Glyphs + +.phrase glyphs glyphs + +// (Assumes that the 'one_command' group will also be populated.) +.phrase one_glyph <name> glyph +.synonym glyph <name> +.template += |~.name;| Glyph Command + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +Art spec: ~.art_spec; + +A glyph is a command that sets a small graphic used as an icon +or attention indicator. The glyph scales with the surrounding font. + +// Ifs + +.phrase ifs ifs : text +.synonym if flags +.template += If Flags + +An if flag is similar to ZzTeX's flags but is only used by Plain +TeX. Because all the if flags are internal to Plain TeX and +never used in design or book files, no more information will +be provided. + +// Inserts + +.phrase inserts inserts : text +.template += Inserts + +An insert is one or more chunks of text that are to be inserted on +the page at the top or bottom. Examples are floating figures, +floating tables, and footnotes. + +ZzTeX defines an insert for floats at the top of the page, +floats at the bottom, and footnotes. Each insert consist of +three registers needed to manage the text: a count, a dimen, +and a skip. + +Since the operation of inserts is entirely internal, there is no +additional information about them. + +// Lets + +.phrase one_let <name> +.synonym <name>=\%:\.percent +.synonym <name>=\&:\.ampersand +.synonym <name>=\<:\.less +.synonym <name>=\>:\.greater +.synonym <name> synonym +.synonym <name>=\&:\.ampersand synonym +.synonym <name>=\%:\.percent synonym +.synonym <name>=\<:\.less synonym +.synonym <name>=\>:\.greater synonym +.synonym synonym <name> +.template += |~.name;| Synonym + +~include common_info; + +Synonym for: |~.parent;| + +~.comment; + +A synonym is a name established with the |\let| command and is +equivalent to its "parent" command. To see information on this name's +parent command, try |~.facility; ~.parent;|. + +// Locators + +.phrase locators locators +.synonym indexing commands +.synonym indexing locators +.template += Index Locators + +An index locator is a command that creates an entry in the +book's index. It takes an argument with one, two, or three headings +separated by bars: + + \xpage{Main|subhead} + +Some locators can specify a page range, in which case there are +two additional commands: + + \xpagebegin{Main|subhead} + \xpageend{Main|subhead} + +If it is a command like |\xsee| and |\xseealso|, it takes an additional +first argument with the heading to consult. In this example, the heading +|Synonym| will refer to the heading |Primary|: + + \xsee{Primary}{Synonym} + +The following locators are available for the ~.project; book: + +&= & Begin/end& See-like +&= Command& commands?& reference? +---- +~foreach i, command_list; +& |~.command_list[i];|& ~.range_list[i];& ~.refers_list[i]; +~end; +&. +---- +~include indexing_info; + +// (Assumes that the 'one_command' group will also be populated.) +.phrase one_locator <name> locator +.synonym locator <name> +.synonym <name> indexer +.synonym indexer <name> +.synonym <name> indexing command +.synonym indexing command <name> +.synonym <name> locator command +.synonym locator command <name> +.template += |~.name;| Index Locator Command + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +An index locator is a command that creates an entry in the book's index. +The format of this locator command is shown above. There is one command +if this kind of locator can only specify a single page. There are three +commands if it can specify a single page or a page range. The commands for +this locator are: + +~foreach cmd, command_list; +* ~.command_list[cmd]; +~end; +*. +---- +For more information on locators, try |~.facility; locators|. + +// Marks + +.phrase marks marks +.synonym page marks +.template += Mark Pseudo-Commands + +A mark is a chunk of text inserted into the current page using the +|\mark| command. The purpose of a mark is to hold information +for running heads and feet. This information can be extracted from +the page using pseudo-commands such as |\topmark| in the header +and footer formatting macros. + +The |\mark| command and the extracting pseudo-commands are not used +directly in ZzTeX design or book files. Instead, |\setmarkinfo| and +|\markinfo| are used. + +Here is a list of all the mark pseudo-commands. + +&= Command& Description +---- +~foreach mark, desc_table; +& |~.mark;|& ~.desc_table[mark]; +~end; +&. + +(Do not confuse marks with markers.) +---- +For information on a specific mark, try |~.facility; \*name*|. + +.phrase one_mark <name> +.synonym <name> mark +.synonym mark <name> +.synonym <name> page mark +.synonym page mark <name> +.template += |~.name;| Mark Pseudo-Command + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +A mark is a chunk of text inserted into the current page using the +|\mark| command. The purpose of a mark is to hold information +for running heads and feet. +---- +For more information on marks, try |~.facility; marks|. + +// Markers + +.phrase markers markers +.synonym argument markers +.synonym command markers +.template += Markers + +A marker indicates a point in a command argument where the following +text is interpreted differently from the preceding text. For example, + + $$ + a = b \eqno + $$ + +The |\eqno| marker indicates that the following text (empty in this +example) should be interpreted as the equation number. + +Here is a list of all the markers provided by ZzTeX. + +&= Marker& Meaning +---- +~foreach marker, comment_table; +& |~.marker;|& ~.comment_table[marker]; +~end; +&. + +(Do not confuse markers with marks.) +---- +For information on a specific marker, try |~.facility; \*name*|. + +.phrase one_marker <name> +.synonym <name> marker +.synonym marker <name> +.template += |~.name;| Marker + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +A marker indicates a point in a command argument where the following +text is interpreted differently from the preceding text. +---- +For more information on markers, try |~.facility; markers|. + +// Math accents + +.phrase math_accents math accents +.template += Math Accent Commands + +A math accent command produces an accent over a math character. +For example, + + x = y \times \hat{a} + +produces + +& *x* = *y* × *â* +&. + +Here is a list of all the math accent commands. + +&= Command& Description +---- +~foreach acc, accent_table; +& |~.acc;|& ~.accent_table[acc]; +~end; +&. +~include internal_note; +---- +For information on a specific accent, try |~.facility; \*name*|. + +// (Assumes that the 'one_command' group will also be populated.) +.phrase one_math_accent <name> accent +.synonym accent <name> +.synonym <name> math accent +.synonym math accent <name> +.template += |~.name;| Math Accent Command + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +A math accent command produces an accent over a math character. +---- +For a list of all math accents, try |~.facility; math accents|. + +// Math characters + +// (Assumes that the 'one_command' group will also be populated.) +.phrase one_math_char <name> character +.synonym character <name> +.synonym <name> symbol +.synonym symbol <name> +.synonym <name> math character +.synonym math character <name> +.synonym <name> math symbol +.synonym math symbol <name> +.template += |~.name;| Math Character + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +This command sets a math character or symbol with the following properties. + +& Math class:& |~.math_class;| +& Math family:& |~.math_family;| +& Font position:& ~.position; +&. + +// Math character constants + +.phrase one_math_char_constant <name> + +// Math classes + +.phrase math_classes math classes +.synonym classes +.template += Math Classes + +Each math character and subexpression is assigned to one of the +math classes shown below. The class determines how the character or +subexpression is formatted. In particular, it determines the amount +of space on each side of it. Each class is assigned a number, although +you never need to worry about them. + +You can force a math expression into a particular class using the +commands in the following table. Each takes an argument that is +the expression to be classified. For example: + + x \mathbin{.} y + +This forces the period to act like a binary operator, thus being set +with a thin space on either side of it. + +&= Class& Number& Class Command& Description +---- +~foreach i, class_list; +& |~.class_list[i];|& ~.i;& |~.command_list[i];|& ~.desc_list[i]; +~end; +&. + +.phrase one_chardef_math_class <name> +.synonym <name> math class +.synonym math class <name> +.synonym <name> class +.synonym class <name> +.template += |~.name;| Math Class + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +Value: ~.value; + +Each math character and subexpression is assigned to a math class. +The class determines how the character or subexpression is formatted. +---- +For more information and list of all math classes, try |~.facility; math classes|. + +// (Assumes that the 'one_command' group will also be populated.) +.phrase one_command_math_class <name> math class +.synonym math class <name> +.synonym <name> class +.synonym class <name> +.template += |~.name;| Math Class Command + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +A math class command forces its argument to be interpreted +according to a particular math class (specified above) rather than its standard +math class. +---- +For more information on math classes, try |~.facility; math classes|.&/ +~include command_info; + +// Math families + +.phrase math_families math families : text +.synonym family +.synonym families +.synonym type family +.synonym type families +.template += Math Families + +A math family is a number that is assigned to a type style so the +style can be used in math expressions. Associated with the family +are three fonts, one each for text size, script size, and scriptscript +size. A type style cannot be used in math without a family number. +This is occasionally a problem because there is a limit of 15 families. +---- +For information about a particular family, try |~.facility; \*xx*fam|; +for example, |~.facility; \rmfam|&/ +For a list of type styles and their associated families, +try |~.facility; type styles|. + +.phrase one_math_family <name> +.synonym family <name> +.synonym <name> family +.synonym <name> math family +.synonym <name> type family +.synonym math family <name> +.synonym type family <name> +.template += |~.name;| Math Family + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +& Type style:& |~.style;| +& Family number:& ~.number; +&. + +A math family is a number assigned to a type style so the style +can be used in math expressions. Only families 0--14 are usable +in math. +---- +For more information on math families, try |~.facility; math families| + +// Math functions + +.phrase math_functions math functions : text +.synonym functions +.template += Math Functions + +Math functions are commands that set the names of mathematical functions +such as sin and max. If the command is followed by a fence, the fence +abuts the name. Otherwise a thin space follows the name. For example, + + ... the $\sin x$ and the $\sin(x)$ are both ways of writing ... + +produces + +& ... the sin *x* and the sin(*x*) are both ways of writing ... +&. +---- +For information on a specific function, try |~.facility; \*name*| + +// (Assumes that the 'one_command' group will also be populated.) +.phrase one_math_function <name> function +.synonym function <name> +.synonym <name> math function +.synonym math function <name> +.template += |~.name;| Math Function + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +& Sets:& ~.function; +& Limits:& ~.limits; +&. + +A math function is a command that sets a math function name, +usually in roman. +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; math functions| + +// Math joined symbols + +// (Assumes that the 'one_command' group will also be populated.) +.phrase one_math_joined <name> joined math symbol +.synonym joined math symbol <name> +.synonym <name> joined symbol +.synonym joined symbol <name> +.synonym <name> math symbol +.synonym math symbol <name> +.template += |~.name;| Joined Math Symbol + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +A joined math symbol is constructed by adjoining one symbol +with another. In this case, the symbol is built as: + + ~.left; ~.right; +---- +~include math_class_info; + +// Math stacked symbols + +// (Assumes that the 'one_command' group will also be populated.) +.phrase one_math_stacked <name> stacked math symbol +.synonym stacked math symbol <name> +.synonym <name> stacked symbol +.synonym stacked symbol <name> +.synonym <name> math symbol +.synonym math symbol <name> +.template += |~.name;| Stacked Math Symbol + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +A stacked math symbol is constructed by stacking one symbol +on top of another. In this case, the symbol is built as: + + ~.above; + ~.below; +---- +~include math_class_info; + +// Muskip registers + +.phrase muskips muskip registers : text +.synonym muskips +.template += Muskip Registers + +A muskip register contains a glue value (nominal, stretch, shrink) +measured in math mu units (1/18 em). It can specify a horizontal space +to be used in math. Muskip registers are only used in math. + +A muskip register is accessed and set as follows: + +| \*name* +| \*name* = *mu-glue* + +Muskip registers are never used directly in book files. +---- +For a list of all muskip registers, try |~.facility; all muskips|.&/ +For information on a particular muskip register, try |~.facility; \*name*|. + +.phrase all_muskips all muskip registers +.synonym all muskips +.template += List of Muskip Registers + +This is the list of all muskip registers available in ZzTeX. + +&= Register& Description +---- +~foreach reg, reg_table; +& |~.reg;|& ~.reg_table[reg]; +~end; +&. +~include internal_note; +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; muskip registers| + +.phrase one_muskip <name> +.synonym <name> muskip +.synonym muskip <name> +.synonym <name> register +.synonym register <name> +.synonym <name> muskip register +.synonym muskip register <name> +.template += |~.name;| Muskip Register + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +Default: |~.default;| + +A muskip register contains a glue value (nominal, stretch, shrink) +measured in math mu units (1/18 em). It can specify a horizontal space +to be used in math. +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; muskips| + +// Math \text command + +.phrase math_text math \text : text +.template += Math |\text| Command + +There is a |\text| command that can be used in math expressions +to typeset its argument in text mode. + +Usage: |\text{*text*}| + +For example, + + $$ + x = 0.999\ldots = 1\quad \text{(see limits description)} + $$ + +This math display would be set as follows. + +& *x* = 0.999... = 1&_(see limits description) +&. + +Note that this |\text| command is only defined in math mode. + +// Named Characters + +.phrase one_named_char <name> +.synonym <name>=\|:\.bar +.synonym <name> character +.synonym <name>=\|:\.bar character +.synonym character <name> +.template += ~.name; Named Character + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +Font position: |~.position;| + +A named character is a single character that is not on the keyboard but is +assigned a name so that it can be easily typed. Some named characters also +have a character command synonym (e.g., |\@| = |\atsign|). + +// Page make-up + +.phrase page_makeup page make-up +.synonym page makeup +.synonym paging +.template += Page Make-Up + +Page make-up is the process of formatting the text on each +page of a book. In particular, it involves deciding what +text should appear on each page and on each spread. + +The following ZzTeX commands can help with page make-up. + +~foreach name, makeup_set; +* |~.name;| +~end; +*. + +// Penalties + +.phrase penalties penalties +.synonym penalty +.template += Penalties + +A penalty is a number that specifies how much TeX should favor or +disfavor a line break or page break. Positive penalties cause TeX +to disfavor breaks, while negative penalties cause it to favor breaks. +Penalties range from -10,000 (meaning always break) to +10,000 (meaning +never break). + +Penalties are used in commands such as |\vpenalty|, |\linebreak|, and +|\columnbreak|. These commands are rarely used in book files. + +Here is a table of all the available penalties. + +&= Penalty& Meaning +---- +~foreach name, comment_table; +& |~.name;|& ~.comment_table[name]; +~end; +&. + +.phrase one_penalty <name> +.synonym <name> penalty +.synonym penalty <name> +.template += |~.name;| Penalty + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; penalties|. + +// Prefixes + +.phrase prefixes prefixes +.synonym command prefixes +.template += Prefixes + +A prefix specifies an attribute of the name being defined +using |\def| and related commands. It also specifies an +attribute of I/O operations. + +Here is a list of all the prefixes. + +&= Prefix& Description +---- +~foreach pre, prefix_table; +& |~.pre;|& ~.prefix_table[pre]; +~end; +&. + +.phrase one_prefix <name> +.synonym <name> prefix +.synonym prefix <name> +.synonym <name> command prefix +.synonym command prefix <name> +.template += |~.name;| Prefix + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +A prefix specifies an attribute of the name being defined +using |\def| and related commands. It also specifies an +attribute of I/O operations. +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; prefixes|. + +// Skip (Glue) registers + +.phrase skips skip registers : text +.synonym skips +.synonym glue registers +.synonym glues +.template += Skip Registers + +A skip register contains a glue value (nominal, stretch, shrink) +that can specify a horizontal or vertical space, a left or right +indentation, a gutter, etc. + +A skip register is accessed and set as follows: + +| \*name* +| \*name* = *glue* + +Skip registers are never used directly in book files. +---- +For a list of all skip registers, try |~.facility; all skips|.&/ +For information on a particular skip register, try |~.facility; \*name*|. + +.phrase all_skips all skip registers +.synonym all skips +.synonym all glue registers +.template += List of Skip (Glue) Registers + +This is the list of all skip registers available in ZzTeX. + +&= Register& Description +---- +~foreach reg, reg_table; +& |~.reg;|& ~.reg_table[reg]; +~end; +&. +~include internal_note; +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; skip registers| + +.phrase one_skip <name> +.synonym <name> skip +.synonym skip <name> +.synonym <name> register +.synonym register <name> +.synonym <name> skip register +.synonym skip register <name> + +.synonym <name> glue +.synonym glue <name> +.synonym <name> glue register +.synonym glue register <name> +.template += |~.name;| Skip (Glue) Register + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +Default: |~.default;| + +A skip register contains a glue value (nominal, stretch, shrink) +that can specify a horizontal or vertical space, a left or right +indentation, a gutter, etc. +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; skips| + +// Spacing + +.phrase spacing spacing : text +.template += Spacing Commands + +To see a list of commands for horizontal spacing, +try |~.facility; horizontal spacing|. + +To see a list of commands for vertical spacing, +try |~.facility; vertical spacing|. + +.phrase horizontal_spacing horizontal spacing +.template += Horizontal Spacing + +This table presents a list of all the horizontal spacing commands +available in ZzTeX. + +A command described as *breakable* allows a preceding line break, and the +space is discarded. A command described as *unbreakable* does not allow a +preceding line break. + +~foreach cmd, comment_table; +& |~.cmd;|& ~.comment_table[cmd]; +~end; +&. +---- +For more information on any of these commands, try |~.facility; \*name*|. + +.phrase vertical_spacing vertical spacing +.template += Vertical Spacing + +Here is a list of all the vertical spacing commands available in ZzTeX. + +~foreach name, name_set; +* |~.name;| +~end; +*. +---- +For more information on any of these commands, try |~.facility; \*name*|. + +// Suffixes + +.phrase suffixes suffixes +.synonym command suffixes +.template += Suffixes + +A suffix can be affixed to certain math commands to specify +how limits are to be set. + +Here is a list of all the suffixes. + +&= Suffix& Description +---- +~foreach suf, suffix_table; +& |~.suf;|& ~.suffix_table[suf]; +~end; +&. + +.phrase one_suffix <name> +.synonym <name> suffix +.synonym suffix <name> +.synonym <name> command suffix +.synonym command suffix <name> +.template += |~.name;| Suffix + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +A suffix can be affixed to certain math commands to specify +how limits are to be set. +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; suffixes|. + +// Titles + +.phrase titles titles +.synonym heads +.synonym adjustments +.synonym head adjustments +.synonym title adjustments +.template += Titles and Their Adjustment + +A *title* or *head* appears in various ZzTeX commands, including +hierarchy commands such as |\chapter| and |\section|, captions, +enunciations, etc. Each of these commands takes an argument that +specifies the text of the title. + +| \chapter{*title-text*} + +The title text can appear in various places: + +* In the body of the text at the position of the |\chapter| command. +* In the running heads or feet of multiple pages. +* In the main table of contents or a "mini-ToC" such as might +appear at the beginning of each chapter. +*. + +Sometimes it is necessary to modify the title slightly when it appears in +these various places. For example, if a title has a footnote, that footnote +does not want to appear in the running head or table of contents. ZzTeX +provides the following commands that can be used within the text of a title +to make such adjustments. + +~foreach cmd, command_set; +* |~.cmd;| +~end; +*. + +// Toks registers + +.phrase toks toks registers : text +.synonym toks +.synonym tokens +.synonym token registers +.template += Toks (Token) Registers + +A toks (token) register contains a sequence of TeX tokens (characters, commands, +spaces, etc.) that can specify a text fragment, file name, tag, options +list, etc. + +A toks register is accessed and set as follows: + +| \*name* +| \*name* = {*tokens*} + +Toks registers are never used directly in book files. +---- +For a list of all toks registers, try |~.facility; all toks|.&/ +For information on a particular toks register, try |~.facility; \*name*|. + +.phrase all_toks all toks registers +.synonym all toks +.synonym all token registers +.synonym all tokens +.template += List of Toks (Token) Registers + +This is the list of all toks registers available in ZzTeX. + +&= Register& Description +---- +~foreach reg, reg_table; +& |~.reg;|& ~.reg_table[reg]; +~end; +&. +~include internal_note; +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; toks registers| + +.phrase one_toks <name> +.synonym <name> toks +.synonym toks <name> +.synonym <name> register +.synonym register <name> +.synonym <name> toks register +.synonym toks register <name> + +.synonym <name> token +.synonym token <name> +.synonym <name> token register +.synonym token register <name> +.template += |~.name;| Toks (Token) Register + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +Default: |~.default;| + +A toks register contains a sequence of TeX tokens (characters, commands, +spaces, etc.) that can specify a text fragment, file name, tag, options +list, etc. +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; toks| + +// Style relations + +.phrase style_relations style relations +.synonym relations +.synonym font relations +.synonym type relations +.template += Style Relation Commands + +A style relation is a command that selects a new type style for +its argument text based on the prevailing type style. The argument text +is set in the new style and then the prevailing style continues. +For example, + +| *...* a set of \emph{dependencies} on parent structures *...* + +might typeset the text as + +& *...* a set of *dependencies* on parent structures *...* +&. + +Style relation commands are used instead of the underlying type +style declarations (e.g., |\it|) for various reasons, the most +important one being that the style change is restricted to the +argument text. + +Here is a list of the relation commands available for the ~.project; +book. For more details about a particular relation, try |~.facility; +\*name*|. + +&= Relation& Where defined +---- +~foreach rel, relation_table; +& |~.rel;|& ~.relation_table[rel]; +~end; +&. + +*Note:* The |\mono| command is used like a relation, but it is +actually just a normal command. +---- +~include command_info; + +// (Assumes that the 'one_command' group will also be populated.) +.phrase one_style_relation relation <name> +.synonym <name> relation +.synonym <name> font relation +.synonym <name> style relation +.synonym <name> type relation +.synonym font relation <name> +.synonym style relation <name> +.synonym type relation <name> +.template += |~.name;| Style Relation Command + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +A style relation is a command that selects a new type style for +its argument based on the prevailing type style. The argument text +is set in the new style and then the prevailing style continues. + +Here is a table of all the relationships established by this command. + +&= Prevailing& & New +&= style& & style +---- +~foreach sty, style_map; +& ~.sty;& ⇒& ~.style_map[sty]; +~end; +&. +---- +For more information on style relations and a list of all available +relations, try |~.facility; style relations|.&/ +~include command_info; + +// Tags + +.phrase tags tags : text +.template += Tags + +A tag is a TeX name that is used to store information about a particular +spot in a book. You can tag a spot using the |\tag| command. + + \section{All About Tags} + \tag{S:about-tags} + +The following information is associated with the tag |S:about-tags|: + +* The page number on which the tag is defined. + +* The composite number text of the enclosing element (in the above example, +the section number). + +* The title or caption of the enclosing element. +*. + +The following cross-referencing commands can be used to typeset the +information asociated with a tag: + +& |\ref{*tag*}|& Set the composite number text. +& |\refpage{*tag*}|& Set the page number. +& |\reftitle{*tag*}|& Set the title (rarely used). +&. + +If the |\tag| command is used at a point in the text where there is +no surrounding taggable element, an error message is produced. In this +situation, if you only want to reference the page number, use the |\tagpageonly| +command instead. + +== Tag Names + +If you need to add a tag to a book, please follow the naming conventions +chosen by the author. If the author was haphazard, use the following +prefixes on tags of various kinds: + +&= Prefix& Meaning +---- +& |A:|& appendix +& |C:|& chapter or quasichapter +& |E:|& equation +& |F:|& figure +& |I:|& list item +& |P:|& page number of arbitrary text (with |\tagpageonly|) +& |S:|& section, subsection, etc. +& |T:|& table +& |X:|& exercise +&. + +Tags names beginning with |z*X*:|, where *X* is a capital letter, are +internal to ZzTeX. For a description of these internal tags, +try |~.facility; internal tags|. +---- +To obtain a list of all the tags in the ~.project; book, try +|~.facility; all tags|. + +.phrase internal_tags internal tags : text +.template += Internal Tags + +Here is a list of all the internal tags used by ZzTeX. + +&= Tag prefix& Usage +---- +& |zB:|& Bibliographic entry information. +& |zE:|& Page number of frame element. +& |zF:|& Page number of float element. +& |zH:|& Error message help text. +& |zM:|& Page number of marginnote element. +& |zP:|& Page number of proofnote element. +& |zR:|& Page number of marginrule element. +& |zS:|& Composite cross-reference snapshot information. +&. +---- +For a description of tags in general, try |~.facility; tags|. + +// Type styles + +.phrase type_styles type styles +.synonym styles +.synonym font styles +.template += Type Styles + +A type style is a declaration that establishes the current style for +text (e.g., roman, italic). As with all declarations, it pertains only +to the following text in the current brace group. + +Type styles are rarely used directly in book files. Instead, the current +style is established using a style relation command such as |\emph| or +|\bold|. To see a list of all the relation commands, try |~.facility; +type relations|. To see a list for a particular style, along with +information about that style, try |~.facility; \*style*|. + +Here are all the type styles available for the ~.project; book. +&= & & Family& Family& Usable +&= Style& Encoding& number& name& in math? +---- +~foreach fam, family_list; +& |~.style_list[fam];|& |~.encoding_list[fam];|& ~.fam;& |~.family_list[fam];|& +~.math_list[fam]; +~end; +&. +---- +For information on encodings, try |~.facility; encodings|.&/ +~include declaration_info; + +// (Assumes that the 'one_declaration' group will also be populated.) +.phrase one_type_style type style <name> +.synonym <name> style +.synonym style <name> +.synonym <name> font style +.synonym font style <name> +.template += |~.name;| Type Style Declaration + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +A type style is a declaration that establishes the current style for +text (e.g., roman, italic). Instead of using the style declaration, +you should use a style relation command. Here are the style relations +pertinent to this style. + +&= Current style& Relation& New style +---- +~foreach rel, new_style; +& |~.name;|& |~.rel;|& |~.new_style[rel];| +~end; +&. +---- +For more information on type styles, try |~.facility; type styles|&/ +For more information on type relations, try |~.facility; type relations| + +// Type sizes + +.phrase type_sizes type sizes : text +.synonym sizes +.synonym font sizes +.template += Type Sizes + +A type size is a declaration that establishes the current size +for text. As with all declarations, it pertains only +to the following text in the current brace group. + +When a type size is established, there is no current style +for the subsequent text. You must also establish a style +after establishing a size. + + {\footnotesize\it That '\it' command was necessary + to establish the style.} + +Type sizes are rarely used directly in book files. Instead, the +surrounding element (typically a block) establishes the size +for the text in that element. The main text size is always called +|\textsize|. +---- +To see a list of all the available type sizes, try |~.facility; all sizes|.&/ +To see the details of a particular size, try |~.facility; \*name*|. + +.phrase all_type_sizes all type sizes +.synonym all sizes +.synonym all font sizes +.template += List of Type Sizes + +This is the list of all type sizes available in the ~.project; book. + +&= Size declaration& Available styles +---- +~foreach size, style_table; +& |~.size;|& |~.style_table[size];| +~end; +&. +---- +For more information, try |~.facility; type sizes|.&/ +To see the details of a particular size, try |~.facility; \*name*|. + +// (Assumes that the 'one_declaration' group will also be populated.) +.phrase one_type_size size <name> +.synonym <name> size +.synonym <name> type size +.synonym type size <name> +.synonym <name> font size +.synonym font size <name> +.template += |~.name;| Type Size Declaration + +~include common_info; + +~.comment; + +A type size is a declaration that establishes the current size +for text. As with all declarations, it pertains only +to the following text in the current brace group. + +Here is a list of all the type styles available in |~.name;|. + +&= & Can use& Can use +&= Style& in math?& in scripts?& Family, style, size +---- +~foreach i, style_list; +& |~.style_list[i];|& ~.math_list[i];& ~.script_list[i];& ~.font_list[i]; +~end; +&. +---- +For more information on type sizes, try |~.facility; type sizes|.&/ +To see a list of all the available type sizes, try |~.facility; all sizes|. + +// Composite Cross-Reference Phrases +// --------- --------------- ------- + + +.phrase all_art_files all art files +.synonym art files +.template += List of All Art Files for ~.project; + +This is a list of all the art files used in ~.project;, in order +by file name. + +Count: ~.*div_table; + +&= Division& Page& File& Size at scale& Reused? +---- +~foreach file, div_table; +& ~.div_table[file];& ~.page_table[file];& ~.file;& ~.size_table[file];& ~.reused_table[file]; +~end; +&. +---- +For a list of just the missing art files, try |~.facility; missing art files|. + +.phrase all_biblio_entries all bibliography entries +.synonym all bibliography tags +.synonym bibliography entry list +.synonym bibliography entries +.template += List of All Bibliography Entries for ~.project; + +This is a list of all the bibliography entries in the ~.project; +bibliography, in order by tag. + +Count: ~.*page_table; + +&= Page& Tag& Author& Year +---- +~foreach tag, page_table; +& ~.page_table[tag];& |~.tag;|& ~.author_table[tag];& ~.year_table[tag]; +~end; +&. + +.phrase all_tags all tags +.synonym tag list +.template += List of All Tags for ~.project; + +This is a list of all the tags used in ~.project;, +in order by tag name. +(This list does not include bibliography entry tags.) + +Count: ~.*comp_table; + +&= Tag& Comp. Text& Division& Page +---- +~foreach tag, comp_table; +& |~.tag;|& ~.comp_table[tag];& ~.div_table[tag];& ~.page_table[tag]; +~end; +&. + +Tags beginning with |\z*X*:| are internal to ZzTeX. For a description +of those tags, try |~.facility; internal tags|.&/ +---- +For a list of all the bibliography entry tags, try |~.facility; +all biblio tags|. + +.phrase book_info book information : text +.template += Book Information + +~.facility; can show you all kinds of information about the +~.project; project. + +& |~.facility;| command words& Report produced +---- +& |overview|& Overview of the book and its design. +& |all art files|& List of all art files. +& |all biblio entries|& List of all bibliography entries. +& |all tags|& List of all tags. +& |cleanup report|& Report about cleanup of files. +& |contents|& High-level table of contents. +& |design report|& Report of elements with explanatory comments. +& |duplicate tags|& List of duplicate tags. +& |library|& List of documentation files in ZzTeX directory. +& |missing art files|& List of missing art files. +& |printer report|& Report to accompany final printer PDF. +& |proofnote list|& List of outstanding proofnotes. +& |to-do list|& List of outstanding to-dos. +& |undefined tags|& List of undefined tags. +&. + +.phrase contents contents +.synonym table of contents +.template += Table of Contents for ~.project; + +~foreach i, page_list; +& ~.page_list[i];& ~.comp_list[i];& ~.title_list[i]; +~end; +&. + +.phrase design_report design report +.synonym compositor's design report +.template += Design Report for ~.project; + +~include title_author_publisher_isbn; +&. + +== Summary of Design + +~include design_summary; + +Every project starts with a cleanup of the text files. +Try |~.facility; cleanup report| for a description of +the cleanup of ~.project;. + +== Documented Elements + +The following sections present the book design elements that +have specific documentation in the main design file ~.zzd_file;. +It is a good idea to review these elements at the start of a project. + +~foreach i, head_list; +~if not empty? head_list[i]; +=== ~.head_list[i]; +~fi; + +★&_~.usage_list[i]; + +~if value? style_list[i]; +& Style: ~.style_list[i]; +&. +~fi; + +~.comment_list[i]; +~end; + +.phrase duplicate_tags duplicate tags +.synonym duplicate tags list +.template += List of Duplicate Tags for ~.project; + +This is a list of all the duplicate tags in the ~.project; book. + +Count: ~.*comp_table; + +&= Tag& Comp. Texts& Divisions& Pages +---- +~foreach tag, comp_table; +& |~.tag;|& ~.comp_table[tag];& ~.div_table[tag];& ~.page_table[tag]; +~end; +&. +---- +To see a list of all the tags, try |~.facility; all tags|. + +.phrase library library +.synonym documentation +.template += ZzTeX Documentation library + +The following text documents are available in the ZzTeX directory. +They present details about various facilities in ZzTeX. + +&= Document& Topic +---- +~foreach file, title_table; +& ~.file;& ~.title_table[file]; +~end; +&. + +.phrase missing_art_files missing art files +.synonym missing art +.template += List of Missing Art Files for ~.project; + +This is a list of the missing art files used in ~.project;, in order +by file name. An art file is missing if there is an |\art| command +for it but it does not exist in the art directory. + +Count: ~.*div_table; + +&= Division& Page& File& Size at scale& Reused? +---- +~foreach file, div_table; +& ~.div_table[file];& ~.page_table[file];& ~.file;& ~.size_table[file];& ~.reused_table[file]; +~end; +&. +---- +For a list of all the art files, try |~.facility; all art files|. + +.phrase printer_report printer report +.template += Printer Report for ~.project; + +~include title_author_publisher_isbn; +& &` +& Trim:& ~.trimwidth; × ~.trimheight; +& Head&`margin:& ~.headmargin; +& Gutter:& ~.eveninnermargin; +& &` +& Fonts:& All embedded and subsetted at 100% +& Art:& All embedded +&. + +&` + +---- +Black: For 2-color books, please set Overprint Black as the default. +---- + +&` + +Paul C. Anagnostopoulos&/ +Windfall Software&/ +978 371-2316&/ +paul@windfall.com + +&` + += Pagination + +~foreach i, page_list; +& ~.page_list[i];& ~.comp_list[i];& ~.title_list[i]; +~end; +&. + +.phrase-dups project_overview <project> +.synonym book +.synonym overview +.synonym project +.synonym book overview +.synonym project overview +.template += ~.project; Overview + +~include title_author_publisher_isbn; +& &` +& Processed:& ~.date; ~.time; +& ZzTeX&`version:& v~.zztex_version; +& &` +& Art&`root:& ~.art_root; +& Placing&`art?& ~.place_art; +& PDF&`hyperlinks?& ~.hyperlinks; +& &` +& Proof&`ident:& ~.proof; +& Compositor:& ~.compositor; +& Company:& ~.company; +&. + +== Summary of Design + +~include design_summary; +---- +~.facility; can present all sorts of information about this project. +Try |~.facility; book info|. + +.phrase proofnote_list proofnote list +.synonym all proofnotes +.template += List of All Proofnotes for ~.project; + +This is a list of all the outstanding proofnotes in the ~.project; +files. + +Count: ~.*div_list; + +&= Division& Page& Note +---- +~foreach i, div_list; +& ~.div_list[i];& ~.page_list[i];& ~.note_list[i]; +~end; +&. + +.phrase todo_list to-dos +.synonym todos +.synonym to-do list +.synonym todo list +.synonym all to-dos +.synonym all todos +.template += List of All To-Dos for ~.project; + +This is a list of all the outstanding to-do notes in the ~.project; +files. + +Count: ~.*div_list; + +&= Division& Page& Note +---- +~foreach i, div_list; +& ~.div_list[i];& ~.page_list[i];& ~.note_list[i]; +~end; +&. +---- + +.phrase undefined_tags undefined tags +.synonym undefined tags list +.template += List of Undefined Tags for ~.project; + +This is a list of all the undefined tags in the ~.project; files. + +Count: ~.*div_table; + +&= & First& First +&= Tag& Division& Page& References +---- +~foreach tag, div_table; +& |~.tag;|& ~.div_table[tag];& ~.page_table[tag];& ~.refs_table[tag]; +~end; +&. +---- +To see a list of all the tags, try |~.facility; all tags|. + +// Footnotes +// --------- + + +.footnote defineenunciation_enunciation \defineenunciation one_command +.footnote defineenunciation_enunciation \title one_marker +.footnote defineenunciation_enunciation \attributiontypecase one_command +.footnote defineenunciation_enunciation \defineeoedingbat one_command +.template defineenunciation_enunciation +For a complete description of this item, try |~.facility; \enunciation|. + +.footnote definelocator_locators \definelocator one_command +.footnote definelocator_locators \definelocatorformat one_command +.footnote definelocator_locators \generateindex one_command +.footnote definelocator_locators \indexentry one_command +.footnote definelocator_locators \alphabreak one_command +.template definelocator_locators +~include indexing_info; + +.footnote hat_zmhat \hat one_named_char +.template hat_zmhat +*Note:* When used in math mode, |\hat| is a synonym for |\zmhat| +and produces a hat accent over its argument. + +.footnote space_spacing space one_character +.template space_spacing +If you are looking for information on spacing commands, +try |~.facility; spacing|. + +.footnote proofnote_note_list \proofnote one_block +.template proofnote_note_list +If you are looking for a list of the outstanding proofnotes +for the ~.project; project, try |~.facility; proofnote list|. + +.footnote text_math_text \text one_block +.template text_math_text +If you are looking for information on the \text command that +is used in math, try |~.facility; math \text|. + +.footnote tilde_zmtilde \tilde one_named_char +.template tilde_zmtilde +*Note:* When used in math mode, |\tilde| is a synonym for |\zmtilde| +and produces a tilde accent over its argument. + +.footnote toc_contents \toc one_block +.template toc_contents +If you are looking for a table of contents for ~.project;, +try |~.facility; contents|. + +.footnote zmhat_hat \zmhat one_math_accent +.template zmhat_hat +*Note:* This is the internal accent command. Use |\hat| in book files. + +.footnote zmtilde_tilde \zmtilde one_math_accent +.template zmtilde_tilde +*Note:* This is the internal accent command. Use |\tilde| in book files. + +// Included Templates +// -------- --------- + + +.template command_line_chars +Some characters are difficult or impossible to type on the 4NT/Take +Command command line. For an explanation of how to enter them, +try |~.facility; command line|. + +.template common_info +& What it is:& ~.class; +& Where it is:& ~.where; +& Attributes:& ~.attributes; +~if value? overridden;& Supercedes:& ~.overridden;~fi; +&. + +~if value? usage;Usage: |~.usage;|~fi; + +.template command_info +For information on commands in general, try |~.facility; commands|. + +.template declaration_info +For information on declarations in general, try |~.facility; declarations|. + +.template design_info +& Design macro for:& ~.design; +~if value? derived;& Derived from:& |~.derived;|~fi; +~if value? style;& Element style:& |~.style;|~fi; +~if not empty? variant_list;& Affecting variants:& ~ + |~foreach i,variant_list,iter;~,variant_list[i],iter /= 1;~end;|~fi; +&. + +.template design_summary +& Trim:& ~.trimwidth; × ~.trimheight; +& Text measure:& ~.textmeasure; +& Lines per page:& ~.linesperpage; +& For make-up:& ~.linesshort; short, ~.lineslong; long +& Even text margins:& left = ~.evenlefttextmargin;, right = ~.evenrighttextmargin; +& Odd text margins:& left = ~.oddlefttextmargin;, right = ~.oddrighttextmargin; +& Paragraph indent:& ~.parindent; +&. + +.template gory_details +To see more details about the design, try |~.facility; ~.name; details|. + +.template indexing_info +For a complete description of the ZzTeX indexing facility, +try |~.facility; indexing|. + +.template internal_note +(Note that names containing at-signs or beginning with 'z' are internal.) + +.template math_class_info +For more information on math classes, try |~.facility; math classes|. + +.template title_author_publisher_isbn +& Title:& *~.title;* +~foreach i,author,iter; +& ~if iter = 1;Author:~fi;& ~.author[i]; +~end; +& Publisher:& ~.publisher; +& ISBN:& ~.isbn; + +.include zzdetails.dat +.end diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/plain/zztex/zzplain.dat b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/plain/zztex/zzplain.dat new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5aebd853cd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/plain/zztex/zzplain.dat @@ -0,0 +1,1315 @@ +% This is the plain TeX format that's described in The TeXbook. +% N.B.: A version number is defined at the very end of this file; +% please change that number whenever the file is modified! +% And don't modify the file under any circumstances. + +\catcode`\{=1 % left brace is begin-group character +\catcode`\}=2 % right brace is end-group character +\catcode`\$=3 % dollar sign is math shift +\catcode`\&=4 % ampersand is alignment tab +\catcode`\#=6 % hash mark is macro parameter character +\catcode`\^=7 +\catcode`\^^K=7 % circumflex and uparrow are for superscripts +\catcode`\_=8 +\catcode`\^^A=8 % underline and downarrow are for subscripts +\catcode`\^^I=10 % ascii tab is a blank space +\chardef\active=13 +\catcode`\~=\active % tilde is active +\catcode`\^^L=\active +\outer\def^^L{\par} % ASCII formfeed is |\outer\par| + +\message{Preloading the plain format: codes,} + +% We had to define the \catcodes right away, before the message line, +% since \message uses the { and } characters. +% When INITEX (the TeX initializer) starts up, +% it has defined the following \catcode values: +% \catcode`\^^@=9 % ascii null is ignored +% \catcode`\^^M=5 % ascii return is end-line +% \catcode`\\=0 % backslash is TeX escape character +% \catcode`\%=14 % percent sign is comment character +% \catcode`\ =10 % ascii space is blank space +% \catcode`\^^?=15 % ascii delete is invalid +% \catcode`\A=11 ... \catcode`\Z=11 % uppercase letters +% \catcode`\a=11 ... \catcode`\z=11 % lowercase letters +% all others are type 12 (other) + +% Here is a list of the characters that have been specially catcoded: +\def\dospecials{\do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% + \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~} +% (not counting ascii null, tab, linefeed, formfeed, return, delete) +% Each symbol in the list is preceded by \do, which can be defined +% if you want to do something to every item in the list. + +% We make @ signs act like letters, temporarily, to avoid conflict +% between user names and internal control sequences of plain format. +\catcode`@=11 + +% INITEX sets up \mathcode x=x, for x=0..255, except that +% \mathcode x=x+"7100, for x = `A to `Z and `a to `z; +% \mathcode x=x+"7000, for x = `0 to `9. +% The following changes define internal codes as recommended +% in Appendix C of The TeXbook: +\mathcode`\^^@="2201 % \cdot +\mathcode`\^^A="3223 % \downarrow +\mathcode`\^^B="010B % \alpha +\mathcode`\^^C="010C % \beta +\mathcode`\^^D="225E % \land +\mathcode`\^^E="023A % \lnot +\mathcode`\^^F="3232 % \in +\mathcode`\^^G="0119 % \pi +\mathcode`\^^H="0115 % \lambda +\mathcode`\^^I="010D % \gamma +\mathcode`\^^J="010E % \delta +\mathcode`\^^K="3222 % \uparrow +\mathcode`\^^L="2206 % \pm +\mathcode`\^^M="2208 % \oplus +\mathcode`\^^N="0231 % \infty +\mathcode`\^^O="0140 % \partial +\mathcode`\^^P="321A % \subset +\mathcode`\^^Q="321B % \supset +\mathcode`\^^R="225C % \cap +\mathcode`\^^S="225B % \cup +\mathcode`\^^T="0238 % \forall +\mathcode`\^^U="0239 % \exists +\mathcode`\^^V="220A % \otimes +\mathcode`\^^W="3224 % \leftrightarrow +\mathcode`\^^X="3220 % \leftarrow +\mathcode`\^^Y="3221 % \rightarrow +\mathcode`\^^Z="8000 % \ne +\mathcode`\^^[="2205 % \diamond +\mathcode`\^^\="3214 % \le +\mathcode`\^^]="3215 % \ge +\mathcode`\^^^="3211 % \equiv +\mathcode`\^^_="225F % \lor +\mathcode`\ ="8000 % \space +\mathcode`\!="5021 +\mathcode`\'="8000 % ^\prime +\mathcode`\(="4028 +\mathcode`\)="5029 +\mathcode`\*="2203 % \ast +\mathcode`\+="202B +\mathcode`\,="613B +\mathcode`\-="2200 +\mathcode`\.="013A +\mathcode`\/="013D +\mathcode`\:="303A +\mathcode`\;="603B +\mathcode`\<="313C +\mathcode`\=="303D +\mathcode`\>="313E +\mathcode`\?="503F +\mathcode`\[="405B +\mathcode`\\="026E % \backslash +\mathcode`\]="505D +\mathcode`\_="8000 % \_ +\mathcode`\{="4266 +\mathcode`\|="026A +\mathcode`\}="5267 +\mathcode`\^^?="1273 % \smallint + +% INITEX sets \uccode`x=`X and \uccode `X=`X for all letters x, +% and \lccode`x=`x, \lccode`X=`x; all other values are zero. +% No changes to those tables are needed in plain TeX format. + +% INITEX sets \sfcode x=1000 for all x, except that \sfcode`X=999 +% for uppercase letters. The following changes are needed: +\sfcode`\)=0 +\sfcode`\'=0 +\sfcode`\]=0 +% The \nonfrenchspacing macro will make further changes to \sfcode values. + +% Finally, INITEX sets all \delcode values to -1, except \delcode`.=0 +\delcode`\(="028300 +\delcode`\)="029301 +\delcode`\[="05B302 +\delcode`\]="05D303 +\delcode`\<="26830A +\delcode`\>="26930B +\delcode`\/="02F30E +\delcode`\|="26A30C +\delcode`\\="26E30F +% N.B. { and } should NOT get delcodes; otherwise parameter grouping fails! + +% To make the plain macros more efficient in time and space, +% several constant values are declared here as control sequences. +% If they were changed, anything could happen; so they are private symbols. +\chardef\@ne=1 +\chardef\tw@=2 +\chardef\thr@@=3 +\chardef\sixt@@n=16 +\chardef\@cclv=255 +\mathchardef\@cclvi=256 +\mathchardef\@m=1000 +\mathchardef\@M=10000 +\mathchardef\@MM=20000 + +% Allocation of registers + +% Here are macros for the automatic allocation of \count, \box, \dimen, +% \skip, \muskip, and \toks registers, as well as \read and \write +% stream numbers, \fam codes, \language codes, and \insert numbers. + +\message{registers,} + +% When a register is used only temporarily, it need not be allocated; +% grouping can be used, making the value previously in the register return +% after the close of the group. The main use of these macros is for +% registers that are defined by one macro and used by others, possibly at +% different nesting levels. All such registers should be defined through +% these macros; otherwise conflicts may occur, especially when two or more +% macro packages are being used at once. + +% The following counters are reserved: +% 0 to 9 page numbering +% 10 count allocation +% 11 dimen allocation +% 12 skip allocation +% 13 muskip allocation +% 14 box allocation +% 15 toks allocation +% 16 read file allocation +% 17 write file allocation +% 18 math family allocation +% 19 language allocation +% 20 insert allocation +% 21 the most recently allocated number +% 22 constant -1 +% New counters are allocated starting with 23, 24, etc. Other registers are +% allocated starting with 10. This leaves 0 through 9 for the user to play +% with safely, except that counts 0 to 9 are considered to be the page and +% subpage numbers (since they are displayed during output). In this scheme, +% \count 10 always contains the number of the highest-numbered counter that +% has been allocated, \count 14 the highest-numbered box, etc. +% Inserts are given numbers 254, 253, etc., since they require a \count, +% \dimen, \skip, and \box all with the same number; \count 20 contains the +% lowest-numbered insert that has been allocated. Of course, \box255 is +% reserved for \output; \count255, \dimen255, and \skip255 can be used freely. + +% It is recommended that macro designers always use +% \global assignments with respect to registers numbered 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, and +% always non-\global assignments with respect to registers 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 255. +% This will prevent ``save stack buildup'' that might otherwise occur. + +\count10=22 % allocates \count registers 23, 24, ... +\count11=9 % allocates \dimen registers 10, 11, ... +\count12=9 % allocates \skip registers 10, 11, ... +\count13=9 % allocates \muskip registers 10, 11, ... +\count14=9 % allocates \box registers 10, 11, ... +\count15=9 % allocates \toks registers 10, 11, ... +\count16=-1 % allocates input streams 0, 1, ... +\count17=-1 % allocates output streams 0, 1, ... +\count18=3 % allocates math families 4, 5, ... +\count19=0 % allocates \language codes 1, 2, ... +\count20=255 % allocates insertions 254, 253, ... +\countdef\insc@unt=20 % the insertion counter +\countdef\allocationnumber=21 % the most recent allocation +\countdef\m@ne=22 +\m@ne=-1 % a handy constant +\def\wlog{\immediate\write\m@ne} % write on log file (only) + +% Here are abbreviations for the names of scratch registers +% that don't need to be allocated. + +\countdef\count@=255 +\dimendef\dimen@=0 +\dimendef\dimen@i=1 % global only +\dimendef\dimen@ii=2 +\skipdef\skip@=0 +\toksdef\toks@=0 + +% Now, we define \newcount, \newbox, etc. so that you can say \newcount\foo +% and \foo will be defined (with \countdef) to be the next counter. +% To find out which counter \foo is, you can look at \allocationnumber. +% Since there's no \boxdef command, \chardef is used to define a \newbox, +% \newinsert, \newfam, and so on. + +\outer\def\newcount{\alloc@0\count\countdef\insc@unt} +\outer\def\newdimen{\alloc@1\dimen\dimendef\insc@unt} +\outer\def\newskip{\alloc@2\skip\skipdef\insc@unt} +\outer\def\newmuskip{\alloc@3\muskip\muskipdef\@cclvi} +\outer\def\newbox{\alloc@4\box\chardef\insc@unt} +\let\newtoks=\relax % we do this to allow plain.tex to be read in twice +\outer\def\newhelp#1#2{\newtoks#1#1\expandafter{\csname#2\endcsname}} +\outer\def\newtoks{\alloc@5\toks\toksdef\@cclvi} +\outer\def\newread{\alloc@6\read\chardef\sixt@@n} +\outer\def\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n} +\outer\def\newfam{\alloc@8\fam\chardef\sixt@@n} +\outer\def\newlanguage{\alloc@9\language\chardef\@cclvi} +\def\alloc@#1#2#3#4#5{\global\advance\count1#1by\@ne + \ch@ck#1#4#2% make sure there's still room + \allocationnumber=\count1#1% + \global#3#5=\allocationnumber + \wlog{\string#5=\string#2\the\allocationnumber}} +\outer\def\newinsert#1{\global\advance\insc@unt by\m@ne + \ch@ck0\insc@unt\count + \ch@ck1\insc@unt\dimen + \ch@ck2\insc@unt\skip + \ch@ck4\insc@unt\box + \allocationnumber=\insc@unt + \global\chardef#1=\allocationnumber + \wlog{\string#1=\string\insert\the\allocationnumber}} +\def\ch@ck#1#2#3{\ifnum\count1#1<#2% + \else\errmessage{No room for a new #3}\fi} + +% Here are some examples of allocation. +\newdimen\maxdimen +\maxdimen=16383.99999pt % the largest legal <dimen> +\newskip\hideskip +\hideskip=-1000pt plus 1fill % negative but can grow +\newskip\centering +\centering=0pt plus 1000pt minus 1000pt +\newdimen\p@ +\p@=1pt % this saves macro space and time +\newdimen\z@ +\z@=0pt % can be used both for 0pt and 0 +\newskip\z@skip +\z@skip=0pt plus0pt minus0pt +\newbox\voidb@x % permanently void box register + +% And here's a different sort of allocation: +% For example, \newif\iffoo creates \footrue, \foofalse to go with \iffoo. +\outer\def\newif#1{\count@\escapechar \escapechar\m@ne + \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter + \def\@if#1{true}{\let#1=\iftrue}% + \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter + \def\@if#1{false}{\let#1=\iffalse}% + \@if#1{false}\escapechar\count@} % the condition starts out false +\def\@if#1#2{\csname\expandafter\if@\string#1#2\endcsname} +{\uccode`1=`i \uccode`2=`f \uppercase{\gdef\if@12{}}} % `if' is required + +% Assign initial values to TeX's parameters + +\message{parameters,} + +% All of TeX's numeric parameters are listed here, +% but the code is commented out if no special value needs to be set. +% INITEX makes all parameters zero except where noted. + +\pretolerance=100 +\tolerance=200 % INITEX sets this to 10000 +\hbadness=1000 +\vbadness=1000 +\linepenalty=10 +\hyphenpenalty=50 +\exhyphenpenalty=50 +\binoppenalty=700 +\relpenalty=500 +\clubpenalty=150 +\widowpenalty=150 +\displaywidowpenalty=50 +\brokenpenalty=100 +\predisplaypenalty=10000 +% \postdisplaypenalty=0 +% \interlinepenalty=0 +% \floatingpenalty=0, set during \insert +% \outputpenalty=0, set before TeX enters \output +\doublehyphendemerits=10000 +\finalhyphendemerits=5000 +\adjdemerits=10000 +% \looseness=0, cleared by TeX after each paragraph +% \pausing=0 +% \holdinginserts=0 +% \tracingonline=0 +% \tracingmacros=0 +% \tracingstats=0 +% \tracingparagraphs=0 +% \tracingpages=0 +% \tracingoutput=0 +\tracinglostchars=1 +% \tracingcommands=0 +% \tracingrestores=0 +% \language=0 +\uchyph=1 +% \lefthyphenmin=2 \righthyphenmin=3 set below +% \globaldefs=0 +% \maxdeadcycles=25 % INITEX does this +% \hangafter=1 % INITEX does this, also TeX after each paragraph +% \fam=0 +% \mag=1000 % INITEX does this +% \escapechar=`\\ % INITEX does this +\defaulthyphenchar=`\- +\defaultskewchar=-1 +% \endlinechar=`\^^M % INITEX does this +\newlinechar=-1 +\delimiterfactor=901 +% \time=now % TeX does this at beginning of job +% \day=now % TeX does this at beginning of job +% \month=now % TeX does this at beginning of job +% \year=now % TeX does this at beginning of job +\showboxbreadth=5 +\showboxdepth=3 +\errorcontextlines=5 + +\hfuzz=0.1pt +\vfuzz=0.1pt +\overfullrule=5pt +\hsize=6.5in +\vsize=8.9in +\maxdepth=4pt +\splitmaxdepth=\maxdimen +\boxmaxdepth=\maxdimen +% \lineskiplimit=0pt, changed by \normalbaselines +\delimitershortfall=5pt +\nulldelimiterspace=1.2pt +\scriptspace=0.5pt +% \mathsurround=0pt +% \predisplaysize=0pt, set before TeX enters $$ +% \displaywidth=0pt, set before TeX enters $$ +% \displayindent=0pt, set before TeX enters $$ +\parindent=20pt +% \hangindent=0pt, zeroed by TeX after each paragraph +% \hoffset=0pt +% \voffset=0pt + +% \baselineskip=0pt, changed by \normalbaselines +% \lineskip=0pt, changed by \normalbaselines +\parskip=0pt plus 1pt +\abovedisplayskip=12pt plus 3pt minus 9pt +\abovedisplayshortskip=0pt plus 3pt +\belowdisplayskip=12pt plus 3pt minus 9pt +\belowdisplayshortskip=7pt plus 3pt minus 4pt +% \leftskip=0pt +% \rightskip=0pt +\topskip=10pt +\splittopskip=10pt +% \tabskip=0pt +% \spaceskip=0pt +% \xspaceskip=0pt +\parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil + +\thinmuskip=3mu +\medmuskip=4mu plus 2mu minus 4mu +\thickmuskip=5mu plus 5mu + +% We also define special registers that function like parameters: +\newskip\smallskipamount +\smallskipamount=3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt +\newskip\medskipamount +\medskipamount=6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt +\newskip\bigskipamount +\bigskipamount=12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt +\newskip\normalbaselineskip +\normalbaselineskip=12pt +\newskip\normallineskip +\normallineskip=1pt +\newdimen\normallineskiplimit +\normallineskiplimit=0pt +\newdimen\jot +\jot=3pt +\newcount\interdisplaylinepenalty +\interdisplaylinepenalty=100 +\newcount\interfootnotelinepenalty +\interfootnotelinepenalty=100 + +% Definitions for preloaded fonts + +\def\magstephalf{1095 } +\def\magstep#1{\ifcase#1 \@m\or 1200\or 1440\or 1728\or 2074\or 2488\fi\relax} + +% Fonts assigned to \preloaded are not part of "plain TeX", +% but they are preloaded so that other format packages can use them. +% For example, if another set of macros says "\font\ninerm=cmr9", +% TeX will not have to reload the font metric information for cmr9. + +\message{fonts,} + +\font\tenrm=cmr10 % roman text +% \font\preloaded=cmr9 +% \font\preloaded=cmr8 +\font\sevenrm=cmr7 +% \font\preloaded=cmr6 +\font\fiverm=cmr5 + +\font\teni=cmmi10 % math italic +% \font\preloaded=cmmi9 +% \font\preloaded=cmmi8 +\font\seveni=cmmi7 +% \font\preloaded=cmmi6 +\font\fivei=cmmi5 + +\font\tensy=cmsy10 % math symbols +% \font\preloaded=cmsy9 +% \font\preloaded=cmsy8 +\font\sevensy=cmsy7 +% \font\preloaded=cmsy6 +\font\fivesy=cmsy5 + +\font\tenex=cmex10 % math extension + +% \font\preloaded=cmss10 % sans serif +% \font\preloaded=cmssq8 + +% \font\preloaded=cmssi10 % sans serif italic +% \font\preloaded=cmssqi8 + +\font\tenbf=cmbx10 % boldface extended +% \font\preloaded=cmbx9 +% \font\preloaded=cmbx8 +\font\sevenbf=cmbx7 +% \font\preloaded=cmbx6 +\font\fivebf=cmbx5 + +\font\tentt=cmtt10 % typewriter +% \font\preloaded=cmtt9 +% \font\preloaded=cmtt8 + +% \font\preloaded=cmsltt10 % slanted typewriter + +\font\tensl=cmsl10 % slanted roman +% \font\preloaded=cmsl9 +% \font\preloaded=cmsl8 + +\font\tenit=cmti10 % text italic +% \font\preloaded=cmti9 +% \font\preloaded=cmti8 +% \font\preloaded=cmti7 + +\message{more fonts,} +% \font\preloaded=cmu10 % unslanted text italic + +% \font\preloaded=cmmib10 % bold math italic +% \font\preloaded=cmbsy10 % bold math symbols + +% \font\preloaded=cmcsc10 % caps and small caps + +% \font\preloaded=cmssbx10 % sans serif bold extended + +% \font\preloaded=cmdunh10 % Dunhill style + +% \font\preloaded=cmr7 scaled \magstep4 % for titles +% \font\preloaded=cmtt10 scaled \magstep2 +% \font\preloaded=cmssbx10 scaled \magstep2 + +% \font\preloaded=manfnt % METAFONT logo and dragon curve and special symbols + +% Additional \preloaded fonts can be specified here. +% (And those that were \preloaded above can be eliminated.) + +\let\preloaded=\undefined % preloaded fonts must be declared anew later. + +\skewchar\teni='177 +\skewchar\seveni='177 +\skewchar\fivei='177 +\skewchar\tensy='60 +\skewchar\sevensy='60 +\skewchar\fivesy='60 + +\textfont0=\tenrm +\scriptfont0=\sevenrm +\scriptscriptfont0=\fiverm +\def\rm{\fam\z@\tenrm} +\textfont1=\teni +\scriptfont1=\seveni +\scriptscriptfont1=\fivei +\def\mit{\fam\@ne} +\def\oldstyle{\fam\@ne\teni} +\textfont2=\tensy +\scriptfont2=\sevensy +\scriptscriptfont2=\fivesy +\def\cal{\fam\tw@} +\textfont3=\tenex +\scriptfont3=\tenex +\scriptscriptfont3=\tenex +\newfam\itfam +\def\it{\fam\itfam\tenit} % \it is family 4 +\textfont\itfam=\tenit +\newfam\slfam +\def\sl{\fam\slfam\tensl} % \sl is family 5 +\textfont\slfam=\tensl +\newfam\bffam +\def\bf{\fam\bffam\tenbf} % \bf is family 6 +\textfont\bffam=\tenbf +\scriptfont\bffam=\sevenbf +\scriptscriptfont\bffam=\fivebf +\newfam\ttfam +\def\tt{\fam\ttfam\tentt} % \tt is family 7 +\textfont\ttfam=\tentt + +% Macros for setting ordinary text +\message{macros,} + +\def\frenchspacing{\sfcode`\.\@m \sfcode`\?\@m \sfcode`\!\@m + \sfcode`\:\@m \sfcode`\;\@m \sfcode`\,\@m} +\def\nonfrenchspacing{\sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000% + \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 } + +\def\normalbaselines{\lineskip\normallineskip + \baselineskip\normalbaselineskip \lineskiplimit\normallineskiplimit} + +\def\^^M{\ } % \<return> = \<space> +\def\^^I{\ } % \<tab> = \<space> + +\def\lq{`} +\def\rq{'} +\def\lbrack{[} +\def\rbrack{]} + +\let\endgraf=\par +\let\endline=\cr + +\def\space{ } +\def\empty{} +\def\null{\hbox{}} + +\let\bgroup={ +\let\egroup=} + +% In \obeylines, we say `\let^^M=\par' instead of `\def^^M{\par}' +% since this allows, for example, `\let\par=\cr \obeylines \halign{...' +{\catcode`\^^M=\active % these lines must end with % +\gdef\obeylines{\catcode`\^^M\active \let^^M\par}% +\global\let^^M=\par} % this is in case ^^M appears in a \write +\def\obeyspaces{\catcode`\ \active} +{\obeyspaces\global\let =\space} + +\def\loop#1\repeat{\def\body{#1}\iterate} +\def\iterate{\body \let\next\iterate \else\let\next\relax\fi \next} +\let\repeat=\fi % this makes \loop...\if...\repeat skippable + +\def\thinspace{\kern .16667em } +\def\negthinspace{\kern-.16667em } +\def\enspace{\kern.5em } + +\def\enskip{\hskip.5em\relax} +\def\quad{\hskip1em\relax} +\def\qquad{\hskip2em\relax} + +\def\smallskip{\vskip\smallskipamount} +\def\medskip{\vskip\medskipamount} +\def\bigskip{\vskip\bigskipamount} + +\def\nointerlineskip{\prevdepth-1000\p@} +\def\offinterlineskip{\baselineskip-1000\p@ + \lineskip\z@ \lineskiplimit\maxdimen} + +\def\topglue{\nointerlineskip\vglue-\topskip\vglue} % for top of page +\def\vglue{\afterassignment\vgl@\skip@=} +\def\vgl@{\par \dimen@\prevdepth \hrule height\z@ + \nobreak\vskip\skip@ \prevdepth\dimen@} +\def\hglue{\afterassignment\hgl@\skip@=} +\def\hgl@{\leavevmode \count@\spacefactor \vrule width\z@ + \nobreak\hskip\skip@ \spacefactor\count@} + +\def~{\penalty\@M \ } +\def\slash{/\penalty\exhyphenpenalty} % a `/' that acts like a `-' + +\def\break{\penalty-\@M} +\def\nobreak{\penalty \@M} +\def\allowbreak{\penalty \z@} + +\def\filbreak{\par\vfil\penalty-200\vfilneg} +\def\goodbreak{\par\penalty-500 } +\def\eject{\par\break} +\def\supereject{\par\penalty-\@MM} + +\def\removelastskip{\ifdim\lastskip=\z@\else\vskip-\lastskip\fi} +\def\smallbreak{\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount + \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi} +\def\medbreak{\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount + \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi} +\def\bigbreak{\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount + \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi} + +\def\line{\hbox to\hsize} +\def\leftline#1{\line{#1\hss}} +\def\rightline#1{\line{\hss#1}} +\def\centerline#1{\line{\hss#1\hss}} + +\def\rlap#1{\hbox to\z@{#1\hss}} +\def\llap#1{\hbox to\z@{\hss#1}} + +\def\m@th{\mathsurround\z@} +\def\underbar#1{$\setbox\z@\hbox{#1}\dp\z@\z@ + \m@th \underline{\box\z@}$} + +\newbox\strutbox +\setbox\strutbox=\hbox{\vrule height8.5pt depth3.5pt width\z@} +\def\strut{\relax\ifmmode\copy\strutbox\else\unhcopy\strutbox\fi} + +\def\hidewidth{\hskip\hideskip} % for alignment entries that can stick out +\def\ialign{\everycr{}\tabskip\z@skip\halign} % initialized \halign +\newcount\mscount +\def\multispan#1{\omit \mscount#1\relax + \loop\ifnum\mscount>\@ne \sp@n\repeat} +\def\sp@n{\span\omit\advance\mscount\m@ne} + +\newif\ifus@ +\newif\if@cr +\newbox\tabs +\newbox\tabsyet +\newbox\tabsdone + +\def\cleartabs{\global\setbox\tabsyet\null \setbox\tabs\null} +\def\settabs{\setbox\tabs\null \futurelet\next\sett@b} +\let\+=\relax % in case this file is being read in twice +\def\sett@b{\ifx\next\+\def\nxt{\afterassignment\s@tt@b\let\nxt}% + \else\let\nxt\s@tcols\fi \let\next\relax \nxt} +\def\s@tt@b{\let\nxt\relax \us@false\m@ketabbox} +\def\tabalign{\us@true\m@ketabbox} % non-\outer version of \+ +\outer\def\+{\tabalign} +\def\s@tcols#1\columns{\count@#1\dimen@\hsize + \loop\ifnum\count@>\z@ \@nother \repeat} +\def\@nother{\dimen@ii\dimen@ \divide\dimen@ii\count@ + \setbox\tabs\hbox{\hbox to\dimen@ii{}\unhbox\tabs}% + \advance\dimen@-\dimen@ii \advance\count@\m@ne} + +\def\m@ketabbox{\begingroup + \global\setbox\tabsyet\copy\tabs + \global\setbox\tabsdone\null + \def\cr{\@crtrue\crcr\egroup\egroup + \ifus@\unvbox\z@\lastbox\fi\endgroup + \setbox\tabs\hbox{\unhbox\tabsyet\unhbox\tabsdone}}% + \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup\@crfalse + \ialign\bgroup&\t@bbox##\t@bb@x\crcr} + +\def\t@bbox{\setbox\z@\hbox\bgroup} +\def\t@bb@x{\if@cr\egroup % now \box\z@ holds the column + \else\hss\egroup \global\setbox\tabsyet\hbox{\unhbox\tabsyet + \global\setbox\@ne\lastbox}% now \box\@ne holds its size + \ifvoid\@ne\global\setbox\@ne\hbox to\wd\z@{}% + \else\setbox\z@\hbox to\wd\@ne{\unhbox\z@}\fi + \global\setbox\tabsdone\hbox{\box\@ne\unhbox\tabsdone}\fi + \box\z@} + +\def\hang{\hangindent\parindent} +\def\textindent#1{\indent\llap{#1\enspace}\ignorespaces} +\def\item{\par\hang\textindent} +\def\itemitem{\par\indent \hangindent2\parindent \textindent} +\def\narrower{\advance\leftskip\parindent + \advance\rightskip\parindent} + +\outer\def\beginsection#1\par{\vskip\z@ plus.3\vsize\penalty-250 + \vskip\z@ plus-.3\vsize\bigskip\vskip\parskip + \message{#1}\leftline{\bf#1}\nobreak\smallskip\noindent} +\outer\def\proclaim #1. #2\par{\medbreak + \noindent{\bf#1.\enspace}{\sl#2\par}% + \ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount \removelastskip\penalty55\medskip\fi} + +\def\raggedright{\rightskip\z@ plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax} +\def\ttraggedright{\tt\rightskip\z@ plus2em\relax} % for use with \tt only + +\chardef\%=`\% +\chardef\&=`\& +\chardef\#=`\# +\chardef\$=`\$ +\chardef\ss="19 +\chardef\ae="1A +\chardef\oe="1B +\chardef\o="1C +\chardef\AE="1D +\chardef\OE="1E +\chardef\O="1F +\chardef\i="10 % dotless i +\chardef\j="11 % dotless j +\def\aa{\accent23a} %^accent +\def\l{\char32l} +\def\L{\leavevmode\setbox0\hbox{L}\hbox to\wd0{\hss\char32L}} + +\def\leavevmode{\unhbox\voidb@x} % begins a paragraph, if necessary +\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em}} +\def\AA{\leavevmode\setbox0\hbox{!}\dimen@\ht0\advance\dimen@-1ex% + \rlap{\raise.67\dimen@\hbox{\char'27}}A} + +\def\mathhexbox#1#2#3{\leavevmode + \hbox{$\m@th \mathchar"#1#2#3$}} +\def\dag{\mathhexbox279} +\def\ddag{\mathhexbox27A} +\def\S{\mathhexbox278} +\def\P{\mathhexbox27B} +\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} + +\def\oalign#1{\leavevmode\vtop{\baselineskip\z@skip \lineskip.25ex% + \ialign{##\crcr#1\crcr}}} \def\o@lign{\lineskiplimit\z@ \oalign} +\def\ooalign{\lineskiplimit-\maxdimen \oalign} % chars over each other +{\catcode`p=12 \catcode`t=12 \gdef\\#1pt{#1}} \let\getf@ctor=\\ +\def\sh@ft#1{\dimen@#1\kern\expandafter\getf@ctor\the\fontdimen1\font + \dimen@} % kern by #1 times the current slant +\def\d#1{{\o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\sh@ft{-1ex}.\hidewidth}}} +\def\b#1{{\o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\sh@ft{-3ex}% + \vbox to.2ex{\hbox{\char22}\vss}\hidewidth}}} +\def\c#1{{\setbox\z@\hbox{#1}\ifdim\ht\z@=1ex\accent24 #1% %^accent + \else\ooalign{\unhbox\z@\crcr\hidewidth\char24\hidewidth}\fi}} +\def\copyright{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{c}\hfil\crcr\Orb}}} + +\def\dots{\relax\ifmmode\ldots\else$\m@th\ldots\,$\fi} +\def\TeX{T\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX} + +\def\`#1{{\accent18 #1}} %^accent +\def\'#1{{\accent19 #1}} %^accent +\def\v#1{{\accent20 #1}} %^accent +\let\^^_=\v +\def\u#1{{\accent21 #1}} %^accent +\let\^^S=\u +\def\=#1{{\accent22 #1}} %^accent +\def\^#1{{\accent94 #1}} %^accent +\let\^^D=\^ +\def\.#1{{\accent95 #1}} %^accent +\def\H#1{{\accent"7D #1}} %^accent +\def\~#1{{\accent"7E #1}} %^accent +\def\"#1{{\accent"7F #1}} %^accent +\def\t#1{{\edef\next{\the\font}\the\textfont1\accent"7F\next#1}} %^accent + +\def\hrulefill{\leaders\hrule\hfill} +\def\dotfill{\cleaders\hbox{$\m@th \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hfill} +\def\rightarrowfill{$\m@th\smash-\mkern-7mu% + \cleaders\hbox{$\mkern-2mu\smash-\mkern-2mu$}\hfill + \mkern-7mu\mathord\rightarrow$} +\def\leftarrowfill{$\m@th\mathord\leftarrow\mkern-7mu% + \cleaders\hbox{$\mkern-2mu\smash-\mkern-2mu$}\hfill + \mkern-7mu\smash-$} +\mathchardef\braceld="037A +\mathchardef\bracerd="037B +\mathchardef\bracelu="037C +\mathchardef\braceru="037D +\def\downbracefill{$\m@th \setbox\z@\hbox{$\braceld$}% + \braceld\leaders\vrule height\ht\z@ depth\z@\hfill\braceru + \bracelu\leaders\vrule height\ht\z@ depth\z@\hfill\bracerd$} +\def\upbracefill{$\m@th \setbox\z@\hbox{$\braceld$}% + \bracelu\leaders\vrule height\ht\z@ depth\z@\hfill\bracerd + \braceld\leaders\vrule height\ht\z@ depth\z@\hfill\braceru$} + +\outer\def\bye{\par\vfill\supereject\end} + +% Macros for math setting +\message{math definitions,} + +\let\sp=^ +\let\sb=_ +\def\,{\mskip\thinmuskip} +\def\>{\mskip\medmuskip} +\def\;{\mskip\thickmuskip} +\def\!{\mskip-\thinmuskip} +\def\*{\discretionary{\thinspace\the\textfont2\char2}{}{}} +{\catcode`\'=\active \gdef'{^\bgroup\prim@s}} +\def\prim@s{\prime\futurelet\next\pr@m@s} +\def\pr@m@s{\ifx'\next\let\nxt\pr@@@s \else\ifx^\next\let\nxt\pr@@@t + \else\let\nxt\egroup\fi\fi \nxt} +\def\pr@@@s#1{\prim@s} +\def\pr@@@t#1#2{#2\egroup} +{\catcode`\^^Z=\active \gdef^^Z{\not=}} % ^^Z is like \ne in math + +{\catcode`\_=\active \global\let_=\_} % _ in math is either subscript or \_ + +\mathchardef\alpha="010B +\mathchardef\beta="010C +\mathchardef\gamma="010D +\mathchardef\delta="010E +\mathchardef\epsilon="010F +\mathchardef\zeta="0110 +\mathchardef\eta="0111 +\mathchardef\theta="0112 +\mathchardef\iota="0113 +\mathchardef\kappa="0114 +\mathchardef\lambda="0115 +\mathchardef\mu="0116 +\mathchardef\nu="0117 +\mathchardef\xi="0118 +\mathchardef\pi="0119 +\mathchardef\rho="011A +\mathchardef\sigma="011B +\mathchardef\tau="011C +\mathchardef\upsilon="011D +\mathchardef\phi="011E +\mathchardef\chi="011F +\mathchardef\psi="0120 +\mathchardef\omega="0121 +\mathchardef\varepsilon="0122 +\mathchardef\vartheta="0123 +\mathchardef\varpi="0124 +\mathchardef\varrho="0125 +\mathchardef\varsigma="0126 +\mathchardef\varphi="0127 +\mathchardef\Gamma="7000 +\mathchardef\Delta="7001 +\mathchardef\Theta="7002 +\mathchardef\Lambda="7003 +\mathchardef\Xi="7004 +\mathchardef\Pi="7005 +\mathchardef\Sigma="7006 +\mathchardef\Upsilon="7007 +\mathchardef\Phi="7008 +\mathchardef\Psi="7009 +\mathchardef\Omega="700A + +\mathchardef\aleph="0240 +\def\hbar{{\mathchar'26\mkern-9muh}} +\mathchardef\imath="017B +\mathchardef\jmath="017C +\mathchardef\ell="0160 +\mathchardef\wp="017D +\mathchardef\Re="023C +\mathchardef\Im="023D +\mathchardef\partial="0140 +\mathchardef\infty="0231 +\mathchardef\prime="0230 +\mathchardef\emptyset="023B +\mathchardef\nabla="0272 +\def\surd{{\mathchar"1270}} +\mathchardef\top="023E +\mathchardef\bot="023F +\def\angle{{\vbox{\ialign{$\m@th\scriptstyle##$\crcr + \not\mathrel{\mkern14mu}\crcr + \noalign{\nointerlineskip} + \mkern2.5mu\leaders\hrule height.34pt\hfill\mkern2.5mu\crcr}}}} +\mathchardef\triangle="0234 +\mathchardef\forall="0238 +\mathchardef\exists="0239 +\mathchardef\neg="023A +\let\lnot=\neg +\mathchardef\flat="015B +\mathchardef\natural="015C +\mathchardef\sharp="015D +\mathchardef\clubsuit="027C +\mathchardef\diamondsuit="027D +\mathchardef\heartsuit="027E +\mathchardef\spadesuit="027F + +\mathchardef\coprod="1360 +\mathchardef\bigvee="1357 +\mathchardef\bigwedge="1356 +\mathchardef\biguplus="1355 +\mathchardef\bigcap="1354 +\mathchardef\bigcup="1353 +\mathchardef\intop="1352 +\def\int{\intop\nolimits} +\mathchardef\prod="1351 +\mathchardef\sum="1350 +\mathchardef\bigotimes="134E +\mathchardef\bigoplus="134C +\mathchardef\bigodot="134A +\mathchardef\ointop="1348 +\def\oint{\ointop\nolimits} +\mathchardef\bigsqcup="1346 +\mathchardef\smallint="1273 + +\mathchardef\triangleleft="212F +\mathchardef\triangleright="212E +\mathchardef\bigtriangleup="2234 +\mathchardef\bigtriangledown="2235 +\mathchardef\wedge="225E +\let\land=\wedge +\mathchardef\vee="225F +\let\lor=\vee +\mathchardef\cap="225C +\mathchardef\cup="225B +\mathchardef\ddagger="227A +\mathchardef\dagger="2279 +\mathchardef\sqcap="2275 +\mathchardef\sqcup="2274 +\mathchardef\uplus="225D +\mathchardef\amalg="2271 +\mathchardef\diamond="2205 +\mathchardef\bullet="220F +\mathchardef\wr="226F +\mathchardef\div="2204 +\mathchardef\odot="220C +\mathchardef\oslash="220B +\mathchardef\otimes="220A +\mathchardef\ominus="2209 +\mathchardef\oplus="2208 +\mathchardef\mp="2207 +\mathchardef\pm="2206 +\mathchardef\circ="220E +\mathchardef\bigcirc="220D +\mathchardef\setminus="226E % for set difference A\setminus B +\mathchardef\cdot="2201 +\mathchardef\ast="2203 +\mathchardef\times="2202 +\mathchardef\star="213F + +\mathchardef\propto="322F +\mathchardef\sqsubseteq="3276 +\mathchardef\sqsupseteq="3277 +\mathchardef\parallel="326B +\mathchardef\mid="326A +\mathchardef\dashv="3261 +\mathchardef\vdash="3260 +\mathchardef\nearrow="3225 +\mathchardef\searrow="3226 +\mathchardef\nwarrow="322D +\mathchardef\swarrow="322E +\mathchardef\Leftrightarrow="322C +\mathchardef\Leftarrow="3228 +\mathchardef\Rightarrow="3229 +\def\neq{\not=} +\let\ne=\neq +\mathchardef\leq="3214 +\let\le=\leq +\mathchardef\geq="3215 +\let\ge=\geq +\mathchardef\succ="321F +\mathchardef\prec="321E +\mathchardef\approx="3219 +\mathchardef\succeq="3217 +\mathchardef\preceq="3216 +\mathchardef\supset="321B +\mathchardef\subset="321A +\mathchardef\supseteq="3213 +\mathchardef\subseteq="3212 +\mathchardef\in="3232 +\mathchardef\ni="3233 +\let\owns=\ni +\mathchardef\gg="321D +\mathchardef\ll="321C +\mathchardef\not="3236 +\mathchardef\leftrightarrow="3224 +\mathchardef\leftarrow="3220 +\let\gets=\leftarrow +\mathchardef\rightarrow="3221 +\let\to=\rightarrow +\mathchardef\mapstochar="3237 +\def\mapsto{\mapstochar\rightarrow} +\mathchardef\sim="3218 +\mathchardef\simeq="3227 +\mathchardef\perp="323F +\mathchardef\equiv="3211 +\mathchardef\asymp="3210 +\mathchardef\smile="315E +\mathchardef\frown="315F +\mathchardef\leftharpoonup="3128 +\mathchardef\leftharpoondown="3129 +\mathchardef\rightharpoonup="312A +\mathchardef\rightharpoondown="312B + +\def\joinrel{\mathrel{\mkern-3mu}} +\def\relbar{\mathrel{\smash-}} % \smash, because - has the same height as + +\def\Relbar{\mathrel=} +\mathchardef\lhook="312C +\def\hookrightarrow{\lhook\joinrel\rightarrow} +\mathchardef\rhook="312D +\def\hookleftarrow{\leftarrow\joinrel\rhook} +\def\bowtie{\mathrel\triangleright\joinrel\mathrel\triangleleft} +\def\models{\mathrel|\joinrel=} +\def\Longrightarrow{\Relbar\joinrel\Rightarrow} +\def\longrightarrow{\relbar\joinrel\rightarrow} +\def\longleftarrow{\leftarrow\joinrel\relbar} +\def\Longleftarrow{\Leftarrow\joinrel\Relbar} +\def\longmapsto{\mapstochar\longrightarrow} +\def\longleftrightarrow{\leftarrow\joinrel\rightarrow} +\def\Longleftrightarrow{\Leftarrow\joinrel\Rightarrow} +\def\iff{\;\Longleftrightarrow\;} + +\mathchardef\ldotp="613A % ldot as a punctuation mark +\mathchardef\cdotp="6201 % cdot as a punctuation mark +\mathchardef\colon="603A % colon as a punctuation mark +\def\ldots{\mathinner{\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp}} +\def\cdots{\mathinner{\cdotp\cdotp\cdotp}} +\def\vdots{\vbox{\baselineskip4\p@ \lineskiplimit\z@ + \kern6\p@\hbox{.}\hbox{.}\hbox{.}}} +\def\ddots{\mathinner{\mkern1mu\raise7\p@\vbox{\kern7\p@\hbox{.}}\mkern2mu + \raise4\p@\hbox{.}\mkern2mu\raise\p@\hbox{.}\mkern1mu}} + +\def\acute{\mathaccent"7013 } %^math_accent +\def\grave{\mathaccent"7012 } %^math_accent +\def\ddot{\mathaccent"707F } %^math_accent +\def\tilde{\mathaccent"707E } %^math_accent +\def\bar{\mathaccent"7016 } %^math_accent +\def\breve{\mathaccent"7015 } %^math_accent +\def\check{\mathaccent"7014 } %^math_accent +\def\hat{\mathaccent"705E } %^math_accent +\def\vec{\mathaccent"017E } %^math_accent +\def\dot{\mathaccent"705F } %^math_accent +\def\widetilde{\mathaccent"0365 } %^math_accent +\def\widehat{\mathaccent"0362 } %^math_accent +\def\overrightarrow#1{\vbox{\m@th\ialign{##\crcr + \rightarrowfill\crcr\noalign{\kern-\p@\nointerlineskip} + $\hfil\displaystyle{#1}\hfil$\crcr}}} +\def\overleftarrow#1{\vbox{\m@th\ialign{##\crcr + \leftarrowfill\crcr\noalign{\kern-\p@\nointerlineskip} + $\hfil\displaystyle{#1}\hfil$\crcr}}} +\def\overbrace#1{\mathop{\vbox{\m@th\ialign{##\crcr\noalign{\kern3\p@} + \downbracefill\crcr\noalign{\kern3\p@\nointerlineskip} + $\hfil\displaystyle{#1}\hfil$\crcr}}}\limits} +\def\underbrace#1{\mathop{\vtop{\m@th\ialign{##\crcr + $\hfil\displaystyle{#1}\hfil$\crcr\noalign{\kern3\p@\nointerlineskip} + \upbracefill\crcr\noalign{\kern3\p@}}}}\limits} +\def\skew#1#2#3{{\muskip\z@#1mu\divide\muskip\z@\tw@ \mkern\muskip\z@ + #2{\mkern-\muskip\z@{#3}\mkern\muskip\z@}\mkern-\muskip\z@}{}} + +\def\lmoustache{\delimiter"437A340 } % top from (, bottom from ) +\def\rmoustache{\delimiter"537B341 } % top from ), bottom from ( +\def\lgroup{\delimiter"462833A } % extensible ( with sharper tips +\def\rgroup{\delimiter"562933B } % extensible ) with sharper tips +\def\arrowvert{\delimiter"26A33C } % arrow without arrowheads +\def\Arrowvert{\delimiter"26B33D } % double arrow without arrowheads +\def\bracevert{\delimiter"77C33E } % the vertical bar that extends braces +\def\Vert{\delimiter"26B30D } +\let\|=\Vert +\def\vert{\delimiter"26A30C } +\def\uparrow{\delimiter"3222378 } +\def\downarrow{\delimiter"3223379 } +\def\updownarrow{\delimiter"326C33F } +\def\Uparrow{\delimiter"322A37E } +\def\Downarrow{\delimiter"322B37F } +\def\Updownarrow{\delimiter"326D377 } +\def\backslash{\delimiter"26E30F } % for double coset G\backslash H +\def\rangle{\delimiter"526930B } +\def\langle{\delimiter"426830A } +\def\rbrace{\delimiter"5267309 } +\let\}=\rbrace +\def\lbrace{\delimiter"4266308 } +\let\{=\lbrace +\def\rceil{\delimiter"5265307 } +\def\lceil{\delimiter"4264306 } +\def\rfloor{\delimiter"5263305 } +\def\lfloor{\delimiter"4262304 } + +\def\bigl{\mathopen\big} +\def\bigm{\mathrel\big} +\def\bigr{\mathclose\big} +\def\Bigl{\mathopen\Big} +\def\Bigm{\mathrel\Big} +\def\Bigr{\mathclose\Big} +\def\biggl{\mathopen\bigg} +\def\biggm{\mathrel\bigg} +\def\biggr{\mathclose\bigg} +\def\Biggl{\mathopen\Bigg} +\def\Biggm{\mathrel\Bigg} +\def\Biggr{\mathclose\Bigg} +\def\big#1{{\hbox{$\left#1\vbox to8.5\p@{}\right.\n@space$}}} +\def\Big#1{{\hbox{$\left#1\vbox to11.5\p@{}\right.\n@space$}}} +\def\bigg#1{{\hbox{$\left#1\vbox to14.5\p@{}\right.\n@space$}}} +\def\Bigg#1{{\hbox{$\left#1\vbox to17.5\p@{}\right.\n@space$}}} +\def\n@space{\nulldelimiterspace\z@ \m@th} + +\def\choose{\atopwithdelims()} +\def\brack{\atopwithdelims[]} +\def\brace{\atopwithdelims\{\}} + +\def\sqrt{\radical"270370 } + +\def\mathpalette#1#2{\mathchoice{#1\displaystyle{#2}}% + {#1\textstyle{#2}}{#1\scriptstyle{#2}}{#1\scriptscriptstyle{#2}}} +\newbox\rootbox % Box to hold radicand for nth root commands. +\def\root#1\of{\setbox\rootbox + \hbox{$\m@th\scriptscriptstyle{#1}$}\mathpalette\r@@t} +\def\r@@t#1#2{\setbox\z@\hbox{$\m@th#1\sqrt{#2}$}\dimen@\ht\z@ + \advance\dimen@-\dp\z@ + \mkern5mu\raise.6\dimen@\copy\rootbox \mkern-10mu\box\z@} +\newif\ifv@ +\newif\ifh@ +\def\vphantom{\v@true\h@false\ph@nt} +\def\hphantom{\v@false\h@true\ph@nt} +\def\phantom{\v@true\h@true\ph@nt} +\def\ph@nt{\ifmmode\def\next{\mathpalette\mathph@nt}% + \else\let\next\makeph@nt\fi\next} +\def\makeph@nt#1{\setbox\z@\hbox{#1}\finph@nt} +\def\mathph@nt#1#2{\setbox\z@\hbox{$\m@th#1{#2}$}\finph@nt} +\def\finph@nt{\setbox\tw@\null + \ifv@ \ht\tw@\ht\z@ \dp\tw@\dp\z@\fi + \ifh@ \wd\tw@\wd\z@\fi \box\tw@} +\def\mathstrut{\vphantom(} +\def\smash{\relax % \relax, in case this comes first in \halign + \ifmmode\def\next{\mathpalette\mathsm@sh}\else\let\next\makesm@sh + \fi\next} +\def\makesm@sh#1{\setbox\z@\hbox{#1}\finsm@sh} +\def\mathsm@sh#1#2{\setbox\z@\hbox{$\m@th#1{#2}$}\finsm@sh} +\def\finsm@sh{\ht\z@\z@ \dp\z@\z@ \box\z@} + +\def\cong{\mathrel{\mathpalette\@vereq\sim}} % congruence sign +\def\@vereq#1#2{\lower.5\p@\vbox{\lineskiplimit\maxdimen\lineskip-.5\p@ + \ialign{$\m@th#1\hfil##\hfil$\crcr#2\crcr=\crcr}}} +\def\notin{\mathrel{\mathpalette\c@ncel\in}} +\def\c@ncel#1#2{\m@th\ooalign{$\hfil#1\mkern1mu/\hfil$\crcr$#1#2$}} +\def\rightleftharpoons{\mathrel{\mathpalette\rlh@{}}} +\def\rlh@#1{\vcenter{\m@th\hbox{\ooalign{\raise2pt + \hbox{$#1\rightharpoonup$}\crcr + $#1\leftharpoondown$}}}} +\def\buildrel#1\over#2{\mathrel{\mathop{\kern\z@#2}\limits^{#1}}} +\def\doteq{\buildrel\textstyle.\over=} + +\def\log{\mathop{\rm log}\nolimits} +\def\lg{\mathop{\rm lg}\nolimits} +\def\ln{\mathop{\rm ln}\nolimits} +\def\lim{\mathop{\rm lim}} +\def\limsup{\mathop{\rm lim\,sup}} +\def\liminf{\mathop{\rm lim\,inf}} +\def\sin{\mathop{\rm sin}\nolimits} +\def\arcsin{\mathop{\rm arcsin}\nolimits} +\def\sinh{\mathop{\rm sinh}\nolimits} +\def\cos{\mathop{\rm cos}\nolimits} +\def\arccos{\mathop{\rm arccos}\nolimits} +\def\cosh{\mathop{\rm cosh}\nolimits} +\def\tan{\mathop{\rm tan}\nolimits} +\def\arctan{\mathop{\rm arctan}\nolimits} +\def\tanh{\mathop{\rm tanh}\nolimits} +\def\cot{\mathop{\rm cot}\nolimits} +\def\coth{\mathop{\rm coth}\nolimits} +\def\sec{\mathop{\rm sec}\nolimits} +\def\csc{\mathop{\rm csc}\nolimits} +\def\max{\mathop{\rm max}} +\def\min{\mathop{\rm min}} +\def\sup{\mathop{\rm sup}} +\def\inf{\mathop{\rm inf}} +\def\arg{\mathop{\rm arg}\nolimits} +\def\ker{\mathop{\rm ker}\nolimits} +\def\dim{\mathop{\rm dim}\nolimits} +\def\hom{\mathop{\rm hom}\nolimits} +\def\det{\mathop{\rm det}} +\def\exp{\mathop{\rm exp}\nolimits} +\def\Pr{\mathop{\rm Pr}} +\def\gcd{\mathop{\rm gcd}} +\def\deg{\mathop{\rm deg}\nolimits} + +\def\bmod{\nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip\mkern5mu + \mathbin{\rm mod}\penalty900\mkern5mu\nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip} +\def\pmod#1{\allowbreak\mkern18mu({\rm mod}\,\,#1)} + +\def\cases#1{\left\{\,\vcenter{\normalbaselines\m@th + \ialign{$##\hfil$&\quad##\hfil\crcr#1\crcr}}\right.} +\def\matrix#1{\null\,\vcenter{\normalbaselines\m@th + \ialign{\hfil$##$\hfil&&\quad\hfil$##$\hfil\crcr + \mathstrut\crcr\noalign{\kern-\baselineskip} + #1\crcr\mathstrut\crcr\noalign{\kern-\baselineskip}}}\,} +\def\pmatrix#1{\left(\matrix{#1}\right)} +\newdimen\p@renwd +\setbox0=\hbox{\tenex B} +\p@renwd=\wd0 % width of the big left ( +\def\bordermatrix#1{\begingroup \m@th + \setbox\z@\vbox{\def\cr{\crcr\noalign{\kern2\p@\global\let\cr\endline}}% + \ialign{$##$\hfil\kern2\p@\kern\p@renwd&\thinspace\hfil$##$\hfil + &&\quad\hfil$##$\hfil\crcr + \omit\strut\hfil\crcr\noalign{\kern-\baselineskip}% + #1\crcr\omit\strut\cr}}% + \setbox\tw@\vbox{\unvcopy\z@\global\setbox\@ne\lastbox}% + \setbox\tw@\hbox{\unhbox\@ne\unskip\global\setbox\@ne\lastbox}% + \setbox\tw@\hbox{$\kern\wd\@ne\kern-\p@renwd\left(\kern-\wd\@ne + \global\setbox\@ne\vbox{\box\@ne\kern2\p@}% + \vcenter{\kern-\ht\@ne\unvbox\z@\kern-\baselineskip}\,\right)$}% + \null\;\vbox{\kern\ht\@ne\box\tw@}\endgroup} + +\def\openup{\afterassignment\@penup\dimen@=} +\def\@penup{\advance\lineskip\dimen@ + \advance\baselineskip\dimen@ + \advance\lineskiplimit\dimen@} +\def\eqalign#1{\null\,\vcenter{\openup\jot\m@th + \ialign{\strut\hfil$\displaystyle{##}$&$\displaystyle{{}##}$\hfil + \crcr#1\crcr}}\,} +\newif\ifdt@p +\def\displ@y{\global\dt@ptrue\openup\jot\m@th + \everycr{\noalign{\ifdt@p \global\dt@pfalse \ifdim\prevdepth>-1000\p@ + \vskip-\lineskiplimit \vskip\normallineskiplimit \fi + \else \penalty\interdisplaylinepenalty \fi}}} +\def\@lign{\tabskip\z@skip\everycr{}} % restore inside \displ@y +\def\displaylines#1{\displ@y \tabskip\z@skip + \halign{\hbox to\displaywidth{$\@lign\hfil\displaystyle##\hfil$}\crcr + #1\crcr}} +\def\eqalignno#1{\displ@y \tabskip\centering + \halign to\displaywidth{\hfil$\@lign\displaystyle{##}$\tabskip\z@skip + &$\@lign\displaystyle{{}##}$\hfil\tabskip\centering + &\llap{$\@lign##$}\tabskip\z@skip\crcr + #1\crcr}} +\def\leqalignno#1{\displ@y \tabskip\centering + \halign to\displaywidth{\hfil$\@lign\displaystyle{##}$\tabskip\z@skip + &$\@lign\displaystyle{{}##}$\hfil\tabskip\centering + &\kern-\displaywidth\rlap{$\@lign##$}\tabskip\displaywidth\crcr + #1\crcr}} + +% Definitions related to output + +\message{output routines,} + +\countdef\pageno=0 +\pageno=1 % first page is number 1 +\newtoks\headline +\headline={\hfil} % headline is normally blank +\newtoks\footline +\footline={\hss\tenrm\folio\hss} + % footline is normally a centered page number in font \tenrm +\newif\ifr@ggedbottom +\def\raggedbottom{\topskip 10\p@ plus60\p@ \r@ggedbottomtrue} +\def\normalbottom{\topskip 10\p@ \r@ggedbottomfalse} % undoes \raggedbottom +\def\folio{\ifnum\pageno<\z@ \romannumeral-\pageno \else\number\pageno \fi} +\def\nopagenumbers{\footline{\hfil}} % blank out the footline +\def\advancepageno{\ifnum\pageno<\z@ \global\advance\pageno\m@ne + \else\global\advance\pageno\@ne \fi} % increase |pageno| + +\newinsert\footins +\def\footnote#1{\let\@sf\empty % parameter #2 (the text) is read later + \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi + #1\@sf\vfootnote{#1}} +\def\vfootnote#1{\insert\footins\bgroup + \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty + \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes + \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty\@MM + \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\z@skip \spaceskip\z@skip \xspaceskip\z@skip + \textindent{#1}\footstrut\futurelet\next\fo@t} +\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t + \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next} +\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next} +\def\f@t#1{#1\@foot} +\def\@foot{\strut\egroup} +\def\footstrut{\vbox to\splittopskip{}} +\skip\footins=\bigskipamount % space added when footnote is present +\count\footins=1000 % footnote magnification factor (1 to 1) +\dimen\footins=8in % maximum footnotes per page + +\newinsert\topins +\newif\ifp@ge +\newif\if@mid +\def\topinsert{\@midfalse\p@gefalse\@ins} +\def\midinsert{\@midtrue\@ins} +\def\pageinsert{\@midfalse\p@getrue\@ins} +\skip\topins=\z@skip % no space added when a topinsert is present +\count\topins=1000 % magnification factor (1 to 1) +\dimen\topins=\maxdimen % no limit per page +\def\@ins{\par\begingroup\setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup} % start a \vbox +\def\endinsert{\egroup % finish the \vbox + \if@mid \dimen@\ht\z@ \advance\dimen@\dp\z@ \advance\dimen@12\p@ + \advance\dimen@\pagetotal \advance\dimen@-\pageshrink + \ifdim\dimen@>\pagegoal\@midfalse\p@gefalse\fi\fi + \if@mid \bigskip\box\z@\bigbreak + \else\insert\topins{\penalty100 % floating insertion + \splittopskip\z@skip + \splitmaxdepth\maxdimen \floatingpenalty\z@ + \ifp@ge \dimen@\dp\z@ + \vbox to\vsize{\unvbox\z@\kern-\dimen@}% depth is zero + \else \box\z@\nobreak\bigskip\fi}\fi\endgroup} + +\output{\plainoutput} +\def\plainoutput{\shipout\vbox{\makeheadline\pagebody\makefootline}% + \advancepageno + \ifnum\outputpenalty>-\@MM \else\dosupereject\fi} +\def\pagebody{\vbox to\vsize{\boxmaxdepth\maxdepth \pagecontents}} +\def\makeheadline{\vbox to\z@{\vskip-22.5\p@ + \line{\vbox to8.5\p@{}\the\headline}\vss}\nointerlineskip} +\def\makefootline{\baselineskip24\p@\lineskiplimit\z@\line{\the\footline}} +\def\dosupereject{\ifnum\insertpenalties>\z@ % something is being held over + \line{}\kern-\topskip\nobreak\vfill\supereject\fi} + +\def\pagecontents{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi + \dimen@=\dp\@cclv \unvbox\@cclv % open up \box255 + \ifvoid\footins\else % footnote info is present + \vskip\skip\footins + \footnoterule + \unvbox\footins\fi + \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} +\def\footnoterule{\kern-3\p@ + \hrule width 2truein \kern 2.6\p@} % the \hrule is .4pt high + +% Hyphenation, miscellaneous macros, and initial values for standard layout +\message{hyphenation} + +\lefthyphenmin=2 +\righthyphenmin=3 % disallow x- or -xx breaks +\input hyphen + +\def\magnification{\afterassignment\m@g\count@} +\def\m@g{\mag\count@ + \hsize6.5truein\vsize8.9truein\dimen\footins8truein} + +\def\tracingall{\tracingonline\@ne\tracingcommands\tw@\tracingstats\tw@ + \tracingpages\@ne\tracingoutput\@ne\tracinglostchars\@ne + \tracingmacros\tw@\tracingparagraphs\@ne\tracingrestores\@ne + \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen\errorstopmode} + +\def\showhyphens#1{\setbox0\vbox{\parfillskip\z@skip\hsize\maxdimen\tenrm + \pretolerance\m@ne\tolerance\m@ne\hbadness0\showboxdepth0\ #1}} + +\normalbaselines\rm % select roman font +\nonfrenchspacing % punctuation affects the spacing +\catcode`@=12 % at signs are no longer letters + +\def\fmtname{plain} +\def\fmtversion{3.1415926} % identifies the current format diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzart.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzart.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..52b40814269 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzart.tex @@ -0,0 +1,611 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Art Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This module provides facilities to deal with external art. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 7 June 1991 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Art File Root & Placing Control +% --- ---- ---- - ------- ------- + + +\def \zartroot {} +\setflag \zplaceart = \true + + +\def \setartroot #1{% {root/} + \gdef \zartroot {#1}} + +\def \zprependartroot #1#2{% {\name}{filespec} + \edef #1{\zartroot#2}} + +\def \placeart #1{% + \setflag \zplaceart = #1} + +% Imported Art +% -------- --- + + +\defineblock{\art}{\endart}{\false}{} + +%~block art Type +% \abovepenalty = integer % Penalty above block. +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above block. +% \belowpenalty = integer % Penalty below block. +% \belowskip = glue % Space b/b below block. +% \setflag \cliptobb = flag % Clip art to its bounding box? +% \hfuzz = dimen % Horizontal fuzz. +% \hscale = dimen % Horizontal scale (in points). +% \leftindent = glue % Left indentation. +% \rightindent = glue % Right indentation. +% \vscale = dimen % Vertical scale (in points). +% \vshift = dimen % Vertical shift. +%~end + +\definedimen{\artwidth}{0pt} +\definedimen{\artheight}{0pt} +\definedimen{\hscale}{0pt} +\definedimen{\vscale}{0pt} + + +%~ The format of the *file-info* argument is: +%~ *file*,*width*,*height*,*scale*[,*gutter*,*file*,...]&/ +%~ The *file* is a file name preceded by |!| or |=|. + +\def \art #1#2{% {type}{file-info} + \beginblockscope{art}% + \global\increment \artdepth + \abovepenalty = \breakgood %~default hard + \belowpenalty = \breakgood %~default hard + \setflag \cliptobb = \false %~default soft + \hfuzz = 1pt %~default soft + \hscale = 1.0pt %~default hard + \vscale = 1.0pt %~default hard + \vshift = \mindimen %~default soft + \processdesign{\art}{#1}% + \global\increment \artnumber + \global\artwidth = 0pt + \global\artheight = 0pt + \artformat{#2}% + \endart} + +\def \endart {% + \global\decrement \artdepth + \endblockscope{art}} + +\def \artformat #1{% {info} + \endgraf + \bbskipabove{\abovepenalty}{\aboveskip}% + \alterindentation{\leftindent}{\rightindent}% + \noindent \zbldartline 0pt,#1,\zmark \endgraf + \prevdepth = 0pt % Nothing better to do. + \bbskipbelow{\belowpenalty}{\belowskip}} + +\def \zbldartline #1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\zmark{% gutter,file,width,height,scale,...,\zmark + \zbuildartlineb{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \zwriteartinfo{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#6}}\zbldartline #6\zmark \fi} + +% Place Art File +% ----- --- ---- + + +\definedimen{\zleftslop}{0pt} +\definedimen{\zrightslop}{0pt} +\definedimen{\ztopslop}{0pt} +\definedimen{\zbottomslop}{0pt} +\definedimen{\zartwidth}{0pt} +\definedimen{\zartheight}{0pt} +\definedimen{\zartscale}{0pt} + + +\def \zbuildartlineb #1#2#3#4#5{% {gutter}{file}{width}{height}{scale} + \kern #1\relax + \zparseartfile #2,0pt,0pt,0pt,0pt,\zmark + \zchkartfile{\zgotart}% + \zcalcartdimens{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \zbuildartlinec{\zartfile}% + \gcalculate \artwidth = {\artwidth,+,#1,+,\zartwidth}% + \if \dimgtrp{\zartheight}{\artheight}\global\artheight = \zartheight \fi} + +\def \zparseartfile #1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\zmark{% spec,left,right,top,bottom\zmark + \zparseartspec #1.eps.\zmark + \zleftslop = #2% + \zrightslop = #3% + \ztopslop = #4% + \zbottomslop = #5\relax} + +\def \zcalcartdimens #1#2#3{% {width}{height}{scale} + \if \orp{\andp{\dimzerop{#1}}{\dimzerop{#2}}} + {\forceepsbb}% + \if \zgotart + \zreadepsbb{\zartwidth}{\zartheight}{\zartfile}% + \else + \zartwidth = 20pc \zartheight = 10pc + \fi + \else + \calculate \zartwidth = {#1,-,\zleftslop,-,\zrightslop}% + \calculate \zartheight = {#2,-,\ztopslop,-,\zbottomslop}% + \fi + \zcalcartscale #3\zmark + \calculate \zartwidth = {\zartwidth,S,\zartscale,S,\hscale}% + \calculate \zartheight = {\zartheight,S,\zartscale,S,\vscale}% + \calculate \zleftslop = {\zleftslop,S,\zartscale,S,\hscale}% + \calculate \zbottomslop = {\zbottomslop,S,\zartscale,S,\vscale}% + \if \forceepsbb + \advance \zleftslop by \zbbxorigin + \advance \zbottomslop by \zbbyorigin + \fi} + +\def \zcalcartscale #1#2\zmark{% scale\zmark + \if \codeeqlp{#1}{=}% + \if \emptyargp{#2}% + \calculate \zartscale = {\hsize,R,\zartwidth}% + \else + \calculate \zartscale = {#2,R,\zartwidth}% + \fi + \else + \calculate \zartscale = {#1#2pt,/,100}% + \fi} + +\def \zbuildartlinec #1{% {title} + \if \dimeqlp{\vshift}{\mindimen}% + \measureascenderheight{\vshift}% + \fi + \vtop {% % Place art in a vbox. + \offinterlineskip + \rule{height \vshift width 0pt}% % Force the height of the + \kern -\vshift % box to match ascenders. + \rule{height 0pt width \zartwidth}% % Force the width of the box. + \if \andp{\zplaceart}{\zgotart}% + \rule{height 0pt depth \zartheight width 0pt}% % Force its depth. + \zplaceartfile + \vss + \else + \vbox to \zartheight{% % Force its depth. + \topcornermarks{\zartwidth}{.5pc}{.25pt}% + \vss + \hbox to \zartwidth {\hss \zannofont #1\hss}% + \hbox to \zartwidth {\hss \zannofont + \if \notp{\zplaceart}[not placing]\fi + \if \notp{\zgotart}[to come]\fi + \hss}% + \vss + \bottomcornermarks{\zartwidth}{.5pc}{.25pt}}% + \fi}} + +\def \zplaceartfile {% + \kern \zbottomslop + \moveleft \zleftslop \vbox{% + \special{CTM: push}% + \special{CTM: scale \thefactor\hscale \space \thefactor\vscale}% + \specialplaceepsfile{\zartfile}{\zartscale}{\cliptobb}% + \special{CTM: pop}}% + \kern -\zbottomslop} + +% Duplicates and Missing Art +% ---------- --- ------- --- + + +% Write an art entry into the cross-reference file. + +\def \zwriteartinfo #1#2#3#4{% {file}{width}{height}{scale} + \zbeginhidewrite + \edef \znext {\noexpand\xref{art}{\noexpand\folio}% + {#1}% + {#2,#3} + {#4}}% + \znext + \zendhidewrite} + +% This macro is invoked by \xref. In copy mode, it checks to make sure +% that no art file is used twice. + +\def \xrefart #1#2#3#4{% {page}{number}{title}{tag} + \ifnum \xrefmode=\xrefcopymode + \zxrefarta #2,\zmark + \fi} + +\def \zxrefarta #1#2,#3\zmark{% + \if \notp{\orp{\codeeqlp{#1}{!}}{\codeeqlp{#1}{=}}}% + \if \definedp{\zart:#1#2}% + \warning{dupart}{Art file `#1#2' is used more than once in the book}% + \fi + \withname\gdef{\zart:#1#2}{}% + \fi} + +% This macro is invoked at the end of the run. + +\def \zmissingartmsg {% + \if \posp{\zmissingart}% + \remark{Number of missing art files in this run: \number\zmissingart.}% + \fi} + +% Built-In Art Blocks +% -------- --- ------ + +\def \fullpagegraphic #1{% {art-spec} + \vsinkfromtrim{-\standardbleed} + \smashbox{% + \with{\hfuzz=99pc% + \leftindent=\if \evenpagep \evenbleedshift \else \oddbleedshift \fi} + \art{graphic}{#1}}} + +\def \artgraphicdesign {% + \aboveskip = \noskip + \belowskip = \noskip + \setflag \cliptobb = \false + \hfuzz = 1pt + \leftindent = 0pt + \rightindent = 0pt + \vshift = 0pt} + +% Glyph Definitions +% ----- ----------- + + +% This macro allows the user to define a "glyph," which is an EPS file +% that is treated like a fancy character. The bounding box must be +% perfect. + +\def \defineglyph #1#2#3{% {\name}{spec,width,height,scale}{raise} + \gdef #1{\zglyph #2,#3\zmark}} + +\def \zglyph #1,#2,#3,#4,#5\zmark{% spec,width,height,scale,raise\zmark + {\zparseartspec #1.eps.\zmark + \zchkartfile{\zgotart}% + \zartwidth = #2% + \zartheight = #3% + \tdimena = #4\typesize % \tdimena = final scale in points. + \divide \tdimena by 10 + \calculate \zartwidth = {\zartwidth,P,\thefactor\tdimena}% + \calculate \zartheight = {\zartheight,P,\thefactor\tdimena}% + \raise #5 \hbox to \zartwidth{% + \rule{height \zartheight depth 0pt width 0pt}% + \if \zgotart + \specialplaceglyph{\zartfile}{\tdimena}{\false}% + \fi + \hfil}}} + +\defineglyph{\acidfree}{!acidfree,2pc,2pc,35}{-1.5pt} + +% Panel Label Block +% ----- ----- ----- + + +\defineblock{\panellabel}{\endpanellabel}{\false}{} + +%~block panellabel Type +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above block. +% \belowskip = glue % Space b/b below block. +% \bodyfont = {...} % Font for text. +% \style = {...} % Label style. +% \vshift = dimen % Vertical shift. +%~end + +\def \panellabel #1#2{% {type}{label-list} + \beginblockscope{panellabel}% + \global\increment \panellabeldepth + \style = {letter in parens}% %~default soft + \vshift = 0pt %~default soft + \processdesign{\panellabel}{#1}% + \global\increment \panellabelnumber + \panellabelformat{#2}% + \endpanellabel} + +\def \endpanellabel {% + \global\decrement \panellabeldepth + \endblockscope{panellabel}} + +\def \panellabelformat #1{% {panel-list} + \endgraf + \bbskipabove{\breaknever}{\aboveskip}% + \the\bodyfont + \noindent + \zdolabel #1,\zmark + \endgraf + \bbskipbelow{\breakallowed}{\belowskip}} + +\def \zdolabel #1,#2,#3\zmark{% shift,label,... + \rlap{% + \hspace{#1}% + \smash{\lower \vshift \hbox{#2}}}% + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#3}}\zdolabel #3\zmark \fi} + +% Frames +% ------ + + +\defineblock{\frame}{\endframe}{\false}{} + +%~block frame Type +% \abovepenalty = integer % Penalty above block. +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above block. +% \def \backgroundformat ##1{...} % Background formatter. +% \belowpenalty = integer % Penalty below block. +% \belowskip = glue % Space b/b below block. +% \deferredparams = {...} % Deferred parameter calculations. +% \framecolor = {color} % Color of frame. +% \framewidths = {left,right,top,bot} % Widths of frame segments. +% \framegaps = {left,right,top,bot} % Gaps between frame and material. +% \leftindent = glue % Left indentation of enclosed material. +% \screencolor = {color} % Background screen color. +% \width = dimen % Width of enclosed material. +%~end + +% Together, \leftindent and \width specify the position of the enclosed +% text within the text box, not of the frame itself. + + +\definetoks{\deferredparams} +\definetoks{\framecolor} +\definetoks{\framewidths} +\definetoks{\framegaps} +\definetoks{\screencolor} + +\definecount{\framepage}{0} + +\definecount{\zdivframecounter}{0} + +\def \frame #1{% {type} + \beginblockscope{frame}% + \global\increment \framedepth + \global\increment \zdivframecounter + \whichpage{\framepage}{zE:\the\divisionname-\the\zdivframecounter}% + \abovepenalty = \breakgood %~default hard + \def \backgroundformat ##1{}% %~default soft + \belowpenalty = \breakgood %~default hard + \deferredparams = {}% %~default soft + \framecolor = {black}% %~default soft + \leftindent = 0pt %~default soft + \screencolor = {}% %~default soft + \width = \naturalwidth %~default soft + \processdesign{\frame}{#1}% + \global\increment \framenumber + \setbox\zboxa = \vtop \bgroup + \zpushvcontext} + +\def \endframe {% + \endgraf + \unskip + \zpopvcontext + \egroup % \vtop + \the\deferredparams + \setbox\zboxb = \hbox to \width{% + \hspace{-\leftindent}\box\zboxa \hss}% + \edef \zcolorrule {\noexpand\colorrule{\the\framecolor}}% + \def \zarga ##1,##2,##3,##4\zmark{##1\relax}% + \def \zargb ##1,##2,##3,##4\zmark{##2\relax}% + \def \zargc ##1,##2,##3,##4\zmark{##3\relax}% + \def \zargd ##1,##2,##3,##4\zmark{##4\relax}% + \tdimenc = \expandafter\zargc\the\framegaps\zmark + \advance \tdimenc by \ht\zboxb + \advance \tdimenc by \dp\zboxb + \advance \tdimenc by \expandafter\zargd\the\framegaps\zmark + \setbox\zboxa = \vtop {% + \offinterlineskip + \measureascenderheight{\tdimena}% % Force the height of the + \rule{width 0pt height \tdimena}% % box to match ascenders. + \kern -\tdimena + \smashbox{\backgroundformat{\tdimenc}}% + \if \notp{\emptytoksp{\screencolor}}% + \tdimend = \expandafter\zarga\the\framegaps\zmark + \advance \tdimend by \wd\zboxb + \advance \tdimend by \expandafter\zargb\the\framegaps\zmark + \smashbox{% +%%% \moveright \expandafter\zarga\the\framewidths\zmark \smashbox{% + \colorrule{\the\screencolor}{width \tdimend height \tdimenc}}% + \fi + \zcolorrule{height \expandafter\zargc\the\framewidths\zmark}% + \kern -\expandafter\zargc\the\framewidths\zmark + \hbox {% + \rlap{\zcolorrule{height \tdimenc + width \expandafter\zarga\the\framewidths\zmark}}% + \hskip \expandafter\zarga\the\framegaps\zmark + \vbox {% + \vskip \expandafter\zargc\the\framegaps\zmark + \box\zboxb + \vskip \expandafter\zargd\the\framegaps\zmark}% + \hskip \expandafter\zargb\the\framegaps\zmark + \llap{\zcolorrule{height \tdimenc + width \expandafter\zargb\the\framewidths\zmark}}}% + \kern -\expandafter\zargd\the\framewidths\zmark + \zcolorrule{height \expandafter\zargd\the\framewidths\zmark}% + \tagpageonly{\uniquetag{zE}{\the\zdivframecounter}}}% + \advance \leftindent by -\expandafter\zarga\the\framewidths\zmark + \advance \leftindent by -\expandafter\zarga\the\framegaps\zmark + \frameformat + \global\decrement \framedepth + \endblockscope{frame}} + +\def \frameformat {% + \bbskipabove{\abovepenalty}{\aboveskip}% + \hindent{\leftindent} \rlap{\box\zboxa}\par + \prevdepth = 0pt % Last thing in box is rule. + \bbskipbelow{\belowpenalty}{\belowskip}} + +% This macro is invoked at the beginning of each division. + +\def \zframedivinit {% + \global\zdivframecounter = 0\relax} + +% Margin Rules +% ------ ----- + + +\defineblock{\marginrule}{\endmarginrule}{\false}{} + +%~block marginrule Type +% \artspec = {...} % Art spec for graphic above rule. +% \leftshift = dimen % Horizontal shift for rule in left margin. +% \position = {...} % Position options. +% \rightshift = dimen % Horizonal shift for rule in right margin. +% \rulecolor = {...} % Color of rule. +% \rulewidth = dimen % Width of rule. +% \vshift = dimen % Vertical shift for note. +%~end + +\definetoks{\artspec} +\definedimen{\leftshift}{0pt} +\definedimen{\rightshift}{0pt} + +\definecount{\marginrulepage}{0} + +\definecount{\zdivmrcounter}{0} +\definedimen{\zmrshift}{0pt} +\definedimen{\zmrprevdepth}{0pt} + +\def \marginrule #1#2{% {type}{height,depth} + \blockcantbein{\marginrule}{\marginrule}% + \beginblockscope{marginrule}% + \global\increment \marginruledepth + \global\increment \zdivmrcounter + \whichpage{\marginrulepage}{zR:\the\divisionname-\the\zdivmrcounter}% + \rulecolor = {black} %~default soft + \vshift = 0pt %~default soft + \processdesign{\marginrule}{#1}% + \zparsemrpos{\the\position}% + \marginruleformat{#2}% + \endmarginrule} + +\def \endmarginrule {% + \global\decrement \marginruledepth + \endblockscope{marginrule}} + +\def \marginruleformat #1{% {height,depth} + \if \vmodep + \zmrprevdepth = \prevdepth + \nointerlineskip + \else + \vadjust + \fi + \bgroup + \topskip = 0pt + \moveright \zmrshift \vtop to 0pt{% + \vskip \vshift + \zmrgraphic + \zmrrule #1\zmark + \vss + \tagpageonly{\uniquetag{zR}{\the\zdivmrcounter}}}% + \egroup + \if \vmodep \prevdepth = \zmrprevdepth \fi} + +% This macro sets up variables that specify the position of a margin rule +% according to the \position design parameter: +% +% \ifevenpage Use next position only on even page. +% \ifoddpage Use next position only on odd page. +% \leftmargin Shift note to left margin. +% \outsidemargin Shift note to outside margin. +% \rightmargin Shift note to right margin. + +\definecount{\zmrhpos}{0} + +\def \zparsemrpos #1{% {options...} + \global\zmrhpos = 0 + {\def \ifevenpage ##1{\if \evenp{\marginrulepage}##1\fi}% + \def \ifoddpage ##1{\if \oddp{\marginrulepage}##1\fi}% + \def \leftmargin {\global\zmrhpos=1\relax}% + \def \outsidemargin{\ifevenpage{\leftmargin}\ifoddpage{\rightmargin}}% + \def \rightmargin {\global\zmrhpos=2\relax}% + #1\relax}% + \ifcase \zmrhpos + \error{nomrpos} + {No horizontal position has been specified for a margin rule}% + \or + \if \negp{\leftshift}% + \zmrshift = \leftshift + \else + \if \evenp{\marginrulepage}% + \calculate \zmrshift = {-\evenlefttextmargin,+,\leftshift}% + \else + \calculate \zmrshift = {-\oddlefttextmargin,+,\leftshift}% + \fi + \fi + \or + \calculate \zmrshift = {\textmeasure,+,\rightshift}% + \fi} + +\def \zmrgraphic {% + \if \emptytoksp{\artspec}% + \artheight = 0pt + \else + \xdef \znext {\noexpand\art{zmarginrule}{\the\artspec}}% + \znext + \kern -1pt + \fi} + +\definedimen{\zmrdepth}{0pt} + +\def \zmrrule #1,#2\zmark{% height,depth\zmark + \calculate \zmrdepth = {#2,-,\artheight}% + \setbox \zboxa = \hbox{\vrule width 0pt height #1 depth \zmrdepth}% + \vskip -\ht\zboxa + \colorrule{\the\rulecolor}{width \rulewidth height #1 depth \zmrdepth}} + +\def \artzmarginruledesign {% + \aboveskip = \noskip + \belowskip = \noskip + \setflag \cliptobb = \false + \hfuzz = 999pc + \leftindent = 0pt + \rightindent = 0pt + \vshift = \mindimen} + +% This macro is invoked at the beginning of each division. + +\def \zmrdivinit {% + \global\zdivmrcounter = 0\relax} + +% Corner Marks +% ------ ----- + + +\def \topcornermarks #1#2#3{% {box-width}{length}{thickness} + \hbox to #1{\vrule height #3 depth 0pt width #2 \hss + \vrule height #3 depth 0pt width #2}% + \nointerlineskip + \hbox to #1{\vrule height #2 depth 0pt width #3 \hss + \vrule height #2 depth 0pt width #3}} + +\def \bottomcornermarks #1#2#3{% {box-width}{length}{thickness} + \hbox to #1{\vrule height #2 depth 0pt width #3 \hss + \vrule height #2 depth 0pt width #3}% + \nointerlineskip + \hbox to #1{\vrule height #3 depth 0pt width #2 \hss + \vrule height #3 depth 0pt width #2}} + +% Utilities +% --------- + + +\definecount{\zmissingart}{0} % Count of missing art files. + + +% Check that the art file exists and issue remark if not. + +\def \zchkartfile #1{% {\flag} + \setflag #1= \true + \checkfile{\znext}{\zartfile}% + \if \notp{\znext}% + \remark{Art file `\zartfile' is missing; ignored for now}% + \global\increment \zmissingart + \setflag #1= \false + \fi} + +\def \zparseartspec #1#2.#3.#4\zmark{% name.ext.\zmark + \def \zartfile {???}% % Why do this? + \if \codeeqlp{#1}{!}% + \def \zartfile{#2.#3}% + \else\if \codeeqlp{#1}{=}% + \zprependartroot{\zartfile}{#2.#3}% + \else + \zprependartroot{\zartfile}{#1#2.#3}% + \fi\fi} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzbiblio.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzbiblio.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cc834e4109e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzbiblio.tex @@ -0,0 +1,427 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Bibliography Facility +% +% Synopsis: This module provides a new bibliography facility to replace +% zzbibtex. It is more flexible so that it can handle numeric, +% key, and author/year citations. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 1 December 2016 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Initialization +% -------------- + + +\def \zbiblioinit {% + \if \definedp{\bibliodesign}% + \begingroup + \bibliodesign + \globaldefs = 1 + \citestyle = \citestyle + \endgroup + \fi} + +% Bibliography Cross-Reference +% ------------ --------------- + + +% When tags are loaded, define the name \=zB:tag to contain the +% bibliographic info in this format: +% folio\zmark key\zmark {author}{year}{full-author} + +\def \xrefbib #1#2#3#4{% {folio}{key}{{author}{year}{full-author}}{tag} + \ifnum \xrefmode=\xrefloadtagmode + \if \definedp{\=zB:#4}\zduptag{#4}\fi + \withname\gdef{\=zB:#4}{#1\zmark#2\zmark#3}% + \fi} + +% This macro loads the cite cross-reference entries and invokes the +% specified macro for each one. + +\def \mapxrefcites #1{% {\macro} + {\let \zmapcitemacro = #1\relax + \zxloadcomp{\xrefloadcitemode}}} + +\def \xrefcite #1#2#3#4{% {page}{}{}{tag} + \ifnum \xrefmode=\xrefloadcitemode + \zmapcitemacro{#1}{#4}% + \fi} + +% Biblio Block +% ------ ----- + + +\defineblock{\biblio}{\endbiblio}{\false}{} + +%~block biblio +% \citestyle = integer % Citation style. +% \setflag \indexcites = boolean % If true, index each cite (not implemented). +% \setflag \citeself = boolean % If true, \bibitem cites itself (not implemented). +%~end + +\definecount{\citestyle}{-1} + +\chardef \citebynumber = 0 +\chardef \citebykey = 1 +\chardef \citebyauthoryear = 2 + + +\def \biblio {% + \blockcantbein{\biblio}{\biblio}% + \blockmustbein{\biblio}{\list}% + \beginblockscope{biblio}% + \global\increment \bibliodepth + \setflag \citeself = \false %~default soft + \processdesign{\biblio}{}% + \global\increment \biblionumber} + +\def \endbiblio {% + \endgraf + \fakepar % In case biblio is empty. + \global\decrement \bibliodepth + \endblockscope{biblio}} + +% Bibliography Items +% ------------ ----- + + +\definecount{\zbibitemnumber}{0} +\definetoks{\zbibauthor} +\definetoks{\zbibyear} +\definetoks{\zbibfullauthor} +\definetoks{\bibitemtag} % Tag of current \bibitem. + + +%~ The |\bibitem| command is used in a |\biblio| block to start +%~ each entry in the bibliography. It takes two arguments; the +%~ format of the first argument depends on the citation style. +%~ * Cited by number: |\bibitem{}{*tag*}| +%~ * Cited by key: |\bibitem{*key*}{*tag*}| +%~ * Cited by author/year: |\bibitem{*author*;*year*;*full-author*}{*tag*}| +%~ *. +%~ In the author/year format, the second semicolon and *full-author* are +%~ optional. + +\def \bibitem #1#2{% {[info]}{tag} + \blockmustbein{\bibitem}{\biblio}% + \zbibitemnumber = \itemnumber + \increment \zbibitemnumber + \ifcase \citestyle + \edef \zbibkey {\the\zbibitemnumber}% + \zbibauthor = {}% + \zbibyear = {}% + \zbibfullauthor = {}% + \or + \def \zbibkey {#1}% + \zbibauthor = {}% + \zbibyear = {}% + \zbibfullauthor = {}% + \or + \def \zbibkey {}% + \zparseauthoryear #1;;;\zmark + \else + \error{invalidcitestyle}{The \string\citestyle parameter is invalid: \the\citestyle}% + \fi + \bibitemtag = {#2}% + \item{\zbibkey}% + \if \PDFhyperlinks \PDFmark{T:#2}\fi + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#2}}% + \edef \znext {% + \noexpand\xref{bib}{\noexpand\folio} + {\zbibkey} + {{\the\zbibauthor}{\the\zbibyear}{\the\zbibfullauthor}} + {#2}}% + \znext + \fi +%%% \if \indexcites +%%% \edef \znext {\noexpand\xbiblio1{\the\zbibauthor}}% +%%% \znext +%%% \fi + \ignorespaces} + +\def \zparseauthoryear #1;#2;#3;#4\zmark{% + \if \orp{\emptyargp{#1}}{\emptyargp{#2}}% + \error{nocitetags}{The author and/or year are missing}% + \fi + \zbibauthor = {#1}% + \zbibyear = {#2}% + \zbibfullauthor = {#3}} + +% Bibliography Citation Page List +% ------------ -------- ---- ---- + + +\setflag \zcitexrefsloaded = \false + + +%~ If this macro is specified as the |\endpartext| of a bibliography +%~ |\list|, then each entry in the bibliography will include a list +%~ of the pages citing that entry. The argument determines whether +%~ each page is made into a hyperlinked PDF button. +%~ +%~ In order for the citation information to be available, the +%~ |\xrefcites| document parameter must be set to 1. + +\def \citepagelist #1{% {button?} + \if \notp{\zcitexrefsloaded}% + \mapxrefcites{\zbibcitelist}% + \global\setflag \zcitexrefsloaded = \true + \fi + \setflag \zbibfirstpage = \true + \def \zbibprevpage {}% + \withname\maplistlf {\=citetag:\the\bibitemtag} + {\zbibcitepage{##1}{#1}}} + +\def \zbibcitelist #1#2{% {page}{tag} + \if \withname\undefinedp {\=citetag:#2}% + \withname\setlist {\=citetag:#2}={}% + \fi + \withname\appendlf {\=citetag:#2}{#1}} + +\def \zbibcitepage #1#2{% {page}{button?} + \stringeql{\zsamepage}{#1}{\zbibprevpage}% + \if \notp{\zsamepage}% + \if \notp{\emptydefp{\zbibprevpage}},\space \fi + \if #2% + \pagebutton{#1}{#1}% + \else + #1% + \fi + \def \zbibprevpage {#1}% + \fi} + +% Low-Level Citation Commands +% --------- -------- -------- + + +%~ This command produces the key of the bibliography entry specified +%~ by the *tag*. The command makes sense only for the numbered or +%~ keyed citation styles. + +\def \citekey #1{% {tag} %^citation + \if \eqlp{\citestyle}{\citebyauthoryear}% + \warning{badcitekey}{The \noexpand\citekey command doesn't make sense + when citing by author/year}% + \fi + \zcitetaginfo{#1}% + \zcitetext{#1}{\zcitekey}% + \zxrefcite{\true}{#1}} +%%% \if \indexcites \zciteindex{\zcitekey}\fi} + +%~ This command produces the author of the bibliography entry specified +%~ by the *tag*. The command makes sense only for the author/year +%~ citation style. + +\def \citeauthor #1{% {tag} %^citation + \if \neqlp{\citestyle}{\citebyauthoryear}% + \warning{badciteauthor}{The \noexpand\citeauthor command only makes sense + when citing by author/year}% + \fi + \zcitetaginfo{#1}% + \zcitetext{#1}{\zciteauthor}% + \zxrefcite{\true}{#1}} + +%~ This command produces the year of the bibliography entry specified +%~ by the *tag*. The command makes sense only for the author/year +%~ citation style. + +\def \citeyear #1{% {tag} %^citation + \if \neqlp{\citestyle}{\citebyauthoryear}% + \warning{badciteyear}{The \noexpand\citeyear command only makes sense + when citing by author/year}% + \fi + \zcitetaginfo{#1}% + \zcitetext{#1}{\zciteyear}% + \zxrefcite{\true}{#1}} + +%~ This command produces the full author of the bibliography entry specified +%~ by the *tag*. The command makes sense only for the author/year +%~ citation style. + +\def \citefullauthor #1{% {tag} %^citation + \if \neqlp{\citestyle}{\citebyauthoryear}% + \warning{badcitefullauthor}{The \noexpand\citefullauthor command only makes sense + when citing by author/year}% + \fi + \zcitetaginfo{#1}% + \zcitetext{#1}{\zcitefullauthor}% + \zxrefcite{\true}{#1}} + +\def \zcitetaginfo #1{% {tag} + \zcitenoinfo + \if \definedp{\=zB:#1}% + \expandafterthrice\zcitetaginfoa \name{\=zB:#1}% + \else + \writelog{ZzTeX citation: undefined tag `#1'.}% + \zxwriteinfo{\false}{undef-tag}{#1}{}% + \global\increment \zuntagrefs + \fi} + +\def \zcitetaginfoa #1\zmark#2\zmark#3#4#5{% folio\zmark key\zmark + % {author}{year}{full-author} + \if \eqlp{\citestyle}{\citebyauthoryear}% + \def \zciteauthor {#3}% + \def \zciteyear {#4}% + \def \zcitefullauthor {#5}% + \else + \def \zcitekey {#2}% + \fi} + +\def \zcitenoinfo {% + \def \zcitekey {???}% + \def \zciteauthor {???author???}% + \def \zciteyear {???}% + \def \zcitefullauthor {???full-author???}} + +\def \zcitetext #1#2{% {tag}{text} + \if \DVIWindoinuse \colorspecial{ifview color push rgb .5 .22 .24}\fi + \if \PDFhyperlinks + \tagbutton{#1}{#2}% + \else + #2% + \fi + \if \DVIWindoinuse \colorspecial{ifview color pop}\fi} + +\def \zxrefcite #1#2{% {defined?}{tag} + \ifcase \xrefcites + \relax + \or + \xref{cite}{\folio}{}{}{#2}% + \else + \customcitexref{#1}{#2}% {boolean}{tag} + \fi} + +%%%\def \zciteindex #1{% {\zcitemacro} +%%% \expandafter\xcite\expandafter1\expandafter{#1}} + +% High-Level Citation Commands +% ---------- -------- -------- + + +%~ This high-level citation command produces the key or author/year +%~ of the bibliography entry specified by the *tag*. The text +%~ is formatted in the style appropriate for a noun in a sentence. +%~ There are two formats for the command: +%~ * |\citenoun{*tag*}| accepts a tag and produces the key or author/year. +%~ * |\citenoun{*tag*;*info*}| accepts a tag and additional +%~ information such as a page number or section reference. +%~ *. +%~ The format of the text produced is controlled by the |\citenounformat|, +%~ |\citenouninfoformat|, and |\citepunct| macros in the design file. + +\def \citenoun #1{% {tag[;info]} %^citation + \expandafter\zsetcitepunc \citepunct + \zcitetagsinfo #1;;\zmark + \def \zcitenounsep {}% + \expandafter\zcitenoun \zcitetags,\zmark} + +\def \zcitenoun #1,#2\zmark {% tag,other-tags\zmark + \zcitenounsep + \edef \zcitenounsep {\zcitesep}% + \if \eqlp{\citestyle}{\citebyauthoryear}% + \if \emptydefp{\zciteinfo}% + \zciteonetag{\citenounformat}#1!!\zmark + \else + \citenouninfoformat{\citeauthor{#1}}{\citeyear{#1}}{\zciteinfo}% + \fi + \else + \if \emptydefp{\zciteinfo}% + \citenounformat{\citekey{#1}}% + \else + \citenouninfoformat{\citekey{#1}}{\zciteinfo}% + \fi + \fi + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#2}}\zcitenoun #2\zmark \fi} + +%~ This high-level citation command produces the key or author/year +%~ of the bibliography entry specified by the *tag*. The text +%~ is formatted in the style appropriate for a parenthetical +%~ citation list. There are two formats for the command: +%~ * |\citeparen{*tag-list*}| accepts one or more tags separated +%~ by commas and produces a parenthetical list of keys or author/years. +%~ * |\citeparen{*tag*;*info*}| accepts a tag and additional +%~ information such as a page number or section reference. +%~ *. +%~ The format of the text produced is controlled by the |\citeparenformat|, +%~ |\citepareninfoformat|, and |\citepunct| macros in the design file. + +\def \citeparen #1{% {tags[;info]} %^citation + \expandafter\zsetcitepunc \citepunct + \zcitetagsinfo #1;;\zmark + \expandafter\zciteparen \zcitetags,\zmark + \zcitecfence} + +\def \zciteparen #1,#2\zmark {% tag,other-tags\zmark + \zciteofence + \edef \zciteofence {\zcitesep}% + \if \eqlp{\citestyle}{\citebyauthoryear}% + \if \emptydefp{\zciteinfo}% + \zciteonetag{\citeparenformat}#1!!\zmark + \else + \citepareninfoformat{\citeauthor{#1}}{\citeyear{#1}}{\zciteinfo}% + \fi + \else + \if \emptydefp{\zciteinfo}% + \citeparenformat{\citekey{#1}}% + \else + \citepareninfoformat{\citekey{#1}}{\zciteinfo}% + \fi + \fi + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#2}}\zciteparen #2\zmark \fi} + +%~ This high-level citation command produces the key or author/year +%~ of the bibliography entry specified by the *tag*. The text +%~ is formatted in the style appropriate for a citation that is part +%~ of a surrounding parenthetical sentence. +%~ There are two formats for the command: +%~ * |\citeplain{*tag*}| accepts a tag and produces the key or author/year. +%~ * |\citeplain{*tag*;*info*}| accepts a tag and additional +%~ information such as a page number or section reference. +%~ *. +%~ The format of the text produced is controlled by the |\citeplainformat| +%~ and |\citeplaininfoformat| macros in the design file. + +\def \citeplain #1{% {tag[;info]} %^citation + \zcitetagsinfo #1;;\zmark + \expandafter\zciteplain \zcitetags,\zmark} + +\def \zciteplain #1,#2\zmark {% tag,other-tags\zmark + \if \eqlp{\citestyle}{\citebyauthoryear}% + \if \emptydefp{\zciteinfo}% + \zciteonetag{\citeparenformat}#1!!\zmark + \else + \citepareninfoformat{\citeauthor{#1}}{\citeyear{#1}}{\zciteinfo}% + \fi + \else + \if \emptydefp{\zciteinfo}% + \citeparenformat{\citekey{#1}}% + \else + \citepareninfoformat{\citekey{#1}}{\zciteinfo}% + \fi + \fi + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#2}}\zciteplain #2\zmark \fi} + +\def \zsetcitepunc #1#2#3{% + \def \zciteofence {#1}% + \def \zcitecfence {#2}% + \def \zcitesep {#3}} + +\def \zcitetagsinfo #1;#2;#3\zmark {% {tags[;info]} + \if \emptyargp{#1}% + \warning{nocitetags}{No bibliography entry tags were specified}% + \fi + \def \zcitetags {#1}% + \def \zciteinfo {#2}} + +\def \zciteonetag #1#2!#3!#4\zmark {% + \if \emptyargp{#2}% + \citeyear{#3}% + \else + #1{\citeauthor{#2}}{\citeyear{#2}}% + \fi}
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzbibtex.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzbibtex.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a6179133f80 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzbibtex.tex @@ -0,0 +1,290 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Interface to BibTeX +% +% Synopsis: This module provides the definitions necessary for ZzTeX to +% interface to BibTeX. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 21 July 1992 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Bibliography Preparation +% ------------ ----------- + + +\def \zbiblioinit {} + +\ignore +\setflag \zbiblioing = \false + +\def \preparebiblio {% + \setflag \zbiblioing = \true} + +\def \zbibfinal {% + \if \zbiblioing + \remark{[Generating auxiliary file for BibTeX.}% + {\immediate\openout \zwritea = \jobname.aux\relax + \immediate\write \zwritea + {\zcomment BibTeX auxiliary file for book `\jobname'.}% + \processdesign{\biblio}{}% + \immediate\write \zwritea {\string\bibstyle{\the\bibliostyle}}% + \immediate\write \zwritea {\string\bibdata{\the\bibliofiles}}% + \let \zxmodesave = \xrefmode + \let \xrefmode = \xrefloadauxmode + \input \jobname.zzc\relax + \let \xrefmode = \zxmodesave + \immediate\write \zwritea {\zcomment [end]}% + \immediate\closeout \zwritea} + \remark{Auxiliary file complete.]}% + \fi} + +\endignore + +% Citations +% --------- + + +%~ This citation command produces the key associated with +%~ the specified tag. The key is usually the bibliography +%~ entry number or the author/year combination.&/ +%~ *Note:* Some books do not allow this command to be used. + +\def \cite #1{% {tag} %^citation + \ensurepar + \if \definedp{\=zB:#1}% + \zcitetext{#1}{\expandafterthrice\zbibdata \name{\=zB:#1}0}% + \else + \zuncite{#1}% + \fi + \zxrefcite{\true}{#1}} + +%~ This citation command produces the author associated with +%~ the specified tag. + +\def \citeauthor #1{% {tag} %^citation + \ensurepar + \if \definedp{\=zB:#1}% + \zcitetext{#1}{\expandafterthrice\zbibdata \name{\=zB:#1}1}% + \else + \zuncite{#1}% + \fi + \zxrefcite{\true}{#1}} + +%~ This citation command produces the year associated with +%~ the specified tag. + +\def \citeyear #1{% {tag} %^citation + \ensurepar + \if \definedp{\=zB:#1}% + \zcitetext{#1}{\expandafterthrice\zbibdata \name{\=zB:#1}2}% + \else + \zuncite{#1}% + \fi + \zxrefcite{\true}{#1}} + +\def \nocite #1{% {tag} + \zxrefcite{\false}{#1}} + +\def \zcitetext #1#2{% {tag}{text} + \if \PDFhyperlinks + \tagbutton{#1}{#2}% + \else + #2% + \fi} + +\def \zxrefcite #1#2{% + \ifcase \xrefcites + \relax + \or + \xref{cite}{\folio}{}{}{#2}% + \else + \customcitexref{#1}{#2}% {boolean}{tag} + \fi} + +\def \zbibdata #1\zmark#2\zmark#3#4#5#6{% folio\zmark xxx\zmark + % {label}{author}{year}n + \if \DVIWindoinuse \colorspecial{ifview color push rgb .75 .35 0}\fi + \ifcase #6 #3\or #4\or #5\fi + \if \DVIWindoinuse \colorspecial{ifview color pop}\fi + \if \indexcites \xcite1{#4}\fi} + +\def \zuncite #1{% + \writelog{ZzTeX citation: undefined tag `#1'.}% + \zxwriteinfo{\false}{undef-tag}{#1}{}% + \global\increment \zuntagrefs + \zbibdata -\zmark-\zmark{???}--0} + +% Bibliography Cross-Reference +% ------------ --------------- + + +% When tags are loaded, define the name \=zB:tag to contain the +% bibliographic info. + +\def \xrefbib #1#2#3#4{% {page}{???}{{label}{author}{year}}{tag} + \ifnum \xrefmode=\xrefloadtagmode + \if \definedp{\=zB:#4}\zduptag{#4}\fi + \withname\gdef{\=zB:#4}{#1\zmark#2\zmark#3}% + \fi} + +% This macro loads the cite cross-reference entries and invokes the +% specified macro for each one. + +\def \mapxrefcites #1{% {\macro} + {\let \zmapcitemacro = #1\relax + \zxloadcomp{\xrefloadcitemode}}} + +\def \xrefcite #1#2#3#4{% {page}{}{}{tag} + \ifnum \xrefmode=\xrefloadcitemode + \zmapcitemacro{#1}{#4}% + \fi} + +% Biblio Block +% ------ ----- + + +\defineblock{\biblio}{\endbiblio}{\false}{} + +%~block biblio +% \bibliofiles = {file,...} % List of biblio database files. +% \bibliostyle = {name} % Name of biblio style. +% \setflag \citeself = boolean % If true, \bibitem cites itself. +%~end + +\definetoks{\bibliofiles} +\definetoks{\bibliostyle} + +\definecount{\zbiblionum}{0} + + +\def \biblio {% + \blockcantbein{\biblio}{\biblio}% + \blockmustbein{\biblio}{\list}% + \beginblockscope{biblio}% + \global\increment \bibliodepth + \setflag \citeself = \false %~default soft + \processdesign{\biblio}{}% + \global\increment \biblionumber + \def \begin ##1##2{}% + \def \end ##1{}% + \let \bibitem = \zbibitem + \let \newblock = \relax + \let \em = \it + \zbiblionum = 0\relax} + +\def \endbiblio {% + \endgraf + \fakepar % In case biblio is empty. + \global\decrement \bibliodepth + \endblockscope{biblio}} + +% Bibliography Item +% ------------ ---- + + +\definetoks{\zbibtoksa} +\definetoks{\zbibtoksb} +\definetoks{\zbibtoksc} +\definetoks{\bibitemtag} % Tag of current \bibitem. + + +% This supports items of the form `\bibitem[label][author][year]{tag}'. + +\def \zbibitem {% + \futurelet\znext \zbibitema} + +\def \zbibitema {% + \ifx \znext[% + \let \znext = \zbibitemb + \else + \increment \zbiblionum + % Expand \number\zbiblionum by hand. + \edef \znext {\noexpand\zbibitemb[\number\zbiblionum]}% + \fi + \znext} + +\def \zbibitemb[#1]{% [label] + \zbibtoksa = {#1}% + \futurelet\znext \zbibitemc} + +\def \zbibitemc {% + \if \tokeqlp{\znext}{[}% + \let \znext = \zbibitemd + \else + \def \znext {\zbibitemd[???]}% + \fi + \znext} + +\def \zbibitemd[#1]{% [author] + \zbibtoksb = {#1}% + \futurelet\znext \zbibiteme} + +\def \zbibiteme {% + \if \tokeqlp{\znext}{[}% + \let \znext = \zbibitemf + \else + \def \znext {\zbibitemf[???]}% + \fi + \znext} + +\def \zbibitemf[#1]#2{% [year]{tag} + \zbibtoksc = {#1}% + \bibitemtag = {#2}% + \item{\the\zbibtoksa}% + \if \PDFhyperlinks \PDFmark{T:#2}\fi + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#2}}% + \edef \znext{\noexpand\xref{bib}{\noexpand\folio} + {???} + {{\the\zbibtoksa}{\the\zbibtoksb}{\the\zbibtoksc}} + {#2}}% + \znext + \if \citeself \nocite{#2}\fi + \fi + \if \indexcites + \edef \znext {\noexpand\xbiblio1{\the\zbibtoksb}}% + \znext + \fi + \ignorespaces} + +% Bibliography Citation Page List +% ------------ -------- ---- ---- + + +\setflag \zcitexrefsloaded = \false + + +% If this macro is specified as the \endpartext of a bibliography +% list, it will append a list of the citation pages to each entry. + +\def \citepagelist #1{% {button?} + \if \notp{\zcitexrefsloaded}% + \mapxrefcites{\zbibcitelist}% + \global\setflag \zcitexrefsloaded = \true + \fi + \setflag \zbibfirstpage = \true + \def \zbibprevpage {}% + \withname\maplistlf {\=citetag:\the\bibitemtag} + {\zbibcitepage{##1}{#1}}} + +\def \zbibcitelist #1#2{% {page}{tag} + \if \withname\undefinedp {\=citetag:#2}% + \withname\setlist {\=citetag:#2}={}% + \fi + \withname\appendlf {\=citetag:#2}{#1}} + +\def \zbibcitepage #1#2{% {page}{button?} + \stringeql{\zsamepage}{#1}{\zbibprevpage}% + \if \notp{\zsamepage}% + \if \notp{\emptydefp{\zbibprevpage}},\space \fi + \if #2% + \pagebutton{#1}{#1}% + \else + #1% + \fi + \def \zbibprevpage {#1}% + \fi} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzblock.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzblock.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..989bb4363bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzblock.tex @@ -0,0 +1,327 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Blocks +% +% Synopsis: This module provides facilities for defining and creating +% element blocks. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 23 August 1989 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Block Definition +% ----- ---------- + + +\setlist \zblocklist = {} + +\def \defineblock #1#2#3#4{% {\name}{\endname}{snap?}{redefine} + \if \emptyargp{#4}% + \withname\definecount{#1depth}{0}% + \withname\definecount{#1number}{0}% + \withname\definetoks{#1comptext}% + \withname\gdef{#1varinit}{}% + \if #3\withname\declaresnapitem{#1number}\fi + \append{#1}{\zblocklist}% + \fi} + +\def \resetinvcontext #1{% {\name} + \zdeclareeveryvcontext{\zblockvcontext{#1}}} + +\def \zblockvcontext #1{% {\name} + \zsavevcontext{\name{#1depth}=\the\name{#1depth}% + \name{#1number}=\the\name{#1number}% + \name{#1comptext}={\the\name{#1comptext}}}% + \global\name{#1depth}= 0\relax + \global\name{#1number}= 0\relax} + +% Block Utilities +% ----- --------- + + +\defineskip{\enclosingbaselineskip}{0pt} +\defineskip{\enclosingleftss}{0pt} +\definedimen{\enclosingparindent}{0pt} +\definedimen{\enclosingparrag}{0pt} +\defineskip{\enclosingparskip}{0pt} +\defineskip{\enclosingrightss}{0pt} + + +\def \beginblockscope #1{% + \begingroup + \zpushblock{#1}% + \enclosingbaselineskip = \baselineskip + \enclosingleftss = \leftskip + \tdimena = \leftskip + \advance \enclosingleftss by -\tdimena + \enclosingparindent = \parindent + \enclosingparrag = \parrag + \enclosingparskip = \parskip + \enclosingrightss = \rightskip + \tdimena = \rightskip + \advance \enclosingrightss by -\tdimena} + +\def \endblockscope #1{% + \zpopblock{#1}% + \endgroup} + +\def \processdesign #1#2{% {\block}{type etc.} + \zprocessvariant{#1}% + \resetnumber = {}% + \if \definedp{#1#2design}% + \name{#1#2design}\relax % \relax terminates numbers and such. + \else + \error{nodesign}{No design has been defined for the `\string#1#2' block}% + \fi + \zprocesswith + {\globaldefs = 1 \the\resetnumber}} + +\def \inblockp #1{% {\block-name} + \if \posp{\name{#1depth}}\true \else \false \fi} + +\def \setcomptext #1{% {\xxxcomptext} + \edef \znext {\comptextformat}% + #1= \expandafter{\znext}}% + +\def \blockmustbein #1#2{% {\inner}{\outer} + \if \zerop{\name{#2depth}}% + \error{blkmustnest}{A `\string#1' must be nested in a `\string#2'}% + \fi} + +\def \blockcantbein #1#2{% {\inner}{\outer} + \if \posp{\name{#2depth}}% + \error{blkcantnest} + {A `\string#1' cannot be nested inside a `\string#2'}% + \fi} + +\def \closeifinblock #1#2{% {\block}{\endblock} + \if \inblockp{#1}#2\fi} + +% Block Stack +% ----- ----- + + +\setlist \zblockstack = {} +\setlist \zlinestack = {} + +\def \zpushblock #1{% + \push{#1}{\zblockstack}% + \edef \znext {\noexpand\push{\the\inputlineno}}% + \znext{\zlinestack}} + +\def \zpopblock #1{% + \pop{\zblk}{\zblockstack}% + \pop{\zline}{\zlinestack}% + \stringeql{\znext}{\zblk}{#1}% + \if \notp{\znext}% + \error{blkinvnest}{The `\string\end#1' command does not match the + `\zblk' block that was started on line \zline}% + \fi} + +\def \zemptyblockstackp {\emptylistp{\zblockstack}} + +% Block Variants +% ----- -------- + + +\def \definevariant #1#2#3{% {\block}{\style}{\modifier0,\modifier1,...} + \if \emptyargp{#3}% + \error{varmod}{Between 1 and 8 modifier commands must be specified}% + \fi + \withname\definecount{#2variant}{0}% + \withname\xdef{#1varinit}{\name{#1varinit}\name{#2variant}=0}% + {\tcounta = 0 + \zdefvarpre #2#3,\zmark + \if \gtrp{\tcounta}{8}% + \error{varmod}{Between 1 and 8 modifier commands must be specified}% + \fi + \ztoksa = \expandaftertwice{\name{\zvarcase\lcromannumeral\tcounta}}% + \edef \znext {\global\let \name{#2varcase}=\the\ztoksa}% + \znext}} + +\def \zdefvarpre #1#2,#3\zmark{% \style\modifier,\modifier,...,\zmark + \xdef #2{\noexpand\variant{\name{#1variant}=\the\tcounta}}% + \increment \tcounta + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#3}}\zdefvarpre #1#3\zmark \fi} + +\gdef \zvariant {} % Holds \stylevariant assignments. + +\def \variant #1{% {\stylevariant assignment} + {\ztoksa = \expandafter{\zvariant}% + \ztoksb = {#1}% + \xdef \zvariant {\the\ztoksa \the\ztoksb}}% + \ignorespaces} + +\def \zprocessvariant #1{% {\block} + \name{#1varinit}% + \zvariant \relax % \relax terminates numbers and such. + \gdef \zvariant {}} + +\def \varcase #1{% \style + \name{#1varcase}#1} + +\long\def \zvarcasei #1#2{% \style {var1 code} + \ifcase \name{#1variant}#2\else\zbadvar\fi\relax} +\long\def \zvarcaseii #1#2#3{% \style {var1 code}{var2 code} + \ifcase \name{#1variant}#2\or#3\else\zbadvar\fi\relax} +\long\def \zvarcaseiii #1#2#3#4{% + \ifcase \name{#1variant}#2\or#3\or#4\else\zbadvar\fi\relax} +\long\def \zvarcaseiv #1#2#3#4#5{% + \ifcase \name{#1variant}#2\or#3\or#4\or#5\else\zbadvar\fi\relax} +\long\def \zvarcasev #1#2#3#4#5#6{% + \ifcase \name{#1variant}#2\or#3\or#4\or#5\or#6\else\zbadvar\fi\relax} +\long\def \zvarcasevi #1#2#3#4#5#6#7{% + \ifcase \name{#1variant}#2\or#3\or#4\or#5\or#6\or#7\else\zbadvar\fi\relax} +\long\def \zvarcasevii #1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% + \ifcase \name{#1variant}#2\or#3\or#4\or#5\or#6\or#7\or#8\else\zbadvar\fi\relax} +\long\def \zvarcaseviii #1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8#9{% + \ifcase\name{#1variant}#2\or#3\or#4\or#5\or#6\or#7\or#8\or#9\else\zbadvar\fi\relax} + +\def \setvariant #1{% \modifier + #1% + \zvariant \relax + \gdef \zvariant {}} + +\def \zbadvar {% + \zzerror{Invalid value for variant}} + +% Block Options +% ----- ------- + + +\gdef \zwith {} % Holds \with parameters. + + +%~ The |\with| modifier can be used to modify specific design +%~ parameters for the following block. It only makes sense +%~ preceding block commands. Sometimes it is used with parameters +%~ that are specifically intended for |\with|: +%~ \with{\itemnumber=4} \list{number} +%~ Other times it is used with a parameter that needs to be +%~ changed for one particular block. +%~ \with{\advance\belowskip by -8pt} \float{figure} +%~ Again, be careful to use |\with| only on block commands. + +\long\def \with #1{% {parameter-assignments} %^modifier + {\ztoksa = \expandafter{\zwith}% + \ztoksb = {#1}% + \xdef \zwith {\the\ztoksa \the\ztoksb}}% + \ignorespaces} + +\def \zprocesswith {% + \zwith \relax % \relax terminates numbers and such. + \gdef \zwith {}} + +%~ This block modifier forces a page break above the block. + +\def \breakabove {% %^modifier + \with{\abovepenalty=\breakalways}} + +%~ This block modifier forces a page break below the block. + +\def \breakbelow {% %^modifier + \with{\belowpenalty=\breakalways}} + +% Common Design Parameters +% ------ ------ ---------- + + +% These design parameters are used by a variety of ZZTeX's blocks, so +% they are defined here. + +% Integer parameters: + +\definecount{\abovepenalty}{0} % Penalty above block. +\definecount{\authorlevel}{0} % Author ToC entry level. +\definecount{\belowpenalty}{0} % Penalty below block. +\definecount{\continue}{0} % Block is continued (bit 0) and/or continuation (bit 1). +\definecount{\difficulty}{0} % Level of difficulty of the block. + +% Flag parameters: + +\setflag \allowbreaks = \false % Allow page breaks in block? +\setflag \allowintoc = \false % Allow section in ToC? + +% Dimension parameters: + +\definedimen{\height}{0pt} % Height of text. +\definedimen{\ruleshift}{0pt} % Horizontal shift for rule. +\definedimen{\ruleheight}{0pt} % Height (thickness) of rule. +\definedimen{\rulewidth}{0pt} % Width of rule. +\definedimen{\topadjust}{\mindimen} % Adjustment for head at top of page. +\definedimen{\vshift}{0pt} % Vertical shift. +\definedimen{\width}{0pt} % Width of text. + +% Skip (glue) parameters: + +\defineskip{\aboveskip}{0pt} % Base/base skip above block. +\defineskip{\belowskip}{0pt} % Base/base skip below block. +\defineskip{\columngutter}{0pt} % Width of gutter between columns. +\defineskip{\interrowskip}{0pt} % Extra space between rows. +\defineskip{\leftindent}{0pt} % Left indentation glue. +\defineskip{\numbersink}{0pt} % Sinkage to section number, or +\defineskip{\numberskip}{0pt} % Space b/b to section number. +\defineskip{\parhang}{0pt} % Hanging indent for paragraph. +\defineskip{\rightindent}{0pt} % Right indentation glue. +\defineskip{\ruleskip}{0pt} % Vskip for rule. +\defineskip{\textsink}{0pt} % Vsink for text. +\defineskip{\textskip}{0pt} % Base/base skip for text. +\defineskip{\titlesink}{0pt} % Sinkage to section title, or +\defineskip{\titleskip}{0pt} % Space b/b to section title. + +% Token list parameters: + +\definetoks{\authortext} % Part/chapter author text. +\definetoks{\bodyfont} % Font for body of block. +\definetoks{\divisions} % List of division names. +\definetoks{\numberfont} % Font for block number. +\definetoks{\numberwordfont} % Font for block word like "chapter". +\definetoks{\openertext} % Part/chapter opener text. +\definetoks{\position} % Position of the block. +\definetoks{\resetnumber} % List of sequence numbers to reset. +\definetoks{\rulecolor} % Color of a rule. +\definetoks{\runners} % Running head/foot macros. +\definetoks{\style} % Heading style. +\definetoks{\textcolor} % Color of text. +\definetoks{\titlefont} % Font for title. + +% Macro parameters: + +\def \numberformat #1{} % {code} %~ Formatter for block number. +\def \paging {} % {code} %~ Page control commands. +\def \providemark #1{} % {code} %~ Provide marks for the block. +\def \titleformat {} % {code} %~ Formatter for title. + +% The \continue Parameter +% --- --------- --------- + + +% The \continue parameter is set as follows: +% 0: neither continued nor continuation +% 1: continued +% 2: continuation +% 3: both continuation and continued + + +\def \continuedp {\oddp{\continue}} + +\def \continuationp {\gtrp{\continue}{1}} + +\def \zsetcontinue {% + \if \andp{\zerop{\continue}}{\continuation}% + \continue = 2\relax + \fi} + +% Break Element +% ----- ------- + + +\long\def \breakelement #1{% + \global\setflag \zinpar = {\hmodep}% + \if \zinpar \flushendpar \fi + #1% + \if \zinpar \noindent \ignorespaces \fi}
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzcmmath.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzcmmath.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a7c3f9f24bb --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzcmmath.tex @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: Computer Modern math font support +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +% Not really much to do. + +\setstyleskewchar{\mit}{"7F} +\setstyleskewchar{\msy}{"30} + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzcomenc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzcomenc.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4fecdcdfebe --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzcomenc.tex @@ -0,0 +1,153 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: Redefinitions for Common Encoding +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +% Redefine accents. + +\def \"#1{{\accent 8 #1}} %~ Umlaut accent. %^accent + +\def \.#1{{\accent 11 #1}} %~ Dot accent. %^accent + +\def \H #1{{\accent 12 #1}} %~ Long Hungarian umlaut accent. %^accent + +\def \^#1{{\accent 7 #1}} %~ Circumflex accent. %^accent + +\def \g #1{% %~ Ogonek accent. %^accent + \setbox \zboxa = \hbox{#1}% + \if \dimeqlp{\ht\zboxa}{1ex}% + \accent 14 #1% + \else + {\ooalign{\hidewidth \char 14 \hidewidth \cr + \unhbox \zboxa}}% + \fi} + +\def \~#1{{\accent 15 #1}} %~ Tilde accent. %^accent + + +% Redefine standard ASCII characters. + +\def \udquote {% %~ Undirected double quote. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \char "22\relax} + +\def \dollar {% %~ Dollar sign. %^named_char + \zprehyph{\dollarhyph}% + \char "24\relax + \zposthyph{\dollarhyph}} + +\let \$ = \dollar + +\def \less {% %~ Less-than sign. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \char "3C\relax} + +\let \< = \relax + +\def \greater {% %~ Greater-than sign. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \char "3E\relax} + +\let \> = \relax + +\def \backslash {% %~ Backslash. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \if \mathmodep + \zmbackslash + \else + \char "5C\relax + \fi} + +\let \\ = \backslash + +\def \underscore {% %~ Underscore. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \zprehyph{\underscorehyph}% + \char "5F\relax + \zposthyph{\underscorehyph}} + +\let \_ = \underscore + +\def \lbrace {% %~ Left brace. %^named_char + \relax + \if \mathmodep + \zmlbrace + \else + \char "7B\relax + \fi} + +\let \{ = \lbrace + +\def \verticalbar {% %~ Vertical bar. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \char "7C\relax} + +\def \rbrace {% %~ Right brace. %^named_char + \relax + \if \mathmodep + \zmrbrace + \else + \char "7D\relax + \fi} + +\let \} = \rbrace + + +% Define additional special characters. + +\def \specialchar #1#2{% {text-char}{math-char} + \ensurepar + \if \mathmodep + \if \emptyargp{#2}% + \error{scinmath}{Cannot use that special character in math mode}% + \else + #2\relax + \fi + \else + #1\relax + \fi} + +% Decided not to make these two characters pseudo-ligatures. + +\def \exclamdown {\specialchar{\char 142}{}} %~ Upside-down exclamation. +\def \questiondown {\specialchar{\char 143}{}} %~ Upside-down question mark. + +\def \bullet {\specialchar{\char 150}{\zmbullet}} %~ Bullet. +\def \cent {\specialchar{\char 151}{}} %~ Cent sign. +\let \cents = \cent +\def \copyright {\specialchar{\char 152}{}} %~ Copyright symbol. +\def \currency {\specialchar{\char 153}{}} %~ Currency symbol. +\def \dagger {\specialchar{\char 154}{\zmdagger}} %~ Dagger. +\def \ddagger {\specialchar{\char 155}{\zmddagger}}%~ Double dagger. +\def \degree {\specialchar{\char 156}{^\circ}} %~ Degree sign. +\let \degrees = \degree +\def \Edh {\specialchar{\char 157}{}} %~ Uppercase Edh. +\def \edh {\specialchar{\char 158}{}} %~ Lowercase edh. +\def \euro {\specialchar{\char 159}{}} %~ Euro symbol. +\def \florin {\specialchar{\char 160}{}} %~ Florin. +\def \lguill {\specialchar{\char 161}{}} %~ Left guillemot. +\def \rguill {\specialchar{\char 162}{}} %~ Right guillemot. +\def \L {\specialchar{\char 163}{}} %~ Uppercase Polish L. +\def \l {\specialchar{\char 164}{}} %~ Lowercase Polish l. +\def \minus {\specialchar{\char 165}{}} %~ Minus sign. +\def \P {\specialchar{\char 166}{}} %~ Paragraph symbol (pilcrow). +\def \perthousand {\specialchar{\char 167}{}} %~ Per thousand symbol. +\def \usquote {\specialchar{\char 168}{}} %~ Undirected single quote. +\def \registered {\specialchar{$^\roman{\char 169}$}{}} %~ Registered symbol. +\def \S {\specialchar{\char 170}{}} %~ Section sign. +\def \SS {\specialchar{\char 170\kern -.1em\char 170}{}} %~ Double section sign. +\def \sterling {\specialchar{\char 171}{}} %~ Pound sterling symbol. +\def \Thorn {\specialchar{\char 172}{}} %~ Uppercase Thorn. +\def \thorn {\specialchar{\char 173}{}} %~ Lowercase thorn. +\def \trademark {\specialchar{$^\roman{\char 174}$}{}} %~ Trademark symbol. +\def \yen {\specialchar{\char 175}{}} %~ Yen symbol. + +% Redefine a few math things. + +\definemathchar{\zmdagger}{\classbinop}{\rmfam}{9A} +\definemathchar{\zmddagger}{\classbinop}{\rmfam}{9B} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzdiv.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzdiv.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..509fd4910c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzdiv.tex @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Division Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This module contains the macros to support divisions, which +% allow a book to be processed in pieces. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 24 September 1990 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Divisions +% --------- + + +\def \zdivext {tex} + +\definetoks{\divisionname} % Name of current division. +\definetoks{\zdivreq} % Divisions requested with \setdivisions. +\zdivreq = {\all} +\definetoks{\zdivset} % Divisions set. +\setlist \zdivset = {} + + +%~ This command is used in the book's root file to specify +%~ the list of divisions that should be processed by ZzTeX. +%~ All other divisions are not processed. If the command +%~ does not appear in the root file, all divisions are processed. + +\def \setdivisions #1{% {division,...} + \if \emptyargp{#1}% + \warning{nodivs}{The \noexpand\setdivisions command does not specify any divisions} + \else + \global\zdivreq = {#1}% + \fi} + +%~ This command is used in the book's root file to specify the +%~ name of a book division file (e.g., |chap01|, |appa|). The order +%~ of these commands determines the order of the divisions. + +\def \division #1{% {division} + \global\divisionname = {#1}% + \edef \znext {\noexpand\inclusionlist\noexpand\zset{#1}{\the\zdivreq}}% + \znext + \if \zset + \remark{Starting division `\the\divisionname'.}% + \push{#1}{\zdivset}% + \freshpage{\short\floats\any}% + \setcolumnnumber{1}% + \zxdivinit{#1}{\true}% + \zindexdivinit{#1}% + \zmndivinit + \zpndivinit + \zframedivinit + \zmrdivinit + \zfltdivinit + \include{#1.\zdivext}% + \endgraf + \freshpage{\short\floats\any}% + \zortahdivfinal + \zindexdivfinal + \zxdivfinal{#1}% + \else + \zxdivinit{#1}{\false}% + {\globaldefs = 1 \name{\=zS:#1}}% % Invoke snapshot. + \fi + \global\divisionname = \expandafter{\jobname}} + +% This macro is invoked at the end of the document. + +\def \zdivmsg {% + \edef \znext {\the\zdivreq}% + \edef \znextfirst {\expandafter\zdivmsga \znext\zmark}% + \if \tokeqlp{\znext}{\zallname}% + \remark{The entire book was processed.}% + \else\if \tokeqlp{\znextfirst}{\zallbutname}% + \relax + \else + \commalist{\zreqlist}{\the\zdivreq}% + \maplist{\zdivmsgb{##1}}{\zreqlist}% + \fi\fi} + +\def \zdivmsga #1#2\zmark{#1} + +\def \zdivmsgb #1{% + \member{\zexists}{#1}{\zdivset}% + \if \notp{\zexists}% + \warning{divnotexist}{The requested division `#1' does not exist}% + \fi} + +% Division Snapshots +% -------- --------- + + +\setlist \zsnaplist = {} % List of registers to be snapshot. + + +\def \declaresnapitem #1{% {\name} + \append{#1}{\zsnaplist}} + + +\def \ztakesnap {% + \let \zmodesave = \xrefmode + \let \xrefmode = \xrefsnapmode + \def \znext {}% + \maplist{\zsnapone{##1}}{\zsnaplist}% + \ztoksa = \expandafter{\znext}% + \edef \znext {\noexpand\xref{snap}{\noexpand\folio}{}% + {\the\ztoksa}{\the\divisionname}}% + \znext + \let \xrefmode = \zmodesave} + +\def \zsnapone #1{% {\register} + \ztoksa = \expandafter{\znext}% + \edef \znext {\the\ztoksa \noexpand#1\the#1}} + + +% Store division snapshot information in a special name in the tag namespace. + +\def \xrefsnap #1#2#3#4{% {}{}{code}{division} + \ifnum \xrefmode=\xrefloadtagmode + \if \undefinedp{\=zS:#4}\withname{\gdef}{\=zS:#4}{}\fi + \withname\xdef{\=zS:#4}{\name{\=zS:#4}#3}% + \fi}
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzdoc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzdoc.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..072436a43ad --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzdoc.tex @@ -0,0 +1,500 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Document Facilities +% +% Synopsis: +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 9 September 1989 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Loading Design Files +% ------- ------ ----- + + +\def \bookauthor {} +\def \booktitle {} +\def \bookpublisher {} +\def \bookISBN {} + + +\def \loaddesign #1{% {file-list} + \zdtinit + \zloadinifile + \global\divisionname = \expandafter{\jobname}% + \setfoliostyle{\arabic}% % Initialize various options that + \setsentencespacing{\false}% $ might be set in the design file. + \setmathspaces{4mu plus .4mu minus .75mu} + {4mu plus .4mu minus .75mu} + {4mu plus .4mu minus .75mu}% + \protectcitecommands + \commalist{\zdeslist}{#1}% + \maplist{\zinputdes{##1}}{\zdeslist}% + \textsize\rm % In case \documentdesign resets + % \normallineskip[limit]. + \if \DVIWindorules \setflag \DVIWindoinuse = \true \fi %%% Temporary. + \if \newbiblio \input zzbiblio \else \input zzbibtex \fi + \if \rangep{\newmath}{1}{2}\input zznewmath\relax \fi + \if \newrunners \input zzrunner\relax \fi + \if \zerop{\tabularversion}% + \tabularversion = \if \newtabular 2\else 1\fi\relax + \fi + \if \neqlp{\tabularversion}{3}\input zztabularv\the\tabularversion\relax \fi + \if \newtitleadjustment \input zzttladj\relax \fi} + +\def \zinputdes #1{% {design-file} + \checkfile{\znext}{#1.zzd}% + \if \znext + \input #1.zzd\relax + \else + \error{nodesfile}{The design file `#1.zzd' is missing} + \zend + \fi + \if \orp{\hmodep}{\posp{\pagetotal}} + \error{desjunk} + {The design file `#1.zzd' has some spurious junk in it} + \fi + \textsize\rm % So \documentdesign macro can use it. + \documentdesign} + +\def \announcedesign #1{% {title} + \remark{Loading design file `#1'._}} + +\def \bookdata #1#2#3#4{% {author}{title}{publisher}{ISBN} + \gdef \bookauthor {#1}% + \gdef \booktitle {#2}% + \gdef \bookpublisher {#3}% + \gdef \bookISBN {#4}} + +%~ Deprecated in favor of |\bookdata|. + +\def \bookinfo #1#2#3{% {author}{title}{publisher} + \gdef \bookauthor {#1}% + \gdef \booktitle {#2}% + \gdef \bookpublisher {#3}} + +\def \commonencoding {% + \input zzcomenc\relax + \global\setflag \zcommonencoding = \true} + +\def \protectcitecommands {% + \let \cite = \citeleterror + \let \citeauthr = \citeleterror + \let \citeyear = \citeleterror + \let \nocite = \citeleterror} + +\def \citeleterror {% + \error{citelet}{Cannot use \noexpand\let to define \noexpand\cite commands}} + +% Design Alternatives +% ------ ------------ + + +% Design alternatives are deprecated. + +\def \designalternative #1#2{% {\name}{choice} + \withname\gdef{\=zA:\string#1}{#2}} + +\def \definedesignalternative #1#2#3{% {\name}{required?}{choice1,...} + \definecount{#1}{-1}% + \if \undefinedp{\=zA:\string#1}% + \if #2% + \error{altreq}{The design alternative `\string#1' must be specified}% + \else + \zdefalt{#1}#3,\zmark + \fi + \fi + \commalist{\zaltlist}{#3}% + \tcounta = -1\relax + \maplist{\zcompalt{#1}{##1}}{\zaltlist}% + \if \negp{#1}% + \error{altinv}{The design alternative `\string#1' is invalid}% + \fi} + +\def \zdefalt #1#2,#3\zmark{% {\name}choice1,...\zmark + \designalternative{#1}{#2}} + +\def \zcompalt #1#2{% {\name}{choice} + \increment \tcounta + \stringeql{\znext}{\name{\=zA:\string#1}}{#2}% + \if \znext \global#1 = \tcounta \fi \relax} + +\let \altcase = \ifcase + +% Document Parameters +% -------- ---------- + + +% The following PDF document information options are available. + +\chardef \PDFinfodefault = 0 +\chardef \PDFinfofull = 1 +\chardef \PDFinfocomp = 2 +\chardef \PDFinfonone = 3 + + +% Integer parameters: + +\adjdemerits = 10000 % Adjacent incompatible lines. +\binoppenalty = 700 % Line break after binary operator. +%\brokenpenalty = 0 % See \even and \oddbrokenpenalty. +\clubpenalty = 500 % Club line at bottom of page. +\defaulthyphenchar = `\- % Default hyphen character. +\defaultskewchar = -1 % Default skew character. +\delimiterfactor = 941 % Math delimiter size factor. +\displaywidowpenalty = 500 % Widow line above math display. +\definecount{\dollarhyph}{0} % 0: no hyphenation after dollar signs; + % 1: hyphenate after, but nowhere else; + % 2: hyphenate after and other places. +\doublehyphendemerits = 80000 % Consecutive hyphenated lines. +\errorcontextlines = 8 % Maximum error context line pairs. +\definecount{\evenbrokenpenalty}{3000} % Column breaks after hyphenated + % line, but on same spread. +\exhyphenpenalty = 0 % Line break after explicit hyphen. +\finalhyphendemerits = 10000 % Penultimate hyphenated line. +\hbadness = 1000 % Above which bad hboxes are shown. +\hyphenpenalty = 50 % Line break after discretionary hyphen. +\interlinepenalty = 0 % Between lines of a paragraph. +\language = 0 % Current set of hyphenation rules. +\lefthyphenmin = 2 % Shortest fragment at beginning of + % hyphenated word. +\linepenalty = 10 % Increment at each line break. +\definecount{\lineslong}{0} % Number of lines page can go long. +\definecount{\linesperpage}{0} % Number of lines per page. +\definecount{\linesshort}{0} % Number of lines page can go short. +\definecount{\maxbottomcolumnfloats}{1} % Floats at column bottom. +\definecount{\maxbottompagefloats}{1} % Floats at page bottom. +\definecount{\maxtopcolumnfloats}{1} % Floats at column top. +\definecount{\maxtoppagefloats}{1} % Floats at page top. +\definecount{\mintextpercent}{10} % Percent of page that must have text. +\newlinechar = -1 % Newline character for \write. +\definecount{\newmath}{0} % Revision level of math---DEPRECATED. +\definecount{\oddbrokenpenalty}{10000} % Spread breaks after + % hyphenated line. +\definecount{\PDFinfo}{\PDFinfodefault} % Include document info in final PDF file. +\pretolerance = 400 % Badness tolerated before hyphenation. +\relpenalty = 500 % Line break after relation operator. +\righthyphenmin = 3 % Shortest fragment at end of hypenated word. +\definecount{\shrinkpercent}{10} % Percentage shrink is of nominal. +\definecount{\stretchpercent}{25} % Percentage of the maximum stretch. +\definecount{\tabularversion}{0} % Version of tabular facility. +\tolerance = \pretolerance % Badness tolerated after hyphenation. +\tracinglostchars = 1 % Positive to trace lost characters. +\definecount{\tracingpagemakeup}{0} % Positive to trace page makeup. +\tracingstats = 1 % Positive to trace memory statistics. +\uchyph = 1 % Positive to hyphenate Capitalized words. +\definecount{\underscorehyph}{1} % See \dollarhyph. +\vbadness = 2000 % Above which bad vboxes are shown. +\widowpenalty = 10000 % Widow line at top of page. +\definecount{\xrefcites}{0} % Cross-reference \cite's: + % 0: no + % 1: simple xref entry + % 2: custom xref entry + +% Flag Parameters: + +\setflag \allowcolor = \true % Allow color specials? +\setflag \allowreftitle = \false % Allow use of \reftitle? +\setflag \baselinetoprules = \true % Rules at page top sit on baseline? +\setflag \DVIWindoinuse = \false % Generate DVIWindo-specific goodies? +\setflag \DVIWindorules = \false % Display page makeup rules? [deprecated] +\setflag \forceepsbb = \false % Force reading of EPS bounding box? +\setflag \indexcites = \false % \cite generates indexing command? +\setflag \newbiblio = \false % Use new biblio facility? +\setflag \newdots = \false % Use new \xdots commands? +\setflag \newrunners = \false % Use new runners scheme? +\setflag \newtabular = \false % Use new tabular module? [deprecated] +\setflag \newtitleadjustment = \false % Use new title adjustment scheme? +\setflag \PDFhyperlinks = \false % Generate PDF hyperlinks? +\setflag \raggedbottom = \false % Ragged-bottom pages? +\setflag \risingbottomfloats = \false % Bottom floats rise up on page? +\setflag \risingfootnotes = \false % Footnotes rise up on page? +\setflag \topdeltaadjustment = \false % Use \topdelta? +\setflag \zcommonencoding = \false % Set with \commonencoding command. + +% Dimension Parameters: + +\boxmaxdepth = \maxdimen % Maximum depth of explicit vboxes. +\delimitershortfall = 4pt % Maximum math delimiter shortfall. +\emergencystretch = 4pt % Emergency stretchability of each line. +\definedimen{\evenbleedshift}{0pt} % Bleed shift for versos. +\definedimen{\eveninnermargin}{0pt} % Inner margin (gutter) for versos. +\definedimen{\evenlefttextmargin}{0pt} % Left text margin for versos. +\definedimen{\evenoutermargin}{0pt} % Outer margin for versos. +\definedimen{\evenrighttextmargin}{0pt} % Right text margin for versos. +\definedimen{\footerheight}{0pt} % Height of footer box. +\definedimen{\headerheight}{0pt} % Height of running head. +\definedimen{\headmargin}{0in} % Head (top) margin. +\hfuzz = 0.33pt % Overrun before overfull hbox messages. +\hoffset = 0pt % Overall horizontal offset. +\zremovePlaindef \jot +\definedimen{\jot}{3pt} % Increment for opening up math displays. +\lineskiplimit = 0pt % Threshold where \lineskip is used + % instead of \baselineskip. +\let \linewidth = \hsize % Alternate name for \hsize. +\maxdepth = 4pt % Maximum depth of boxes on main pages. +\zremovePlaindef \normallineskiplimit +\definedimen{\normallineskiplimit}{0pt} % Normal line skip limit. +\nulldelimiterspace = 1.2pt % Width of a null delimiter. +\definedimen{\oddbleedshift}{0pt} % Bleed shift for rectos. +\definedimen{\oddinnermargin}{0pt} % Inner margin (gutter) for rectos. +\definedimen{\oddlefttextmargin}{0pt} % Left text margin for rectos. +\definedimen{\oddoutermargin}{0pt} % Outer margin for rectos. +\definedimen{\oddrighttextmargin}{0pt} % Right text margin for rectos. +\overfullrule = 6pt % Width of rule appended to overfull boxes. +\parindent = 0pt % Width of paragraph indent. +\definedimen{\parrag}{0pt} % Raggedness of paragraph lines. +\scriptspace = .25pt % Extra space after a sub/superscript. +\splitmaxdepth = \maxdimen % Maximum depth of boxes on split pages. +\definedimen{\standardbleed}{.125in} % Standard bleed required by press. +\definedimen{\standardindent}{0pt} % Standard indentation amount. +\definedimen{\textareaheight}{\mindimen}% Height of text area. +\definedimen{\textmeasure}{0pc} % Width of text area. +\let \textareawidth = \textmeasure +\definedimen{\topdelta}{0pt} % \topskip - height(first line). +\definedimen{\trimheight}{0in} % Trimmed paper height. +\definedimen{\trimwidth}{0in} % Trimmed paper width. +\definedimen{\trimplusbleedheight}{0in} % Trim plus bleed top and bottom. +\definedimen{\trimplusbleedwidth}{0in} % Trim plus bleed both sides. +\definedimen{\typeareaheight}{\mindimen}% Height of type area. +\definedimen{\typeareawidth}{0pt} % Width of type area. +\vfuzz = 0.5pt % Overrun before overfull vbox messages. +\voffset = 0pt % Overall vertical offset. + +% Skip (glue) Parameters: + +\leftskip = 0pt % At left end of paragraph lines. +\lineskip = 0pt % When \baselineskip isn't possible. +\zremovePlaindef \normalbaselineskip +\defineskip{\normalbaselineskip}{0pt} % Normal baseline distance. +\zremovePlaindef \normallineskip +\defineskip{\normallineskip}{0pt} % Normal line skip limit. +\parfillskip = 0pt plus 1fil % Additional \rightskip at paragraph end. +\parskip = 0pt % Above paragraphs. +\rightskip = 0pt % At right end of lines. +\spaceskip = 0pt % Between words (if nonzero). +\splittopskip = 10pt % At top of split pages. +\defineskip{\standardskip}{0pt} % Standard skip above/below elements. +\topskip = \mindimen % At top of main pages. +\xspaceskip = 0pt % Between sentences (if nonzero). + +% Muskip (mu glue) Parameters: + +\definemuskip{\fracbarhang}{0mu} % Fraction bar overhang. +\thinmuskip = 0mu % Math space after punctuation. +\medmuskip = 0mu % Math space around binary operators. +\thickmuskip = 0mu % Math space around relational operators. + +% Token list parameters: + +\definetoks{\annotationfont} % Font for annotations (e.g., proof identification). +\annotationfont = {cmssi10 at 7pt} +\definetoks{\baselinemultiplier}% Multiplier for baselines. +\baselinemultiplier = {1} +\definetoks{\decimalpoint} % Decimal point character. +\decimalpoint = {.} +\definetoks{\PDFbuttoncolor} % Color of hyperlinked text. +\definetoks{\matrixspread} % Baseline multiplier for matrices. +\matrixspread = {1.0} + +% The following parameters are fixed and hidden from the user. + +\mathsurround = 0pt % Space around a math formula in text. + +% Parameter Calculation +% --------- ----------- + + +\def \calculatetextareaheight #1{% {lines} + \relax + \if \dimnegp{\topskip}% + \error{misstopskip}{The value of \string\topskip must be set}% + \fi + {\global\linesperpage = #1\relax + \tcounta = #1\relax + \decrement \tcounta + \textareaheight = \the\tcounta\baselineskip + \global\advance \textareaheight by \topskip + \measurecapheight{\topdelta}% + \measureascenderheight{\tdimena}% + \if \dimgtrp{\tdimena}{\topdelta}\topdelta = \tdimena \fi + \advance \topdelta by -\topskip + \global\negate \topdelta}} + +\def \calculatetypeareaheight #1#2{% {head-height}{head-b/b} + \relax + \if \dimnegp{\textareaheight}% + \error{misstah}{The value of \string\textareaheight must be set}% + \fi + {\typeareaheight = \textareaheight + \advance \typeareaheight by -\topskip + \advance \typeareaheight by #1\relax + \advance \typeareaheight by #2\relax + \global\advance \typeareaheight by \footerheight + \headerheight = #1\relax + \advance \headerheight by #2\relax + \global\advance \headerheight by -\topskip}} + +\def \calculateoffsets #1#2{% {sheet-width}{sheet-height} + \relax + \if \andp{\dimposp{\trimwidth}}{\dimposp{\trimheight}}% + \hoffset = #1\relax + \advance \hoffset by -\trimwidth + \divide \hoffset by 2 + \advance \hoffset by -1in + \voffset = #2\relax + \advance \voffset by -\trimheight + \divide \voffset by 2 + \advance \voffset by -1in\relax + \else + \error{misstrim}{The values of \string\trimwidth and + \string\trimheight must be set}% + \fi} + +\def \calculatepdfoffsets #1#2#3{% {virtual-width}{virtual-height}{bleeds?} + \relax + \if \andp{\dimposp{\trimwidth}}{\dimposp{\trimheight}}% + \hoffset = -1in + \if #3\advance \hoffset by \standardbleed \fi + \calculate \voffset = {#2,-,\trimheight,-,1in}% + \if #3\advance \voffset by -\standardbleed \fi + \else + \error{misstrim}{The values of \string\trimwidth and + \string\trimheight must be set}% + \fi} + +\def \setskip #1=#2#3#4{% \parameter = {nominal}{max-stretch}{[shrink]} + \tdimena = #2\relax + \calculate \tdimenb = {#3,P,\stretchpercent}% + \if \emptyargp{#4}% + \calculate \tdimenc = {\tdimena,P,\shrinkpercent}% + \else + \tdimenc = #4\relax + \fi + #1 = \the\tdimena plus \the\tdimenb minus \the\tdimenc\relax} + +\def \fromtrim #1{% \setskip or \register + \if \tokeqlp{#1}{\setskip}% + \let \znext = \zfromtrima + \else + \def \zfromtrimreg {#1}% + \let \znext = \zfromtrimb + \fi + \znext} + +\def \zfromtrima #1=#2#3#4{% + \setskip #1={#2}{#3}{#4}% + \advance #1 by -\headmargin} + +\def \zfromtrimb {% + \afterassignment\zfromtrimc \zfromtrimreg} + +\def \zfromtrimc {% + \advance \zfromtrimreg by -\headmargin} + +% Document Block +% -------- ----- + + +\def \document {% + % There is no point to embedding the entire document in a group. + % \documentdesign was already invoked by \loaddesign. + \zpushblock{document}% + \xdef \znext {% + \noexpand\definefont \noexpand\zannofont{\the\annotationfont}} + \znext + \zfontsummary{\false}% + \zopentfmlist + \zwritePDFinfo + \zpageinit + \zpushvcontext + \setparrag{\parrag}% + \zxrefinit + \zbiblioinit + \zindexinit + \zfloatinit + \setpagecolumns{}{1}{0pt}% + \if \definedp{\documentprolog}\documentprolog \fi} + +\def \enddocument {% + \endgraf + \if \definedp{\documentepilog}\documentepilog \fi + \closeanychapter + \closeanysection + \zpopblock{document}% + \freshpage{\short\floats\any}% + \zindexfinal + \zxreffinal +%%% \zbibfinal + \zmissingartmsg + \ztagsummary + \zpopvcontext + \zlayoutsummary + \zfontsummary{\true}% + \zwritetfmlist + \if \posp{\tracingstats}\zregstats \fi + \zfeaturewarns + \ztodomsg + \zdivmsg + \zproofidfile + \zend} + +\def \zfeaturewarns {% + \messagenl{_}% + \if \zoverlayset + \remark{Overlays are present on each page.}% + \fi + \zproofident} + +\def \zproofident {% + \zproofidentline + \if \emptytoksp{\zproofid}% + \messagenl{| No proof identification.}% + \else + \messagenl{| \the\zproofid\space\space + \number\year/\number\month/\number\day\space + \formattime\space\space\space + \inicompositor}% + \fi + \zproofidentline} + +\def \zproofidentline {% + \messagenl{+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------_}} + +% Write PDF Document Information +% ----- --- -------- ----------- + + +\def \zwritePDFinfo {% + \ifcase \PDFinfo + \relax + \or + \special{PDF: Title \booktitle}% + \special{PDF: Author \bookauthor}% + \special{PDF: Subject}% + \special{PDF: Keywords Publisher: \bookpublisher, + Compositor: \inicompositor}% + \or + \special{PDF: Title}% + \special{PDF: Author}% + \special{PDF: Subject}% + \special{PDF: Keywords Compositor: \inicompositor}% + \or + \special{PDF: Title}% + \special{PDF: Author}% + \special{PDF: Subject}% + \special{PDF: Keywords}% + \fi} + +% Disable \end +% ------- ---- + + +\let \zend = \end + +\def \end {% + \error{noend}{Do not use the TeX \string\end\space command}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzerror.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzerror.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..693451b2c3b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzerror.tex @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Error Handling +% +% Synopsis: +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 13 August 1989 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Remarks & Errors +% ------- - ------ + + +\def \remark #1{% {text} + \messagenl{_ZzTeX: #1_}} + +\def \warning #1#2{% {help-id}{text} + \zsethelp{#1}% + \zerrmsg{warning}{#2}} + +\def \error #1#2{% {help-id}{text} + \zsethelp{#1}% + \zerrmsg{error}{#2}% + \remark{Continuing from an error may cause unpredictable results.}} + +\def \zzerror #1{% {text} + \zerrmsg{internal error}{#1}% + \remark{Continuing from an internal error will cause erroneous results.}} + +\def \zerrmsg #1#2{% {prefix}{text} + {\newlinechar = `\_% + \errmessage{ZzTeX #1: #2}}} + +%%%\def \zerrcontext #1{% +%%% \listtop{\znext}{\zblockstack}% +%%% \writelog{ZzTeX context: #1 \znext\space \the\typesizename +%%% \the\typestyle \the\typeencoding.}} +%%% +%%%\def \context {% +%%% \zerrcontext{???}% +%%% \zend} + +% To-Do Facility +% ----- -------- + + +\definecount{\ztodocount}{0} + + +%~ The |\todo| command accepts a note that is stored in the composite +%~ cross-reference file as a reminder of something that needs to +%~ be done later. ZzExplore can display a list of the outstanding +%~ to-dos. + +\long\def \todo #1{% {note} + \zwritetodo{#1}% + \ztodo #1\zmark + \global\increment \ztodocount} + +\long\def \ztodo #1#2\zmark{% {char1}{rest of message} + \if \codeeqlp{#1}{!}% + {\errorcontextlines = 0 + \def \znext {#2}% + \zerrmsg{to-do}{\expandafter\zdefof \meaning\znext\zmark\space + [\the\divisionname]}}% + \else\if \codeeqlp{#1}{.}% + \def \znext {#2}% + \writelog{ZzTeX to-do: \expandafter\zdefof \meaning\znext\zmark\space + [\the\divisionname]}% + \else\if \codeeqlp{#1}{?}% + \def \znext {#2}% + \messagenl{_ZzTeX to-do: To come: \expandafter\zdefof \meaning\znext\zmark\space + [\the\divisionname]_}% + \if \DVIWindoinuse \colorspecial{ifview color push rgb 1 0 0}\fi + ???% + \if \DVIWindoinuse \colorspecial{ifview color pop}\fi + \else + \def \znext {#1#2}% + \messagenl{_ZzTeX to-do: \expandafter\zdefof \meaning\znext\zmark\space + [\the\divisionname]_}% + \fi\fi\fi} + +% Write a todo entry into the cross-reference file. + +\long\def \zwritetodo #1{% {message} + \zbeginhidewrite + \def \znext {#1}% + \edef \znext {\noexpand\xref{todo}{\noexpand\folio}{} + {\expandafter\zdefof \meaning\znext\zmark} + {\the\divisionname}}% + \znext + \zendhidewrite} + +% There is nothing to do with each entry in the cross-reference file +% when it is loaded. + +\long\def \xreftodo #1#2#3#4{} + +% This macro is invoked at the end of the run. + +\def \ztodomsg {% + \if \posp{\ztodocount}% + \remark{Number of to-do reminders encountered: \the\ztodocount}% + \fi} + + +% Help Text +% ---- ---- + + +\def \zsethelp #1{% + \if \definedp{\=zH:#1}% + \global\errhelp = \expandafterthrice{\name{\=zH:#1}}% + \else + \global\errhelp = {No additional help is available.}% + \fi} + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzfloat.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzfloat.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b6e3e082462 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzfloat.tex @@ -0,0 +1,1164 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Float Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This module contains the float and caption blocks, as well as +% all the code required to support the scheduling of floats. +% +% Notes: The broadside capability was implemented by Richard A. Wells and +% integrated into ZzTeX on 9/7/94. +% +% Author: Richard A. Wells & Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 7 March 1990 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Data Structures +% ---- ---------- + + +\definecount{\zfltcount}{0} +\def \zfloatfreeq {} +\def \zfloatpendq {} + + +\def \zdeffloat #1#2{% {\float}{\float-box} + \definebox{#2}% + \zfreefloat{#1}{#2}% + \global\increment \zfltcount} + +\def \zgetfloat #1{% {\float} + \if \emptydefp{\zfloatfreeq}% + \error{toomanyflt} + {More than `\the\zfltcount' floats remain for page makeup}% + \else + \pop{#1}{\zfloatfreeq}% + \fi} + +\def \zfreefloat #1#2{% {\float}{\float-box} + \gdef #1{\def \zcurfloatbox {#2}}% + \append{#1}{\zfloatfreeq}} + +\zdeffloat{\zflta}{\zfltboxa} +\zdeffloat{\zfltb}{\zfltboxb} +\zdeffloat{\zfltc}{\zfltboxc} +\zdeffloat{\zfltd}{\zfltboxd} +\zdeffloat{\zflte}{\zfltboxe} +\zdeffloat{\zfltf}{\zfltboxf} +\zdeffloat{\zfltg}{\zfltboxg} +\zdeffloat{\zflth}{\zfltboxh} +\zdeffloat{\zflti}{\zfltboxi} +\zdeffloat{\zfltj}{\zfltboxj} +\zdeffloat{\zfltk}{\zfltboxk} +\zdeffloat{\zfltl}{\zfltboxl} +\zdeffloat{\zfltm}{\zfltboxm} +\zdeffloat{\zfltn}{\zfltboxn} +\zdeffloat{\zflto}{\zfltboxo} +\zdeffloat{\zfltp}{\zfltboxp} +\zdeffloat{\zfltq}{\zfltboxq} +\zdeffloat{\zfltr}{\zfltboxr} +\zdeffloat{\zflts}{\zfltboxs} +\zdeffloat{\zfltt}{\zfltboxt} +\zdeffloat{\zfltu}{\zfltboxu} +\zdeffloat{\zfltv}{\zfltboxv} +\zdeffloat{\zfltw}{\zfltboxw} +\zdeffloat{\zfltx}{\zfltboxx} +\zdeffloat{\zflty}{\zfltboxy} +\zdeffloat{\zfltz}{\zfltboxz} + +% There is an insert class for each of the two places where floats +% can go. + +\defineinsert{\ztopcolinsert} % Floats at top of column. +\count\ztopcolinsert = 1000 +\dimen\ztopcolinsert = \maxdimen +\skip\ztopcolinsert = 0pt +\defineinsert{\zbotcolinsert} % Floats at bottom of column. +\count\zbotcolinsert = 1000 +\dimen\zbotcolinsert = \maxdimen +\skip\zbotcolinsert = 0pt + + +% We need a dimension register to capture box depths. + +\definedimen{\zfloatdp}{0pt} + +% Float Types +% ----- ----- + + +\setlist \zfloattypelist = {} + + +\def \definefloattype #1#2#3{% {type}{toc-level}{association} + \if \emptyargp{#3}% + \withname\definecount{\float#1number}{0}% + \withname\declaresnapitem{\float#1number}% + \else + \edef \znext {% + \global\withname\let{\float#1number}=\name{\float#3number}}% + \znext + \fi + \withname\gdef{\zflt#1lvl}{#2}% + \append{#1}{\zfloattypelist}} + + +\def \resetfloatnumbers {% + \maplist{\global\name{\float##1number}=0\relax}{\zfloattypelist}} + + +% Predefined float types (don't forget an index locator for each one). + +\definefloattype{algorithm}{101}{} +\definefloattype{figure}{102}{} +\definefloattype{table}{103}{} +\definefloattype{listing}{104}{} +\definefloattype{sidebar}{105}{} + +% Float Block +% ----- ----- + + +\defineblock{\float}{\endfloat}{\false}{} + +%~block float Type +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above float. +% \def \beginformat {...} % Beginning of float formatter. +% \belowskip = glue % Space b/b below float. +% \def \comptextformat {...} % Composite number text formatter. +% \continue = integer % Continued or continuation. +% \def \endformat {...} % End of float formatter. +% \leftindent = dimen % Horizontal fudge for all floats. +% \pageplacement = {...} % Overriding page placement. +% \position = {...} % Position (see below). +% \runners = {style} % Runners for a page of floats. +% \topfloatfudge = dimen % Vertical fudge for topmost float. +% \width = dimen % Explicit width for float. +%~end + +\definetoks{\pageplacement} +\definedimen{\topfloatfudge}{0pt} + +% These derived parameters are needed here and by \caption. They may +% also be useful to the user. + +\definecount{\floatpage}{0} +\definedimen{\floatshift}{0pt} +\definedimen{\floatwidth}{0pt} + +\definecount{\zdivfltcounter}{0} % Count floats in each division. +\definebox{\zfltbroadbox} + + +% Floats are packaged up in a vbox using \vtop, so that the float box +% has the same height as the first thing inside. This improves the +% chances that a float at the top of a page will be positioned correctly. + +\def \float #1{% {type} + \if \undefinedp{\float#1number}% + \error{undefflt}{Float type `#1' has not been defined}% + \fi + \endgraf + \blockcantbein{\float}{\float}% + \blockcantbein{\float}{\multicolumn}% + \beginblockscope{float}% + \global\increment \floatdepth + \global\increment \zdivfltcounter + \whichpage{\floatpage}{zF:\the\divisionname-\the\zdivfltcounter}% + \def \beginformat {}% %~default soft + \continue = 0 %~default with + \def \comptextformat {}% %~default soft + \setflag \continuation = \false % Deprecated + \def \endformat {}% %~default soft + \leftindent = 0pt %~default soft + \pageplacement = {}% %~default with + \runners = {normal}% %~default soft + \zoldrunners{\normalheader\normalfooter}% + \width = \naturalwidth %~default soft + \processdesign{\float}{#1}% + \zsetcontinue % Handle old \continuation. + \if \notp{\continuationp}\global\withname\increment{\float#1number}\fi + \global\withname\floatnumber{\float#1number}% + \setcomptext{\floatcomptext}% + \def \zcurflttype {#1}% + \edef \zcurfltlvl {\name{\zflt\zcurflttype lvl}}% + \parindent = 0pt + \parrag = 0pt + \parskip = 0pt + \zparsefltpos{\the\position}% + \if \notp{\emptytoksp{\pageplacement}}% + \zparsefltpagepos{\the\pageplacement}% + \fi + \if \zfltposhere + \penalty \breakallowed % Synchronize main list. + \zparsefltpos{\the\position}% % Recalculate global stuff. + \if \notp{\emptytoksp{\pageplacement}} + \zparsefltpagepos{\the\pageplacement}% + \fi + \fi + \zcalcfltparams + \zgetfloat{\zcurfloat}% + \zcurfloat + \global\setbox \zcurfloatbox = \vtop \bgroup + \zpushvcontext + \setindentation{0pt}{0pt}% + \settextwidth{\floatwidth}% + \settaginfo{\the\floatcomptext}{}% % Set tag info without title. + \setsubtagnumber{0}% + \beginformat} + +\def \endfloat {% + \endgraf + \endformat + \global\zfloatdp = \prevdepth + \tagpageonly{\uniquetag{zF}{\the\zdivfltcounter}}% + \zpopvcontext + \egroup % \vtop + \expandafter\xdef \zcurfloat {% + \def \noexpand\zcurfloatid {\zcurflttype\space \the\floatnumber}% + \def \noexpand\zcurfloatbox {\zcurfloatbox}% + \zfloatdp = \the\zfloatdp + \aboveskip = \the\aboveskip + \belowskip = \the\belowskip + \leftindent = \the\leftindent + \position = {\the\position}% + \pageplacement = {\the\pageplacement}% + \runners = {\the\runners}% + \floatshift = \the\floatshift + \topfloatfudge = \the\topfloatfudge}% + \expandafter\append \zcurfloat{\zfloatpendq}% + \zschedulefloats{\znext}{\false}{\false}% + \if \gtrp{\znext}{99}% + \zfltpage{\zpenfloatpage}% + \fi + \global\decrement \floatdepth + \endblockscope{float}} + +%~ This |\float| modifier forces an alone float. + +\def \alonefloat {% %^modifier + \with{\pageplacement={\alone}}} + +%~ This |\float| modifier forces a bottom float. + +\def \bottomfloat {% %^modifier + \with{\pageplacement={\bottom}}} + +%~ This |\float| modifier forces a broadside float. + +\def \broadsidefloat {% %^modifier + \with{\pageplacement={\broadside}}} + +%~ This |\float| modifier forces a here float. + +\def \herefloat {% %^modifier + \with{\pageplacement={\here}}} + +%~ This |\float| modifier forces a separate float. + +\def \separatefloat {% %^modifier + \with{\pageplacement={\separate}}} + +%~ This |\float| modifier allows the float to occupy the +%~ running head area. Any running head is deleted. + +\def \userharea {% %^modifier + \with{\runners={blind}% + \advance \topfloatfudge by -\headerheight}} + +\def \adjusttopfloatfudge #1{% + \global\advance \topfloatfudge by #1\relax} + +\def \piggybackfloat {% + \edef \znext {\noexpand\global\noexpand\increment + \name{\float\zcurflttype number}}% + \znext + \edef \znext {\floatnumber = \name{\float\zcurflttype number}}% + \znext} + +% Controlling Floats +% ----------- ------ + + +% This macro is invoked at the beginning of each division. + +\def \zfltdivinit {% + \global\zdivfltcounter = 0\relax} + + +\setflag \zschedflts = \true + +\def \deferfloats #1{% {boolean} + \global\setflag \zschedflts = {\notp{#1}}} + + +% Scheduling Tools +% ---------- ----- + + +% These counters keep track of the number of floats scheduled for the +% current page. + +\definecount{\ztopcolfloats}{0} % Number of top column floats. +\definecount{\zbotcolfloats}{0} % Number of bottom column floats. +\definecount{\zfloatsinserted}{0} % Total number of floats. +\definetoks{\zfltrunners} % Runners for first float on page. + +% This macro initializes for handling floats on a new page. + +\def \zfloatinit {% + \global\setflag \zschedflts = \true + \global\ztopcolfloats = 0 + \global\zbotcolfloats = 0 + \zfltrunners = {}} + +% These macros simply hide some of the details to make the \zsched* +% macros easier to read. + +\def \ztallytopfloat {% + \if \orp{\notp{\zfltposmargonly}}{\posp{\ztopcolfloats}}% + \global\increment \ztopcolfloats + \fi} + +\def \zforcenewpage{% + \global\zfloatsinserted = 101\relax} + +\let \zquitscheding = \exitmaplist + +\def \zsetfloattall{% + \zmakefloatalone + \setflag \zfloattall = \true + \tracepagemakeup{Float is too tall for column; positioning `alone'.}} + +\def \zmakefloatalone{% + \setflag \zfltposalone = \true + \setflag \zfltposbottom = \false + \setflag \zfltposhereonly = \false + \setflag \zfltposhere = \false + \setflag \zfltposseparate = \false + \setflag \zfltpostop = \false} + +\def \zmakefloattop{% + \setflag \zfltposalone = \false + \setflag \zfltposbottom = \false + \setflag \zfltposhereonly = \false + \setflag \zfltposhere = \false + \setflag \zfltposseparate = \false + \setflag \zfltpostop = \true} + +% Float Scheduler +% ----- --------- + + +% return-count is a counter passed in by the caller that we should +% set at the end of \zschedulefloats to indicate how +% many floats were emitted during this call. A value +% greater than 99 indicates that a new page should be +% FORCED (e.g. for alone floats) by the output routine. +% during-output? is a flag indicating that the caller is +% part of the output routine. +% flushing? A flag indicating whether we are flushing floats. + +\def \zschedulefloats #1#2#3{% {return-count}{during-output?}{flushing?} + \tracepagemakeup{[Scheduling \if #2floats during output% + \else float when encountered\fi.}% + \tracepagemakeup{Page total: \the\pagetotal; goal: \the\pagegoal.}% + % Reset our counter + \global\zfloatsinserted = 0 + \if \zschedflts + \if \emptydefp{\zfloatpendq}% + \tracepagemakeup{There are no floats to be scheduled.}% + \else + \endgraf + \zinitfloatfit{#2}% + {\setflag \zschedfirstseparate = \true + \setflag \zschedseparateloop = \false + \maplist{\zschedone{#2}{#3}{##1}}{\zfloatpendq}}% + \fi + \else + \tracepagemakeup{Floats are deferred now.}% + \fi + \tracepagemakeup{Float scheduling complete; + floats inserted: \the\zfloatsinserted.]}% + \xdef #1{\the\zfloatsinserted}} + + +\def \zschedone #1#2#3{% {during-output?}{flushing?}{\float} + #3% + \zparsefltpos{\the\position}% + \if \notp{\emptytoksp{\pageplacement}} + \zparsefltpagepos{\the\pageplacement}% + \fi + \if #2% % If flushing floats, force float + \setflag \zfltposbottom = \false % to a `separate'. + \setflag \zfltpostop = \false + \setflag \zfltposseparate = \true + \fi + \tracepagemakeup{Trying to schedule \zcurfloatid; + size: \the\ht\zcurfloatbox+\the\dp\zcurfloatbox.}% + \if \orp{\andp{\zfltposeven}{\oddpagep}}% + {\andp{\zfltposodd}{\evenpagep}}% + \tracepagemakeup{Float is deferred until appropriate even/odd page.}% + \zquitscheding + \else + \setflag \zfloatunsched = \true + \setflag \zfloattall = \false + % The following macros attempt, in order of priority, to schedule + % the current float. Each macro may set up state that causes + % the subsequent macro(s) to do nothing. + \zschedhereonly{#1}% + \zschedhere{#1}% + \zschedalone{#1}% + \zschedbroadside{#1}% + \zschedseparate{#1}% + \zschedtop{#1}% + \zschedbottom{#1}% + \if \zfloattall % Schedule as `alone'. + \zschedalone{#1}% + \fi + \if \zfloatunsched + \tracepagemakeup{Float could not be scheduled.}% + % This exits a \maplist call to \zschedone. + \zquitscheding + \else + % Remove the current float from the queue... + \pop{\zcurfloat}{\zfloatpendq}% + % ...and free up the associated data structures. + \expandaftertwice\zfreefloat \expandafter\zcurfloat\zcurfloatbox + \fi + \fi} + +% Fitting a Float +% ------- - ----- + + +% These registers are used in float fitting. They contain, +% respectively, the amount of vertical space used up by floats for +% the current page and the maximum space available for floats. + +\definedimen{\zfloatpageused}{0pt} +\definedimen{\zfloatmaxavail}{0pt} + + +% Macro to initialize the above parameters (called in \zschedulefloats). + +\def\zinitfloatfit #1{% {during-output?} + \if #1 + \zfloatpageused = 0pt + % Effectively: zfloatmaxavail = (100-mintextpercent) * vsize + \calculate \tcounta = {100,-,\mintextpercent}% + \calculate \zfloatmaxavail = {\vsize,P,\tcounta}% + \else + % Effectively: zfloatpageused = max(pagetotal, vsize * mintextpercent) + \calculate \zfloatpageused = {\vsize,P,\mintextpercent,X,\pagetotal}% + \zfloatmaxavail = \pagegoal + \fi} + + +% The spacing above and below a float is fairly complicated. +% In this table, h is the height of the float, d is the depth. +% +% Position Sequence Above Below +% +% \alone only \topskip - h + none +% \topfloatfudge +% \bottom first \aboveskip - h none +% rest min(\aboveskip, none +% \belowskip) - h +% +% \separate first \topskip - h + none +% \topfloatfudge +% rest min(\aboveskip, none +% \belowskip) - h +% \top first \topskip - h + \belowskip - \topskip - d +% \topfloatfudge +% rest min(\aboveskip, \belowskip - \topskip - d +% \belowskip) - h + + +% Here and broadside floats are handled differently, below in \zfitfloathere +% and \zfitfloatbroadside + +\def \zfitfloat #1#2#3#4#5{% {result-flag}{top?}{aboveskip-first} + % {aboveskip-rest}{belowskip} + {\if \zfltposmargonly + \tcounta = 0 % Margin float should act as first one. + \else + \tcounta = \if #2\ztopcolfloats \else \zbotcolfloats \fi + \fi + \zskipa = \if \zerop{\tcounta}#3\else #4\fi + \advance \zskipa by -\ht\zcurfloatbox + \if \andp{#2}{\zerop{\tcounta}}\advance \zskipa by \topfloatfudge \fi + \tdimena = \zskipa + \advance \tdimena by \ht\zcurfloatbox + \advance \tdimena by \dp\zcurfloatbox + \tdimenb = #5\advance \tdimena by \tdimenb + \tdimenc = \zfloatpageused + \if \notp{\zfltposmargonly}\advance \tdimenc by \tdimena \fi + \tracepagemakeup{Requires: \the\tdimena; + available: \the\zfloatmaxavail; + used: \the\zfloatpageused.}% + \if \dimlssp{\tdimenc}{\zfloatmaxavail}% + \if \andp{\notp{#2}}{\zfltposmargonly}% + \insert \zbotcolinsert {% + \vbox to 0pt{% + \vss + \moveright \floatshift \box\zcurfloatbox + \vskip -\dp\zcurfloatbox}}% + \else + \insert \if #2\ztopcolinsert \else \zbotcolinsert \fi {% + \vskip \zskipa + \moveright \floatshift \box\zcurfloatbox + \nobreak + \if \zfltposmargonly + \vskip \tdimenb + \nobreak + \vskip -\tdimena + \else + \vskip #5\relax + \fi}% + \fi + \if \emptytoksp{\zfltrunners}% + \global\zfltrunners = \expandafter{\the\runners}% + \fi + \global\increment \zfloatsinserted + \global\zfloatpageused = \tdimenc + \global\setflag #1= \true + \else + \global\setflag #1= \false + \fi}} + +\def \zfitfloathere #1#2#3{% {result-flag}{aboveskip}{belowskip} + {\tdimena = #2\relax + \advance \tdimena by \dp\zcurfloatbox + \advance \tdimena by #3\relax + \tracepagemakeup{Requires: \the\tdimena; + page total: \the\pagetotal; + page goal: \the\pagegoal.}% + \advance \tdimena by \pagetotal + \if \dimlssp{\tdimena}{\pagegoal}% + \bbskipabove{\breaknever}{#2}% + \fakepar + \moveright \floatshift \box\zcurfloatbox + \prevdepth = \zfloatdp + \bbskipbelow{\breakallowed}{#3}% + \global\increment \zfloatsinserted + \global\setflag #1= \true + \else + \global\setflag #1= \false + \fi}} + +\def \zfitfloatbroadside {% + {% We know there are no other floats on the the topcolumn when + % this is called (by \zschedbroadside only) and we don't have to + % worry about fixing up the vertical position at the end of the + % page. + % + % Compute the space required + % Start with the topskip + \tdimena = \topfloatfudge + % Add the *width* (since the box will be rotated) + \advance \tdimena by \wd\zcurfloatbox + \tracepagemakeup{Requires: \the\tdimena; + broadside floats always fit.}% + \insert \ztopcolinsert {% + % vskip the top float fudge + \vskip \topfloatfudge + % save the width for unskipping later + \tdimenb = \wd\zcurfloatbox + % vskip the *width* of the box to do the position translation + % that we can't do with PostScript + \vskip \tdimenb + % Put our hbox in a vbox, so we can "lower" it rather than move + % it right (since it will be rotated) + \global\setbox\zfltbroadbox = \vbox{% + \vskip\floatshift % replaces \moveright in other floats + \box\zcurfloatbox}% + \rotatebox{\zfltbroadbox}{90}% + % Undo vertical skip so that insert doesn't cause additional page + \vskip -\tdimenb}% + \if \emptytoksp{\zfltrunners}% + \global\zfltrunners = \expandafter{\the\runners}% + \fi + \global\increment \zfloatsinserted + \global\zfloatpageused = \tdimena}} + +% Individual Schedulers +% ---------- ---------- + + +% This is a temporary register used in calls to \zfitfloat where the +% fit needs to take into account more than one skip value (such as +% both the \aboveskip and \belowskip). In that case this dimen is +% used as a temp to hold the sum of the skip values. + +\defineskip{\zfloatabove}{0pt} +\defineskip{\zfloatbelow}{0pt} +\definedimen{\zfloatextraskip}{0pt} + + +% This scheduler is called for floats with position `here' and no others. + +\def\zschedhereonly #1{% {during-output?} + \if \andp{\zfloatunsched}{\zfltposhereonly}% + \tracepagemakeup{Float is to be positioned `here' only.}% + \if \zschedseparateloop + \tracepagemakeup{Making up a page of separates; quit.}% + \zforcenewpage + \zquitscheding + \else + \if #1% during output: + \tracepagemakeup{Float moved to top of this page.}% + \zmakefloattop + \else % when encountered: + \if \posp{\zbotcolfloats}% + \error{hereonlybot}{Cannot position float `here'; already floats + at bottom.}% + \else\if \dimzerop{\pagetotal}% + \tracepagemakeup{Float at top of column: schedule as `top' float.}% + \zmakefloattop + \else + \zfitfloathere{\zfloatfits}{\aboveskip}{\belowskip}% + \if \zfloatfits + \tracepagemakeup{Float inserted here.}% + \setflag \zfloatunsched = \false + \else + \tracepagemakeup{Float does not fit here.}% + \zforcenewpage + \zquitscheding + \fi + \fi\fi + \fi + \fi + \fi} + + +% This scheduler is called for floats with position `here' along with at +% least one other page position. + +\def\zschedhere #1{% {during-output?} + \if \andp{\zfloatunsched}{\zfltposhere}% + \tracepagemakeup{Float can be positioned `here'.}% + \if \zschedseparateloop + \tracepagemakeup{Making up a page of separates; quit.}% + \zforcenewpage + \zquitscheding + \else + \if #1% during output: + \relax + \else % when encountered: + \if \posp{\zbotcolfloats}% + \tracepagemakeup{There are already floats positioned `bottom'.}% + \else\if \dimzerop{\pagetotal}% + \tracepagemakeup{Float at top of column: schedule as `top' float.}% + \zmakefloattop + \else + \zfitfloathere{\zfloatfits}{\aboveskip}{\belowskip}% + \if \zfloatfits + \tracepagemakeup{Float inserted here.}% + \setflag \zfloatunsched = \false + \else + \tracepagemakeup{Float does not fit here.}% + \fi + \fi\fi + \fi + \fi + \fi} + + +\def \zschedalone #1{% {during-output?} + \if \andp{\zfloatunsched}{\zfltposalone}% + \tracepagemakeup{Float can be positioned `alone'.}% + \if \zschedseparateloop + \tracepagemakeup{Making up a page of separates; quit.}% + \zforcenewpage + \zquitscheding + \else + \if \orp{#1}{\dimzerop{\pagetotal}}% + \if \firstcolumnp % building new page + \if \zerop{\zfloatsinserted}% no floats on this page, yet + \dp\zcurfloatbox = 0pt % Make it fit. + \zfitfloat{\zfloatfits}{\true}{\topskip}{999pt}{0pt}% + \if \zfloatfits + \ztallytopfloat + \tracepagemakeup{Inserted on a page by itself.}% + \zforcenewpage + \setflag \zfloatunsched = \false + \zquitscheding + \fi + \else % wait for next time + \tracepagemakeup{Already floats in this column; quit.}% + \zquitscheding + \fi + \else% still in the middle of a page + \tracepagemakeup{Not in first column of page; quit.}% + \zquitscheding + \fi + \else % As encountered, and page not empty. + \tracepagemakeup{Must wait for new page; quit.}% + \zquitscheding + \fi + \fi + \fi} + +\def \zschedbroadside #1{% {during-output?} + \if \andp{\zfloatunsched}{\zfltposbroadside}% + \tracepagemakeup{Float can be positioned `broadside'.}% + \if \zschedseparateloop + \tracepagemakeup{Making up a page of separates; quit.}% + \zforcenewpage + \zquitscheding + \else + \if \orp{#1}{\dimzerop{\pagetotal}}% + \if \firstcolumnp % building new page + \if \zerop{\zfloatsinserted}% no floats on this page, yet + % Broadside floats "always" fit. The output will have to be + % inspected. + \zfitfloatbroadside + \ztallytopfloat + \tracepagemakeup{Inserted on a page by itself.}% + \zforcenewpage + \setflag \zfloatunsched = \false + \zquitscheding + \else % wait for next time + \tracepagemakeup{Already floats on this page; quit.}% + \zquitscheding + \fi + \else% still in the middle of a page + \tracepagemakeup{Not in first column of page; quit.}% + \zquitscheding + \fi + \else % As encountered, and page not empty. + \tracepagemakeup{Must wait for new page; quit.}% + \zquitscheding + \fi + \fi + \fi} + + +\def\zschedseparate #1{% {during-output?} + \if \andp{\zfloatunsched}{\zfltposseparate}% + \tracepagemakeup{Float can be positioned `separate'.}% + % If a separate float is called when encountered, we don't do anything. + \if #1% during output + \if \firstcolumnp % building a new page + \if \zschedfirstseparate + \if \zerop{\zfloatsinserted}% no floats on this page, yet + \zfloatmaxavail = \vsize % Entire page is available now. + \zfitfloat{\zfloatfits}{\true}{\topskip}{999pt}{0pt}% + \if \zfloatfits + \ztallytopfloat + \setflag \zfloatunsched = \false + \zforcenewpage % This is a page of separates now. + \tracepagemakeup{Inserted at the top of a new page.}% + \setflag \zschedfirstseparate = \false + \setflag \zschedseparateloop = \true + \else + \zsetfloattall + \fi + \else % wait for next time + \tracepagemakeup{Page already has other floats on it.}% + \zquitscheding + \fi + \else % Subsequent separates. + \zfloatabove = \if \dimlssp{\aboveskip}{\belowskip}\aboveskip + \else \belowskip \fi + \zfitfloat{\zfloatfits}{\true}{999pt}{\zfloatabove}{0pt}% + \if \zfloatfits + \ztallytopfloat + \setflag \zfloatunsched = \false + \tracepagemakeup{Inserted on a page with other separates.}% + \else + \zquitscheding + \tracepagemakeup{Does not fit on this page; start new page.}% + \fi + \fi + \else% still in the middle of a page + \tracepagemakeup{Must wait for new page; quit;}% + \zquitscheding + \fi + \else% when encountered + \tracepagemakeup{Must wait for new page; quit.}% + \zquitscheding + \fi + \fi} + + +\def\zschedtop#1{% {during-output?} + \if \andp{\andp{\zfloatunsched}{\zfltpostop}} + {\orp{\notp{\zfltposfollow}}{#1}}% + \tracepagemakeup{Float can be positioned `top'.}% + \if \zschedseparateloop + \tracepagemakeup{Making up a page of separates; quit.}% + \zforcenewpage + \zquitscheding + \else + \if \lssp{\ztopcolfloats}{\maxtopcolumnfloats}% + \zfloatabove = \if \dimlssp{\aboveskip}{\belowskip}\aboveskip + \else \belowskip \fi + \advance \zfloatabove by -\belowskip + \advance \zfloatabove by \topskip + \zfloatbelow = \belowskip + \tdimena = \topskip + \advance \zfloatbelow by -\tdimena + \advance \zfloatbelow by -\zfloatdp + \zfitfloat{\zfloatfits}{\true}{\topskip}{\zfloatabove}{\zfloatbelow}% + \if \zfloatfits + \ztallytopfloat + \tracepagemakeup{Inserted at top of column.}% + \setflag \zfloatunsched = \false + \else + \if \andp{#1}{\zerop{\zfloatsinserted}}\zsetfloattall \fi + \fi + \fi + \fi + \fi} + +\def \zschedbottom#1{% {during-output?} + \if \andp{\zfloatunsched}{\zfltposbottom}% + \tracepagemakeup{Float can be positioned `bottom'.}% + \if \zschedseparateloop + \tracepagemakeup{Making up a page of separates; quit.}% + \zforcenewpage + \zquitscheding + \else + \if \lssp{\zbotcolfloats}{\maxbottomcolumnfloats}% + \zfloatbelow = \if \dimlssp{\aboveskip}{\belowskip}\aboveskip + \else \belowskip \fi + \zfitfloat{\zfloatfits}{\false}{\aboveskip}{\zfloatbelow}{0pt}% + \if \zfloatfits + \if \notp{\zfltpostopafterbot}% + \global\ztopcolfloats = \maxtopcolumnfloats + \fi + \global\increment \zbotcolfloats + \tracepagemakeup{Inserted at bottom of column.}% + \setflag \zfloatunsched = \false + \else + \if \andp{#1}{\zerop{\zfloatsinserted}}\zsetfloattall \fi + \fi + \fi + \fi + \fi} + +% Captions +% -------- + + +\defineblock{\caption}{\endcaption}{\false}{} + +%~block caption Type +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above caption. +% \setflag \allowintoc = flag % Allow caption in ToC. +% \belowskip = glue % Space b/b below caption. +% \captionfudge = dimen % Fudge for \aboveskip. +% \def \comptextformat {...} % (No longer used with captions.) +% \difficulty = integer % Level of difficulty. +% \leftindent = glue % Left indentation. +% \legendfont = {...} % Font for optional legend. +% \def \legendformat ##1{...} % Legend formatter. +% \numberfont = {...} % Font for float number. +% \parindent = dimen % Paragraph indent. +% \parrag = dimen % Paragraph raggedness. +% \parskip = glue % Paragraph skip. +% \position = {...} % Position (see below). +% \rightindent = glue % Right indentation. +% \style = {...} % Heading style. +% \titlefont = {...} % Font for caption title. +% \def \titleformat ##1{...} % Title formatter. +% \width = dimen % Width of caption text. +%~end + +\definedimen{\captionfudge}{0pt} +\definetoks{\legendfont} + +\definebox{\zcapbox} +\definedimen{\zcapshift}{0pt} + +%~ This marker indicates that the following text is the legend or +%~ credit for the caption. + +\definemarker{\legend} + + +\def \caption #1{% {title with optional \legend} + \blockmustbein{\caption}{\float}% + \blockcantbein{\caption}{\caption}% + \beginblockscope{caption}% + \global\increment \captiondepth + \captionfudge = 0pt %~default with + \def \comptextformat {}% %~default hard + \style = {Initial cap/lowercase}% %~default soft + \difficulty = 0 %~default with + \processdesign{\caption}{\zcurflttype}% + \global\increment \captionnumber + \if \notp{\emptydefp{\comptextformat}}% + \error{capcomptext}{The \string\comptextformat\space parameter is no + longer used in captions} + \fi + \captionformat #1\legend\zmark + \if \andp{\allowintoc}{\notp{\continuationp}}\zcaptoc #1\legend\zmark \fi + \endcaption + \zcaptag #1\legend\zmark}% % Reset tag info with title. + +\def \endcaption {% + \global\decrement \captiondepth + \endblockscope{caption}} + +\def \captionformat #1\legend#2\zmark{% + \the\numberfont + \setbox\zcapbox = \vtop{% + \zpushvcontext + \setindentation{\leftindent}{\rightindent}% + \settextwidth{\width}% + \setparrag{\parrag}% + \if \emptyargp{#2}% + \titleformat{#1}% + \else + \let \legend = \relax % So it won't interfere with formatting. + \titleformat{#1\the\legendfont \legendformat{#2}}% + \fi + \endgraf + \global\zfloatdp = \prevdepth + \zpopvcontext}% + \zparsecappos{\the\position}% + \zcalccapitems + \bbskipabove{\breaknever}{\aboveskip}% + \noindent \kern \zcapshift \box\zcapbox \par + \prevdepth = \zfloatdp + \bbskipbelow{\breaknever}{\belowskip}} + +\def \zcaptoc #1\legend#2\zmark{% + \tocentry{\the\floatcomptext}{#1}{\zcurfltlvl}} + +\def \zcaptag #1\legend#2\zmark{% + \settaginfo{\the\floatcomptext}{#1}} + +% Position Handling +% -------- -------- + + +% This macro sets up variables that specify the position of a float, +% according to the \position design parameter: +% +% \alone Place float on a page by itself. +% \anypage Place float on any page. +% \any (synonym for \anypage) +% \bottom Place float at the bottom of a page. +% \broadside Place float broadside (alone, rotated 90 degrees). +% \evenpage Place float on an even page. +% \follow Float must follow its position in the text. +% \here Place float exactly where it appears. +% \ifevenpage Use next position only on even page. +% \ifoddpage Use next position only on odd page. +% \leftmargin Shift float to left margin. +% \margin Same as \leftmargin. +% \marginonly Float fits in the margin and does not occupy any +% vertical space on the page. +% \nofollow Float need not follow its position in the text. +% \oddpage Place float on an odd page. +% \outsidemargin Shift float to outside margin. +% \rightmargin Shift float to right margin. +% \separate Place float on a page with floats only. +% \textarea Leave float at left edge of text area. +% \text (synonym for \textarea) +% \top Place float at the top of a page. +% \topafterbottom Okay to schedule \top float after \bottom. + + +\definecount{\zfltposshift}{0} + + +\def \zparsefltpos #1{% {options...} + {\zclearfltpagepos + \global\setflag \zfltposmargonly = \false + \global\zfltposshift = 0\relax + \zsetupfltpageopts + \def \ifevenpage ##1{\if \evenp{\floatpage}##1\fi}% + \def \ifoddpage ##1{\if \oddp{\floatpage}##1\fi}% + \def \leftmargin {\global\zfltposshift=1\relax}% + \let \margin = \leftmargin + \def \marginonly {\global\setflag\zfltposmargonly=\true}% + \def \outsidemargin{\ifevenpage{\leftmargin}\ifoddpage{\rightmargin}}% + \def \rightmargin {\global\zfltposshift=2\relax}% + \def \textarea {\global\zfltposshift=0\relax}% + \let \text = \textarea + \global\floatpage = \floatpage + #1% + \global\setflag \zfltposhereonly = \zfltposhere + \global\setflag \zfltposok = \zfltposhere + \if \orp{\zfltposalone} + {\orp{\zfltposbottom} + {\orp{\zfltposbroadside} + {\orp{\zfltposseparate} + {\zfltpostop}}}}% + \global\setflag \zfltposhereonly = \false + \global\setflag \zfltposok = \true + \fi + \if \zfltposhereonly \setflag \zfltposhere = \false \fi + \if \notp{\zfltposok}% + \warning{nofloatpos}{No page position has been specified for a float}% + \global\setflag \zfltposalone = \true + \fi}} + +\def \zparsefltpagepos #1{% {options...} + {\zclearfltpagepos + \zsetupfltpageopts + #1% + \global\setflag \zfltposhereonly = \zfltposhere + \if \orp{\zfltposalone} + {\orp{\zfltposbottom}{\orp{\zfltposseparate}{\zfltpostop}}}% + \global\setflag \zfltposhereonly = \false + \fi + \if \zfltposhereonly \global\setflag \zfltposhere = \false \fi}} + +\def \zclearfltpagepos {% + \global\setflag \zfltposalone = \false + \global\setflag \zfltposbottom = \false + \global\setflag \zfltposbroadside = \false + \global\setflag \zfltposeven = \false + \global\setflag \zfltposfollow = \false + \global\setflag \zfltposhere = \false + \global\setflag \zfltposodd = \false + \global\setflag \zfltposseparate = \false + \global\setflag \zfltpostop = \false + \global\setflag \zfltpostopafterbot = \false} + +\def \zsetupfltpageopts {% + \def \alone {\global\setflag\zfltposalone=\true}% + \def \anypage {\global\setflag\zfltposeven=\false + \global\setflag\zfltposodd=\false}% + \let \any = \anypage + \def \bottom {\global\setflag\zfltposbottom=\true}% + \def \broadside {\global\setflag\zfltposbroadside=\true}% + \def \evenpage {\global\setflag\zfltposeven=\true}% + \def \follow {\global\setflag\zfltposfollow=\true}% + \def \here {\global\setflag\zfltposhere=\true}% + \def \nofollow {\global\setflag\zfltposfollow=\false}% + \def \oddpage {\global\setflag\zfltposodd=\true}% + \def \separate {\global\setflag\zfltposseparate=\true}% + \def \top {\global\setflag\zfltpostop=\true}% + \def \topafterbottom {\global\setflag\zfltpostopafterbot=\true}} + +\def \zcalcfltparams {% + \floatshift = 0pt\relax + % Set \floatshift + \ifcase \zfltposshift + \relax + \or + \floatshift = \if \evenp{\floatpage}-\evenlefttextmargin + \else -\oddlefttextmargin \fi \relax + \or + \floatshift = \textmeasure + \else + \zzerror{Invalid value for float `\string\zfltposshift'}% + \fi + \advance \floatshift by \leftindent + + % Set \floatwidth. Default of \naturalwidth is handled differently + % for broadsides than for non-broadsides. If \width not default, use + % it without modification. + + \if \dimeqlp{\width}{\naturalwidth}% + \if \zfltposbroadside + \floatwidth = \textareaheight \relax + \else + \floatwidth = \textmeasure \relax + \ifcase \zfltposshift + \relax + \or + \advance \floatwidth by -\floatshift + \or + \floatwidth = \if \evenp{\floatpage}\evenrighttextmargin + \else \oddrighttextmargin \fi \relax + \else + \zzerror{Invalid value for float `\string\zfltposshift'}% + \fi + \fi + \else + \floatwidth = \width \relax + \fi} + + +% This macro sets up variables that specify the position of a caption, +% according to the \position design parameter: +% +% \above Caption is placed above the figure. +% \below Caption is placed below the figure. +% \follow Caption follows left edge of float. +% \ifevenpage Use next position only on even page. +% \ifoddpage Use next position only on odd page. +% \leftmargin Force caption in left margin. +% \margin Same as \leftmargin +% \outsidemargin Shift caption to outside margin. +% \rightmargin Force caption in right margin. +% \rise Caption rises up from bottom of figure. +% \separate Caption is separate from figure. +% \sink Caption sinks down from top of figure. +% \textarea Force caption at left edge of text area. +% \text (synonym for \textarea) +% \textarearight Force caption at right edge of text area. +% \textright (synonym for \textarearight) + + +\definecount{\zcapposshift}{0} +\definecount{\zcapposvflow}{0} + +\def \zparsecappos #1{% {options...} + {\global\setflag \zcapposabove = \true + \global\zcapposvflow = 0\relax + \global\zcapposshift = 0\relax + \def \above {\global\setflag\zcapposabove=\true}% + \def \below {\global\setflag\zcapposabove=\false}% + \def \follow {\global\zcapposshift=4\relax}% + \def \ifevenpage ##1{\if \evenp{\floatpage}##1\fi}% + \def \ifoddpage ##1{\if \oddp{\floatpage}##1\fi}% + \def \leftmargin {\global\zcapposshift=1\relax}% + \let \margin = \leftmargin + \def \outsidemargin {\ifevenpage{\leftmargin}\ifoddpage{\rightmargin}}% + \def \rightmargin {\global\zcapposshift=2\relax}% + \def \rise {\global\zcapposvflow=1\relax}% + \def \separate {\global\zcapposvflow=0\relax}% + \def \sink {\global\zcapposvflow=2\relax}% + \def \textarea {\global\zcapposshift=0\relax}% + \let \text = \textarea + \def \textarearight {\global\zcapposshift=3\relax}% + \let \textright = \textarearight + #1}} + +\def \zcalccapitems {% + \ifcase \zcapposshift + \zcapshift = 0pt + \or + \zcapshift = \if \evenp{\floatpage}-\evenlefttextmargin + \else -\oddlefttextmargin \fi \relax + \or + \zcapshift = \textmeasure + \or + \zcapshift = \textmeasure + \advance \zcapshift by -\wd\zcapbox + \or + \zcapshift = \floatshift + \else + \zzerror{Invalid value for caption `\string\zcapposshift'}% + \fi + \advance \zcapshift by -\floatshift + % Captions in broadsides *always* follow, i.e. \zcapshift is 0pt + \if \zfltposbroadside + \zcapshift = 0pt\relax + \fi + \ifcase \zcapposvflow + \relax + \or + \forcenextbbskip + \aboveskip = -\dp\zcapbox + \advance \aboveskip by \zfloatdp + \advance \aboveskip by \captionfudge + \or + \advance \belowskip by -\dp\zcapbox + \advance \belowskip by -\captionfudge + \else + \zzerror{Invalid value for caption `\string\zcapposvflow'}% + \fi} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzfont.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzfont.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f2b15f37752 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzfont.tex @@ -0,0 +1,453 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Font Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This module contains all the macros necessary to define type +% sizes, styles, and fonts. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 28 August 1989 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Baselines & Struts +% --------- - ------ + + +\zremovePlaindef \strutbox +\definebox{\strutbox} % Strut for current type size. + +\def \strut {% + \relax + \if \mathmodep + \copy \strutbox + \else + \unhcopy \strutbox + \fi} + +\def \normalbaselines {% + \baselineskip = \the\baselinemultiplier\normalbaselineskip + \lineskiplimit = \normallineskiplimit + \lineskip = \normallineskip} + +% Type Style & Size Definition +% ---- ----- - ---- ---------- + + +% The following character set encodings are available. Odd numbers +% indicate italic; numbers > 20 indicate monospaced. + +\chardef \encoderoman = 0 % Roman. %^encoding +\chardef \encodeitalic = 1 % Italic. %^encoding +\chardef \encodemathitalic = 3 % Math italic. %^encoding +\chardef \encodemathsymbol = 4 % Math symbols. %^encoding +\chardef \encodemathextended = 6 % Math extended symbols. %^encoding +\chardef \encodematharrow = 8 % Math arrows. %^encoding +\chardef \encodeother = 10 % Generic. %^encoding +\chardef \encodemono = 22 % Monospaced. %^encoding +\chardef \encodemonoitalic = 23 % Monospaced italic. %^encoding + +\setlist \zfsizelist = {} +\setlist \zfstylelist = {} + + +\def \definetypestyle #1#2{% {\name}{\encoding} + \append{#1}{\zfstylelist}% + \zfwithfam{\zdeffam}{#1}% + \zfwithmat{\def}{#1}{\zfl}{}% + \zfwithmat{\xdef}{#1}{\zen}{#2}} + +\def \definetypesize #1#2{% {\name}{size/baseline} + \append{#1}{\zfsizelist}% + \zdefsize #1#2/% + \zdefstrut #1#2/% + \zfbldsize{#1}} + +\def \zdefsize #1#2/#3/{% \name size/baseline/ + \zfwithmat{\xdef}{#1}{\zsz}{#2pt}} + +\def \zdefstrut #1#2/#3/{% \name size/baseline/ + {\calculate \tdimena = {#3pt,P,70}% + \tdimenb = #3pt\relax + \advance \tdimenb by -\tdimena + \zfwithmat{\xdef}{#1}{\zst}{height \the\tdimena\space depth \the\tdimenb}}} + + +% A few useful predicates. + +\def \typestylep #1{% {\style} + \xtokeqlp{\the\typestyle}{#1}} + +\def \italicencodingp {% + \oddp{\typeencoding}} + +\def \monoencodingp {% + \gtrp{\typeencoding}{20}} + +% Commands to set font parameters. + +\def \setstylefontparam #1#2#3{% {\style}{param}{value} + \zfwithmat\maplistlf {#1}{\zfl}{% + \zfsetfp{##1}{#2}{#3}}} + +\def \setstylehyphenchar #1#2{% {\style}{number} + \setstylefontparam{#1}{-2}{#2}} + +\def \setstyleskewchar #1#2{% {\style}{number} + \setstylefontparam{#1}{-1}{#2}} + +\def \zfsetfp #1#2#3{% {font}{param}{value} + \if \eqlp{#2}{-2}% + \hyphenchar #1=#3\relax + \else\if \eqlp{#2}{-1}% + \skewchar #1=#3\relax + \else + \fontdimen#2#1=#3\relax + \fi\fi} + +% Style Relations +% ----- --------- + + +\def \definestylerelation #1#2#3{% {\style}{\relation}{\style} + \zfwithmat{\gdef}{#1}{#2}{#3}% + \gdef #2{\bgroup \zfrelstyle{#2}% + \if \italicencodingp \aftergroup \/\fi + \let \znext}} + +\def \zfrelstyle #1{% {\relation} + \if \mathmodep + \ztoksa = \expandaftertwice{\zfmat\math#1}% + \expandafter\ifx \the\ztoksa\relax + \zfnorelstyle{math}{#1}% + \fi + \else + \ztoksa = \expandafterthrice{\expandafter\zfmat\the\typestyle#1}% + \expandafter\ifx \the\ztoksa\relax + \zfnorelstyle{\the\typestyle}{#1}% + \fi + \fi + \the\ztoksa} + +\def \zfnorelstyle #1#2{% + \error{norelstyle} + {The current `#1' style has no related style for `\string#2'}} + +% Font Definition +% ---- ---------- + + +\setlist \ztfmlist = {}% + + +\def \definefont #1#2{% {\name}{tfm at size} + \global\font #1 = #2\relax + \zregistertfm #2\zmark + \if \zcommonencoding + \if \andp{\dimposp{\fontdimen7#1}}{\dimlssp{\fontdimen7#1}{.1pt}}% + \fontdimen7#1 = \fontdimen2#1\relax % Unlock it. + \else\if \dimeqlp{\fontdimen7#1}{\fontdimen2#1} + \relax % Already unlocked. + \else + \error{lockedfont}{The TFM for font `#2' is locked}% + \fi\fi + \fi} + +\def \zregistertfm #1 #2\zmark{% tfm at size\zmark + \member{\ztfmreg}{#1}{\ztfmlist}% + \if \notp{\ztfmreg}\append{#1}{\ztfmlist}\fi} + +\def \fontinterwordspacing #1#2{% {font}{factor} + \fontdimen2#1= #2\fontdimen2#1% + \fontdimen3#1= #2\fontdimen3#1% + \fontdimen4#1= #2\fontdimen4#1% + \fontdimen7#1= #2\fontdimen7#1} + +% Font Selection +% ---- --------- + + +\definetoks{\typesizename} % Current type size name. +\definedimen{\typesize}{0pt} % Current type size in points. +\definetoks{\typestyle} % Current type style. +\definecount{\typeencoding}{0} % Current type encoding. + + +% Equal signs and by's have been omitted for the sake of efficiency. + +\def \setfont #1#2#3{% {\size}{\style}{\font} + \setfontmath{#1}{#2}{#3}{\nullfont}{\nullfont}} + +\def \setfontmath #1#2#3#4#5{% {\size}{\style}{\text}{\script}{\scriptscript} + \edef \zfam {\zffam{#2}}% + \zfwithmat{\xdef}{#1}{#2}{% + \textfont \zfam #3% + \scriptfont \zfam #4% + \scriptscriptfont \zfam #5% + \def \noexpand#2{% + \typestyle {\noexpand#2}% + \typeencoding \zfmat{#2}{\zen}% + #3% + \fam \zfam}}% + \zfbldsize{#1}% + \zfaddfont{#2}{#3}% + \zfaddfont{#2}{#4}% + \zfaddfont{#2}{#5}} + +\def \zfbldsize #1{% {\size} + {\gdef #1{} + \maplist{\zfaddstyle{#1}{##1}}{\zfstylelist}% + \ztoksa \expandafter{#1}% + \xdef #1{% + \typesizename {\noexpand#1}% + \typesize \zfmat{#1}{\zsz}% + \the\ztoksa + \setbox\strutbox \hbox{\vrule \zfmat{#1}{\zst} width 0pt}% + \normalbaselineskip \ht\strutbox + \advance \normalbaselineskip \dp\strutbox + \noexpand\normalbaselines + \typestyle {none}\nullfont \fam -1\relax}}} + +\def \zfaddstyle #1#2{% {\size}{\style} + \ztoksa \expandafter{#1}% + \ztoksb \expandaftertwice{\zfmat{#1}{#2}}% + \expandafter\ifx \the\ztoksb\relax + \xdef #1{\the\ztoksa + \noexpand\zclearfam{\zffam{#2}}% + \def \noexpand#2{\noexpand\zfundef{\noexpand#1}{\noexpand#2}}}% + \else + \xdef #1{\the\ztoksa \the\ztoksb}% + \fi} + +\def \zfaddfont #1#2{% {\style}{font} + \zfwithmat{\appendlf}{#1}{\zfl}{#2}} + + +% This macro clears out a family so TeX can't set math in it. + +\def \zclearfam #1{% {family} + \textfont #1 \nullfont + \scriptfont #1 \nullfont + \scriptscriptfont #1 \nullfont} + +% This macro is called if the user selects a type style that has no font +% in the current size. + +\def \zfundef #1#2{% {\size}{\style} + \error{nofontset} + {No font has been set for size `\string#1' style `\string#2'}} + +% Miscellaneous +% ------------- + + +% The following definition allows the user to write: +% \withfont{\bf Hi there} + +\let \withfont = \relax + +% This macro helps with defining math fonts. + +\def \definemathfonts #1#2#3#4#5#6{% {prefix}{rm-font}{mit}{msy}{mex}{size} + \edef \znext {% + \noexpand\definefont{\name{#1rm}}{#2 at #6}% + \noexpand\definefont{\name{#1mit}}{#3 at #6}% + \noexpand\definefont{\name{#1msy}}{#4 at #6}% + \noexpand\definefont{\name{#1mex}}{#5 at #6}}% + \znext} + +% This macro helps with setting math fonts. + +\def \setmathfonts #1#2#3#4{% {\size}{\text}{\script}{\scriptscript} + \edef \znext {% + \noexpand\setfontmath{\noexpand#1}{\noexpand\rm}% + {\name{#2rm}}{\name{#3rm}}{\name{#4rm}}% + \noexpand\setfontmath{\noexpand#1}{\noexpand\mit}% + {\name{#2mit}}{\name{#3mit}}{\name{#4mit}}% + \noexpand\setfontmath{\noexpand#1}{\noexpand\msy}% + {\name{#2msy}}{\name{#3msy}}{\name{#4msy}}% + \noexpand\setfontmath{\noexpand#1}{\noexpand\mex}% + {\name{#2mex}}{\name{#2mex}}{\name{#2mex}}}% + \znext} + +% Measuring Things +% --------- ------ + + +\definebox{\zmeasbox} + + +\def \measureascenderheight #1{% {\dimen} + \zsetmeasbox{bdfhijklt}% + #1 = \ht\zmeasbox} + +\def \measurecapheight #1{% {\dimen} + \zsetmeasbox{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ}% + #1 = \ht\zmeasbox} + +\def \measuredescenderdepth #1{% {\dimen} + \zsetmeasbox{gjpqy}% + #1 = \dp\zmeasbox} + +\def \measuredigitheight #1{% {\dimen} + \zsetmeasbox{0123456789}% + #1 = \ht\zmeasbox} + +\def \measuredigitwidth #1{% {\dimen} + \zsetmeasbox{0}% + #1 = \wd\zmeasbox} + +\def \measureemwidth #1{% {\dimen} + #1 = 1em} + +\def \measurespacewidth #1{% {\dimen} + #1 = \fontdimen2\font} + +\def \measurexheight #1{% {\dimen} + #1 = 1ex} + +\def \measuretextwidth #1#2{% {\dimen}{text} + \zsetmeasbox{#2}% + #1 = \wd\zmeasbox} + +\def \measuretextheight #1#2{% {\dimen}{text} + \zsetmeasbox{#2}% + #1 = \ht\zmeasbox} + +\def \measuretextdepth #1#2{% {\dimen}{text} + \zsetmeasbox{#2}% + #1 = \dp\zmeasbox} + +\def \zsetmeasbox #1{\setbox\zmeasbox = \hbox{#1}} + +\def \definewidthdimen #1#2{% {\dimen}{text} + \definedimen{#1}{0pt}% + \measuretextwidth{#1}{#2}} + +% Utilities +% --------- + + +\def \zfmat #1#2{% {\size}{\style} + \csname zf\expandafter\discardtok \string#1% + \expandafter\discardtok \string#2\endcsname} + +\def \zfwithmat #1#2#3{% {\command}{\size}{\style} + \expandafter#1\csname zf\expandafter\discardtok \string#2% + \expandafter\discardtok \string#3\endcsname} + + +\def \zffam #1{% {\style} + \csname \expandafter\discardtok \string#1fam\endcsname} + +\def \zfwithfam #1#2{% {\command}{\style} + \expandafter#1\csname \expandafter\discardtok \string#2fam\endcsname} + +% Built-in Styles +% -------- ------ + + +\zremovePlaindef \itfam +\zremovePlaindef \bffam +\zremovePlaindef \ttfam + + % Family Name +\definetypestyle{\rm}{\encoderoman} % 0 RoMan +\definetypestyle{\mit}{\encodemathitalic} % 1 Math ITalic +\definetypestyle{\msy}{\encodemathsymbol} % 2 Math SYmbol +\definetypestyle{\mex}{\encodemathextended} % 3 Math EXtended symbol +\definetypestyle{\cal}{\encoderoman} % 4 CALigraphic letters +\definetypestyle{\bbb}{\encoderoman} % 5 BlackBoard Bold +\definetypestyle{\it}{\encodeitalic} % 6 ITalic +\definetypestyle{\bf}{\encoderoman} % 7 Bold Face +\definetypestyle{\bi}{\encodeitalic} % 8 Bold Italic +\definetypestyle{\tt}{\encodemono} % 9 monospaced (TypewriTer) + +% Note: style \math is reserved for math mode. + +\definestylerelation{\math}{\bbbold}{\bbb} +\definestylerelation{\math}{\bold}{\bf} +\definestylerelation{\rm}{\bold}{\bf} +\definestylerelation{\it}{\bold}{\bi} +\definestylerelation{\math}{\callig}{\cal} +\definestylerelation{\rm}{\callig}{\cal} +\definestylerelation{\rm}{\emph}{\it} +\definestylerelation{\it}{\emph}{\rm} +\definestylerelation{\bf}{\emph}{\bi} +\definestylerelation{\bi}{\emph}{\bf} +\definestylerelation{\math}{\fraktur}{\frk} +\definestylerelation{\tt}{\meta}{\it} +\definestylerelation{\math}{\roman}{\rm} +\definestylerelation{\rm}{\roman}{\rm} +\definestylerelation{\it}{\roman}{\rm} +\definestylerelation{\bf}{\roman}{\rm} +\definestylerelation{\tt}{\roman}{\rm} +\definestylerelation{\rm}{\smallcaps}{\sc} + +% We do not define any sizes or fonts. They just take up memory. + +% Doodad Font +% ------ ---- + + +\def \zrequiredoodad #1#2{% {\name}{size} + \if \undefinedp{\zfdoodad#2}% + \withname\definefont {\zfdoodad#2}{zztexorn at #2}% + \fi + \edef \znext {\let \noexpand#1\name{\zfdoodad#2}}% + \znext} + +% Font Style Summary +% ---- ----- ------- + + +{\catcode`\_ = \catactive + +\gdef \zfontsummary #1{% {font-list?} + {\def _{\space}% + \writelog{}% + \writelog{Type Styles:}% + \writelog{}% + \writelog{Name_____Math Family}% + \writelog{----_____-----------}% + \maplist{\zfsone{##1}}{\zfstylelist}% + \if #1% + \writelog{}% + \maplist{\writelog{ZzTeX: Font used: ##1}}{\ztfmlist}% + \fi + \writelog{}}} + +\gdef \zfsone #1{% + \tcounta = \name{#1fam}% + \writelog{\string #1______% + \if \lssp{\tcounta}{10}% + _\number\tcounta + \else\if \lssp{\tcounta}{15}% + \number\tcounta + \else + ---% + \fi\fi}} + +}% \catcode + +% TFM List File +% --- ---- ---- + + +\definewrite{\ztfmlistfile} + + +\def \zopentfmlist {% + \if \zcommonencoding + \immediate\openout \ztfmlistfile = tfmlist.zzz\relax + \immediate\write \ztfmlistfile {\jobname}% + \fi} + +\def \zwritetfmlist {% + \if \zcommonencoding + \maplist{\immediate\write \ztfmlistfile {##1}}{\ztfmlist}% + \immediate\closeout \ztfmlistfile + \fi} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzfront.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzfront.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f0f281a9fc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzfront.tex @@ -0,0 +1,247 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Front Matter Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This file provides facilities for typesetting the front +% matter of a book. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 24 September 1989 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Copyright Page +% --------- ---- + + +\def \copyrightline #1#2{% {year}{publisher} + \noindent Copyright \copyright\ #1 by #2\par} + +\def \concisecopyrightline #1#2{% {year}{publisher} + \noindent \copyright\ #1 by #2\par} + +\def \superconcisecopyrightline #1#2{% {year}{publisher} + \noindent \copyright\ #1 #2\par} + +\def \copyrightnotice {% + All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, + stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any + means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, + without the prior written permission of the publisher.} + + +% We provide a standard text design for the Library of Congress +% Cataloging-in-Publication data. + +\def \textcipdataidesign {% + \aboveskip = \noskip + \belowskip = \noskip + \bodyfont = {}% + \setflag \enabletabbing = \false + \leftindent = 0pt + \parindent = \enclosingparindent + \parrag = \enclosingparrag + \parskip = 0pt + \rightindent = 0pt + \setflag \verbatimlines = \true + \width = \naturalwidth} + +\def \textcipdataiidesign {% + \textcipdataidesign} + +% Table of Contents Entries +% ----- -- -------- ------- + + +% This macro is used to write a ToC entry in the cross-reference file. + +\def \ztocentry #1#2#3#4{% {number}{title}{level}{allow?} + {\ztoksa = {#2}% + \tcounta = #3\relax + \edef \znext {\noexpand\xref{toc}{\noexpand\folio}{#1}{\the\ztoksa} + {\the\divisionname,\the\tcounta,% + \the\difficulty,\if #41\else 0\fi}}% + \znext}} + +% This is the public command for writing ToC entries. + +\def \tocentry #1#2#3{% {number}{title}{level} + \ztocentry{#1}{#2}{#3}{\true}} + +% This macro allows the compositor to adjust pages in the ToC. + +\setlist \ztocadjlist = {} + +\long\def \tocadjustment #1#2#3{% {toc-type}{number}{commands} + \append{{#1}{#2}{#3}}{\ztocadjlist}} + +% Table of Contents Block +% ----- -- -------- ----- + + +\defineblock{\toc}{\endtoc}{\false}{} + +%~block toc Type +% \abovepenalty = integer % Penalty above text. +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above text. +% \belowpenalty = integer % Penalty below text. +% \belowskip = glue % Space b/b below text. +% \bodyfont = {\size\style} % Default font for body. +% \divisions = {...} % List of divisions to include. +% \foliofont = {\size\style} % Default font for folio. +% \leftindent = glue % Left indentation. +% \levels = {...} % List of levels to include. +% \setflag \minitoc = boolean % Is this a miniToC? +% \parindent = dimen % Paragraph indentation. +% \parrag = dimen % Paragraph raggedness. +% \parskip = glue % Paragraph skip. +% \rightindent = glue % Right indentation. +% \tocwidtha = dimen % General width a. +% \tocwidthb = dimen % General width b. +% \tocwidthc = dimen % General width c. +% \width = dimen % Line width +% \xreffile = {...} % Name of composite xref file to use. +%~end + +\definetoks{\foliofont} +\definetoks{\levels} +\definedimen{\tocwidtha}{0pt} +\definedimen{\tocwidthb}{0pt} +\definedimen{\tocwidthc}{0pt} +\definetoks{\xreffile} + +\definecount{\prevtocprimarylevel}{-1} % Previous level >= 70. + + +\def \toc #1{% {type} + \beginblockscope{toc}% + \def \ztoctype {#1}% + \global\increment \tocdepth + \abovepenalty = \breaknever %~default hard + \belowpenalty = \breakbest %~default hard + \bodyfont = {}% %~default soft + \divisions = {\all}% %~default soft + \setflag \minitoc = \false %~default soft + \tocwidtha = 0pt %~default soft + \tocwidthb = 0pt %~default soft + \tocwidthc = 0pt %~default soft + \xreffile = {}% %~default hard + \processdesign{\toc}{#1}% + \global\increment \tocnumber + \commalist{\zlevlist}{\the\levels}% + \the\bodyfont + \tocformat + \endtoc} + +\def \endtoc {% + \endgraf + \endtocformat + \global\decrement \tocdepth + \endblockscope{toc}} + +\def \tocformat {% + \endgraf + \bbskipabove{\abovepenalty}{\aboveskip}% + \alterindentation{\leftindent}{\rightindent}% + \settextwidth{\width}% + \setparrag{\parrag}% + \zadjtitle = \if \minitoc \zadjtitleminitoc \else \zadjtitletoc \fi + % \adjusttitle should adjust appropriate ToC. + \def \zadjloc {\toc}% + \if \emptytoksp{\xreffile}% + \zxloadcomp{\xrefloadtocmode}% + \else + \zxloadothercomp{\the\xreffile}{\xrefloadtocmode}% + \fi} + +\def \endtocformat {% + \fakepar % In case the ToC is empty. + \setlist \ztocadjlist = {}% + \bbskipbelowblock{\belowpenalty}{\belowskip}} + + +% The following macro is called for each entry in the cross-reference file. +% Each entry must NOT be in a group. + +\def \xreftoc #1#2#3#4{% + \ifnum \xrefmode=\xrefloadtocmode + \xreftocb{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}% + \fi} + +\definecount{\ztoclevel}{0} + +\def \xreftocb #1#2#3#4{% {page}{number}{title} + % {division,level,difficulty,allow} + \def \znext ##1,##2,##3,##4,##5\zmark{% + \ztoksa={##1}\ztoclevel=##2\difficulty=##3\tcounta=##4\relax}% + \znext #4,1,\zmark% + \if \posp{\tcounta}% + \edef \znext {\noexpand\inclusionlist\noexpand\ztoctest + {\the\ztoksa}{\the\divisions}}% + \znext + \if \ztoctest + \ztesttoclev{\ztoclevel}% + \if \ztoctest + \zchktocadj{#2}{#3}% + \the\bodyfont + \name{\toc\ztoctype\romannumeral\ztoclevel format}{#1}{#2}{#3}% + \if \gtrp{\ztoclevel}{69}% + \prevtocprimarylevel = \ztoclevel % Save ToC level. + \global\authortext = {}% % Clear author text. + \fi + \fi + \fi + \fi} + +\def \ztesttoclev #1{% {level} + \setflag \ztoctest = \false + \maplist{\ztesttoca{#1}##1-\zmark}{\zlevlist}} + +\def \ztesttoca #1#2-#3\zmark{% {n}low-high\zmark + \if \emptyargp{#3}% + \setflag \ztoctest = {\eqlp{#1}{#2}}% + \else + \ztesttocb{#1}{#2}#3% + \fi + \if \ztoctest \exitmaplist \fi} + +\def \ztesttocb #1#2#3-{% {n}{low}high- + \setflag \ztoctest = {\andp{\notp{\lssp{#1}{#2}}} + {\notp{\gtrp{#1}{#3}}}}} + +\long\def \zchktocadj #1#2{% {number}{title} + \maplist{\zchktocadjb##1{#1}{#2}}{\ztocadjlist}} + +\long\def \zchktocadjb #1#2#3#4#5{% {type}{number}{commands}{number}{title} + {\stringeql{\znext}{#1}{\ztoctype}% + \if \znext + \stringeql{\znext}{#2}{#4}% + \if \znext + #3\relax + \else + \def \tempa {#2}% % Don't expand titles. + \def \tempb {#5}% + \if \tokeqlp{\tempa}{\tempb}% + #3\relax + \fi + \fi + \fi}} + +\def \bbskipabovetochead #1#2#3#4#5{% {level}{penalty}{skip}{penalty}{skip} + \if \eqlp{\prevtocprimarylevel}{#1}% + \bbskipabove{#2}{#3}% + \else + \bbskipabove{#4}{#5}% + \fi} + +\definetoks{\zdelaytoc} + +\def \delaytocformatter #1{% + \global\zdelaytoc = \expandafter{\the\zdelaytoc #1}} + +\def \dodelayedtocformatter {% + \the\zdelaytoc + \global\zdelaytoc = {}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzhelp.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzhelp.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6d947fbf6bd --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzhelp.tex @@ -0,0 +1,359 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Help Text +% +% Synopsis: This file contains the help text for each error and +% warning signaled by ZzTeX. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 3 July 1990 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +\long\def \definehelp #1#2{% {help-id}{text} + \withname\gdef{\=zH:#1}{#2}} + + +\definehelp{adjheads}{ + You must eliminate the inter-row space between two adjacent rows_ + of column heads. This is done with the \closeuprows command.} + +\definehelp{altinv}{ + The design alternative named above was specified with an_ + invalid value in a \designalternative command.} + +\definehelp{altreq}{ + The design alternative named above must be specifed with a_ + \designalternative command preceding the \loaddesign in_ + your root file. There is no default.} + +\definehelp{artpos}{ + The \art command is in the wrong position relative to the_ + \caption command.} + +\definehelp{blkcantnest}{ + The file contains an occurence of the first block mentioned above_ + nested inside the second block. This is not allowed.} + +\definehelp{blkinvnest}{ + A command to end a block is not properly associated with the command_ + to begin the block. For example, an \endtext is matched with a \list._ + All blocks must be properly nested.} + +\definehelp{blkmustend}{ + The file contains an occurence of the block ending command_ + mentioned first, but it is not preceded by the block starting_ + command mentioned second. Each block must have a starting command.} + +\definehelp{blkmustnest}{ + The file contains an occurence of the first block mentioned above,_ + but it is not nested inside the second block. The first block_ + must be nested in the second.} + +\definehelp{cananchor}{ + The object anchor specified mentioned above is invalid._ + Valid anchors are 'a' -- 'h'.} + +\definehelp{celldecpt}{ + The picutre for this decimal-aligned cell did not include a decimal_ + point, but the number to be typeset does. You must include a_ + decimal point in the template or remove it from the number.} + +\definehelp{citelet}{ + It appears that you have used \let to define a \citexxx command_ + in the design file. This done not work; use \def instead.} + +\definehelp{desjunk}{ + The design file named above contains some paragraph (horizontal mode)_ + text that should not be there.__ + You probably left a percent sign off a comment.} + +\definehelp{divnotexist}{ + The division specified in the message is not included with a_ + \division command in the root file.} + +\definehelp{dupart}{ + The art file named above is used more than once in the book.__ + If a figure really is used more than once, you must copy it with + another name and change one of the \art commands.} + +\definehelp{dupreg}{ + The register named above has already been defined with another_ + \definexxx command.} + +\definehelp{divortah}{ + The \overridetextareaheight command has been used to override the_ + text area height, but the override crosses from one division to the next.__ + If you continue from the warning, the override will be cancelled.} + +\definehelp{empshape}{ + The \shapepar command must be specified with at least one pair of_ + indent/width arguments. You have specified one with no arguments.} + +\definehelp{hereonlybot}{ + ZzTeX cannot position the float `here' because there is already_ + a float positioned at the bottom of the page. Floats must be_ + positioned in order.} + +\definehelp{invindexlvl}{ + The level specified in an indexing command must be 1, 2, or 3.} + +\definehelp{invoper}{ + The operator shown above is not valid in the expression argument_ + of the \calculate command.} + +\definehelp{invsubpart}{ + The subpart argument to \markinfo(upcased) must be 1 or 2._ + You have specified the invalid subpart number shown above.} + +\definehelp{locattr}{ + The attributes of the index locator are not valid. You must specify_ + at least one of \page or \text.} + +\definehelp{missbb}{ + The specified art file does not have a bounding box comment, so_ + ZzTeX cannot determine the size of the art.} + +\definehelp{misset}{ + A tabular column template must begin with \set, so that the column + type will be correctly interpreted.} + +\definehelp{misstah}{ + The value of \textareaheight must be established by the document_ + design macro before \calculatetypeareaheight can be used.__ + You can set it directly or calculate it with \calculatetextareaheight.} + +\definehelp{misstopskip}{ + The value of \topskip must be established by the document design_ + macro before \calculatetextareaheight can be used.} + +\definehelp{misstrim}{ + The values of \trimwidth and \trimheight must be established by the_ + document design macro before \calculateoffsets can be used} + +\definehelp{needheads}{ + The \tabheadrule and \skipbelowcolhead commands require that the_ + previous row is a row of heads.} + +\definehelp{negtabvsp}{ + A negative \tabvspace will not work; it produces no spacing at all._ + You must use \tabcloseup.} + +\definehelp{noartfile}{ + You have requested the art file named above for an \art block,_ + but the file does not exist.__ + If you continue from this warning, the art space will be framed_ + with corner marks and contain the name of the missing file.} + +\definehelp{nobblfile}{ + You have requested a bibliography list with the \biblio command,_ + but there is no bibliography item file.__ + If you continue from this warning, the bibliography list will not_ + be typeset. You must first run BibTeX to produce the item file.} + +\definehelp{nodesfile}{ + The design file named above is required for this book, but it_ + does not exist.__ + You may have misspelled the name of the design file in the_ + \loaddesign command. If not, the design file must be created.} + +\definehelp{nodesign}{ + The file contains a use of the block named above, but the_ + book's design file does not contain a design macro_ + for the block.__ + It's possible you have misspelled the name of the block_ + or its type (if any). If not, a design macro must be_ + added to the design file.} + +\definehelp{nodivs}{ + The \setdivisions command must specify one or more divisions to set.} + +\definehelp{noend}{ + Do not use the \end command in ZzTeX. The root file is terminated_ + with the \enddocument command.__ + If you are trying to end a block, such as a \list block, you must_ + use the corresponding ending command, such as \endlist.} + +\definehelp{nofloatpos}{ + The \position parameter for a float does not specify any_ + page positions for the float. The page positions are \alone,_ + \bottom, \here, \separate, and \top. Without a page_ + position, the float cannot be placed on the page.__ + This error could be due to a missing position in the design file._ + Or, you may have specified the \position parameter in a \with_ + command on the float block and forgotten to include any of the_ + page positions.__ + If you continue, the float will be placed alone on a page. This_ + message may appear again for the same float.} + +\definehelp{nofontset}{ + The file has requested a font of the size and style mentioned above._ + No font has been set for this size/style in the book's design file.__ + You may have misspelled the name of the size or style. If not,_ + the appropriate font must be established in the design file.} + +\definehelp{noheadfoot}{ + The design file does not contain a definition for the header_ + or footer format specified in the message. These definitions_ + must be included in the design file.} + +\definehelp{noinclfile}{ + The file mentioned above has been requested with an \include or_ + \division command, but it does not exist.__ + You may have misspelled the name of the file. If not, you must_ + create it before processing the book again.__ + If you continue from this error, ZzTeX will prompt you for another_ + file name.} + +\definehelp{nomarks}{ + The \markinfo command is being used to format a running head_ + or foot, but no mark information has been provided for the_ + current page.__ + This only happens at the beginning of a book, before the first_ + chapter or quasichapter. You may have set running heads and_ + feet with \setrunners before the first chapter or quasichapter.} + +\definehelp{nomnpos}{ + The \position parameter for a margin note does not specify any_ + horizontal position for the float. The positions are \leftmargin,_ + \rightmargin, and \outsidemargin.} + +\definehelp{noreftitle}{ + The use of the \reftitle command has been disabled in the_ + design file with the \allowreftitle document parameter.__ + If you did not intend to use the \reftitle command, you must_ + remove it from the file. If you need to use it, then modify_ + the design file appropriately.} + +\definehelp{noregsleft}{ + All of the available registers of the type specified in the_ + message have been allocated for use, but a request for another_ + such register has been made.} + +\definehelp{norelstyle}{ + You have requested a type style related to the current style,_ + but no such relation has been established. For example, the_ + current style is \tt and you want to emphasize text with the_ + \emph command, but no style for emphasizing monospaced text_ + has been established.__ + Use the \definestylerelation command to establish the appropriate_ + relationship.} + +\definehelp{notaginfo}{ + A \tag command has been specified in the current block, but_ + the composite number and title has not been established yet.} + +\definehelp{notindexing}{ + ZzTeX has encountered an indexing command (e.g., \xpage), but_ + you have not included a \produceindex command in the root file._ + At least one \produceindex command is required if the files contain_ + indexing commands.__ + If you continue from the warning, the index entries will be written_ + to the log file.} + +\definehelp{notps}{ + The feature show above is only available when you are producing_ + PostScript output. It requires PostScript capabilities.} + +\definehelp{nowith}{ + The \with modifier is not allowed on the command specified in the_ + message. You must remove the \with modifier.__ + If you continue from this warning, the \with will be ignored._ + If you used \with on an \item command, use it on the \list_ + command instead (it will apply to the entire list).} + +\definehelp{obsolete}{ + The command named above is obsolete in this version of ZzTeX.} + +\definehelp{openblock}{ + One or more blocks are in progress at the end of a chapter,_ + appendix, or quasichapter. The names of the blocks are listed_ + in messages preceding this warning.__ + The problem is caused by missing \endxxx commands. For example,_ + you have coded a list but forgotten the \endlist command. You_ + will probably see the message `(\end occurred inside a group at_ + level 1)' at the end of the log.} + +\definehelp{overortah}{ + The \overridetextareaheight command has been used to override the_ + text area height, but a previous override is still in progress.__ + If you continue from the warning, the first command will be cancelled_ + and the second one will take effect. However, the height of the current_ + page may be incorrect.} + +\definehelp{pagepar}{ + A command has been used to request a page break in the middle of_ + a paragraph.__ + You must terminate the paragraph before using the command.} + +\definehelp{plaintex}{ + The Plain TeX command shown below cannot be used in ZzTeX.} + +\definehelp{scinmath}{ + You have tried to use a special character that is not available_ + in math mode.__ + If you need it, use it in a \text command.} + +\definehelp{setminus}{ + When using the MathTime fonts, it is better to use \setdiff than_ + \setminus. If you really want to use \setminus, you will need_ + to define it in the design file.} + +\definehelp{spectah}{ + The design spec's text area height, as specified by \spectextareaheight,_ + differs from the calculated text area height by more than 3 points._ + You should contact the designer about this.} + +\definehelp{skipab}{ + A sequence of elements in the book has resulted in a request_ + for a `skip below an element' followed immediately by a_ + `skip above an element'. Such a sequence is invalid.__ + There is probably an error in the design file.} + +\definehelp{toomanyflt}{ + There are more than the specified number of floats pending for_ + page makeup. A float is pending for makeup when it has been_ + encountered in a file but not yet placed on a page of the book.__ + You must reorganize the file so that the floats are more spread_ + out in the text, this giving ZzTeX an opportunity to place the_ + floats on pages as soon as they are encountered.} + +\definehelp{undefat}{ + The atsign command sequence specified above has not been defined_ + in this block. It must be defined before you can use it.__ + Use the \defineatsigncommand command to define the command.} + +\definehelp{undefflt}{ + The float type specified above has not been defined. It must be_ + defined before you can use it.__ + Use the \definefloattype command to define the float.} + +\definehelp{unimpl}{ + The ZzTeX feature mentioned above is not yet implemented.__ + Please contact Windfall Software if you need the feature.} + +\definehelp{lockedfont}{ + The font specified above is locked, which means it was not correctly_ + installed with ZzTFM.__ + Please contact Windfall Software to determine a remedy.} + +\definehelp{varmod}{ + A variant definition must include between 1 and 8 modifier commands.__ + Modifier commands are specified as a comma-separated list in the third_ + argument to \definevariant.} + +\definehelp{xtran}{ + An error flag from the XTran H converter is still present in this_ + file. The flag message is shown in the above error message.__ + You should fix the error flagged by XTran and remove the flag_ + message from the source file.} + +\definehelp{zztran}{ + An error flag from the ZzTran converter is still present in this_ + file. The flag message is shown in the above error message.__ + You should fix the error flagged by ZzTran and remove the flag_ + message from the source file.}
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzhmode.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzhmode.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8e9553e8ac0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzhmode.tex @@ -0,0 +1,924 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Horizontal Mode Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This module provides various facilities that operate in +% horizontal mode, within a paragraph. See also ZZHMODEB. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 21 September 1989 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Starting Paragraphs +% -------- ---------- + + +% The following token register is executed at the beginning of +% every paragraph. + +\definetoks{\everyparagraph} +\everyparagraph = {} + +% This is what we have to do at the beginning of every paragraph: + +\everypar = {\requiredeverypar \the\everyparagraph} + +% The following command ensures that we are in horizontal mode, +% without doing anything if we already are. + +\def \ensurepar {\unhbox \voidbox} + +% The following command fakes up the start of a paragraph while +% leaving us in vertical mode. + +\def \fakepar {% + \endgraf + \vspace{\parskip}% + \requiredeverypar} + +% Paragraph Penalties +% --------- --------- + + +\definecount{\zclubsv}{-100000} % Overridden \clubpenalty. +\definecount{\zclubct}{1} % Overridden paragraph count. + + +\def \overrideclubpenalty #1{% {penalty} + \if \eqlp{\zclubsv}{-100000}\global\zclubsv = \clubpenalty \fi + \global\clubpenalty = #1\relax + \global\zclubct = \if \vmodep -1\else 0\fi \relax} + +\declareeverypar{\zclubpar} + +\def \zclubpar {% + \ifnum \zclubct=0 + \global\clubpenalty=\zclubsv + \global\zclubsv=-100000\relax + \fi + \global\advance \zclubct 1\relax} + +% Single-Character Commands +% ---------------- -------- + + +% Name Description + +% \<space> Control space +% \! Negative sixth space; negative thin space in math; +% callout in code +% \" Dieresis (umlaut) accent +% \# Pound sign +% \$ Dollar sign +% \% Percent sign +% \& Ampersand +% \' Acute accent +% \( (reserved +% \) for user) +% \* \discretionary{}{}{} +% \+ Hair space +% \, Sixth space; thin space in math +% \- Discretionary hyphen +% \. Dot accent +% \/ Italic correction +% \0 \phantom{0} +% \1 -- \9 (reserved for user) +% \: List element separator +% \; Third space; thick space in math +% \< (reserved for user) +% \= Macron accent; prefix for tag namespace +% \> (reserved for user) +% \? (reserved for user) +% \@ At-sign +% \H Hungarian umlaut accent +% \L Polish suppressed L +% \O Scandinavian O slash +% \P Paragraph sign (pilcrow) +% \S Section sign +% \[ (reserved for user) +% \\ Backslash +% \] (reserved for user) +% \^ Circumflex accent +% \_ Underscore +% \` Grave accent +% \b Bar-under accent +% \c Cedilla accent +% \d Dot-under accent +% \g Ogonek accent +% \h Small horizontal space +% \i Dotless i +% \j Dotless j +% \l Polish suppressed l +% \o Scandinavian o slash +% \r ring accent +% \t Tie-after accent +% \u Breve accent +% \v Hacek accent +% \x \ +% \y } (reserved for user, for index command abbreviations) +% \z / +% \{ Left brace +% \| Vertical bar; \Vert in math mode +% \} Right brace +% \~ Tilde accent + +% Characters +% ---------- + + +% These definitions are in alphabetical order. + +\def \AA {% %~ Ring A (Angstrom). %^named_char + \ensurepar + \if \mathmodep + \mtext{\AA}% + \else + \r{A}% + \fi} + +\def \aa {% %~ Ring a. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \if \mathmodep + \mtext{\aa}% + \else + \r{a}% + \fi} + +\chardef \AE = "1D %~ Scandinavian AE. + +\chardef \ae = "1A %~ Scandinavian ae. + +\chardef \ampersand = `\& %~ Ampersand. + +\let \& = \ampersand + +\chardef \atsign = `\@ %~ At sign. + +\let \@ = \atsign + +\def \backslash {% %~ Backslash. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \if \mathmodep + \zmbackslash + \else \if \monoencodingp + \char "5C\relax + \else + \PSbackslash + \fi\fi} + +\let \\=\backslash + +\def \baselinebullet #1{% {size} %~ Bullet set on baseline. + \zrequiredoodad{\zdoodadfont}{#1}% + \hbox{\zdoodadfont .}} + +\def \bullet {% %~ Bullet. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \if \mathmodep + \zmbullet + \else + \PSbullet + \fi} + +\def \cent {% %~ Cent sign. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \PScent} + +\let \cents = \cent + +\def \copyright {% %~ Copyright symbol. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \PScopyright} + +\def \cdquote {''} %~ Close double quote. %^named_char + +\def \dagger {% %~ Dagger. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \if \mathmodep + \zmdagger + \else + \PSdagger + \fi} + +\def \ddagger {% %~ Double dagger. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \if \mathmodep + \zmddagger + \else + \PSddagger + \fi} + +\def \dollar {% %~ Dollar sign. %^named_char + \zprehyph{\dollarhyph}% + \if \monoencodingp + \char "24\relax + \else + \PSdollar + \fi + \zposthyph{\dollarhyph}} + +\let \$ = \dollar + +\def \ellipsis {% %~ Text ellipsis. + \if \mathmodep + \ldots + \else + \unbreakable\thickspace + .\unbreakable\thickspace + .\unbreakable\thickspace + .\thickspace + \ignorespaces + \fi} + +\def \emdash {---} %~ Em dash. %^named_char + +\def \endash {--} %~ En dash. %^named_char + +\def \greater {% %~ Greater-than sign %^named_char + \ensurepar + \if \monoencodingp + \char "3E\relax + \else + \PSgreater + \fi} + +\def \>{% %~ Greater-than sign. %^named_char + \relax + \if \mathmodep \plainerror \else \greater \fi} + +\chardef \hash = `\# %~ Pound sign, hash, octothorpe. + +\let \# = \hash + +\def \hat {% %~ Hat symbol. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \if \mathmodep + \zmhat + \else + \char "5E\relax + \fi} + +\chardef \i = "10 %~ Dotless i. + +\chardef \j = "11 %~ Dotless j. + +\def \L {\PSpolishL} %~ Uppercase Polish L. %^named_char + +\def \l {\PSpolishl} %~ Lowercase Polish l. %^named_char + +% \lbrace and \rbrace cannot start with \ensurepar, because that won't +% work following a \left or \right command. However, the \relax is required. + +\def \lbrace {% %~ Left brace. %^named_char + \relax + \if \mathmodep + \zmlbrace + \else \if \monoencodingp + \char "7B\relax + \else + \PSbraceleft + \fi\fi} + +\let \{ = \lbrace + +\def \less {% %~ Less-than sign. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \if \monoencodingp + \char "3C\relax + \else + \PSless + \fi} + +\let \< = \less + +\chardef \O = "1F %~ Slashed O. + +\chardef \o = "1C %~ Slashed o. + +\chardef \OE = "1E %~ OE diphthong. + +\chardef \oe = "1B %~ oe diphthong. + +\def \odquote {``} %~ Open double quote. %^named_char + +\def \P {% %~ Paragraph symbol (pilcrow). %^named_char + \ensurepar + \PSparagraph} + +\chardef \percent = `\% %~ Percent sign. + +\let \% = \percent + +\def \perthousand {% %~ Per thousand symbol. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \PSperthousand} + +\def \prellipsis {% %~ Text ellipsis with no left space. + .\unbreakable\thickspace + .\unbreakable\thickspace + .\thickspace + \ignorespaces} + +\def \rbrace {% %~ Right brace. %^named_char + \relax + \if \mathmodep + \zmrbrace + \else \if \monoencodingp + \char "7D\relax + \else + \PSbraceright + \fi\fi} + +\let \} = \rbrace + +\def \registered {% %~ Registered symbol. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \PSregistered} + +\def \S {% %~ Section sign. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \PSsection} + +\def \SS {% %~ Double section sign. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \PSsection\PSsection} + +\chardef \ss = "19 %~ German eszett. + +\def \sterling {% %~ Pound sterling symbol. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \PSsterling} + +\def \tilde {% %~ Tilde. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \if \mathmodep + \zmtilde + \else + \char "7E\relax + \fi} + +\def \trademark {% %~ Trademark symbol. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \PStrademark} + +\def \underscore {% %~ Underscore. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \zprehyph{\underscorehyph}% + \if \monoencodingp + \char "5F\relax + \else + \PSunderscore + \fi + \zposthyph{\underscorehyph}} + +\let \_ = \underscore + +\def \udquote {% %~ Undirected double quote. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \if \monoencodingp + \char "22\relax + \else + \PSudquote + \fi} + +\def \usquote {% %~ Undirected single quote. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \if \monoencodingp + \char "0D\relax + \else + \PSusquote + \fi} + +\def \verticalbar {% %~ Vertical bar. %^named_char + \ensurepar + \if \monoencodingp + \char "7C\relax + \else + \PSbar + \fi} + +\def \|{% %~ Vertical bar. %^named_char + \relax + \if \mathmodep \Vert \else \verticalbar \fi} + +% Accents +% ------- + + +\def \"#1{{\accent "7F #1}} %~ Umlaut accent. %^accent + +\def \'#1{{\accent 19 #1}} %~ Acute accent. %^accent + +\def \.#1{{\accent 95 #1}} %~ Dot accent. %^accent + +\def \=#1{{\accent 22 #1}} %~ Macron accent. %^accent + +\def \^#1{{\accent 94 #1}} %~ Circumflex accent. %^accent + +\def \`#1{{\accent 18 #1}} %~ Grave accent. %^accent + +\def \~#1{{\accent "7E #1}} %~ Tilde accent. %^accent + +\def \b #1{% %~ Bar-under accent. %^accent + \ozalign{\relax #1\cr + \hidewidth \vbox to .2ex {\hbox{\char 22}\vss}\hidewidth}} + +\def \c #1{% %~ Cedilla accent. %^accent + \setbox \zboxa = \hbox{#1}% + \if \dimeqlp{\ht\zboxa}{1ex}% + \accent 24 #1% + \else + {\ooalign{\hidewidth \char 24 \hidewidth \cr + \unhbox \zboxa}}% + \fi} + +\def \d #1{% %~ Dot-under accent. %^accent + \ozalign{\relax #1\cr + \hidewidth.\hidewidth}} + +\def \g #1{% %~ Ogonek accent. %^accent + \setbox \zboxa = \hbox{#1}% + \if \dimeqlp{\ht\zboxa}{1ex}% + \accent 154 #1% + \else + {\ooalign{\hidewidth \char 154 \hidewidth \cr + \unhbox \zboxa}}% + \fi} + +\def \H #1{{\accent "7D #1}} %~ Long Hungarian umlaut accent. %^accent + +\def \r #1{{\accent "17 #1}} %~ Ring accent. %^accent + +\def \t #1{% %~ Tie-after accent. %^accent + {\edef \znext {\the\font}\the\textfont1 \accent "7F \znext #1}} + +\def \u #1{{\accent 21 #1}} %~ Breve accent. %^accent + +\def \v #1{{\accent 20 #1}} %~ Hacek accent. %^accent + +% Spaces +% ------ + + +% TeX space primitives include the following: +% +% <space> Produce a normal space, obeying \spacefactor. +% \<space> Produce a normal space as if \spacefactor = 1000. + +% Here are a set of "space" commands that produce breakable space: + +%~ Specified amount of breakable horizontal space. + +\def \hspace #1{\ensurepar \hskip #1\relax}% {amount} %^hspace + +%~ Specified amount of unbreakable horizontal space +%~ measured in tenths of a point. + +\def \h #1;{% tenths-points; %^hspace + {\tdimena = .1pt + \tdimena = #1\tdimena + \kern \tdimena}} + +\def \fiveemspace {\ensurepar \hskip 5em\relax} %~ Breakable 5 em space. %^hspace + +\def \fouremspace {\ensurepar \hskip 4em\relax} %~ Breakable 4 em space. %^hspace + +\def \threeemspace {\ensurepar \hskip 3em\relax} %~ Breakable 3 em space. %^hspace + +\def \twoemspace {\ensurepar \hskip 2em\relax} %~ Breakable 2 em space. %^hspace + +\def \emspace {\ensurepar \hskip 1em\relax} %~ Breakable 1 em space. %^hspace + +\def \enspace {\ensurepar \hskip .5em\relax} %~ Breakable 1 en space. %^hspace + +\def \digitspace {% %~ Breakable digit space. %^hspace + {\measuredigitwidth{\tdimena}% + \ensurepar \hskip \tdimena}} + +{\catcode`\| = \catactive +\gdef \digitspacebar {% + \catcode`\| = \catactive + \def |{\digitspace}} +} + +\def \thirdspace {\ensurepar \hskip .333em\relax} %~ Breakable 1/3 em space. %^hspace +\let \thickspace = \thirdspace +\def \negthickspace {\ensurepar \hskip -.333em\relax} %~ Breakable negative 1/3 em space. %^hspace + +\def \space { } %~ Normal space. +\def \^^M{\ } %~ Normal space. + +\def \fontspace {\ensurepar \hskip \fontdimen2\font} %~ Breakable font space. %^hspace + +\def \visiblespace {% %~ Visible space. %^hspace + \ensurepar + \hbox {% + \measurespacewidth{\tdimena}% + \kern .16ex + \llap{\rule{width .08ex height .15ex depth .2ex}}% + \lower .2ex \hbox{\rule{width \tdimena height .08ex depth 0pt}}% + \rlap{\rule{width .08ex height .15ex depth .2ex}}% + \kern .16ex}} + +\def \fourthspace {\ensurepar \hskip .25em\relax} %~ Breakable 1/4 em space. %^hspace + +\def \fifthspace {\ensurepar \hskip .2em\relax} %~ Breakable 1/5 em space. %^hspace +\let \thinspace = \fifthspace +\def \negfifthspace {\ensurepar \hskip -.2em\relax} %~ Breakable negative 1/3 em space. %^hspace +\let \negthinspace = \negfifthspace + +\def \sixthspace {\ensurepar \hskip .16667em\relax} %~ Breakable 1/6 em space. %^hspace +\def \negsixthspace {\ensurepar \hskip -.16667em\relax} %~ Breakable negative 1/6 em space. %^hspace + +\def \seventhspace {\ensurepar \hskip .14286em\relax} %~ Breakable 1/7 em space. %^hspace +\let \hairspace = \seventhspace +\def \negseventhspace {\ensurepar \hskip -.14286em\relax} %~ Breakable negative 1/7 em space. %^hspace + +\def \qqqqquad {\unbreakable\fiveemspace} %~ Unbreakable 5 em space. %^hspace +\def \qqqquad {\unbreakable\fouremspace} %~ Unbreakable 4 em space. %^hspace +\def \qqquad {\unbreakable\threeemspace} %~ Unbreakable 3 em space. %^hspace +\def \qquad {\unbreakable\twoemspace} %~ Unbreakable 2 em space. %^hspace +\def \quad {\unbreakable\emspace} %~ Unbreakable 1 em space. %^hspace +\def \nut {\unbreakable\enspace} %~ Unbreakable 1 en space. %^hspace + +%~ Unbreakable 1/3 em space. + +\def \;{\relax\if \mathmodep \mthickspace \else \unbreakable\thickspace \fi} %^hspace + +%~ Unbreakable 1/5 em space. + +\def \,{\relax\if \mathmodep \mthinspace \else \unbreakable\thinspace \fi} %^hspace + +%~ Unbreakable negative 1/5 em space. + +\def \!{\relax\if \mathmodep \mnegthinspace \else \unbreakable\negthinspace\fi} %^hspace + +\def \+{\unbreakable\hairspace} %~ Unbreakable 1/7 em space. %^hspace + +%~ Specified amount of unbreakable horizontal space +%~ measured in hundredths of an em. + +\def \k #1;{% hundredths-em; %^hspace + {\tdimena = .01em + \tdimena = #1\tdimena + \kern \tdimena}} + +%~ This command retains horizontal space at the beginning of a line. +%~ Such space is normally discarded. + +\def \retain {\vrule height 0pt depth 0pt width 0pt\relax} %^hspace + +%~ This declaration causes spaces to be "obeyed," so that every space +%~ in the source is relevent. + +\def \obeyspaces {% + \catcode`\ =\catactive} + +{\obeyspaces +\global\let =\ % +} + +% Space Factors +% ----- ------- + + +% IniTeX sets the space factor code of uppercase letters to 999 so +% periods after them will not end sentences. That just gives people +% one more rule to remember. + + \sfcode`\A=1000 \sfcode`\B=1000 \sfcode`\C=1000 \sfcode`\D=1000 + \sfcode`\E=1000 \sfcode`\F=1000 \sfcode`\G=1000 \sfcode`\H=1000 + \sfcode`\I=1000 \sfcode`\J=1000 \sfcode`\K=1000 \sfcode`\L=1000 + \sfcode`\M=1000 \sfcode`\N=1000 \sfcode`\O=1000 \sfcode`\P=1000 + \sfcode`\Q=1000 \sfcode`\R=1000 \sfcode`\S=1000 \sfcode`\T=1000 + \sfcode`\U=1000 \sfcode`\V=1000 \sfcode`\W=1000 \sfcode`\X=1000 + \sfcode`\Y=1000 \sfcode`\Z=1000 + +% A few characters should not affect the space factor. + + \sfcode`\'=0 + \sfcode`\)=0 + \sfcode`\]=0 + + +\def \setsentencespacing #1{% {flag} + \if #1% + \sfcode`\. = 2250 + \sfcode`\? = 2250 + \sfcode`\! = 2250 + \sfcode`\: = 2000 + \else + \sfcode`\. = 1000 + \sfcode`\? = 1000 + \sfcode`\! = 1000 + \sfcode`\: = 1000 + \fi + \relax} + +% Numbers +% ------- + + +\let \lcromannumeral = \romannumeral + +%~ This command formats an integer as uppercase Roman numerals. + +\def \ucromannumeral #1{% {number} + \uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral#1}} + +%~ This command formats an integer as lowercase letters. + +\def \lcletter #1{% {number} + \ifcase #1% + 0\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or k\or l\or m\or + n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or y\or z\else + \number#1\fi} + +%~ This command formats an integer as uppercase letters. + +\def \ucletter #1{% {number} + \ifcase #1% + 0\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or + N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or X\or Y\or Z\else + \number#1\fi} + +% Lines +% ----- + + +\long\def \line #1{% {text} + \if \vmodep + {\parfillskip = 0pt + \noindent #1\retain \par}% + \else + \retain #1\tl + \fi} + +\long\def \leftline #1{\line{#1\hfil}}% {text} +\long\def \rightline #1{\line{\hfil#1}}% {text} +\long\def \centerline #1{\line{\hfil#1\hfil}}% {text} +\long\def \spreadline #1#2{\line{{#1}\hfil{#2}}}% {text1}{text2} +\long\def \centerspreadline #1#2#3{% + \line{\rlap{#1}\hfil #2\hfil \llap{#3}}}% {text1}{text2}{text3} + + +% This declaration causes line breaks to be "obeyed," so that each +% results in a paragraph end. + +{\catcode`\^^M = \catactive% +\gdef \obeylines {\catcode`\^^M = \active \let ^^M = \par}% +} + +% Line Breaks +% ---- ------ + + +\def \linebreak #1{% {penalty} + \penalty #1\relax} + +\def \tl {\break} + +\def \nl {% + \gluevaries{\znlvar}{\leftskip}% + \if \znlvar \tl \else \hfil \break \fi} + +\def \blankline {\ensurepar \nl} + + +% These commands are used to tie text on one line. + +\def ~{\nobreak \ } % Unbreakable space (tie). + +\def \tie {\ensurepar \hbox} + +% Indentation +% ----------- + + +% Note that this macro just sets \leftskip and \rightskip, and so +% blows away any \parrag. + +\def \setindentation #1#2{% {left}{right} + \leftskip = #1\relax + \rightskip = #2\relax} + + +\def \alterindentation #1#2{% {left-delta}{right-delta} + \leftskip = 1\leftskip + \advance \leftskip by #1\relax + \rightskip = 1\rightskip + \advance \rightskip by #2\relax} + +% Text Width +% ---- ----- + + +% This command must be used AFTER the indentation is established with +% \setindentation or \alterindentation. + +\def \settextwidth #1{% {width} + \if \dimneqlp{#1}{\naturalwidth}% + \hsize = #1\relax + \advance \hsize by \leftskip + \advance \hsize by \rightskip + \fi} + +% Paragraph Raggedness +% --------- ---------- + + +% This command must be used AFTER the indentation is established with +% \setindentation or \alterindentation. + +\def \setparrag #1{% {rag-dimen} + \gluevaries{\zrsvar}{\rightskip}% + \if \notp{\zrsvar}% + \tdimena = #1\relax + \advance \rightskip by 0pt plus \tdimena\relax + \fi} + +\zdeclareeveryvcontext{\setindentation{0pt}{0pt}\setparrag{0pt}} + +% Paragraph Shapes +% --------- ------ + + +\definecount{\zshparct}{0} +\definecount{\zshparrep}{0} +\definedimen{\zshpari}{0pt} +\definedimen{\zshparw}{0pt} + + +\def \nshapepar #1{% {[*repeat1,]indent1,width1,...} + \if \emptyargp{#1}% + \error{empshape}{The argument to \string\shapepar cannot be empty}% + \fi + \gdef \zshpartoks {}% + \global\zshparct = 0 + {\zshapeparc #1,\zmark}% + \parshape = \zshparct\zshpartoks\relax} + +\def \zshapeparc #1#2,#3\zmark{% [*repeat],indent,... + \if \codeeqlp{#1}{*}% + \global\zshparrep = #2\relax + \def \znext {\zshapepare #3\zmark}% + \else + \global\zshparrep = 1 + \def \znext {\zshapepare #1#2,#3\zmark}% + \fi + \znext} + +\def \zshapepare #1,#2,#3\zmark{% indent,width,... + \zshapepard #1,\false,\zshpari\zmark + \global\zshpari = \tdimena + \zshapepard #2,\true,\zshparw\zmark + \global\zshparw = \tdimena + \loop + \if \posp{\zshparrep}% + \xdef \zshpartoks {\zshpartoks \space \the\zshpari \space \the\zshparw}% + \global\increment \zshparct + \global\decrement \zshparrep + \repeat + \if \emptyargp{#3}% + \let \znext = \relax + \else + \def \znext {\zshapeparc #3\zmark}% + \fi + \znext} + +\def \zshapepard #1#2,#3,#4\zmark{% dimen1 dimen-rest,width?,prev + \if \codeeqlp{#1}{+}% + \calculate \tdimena = {#4,+,#2}% + \else\if \codeeqlp{#1}{-}% + \calculate \tdimena = {#4,-,#2}% + \else\if \andp{\codeeqlp{#1}{=}}{#3}% + \calculate \tdimena = {\hsize,-,\zshpari}% + \else + \tdimena = #1#2\relax + \if \dimeqlp{\tdimena}{\naturalwidth}% + \calculate \tdimena = {\hsize,-,\zshpari}% + \fi + \fi\fi\fi + \if #3% + %%% Do we want to adjust the width by \leftskip or \rightskip? + \fi} + + +%%%\definecount{\zshparct}{0} +\definedimen{\zshpard}{0pt} +\definedimen{\zshpare}{0pt} + + +\def \shapepar #1{% {indent1,width1,...} + \if \emptyargp{#1}% + \error{empshape}{The argument to \string\shapepar cannot be empty}% + \fi + \gdef \zshpartoks {}% + \global\zshparct = 0 + {\zshapepara #1,\zmark}% + \parshape = \zshparct\zshpartoks\relax} + +\def \zshapepara #1,#2,#3\zmark{% indent,width,...\zmark + \zshpard = #1\relax + \xdef \zshpartoks {\zshpartoks \space \the\zshpard}% + \zshpare = #2\relax + \if \dimeqlp{\zshpare}{\naturalwidth}% + \zshpare = \hsize + \advance \zshpare by -\zshpard + \else + \advance \zshpare by \leftskip + \advance \zshpare by \rightskip + \fi + \xdef \zshpartoks {\zshpartoks \space \the\zshpare}% + \global\increment \zshparct + \if \emptyargp{#3}% + \let \znext = \relax + \else + \def \znext {\zshapepara #3\zmark}% + \fi + \znext} + + +\def \hangalign #1#2#3{% {indent}{text1}{text2} + \endgraf + {\setbox \zboxa = \hbox{#2}% + \tdimena = \wd\zboxa + \advance \tdimena by #1\relax + \shapepar{#1,\naturalwidth,\tdimena,\naturalwidth}% + \noindent \box\zboxa #3\par}} + +\def \hindent #1{% {indent} + \noindent \hspace{#1}% + \ignorespaces} + +% Adjustments +% ----------- + + +%~ This page overrides the number of lines in a paragraph. The argument +%~ specifies the number of lines and should start with a plus or +%~ minus sign. TeX does not guarantee the change. + +\def \overrideparlength #1{% {lines} %^page_makeup + \looseness = #1\relax} + + +%~ This command is used in the middle of a paragraph, on a line by +%~ itself, to make an adjustment +%~ between two lines. A typical use is to force a page break: +%~ \adjustpar{\fullpagebreak} +%~ There is no need to put a percent sign (|%|) after the command. + +\long\def \adjustpar #1{% {command} %^page_makeup + \vadjust{#1}% + \ignorespaces} + + +% This command is used to adjust the title of a chapter, section, etc. +% The argument looks like `\loc{commands}\loc{commands}...' +% where each \loc is: +% \body To adjust the title in the body of the text. +% \mark To adjust the title in the mark (running heads and feet). +% \toc To adjust the title in the table of contents. + +\def \zadjloc {\body} % Normally, \adjusttitle should adjust body. + +\def \adjusttitle #1{% {\loc{commands}...} + {\def \body ##1{}% + \def \mark ##1{}% + \def \toc ##1{}% + \expandafter\let \zadjloc = \zadjtitleb + #1}} + +\def \zadjtitleb #1{% + #1% + \def \znext {#1}% + \if \tokeqlp{\znext}{\nl}% + \let \znext = \ignorespaces + \else + \let \znext = \relax + \fi + \znext} + +% These macros use \lspspace so they do the right thing while letterspacing. + +\def \titlenl {\adjusttitle{\body{\nl}}\lspspace} +\def \titletl {\adjusttitle{\body{\tl}}\lspspace} +\def \tocnl {\adjusttitle{\toc{\nl}}\lspspace} +\def \toctl {\adjusttitle{\toc{\tl}}\lspspace} + + +% These definitions are used by the new title adjustment scheme, +% but need to be present even when it is not in use. + +\chardef \zadjtitlenone = 0 +\chardef \zadjtitlebody = 1 +\chardef \zadjtitlemark = 2 +\chardef \zadjtitletoc = 3 +\chardef \zadjtitleminitoc = 4 + +\definecount{\zadjtitle}{\zadjtitlebody} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzhmodeb.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzhmodeb.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..69c92d9c1e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzhmodeb.tex @@ -0,0 +1,239 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Horizontal Mode Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This module provides various facilities that operate in +% horizontal mode, within a paragraph. See also ZZHMODE. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 11 January 1994 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Basic Tools +% ----- ----- + + +\def \llap #1{\hbox to 0pt{\hss #1}}% {text} +\def \rlap #1{\hbox to 0pt{#1\hss}}% {text} +\def \clap #1{\hbox to 0pt{\hss #1\hss}}% {text} + +\def \minhbox to #1#2#3#4{% to width{text}{space-in}{space-out} + \measuretextwidth{\tdimena}{#2\hspace{#3}}% + \if \dimgtrp{\tdimena}{#1}% + {#2}\hspace{#4}% + \else + \hbox to #1{#2\hfil}% + \fi} + +% Drop Capitals +% ---- -------- + + +\def \dropcapital #1#2#3{% {height}{lines}{text} + \setbox \zboxa = \hbox{#3}% + \tdimena = \ht\zboxa + \advance \tdimena by -#1\relax + \setbox \zboxa = \hbox{\lower \tdimena \box\zboxa}% + \dp\zboxa = 0pt + \def \zdropshape {0pt,\naturalwidth}% + \tcounta = #2\relax + \loop + \decrement \tcounta + \if \posp{\tcounta}% + \edef \zdropshape {\zdropshape ,\the\wd\zboxa,\naturalwidth}% + \repeat + \expandafter\shapepar\expandafter{\zdropshape,0pt,\naturalwidth}% + \noindent \box\zboxa} + +% Enclosing Text +% --------- ---- + + +\def \enclose #1#2#3{% {thickness}{separation}{text} + \ensurepar + \hbox{\vrule width #1% + \vtop{\vbox{\hrule height #1% + \kern #2% + \hbox{\kern #2#3\kern #2}}% + \kern #2% + \hrule height #1}% + \vrule width #1}} + +\def \colorenclose #1#2#3#4{% {color}{thickness}{separation}{text} + \ensurepar + \hbox{\color{#1}\vrule width #2 \endcolor + \vtop{\vbox{\color{#1}\hrule height #2 \endcolor + \kern #3% + \hbox{\kern #3#4\kern #3}}% + \kern #3% + \color{#1}\hrule height #2 \endcolor}% + \color{#1}\vrule width #2 \endcolor}} + +% Fractions +% --------- + + +% This macro is specifically designed to work in math mode, too. + +\def \piecefraction #1{% + \ztfrac #1/} + +\def \ztfrac #1/#2/{% + \ensurepar + {\measuretextwidth{\tdimena}{/}% + \raise .5ex \hbox{$\scriptstyle #1$}% + \kern -.2\tdimena \raise .3ex \hbox{$\scriptstyle /$}\kern -.2\tdimena% + \hbox{$\scriptstyle #2$}}} + +\let \textfraction = \piecefraction % For compatibility. + +% Leaders +% ------- + + +\def \alignedleaders #1{% {box-or-rule} + \leaders #1\hfill} + +\def \dotleaders {% + \alignedleaders{\hbox to 1em{\hss.\hss}}} + +\def \ruleleaders #1{% {rule} + \alignedleaders{#1}} + +\def \centeredleaders #1{% {box-or-rule} + \cleaders #1\hfill} + +\def \spreadleaders #1{% {box-or-rule} + \xleaders #1\hfill} + +% Paragraph Dingbats +% --------- -------- + + +\def \pardingbat #1#2{% {space}{dingbat} + {\unskip \unbreakable\hfil \allowbreak + \hspace{#1}\retain\unbreakable\hfill + #2% + \finalhyphendemerits = 0 \par}} + +% Rules +% ----- + + +\def \rule #1{% {dimensions} + \if \vmodep + \hrule #1\relax + \else + \vrule #1\relax + \fi} + +\def \colorrule #1#2{% {color}{dimensions} + \if \vmodep + \color{#1} + \nobreak + \hrule #2\relax + \endcolor + \else + \color{#1}\vrule #2\relax\endcolor + \fi} + +\def \slug #1#2{% {width}{height} + \rule{height #2 depth 0pt width #1}} + +% Shapes +% ------ + + +\def \rectangle #1#2#3#4{% {rise}{width}{height}{thickness} + {\tdimena = #2\relax + \advance \tdimena by -#4\relax + \advance \tdimena by -#4\relax + \raise #1 \hbox{% + \vrule height #3 depth 0pt width #4\relax + \vbox to #3{% + \hrule height #4 depth 0pt width \tdimena\relax + \vfil + \hrule height #4 depth 0pt width \tdimena\relax}% + \vrule height #3 depth 0pt width #4}}} + +% Underlining & Overstriking +% ----------- - ------------ + + +\def \fakebold #1{% {text} + \hbox{\rlap{#1}% + \rlap{\lower .009em \hbox{\kern .009em #1}}% + \lower .018em \hbox{\kern .018em #1}}} + +\def \multiunderline #1#2#3#4#5{% {count}{drop1}{drop2}{thickness}{text} + \ensurepar + {\setbox\zboxa = \hbox{#5}% + \rlap{\lower #2 \hbox{\vrule height #4 depth 0pt width \the\wd\zboxa}}% + \tcounta = #1\relax + \tdimena = #2\relax + \loop + \decrement \tcounta + \if \posp{\tcounta}% + \advance \tdimena by #3\relax + \rlap{\lower \tdimena \hbox{\vrule height #4 depth 0pt + width \the\wd\zboxa}}% + \repeat + \box\zboxa}} + +\def \overstrike #1#2{% {text1}{text2} + \ensurepar + {\setbox\zboxa = \hbox{#1}% + \setbox\zboxb = \hbox{#2}% + \tdimena = \wd\zboxa + \advance \tdimena by -\wd\zboxb + \divide \tdimena by 2 + \rlap{\kern \tdimena \box\zboxb}\box\zboxa}} + +\def \strikethrough #1{% {text} + \ensurepar + {\setbox\zboxa = \hbox{#1}% + \rlap{\raise .45ex \hbox{\vrule height .1ex depth 0pt + width \the\wd\zboxa}}% + \box\zboxa}} + +\let \zunline = \underline + +\def \underline #1{% {text} + \relax + \if \mathmodep + \zunline{#1}% + \else + \multiunderline{1}{.4ex}{0pt}{.1ex}{#1}% + \fi} + +% Vertical Centering +% -------- --------- + + +\def \centeroncapheight #1{% {text} + \ensurepar + {\setbox\zboxa = \hbox{#1}% + \measurecapheight{\tdimena}% % Calculate ht(CAP) - ht(text) + \advance \tdimena by -\ht\zboxa % ------------------ + \divide \tdimena by 2 % 2 + \raise \tdimena \box\zboxa}} + +\def \centerondigitheight #1{% {text} + \ensurepar + {\setbox\zboxa = \hbox{#1}% + \measuredigitheight{\tdimena}% % Calculate ht(123) - ht(text) + \advance \tdimena by -\ht\zboxa % ------------------ + \divide \tdimena by 2 % 2 + \raise \tdimena \box\zboxa}} + +\def \centeronxheight #1{% {text} + \ensurepar + {\setbox\zboxa = \hbox{#1}% + \tdimena = 1ex % Calculate 1ex - ht(text) + \advance \tdimena by -\ht\zboxa % -------------- + \divide \tdimena by 2 % 2 + \raise \tdimena \box\zboxa}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzhyper.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzhyper.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cf20d36eb2b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzhyper.tex @@ -0,0 +1,185 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: PDF Hyperlink Facility +% +% Synopsis: This module provides facilities for creating PDF hyperlinks +% in the document. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 12 March 2014 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Control Hyperlinking +% ------- ------------ + + +% If hyperlinking is turned off, then we also clear the button color. + +\def \setPDFhyperlinks #1{% + \global\setflag \PDFhyperlinks = #1\relax + \if \notp{#1}\PDFbuttoncolor = {}\fi} + +% Hyperlink Marks +% --------- ----- + + +% This macro generates a hyperlink mark that can be used as the target +% of a button. + +\def \PDFmark #1{% + \if \PDFhyperlinks + \special{mark: #1}% + \if \vmodep \repeatpenalty \fi % In case glue follows \special. + \fi} + +% Hyperlink Buttons +% --------- ------- + + +\def \pagebutton #1#2{% {folio}{text} + \if \PDFhyperlinks + \ztextbutton{P:#1}{#2}% + \if \emptytoksp{\PDFbuttoncolor}% + #2% + \else + \colortext{\the\PDFbuttoncolor}{#2}% + \fi + \else + #2% + \fi} + +\def \tagbutton #1#2{% {tag}{text} + \if \PDFhyperlinks + \ztextbutton{T:#1}{#2}% + \if \emptytoksp{\PDFbuttoncolor}% + #2% + \else + \colortext{\the\PDFbuttoncolor}{#2}% + \fi + \else + #2% + \fi} + +\def \URLbutton #1#2{% {URL}{text} + \if \PDFhyperlinks + \ztextbutton{#1}{#2}% + \if \emptytoksp{\PDFbuttoncolor}% + #2% + \else + \colortext{\the\PDFbuttoncolor}{#2}% + \fi + \else + #2% + \fi} + +\def \colorbuttontext {% + \if \andp{\PDFhyperlinks}{\notp{\emptytoksp{\PDFbuttoncolor}}}% + \color{\the\PDFbuttoncolor}% + \fi} + +\def \endcolorbuttontext {% + \if \andp{\PDFhyperlinks}{\notp{\emptytoksp{\PDFbuttoncolor}}}% + \endcolor + \fi} + +% Low-Level Button Macros +% --------- ------ ------ + + +% These low-level macros do not check \PDFhyperlinks. + + +\def \ztextbutton #1#2{% {mark}{text} + \measuretextwidth{\tdimena}{#2}% + \zwidthbutton{#1}{\tdimena}} + +\def \zwidthbutton #1#2{% {mark}{width-expr} + \calculate \tdimena = {#2}% + \if \hmodep + \smash{\lower .5ex \hbox{% + \special{button: \number\tdimena\space + \number\normalbaselineskip\space #1}}}% + \else + \special{button: \number\tdimena\space + \number\normalbaselineskip\space #1}% + \fi} + +\def \zURLbutton #1#2{% {url}{text} + \measuretextwidth{\tdimena}{#2}% + \def \zurltext {#1}% + \smash{\lower .5ex \hbox{% + \special{button: \number\tdimena\space + \number\normalbaselineskip\space + \expandafter\zdefof \meaning\zurltext\zmark}}}} + +% Email Addresses and URLs +% ----- --------- --- ---- + + +\def \zurlprefix {} + + +\def \urltext #1#2{% {font}{break before .?}{url} + \bgroup + #1% + \setflag \zurldotbreak = #2% + \catcode `\& = \catactive + \catcode `\. = \catactive + \catcode `\/ = \catactive + \catcode `\@ = \catactive + \catcode `\_ = \catactive + \zurltexta} + +\def \zurltexta #1{% {url} + \zurltextb #1\-\-\zmark} + +\def \zurltextb #1\-#2\-#3\zmark{% part1\-part2\-part3\zmark + \expandafter\def \expandafter\zfullurl \expandafter{\zurlprefix #1#2}% + \zurltextc{#1}% + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#2}}% + \break + \zurltextc{#2#3}% + \fi + \egroup + \gdef \zurlprefix {}} + +{\catcode `\& = \catactive + \catcode `\. = \catactive + \catcode `\/ = \catactive + \catcode `\@ = \catactive + \catcode `\_ = \catactive + +\gdef \zurltextc #1{% {url-text} + \def &{\ampersand \discretionary{}{}{}}% % Break after & + \let \& = &% + \if \zurldotbreak + \def .{\discretionary{}{}{}\char"2E }% % Break before . + \else + \def .{\char"2E \discretionary{}{}{}}% % Break after . + \fi + \def /{\char"2F \discretionary{}{}{}}% % Break after / + \def @{\atsign \discretionary{}{}{}}% % Break after @ + \let \@ = @% + \let _ = \underscore % Set _ + \let ~ = \tilde % Set ~ + \def \-{\discretionary{}{}{}}% % No hyphenation + \if \PDFhyperlinks + \expandafter\zURLbutton \expandafter{\zfullurl}{#1}% + \fi + \colorbuttontext + #1% + \endcolorbuttontext} + +} % \catcode + +% Digital Object Identifiers +% ------- ------ ----------- + + +\def \DOI {% {number} + \def \zurlprefix {http://dx.doi.org/}% + \ensurepar \url} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzhyph.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzhyph.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1aea8d1cd82 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzhyph.tex @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Hyphenation Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This module provides the extra facilities for dealing with +% hyphenation and related matters. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 6 October 1990 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Hyphenating Words +% ----------- ----- + + +\def \*{% + \discretionary{}{}{}} + +\def \hyphen{% + \nobreak -\zposthyph{2}} + +\def \slash {/\zposthyph{1}} + + +% These macros are used in ZZHMODE to allow special characters to hyphenate. + +\def \zprehyph #1{% {\parameter} + \ifcase #1% + \relax + \or + \relax + \else + \nobreak + \fi} + +\def \zposthyph #1{% {\parameter} + \ifcase #1% + \relax + \or + \discretionary{}{}{}% + \else + \penalty \exhyphenpenalty \hskip 0pt\relax + \fi} + +% Displaying Hyphens +% ---------- ------- + + +\def \showhyphens #1{% + \setbox\zboxa = \vbox{% + \hsize = \maxdimen + \parfillskip = 0pt + \pretolerance = -1 + \tolerance = -1 + \hbadness = 0pt + \showboxdepth = 0 + \ #1}} + +% Hyphenation Exceptions +% ----------- ---------- + + +\hyphenation{% + acad-e-my a-mi-no anag-no-sto-pou-los + an-a-lyse an-a-lysed an-a-lys-es + an-a-lys-ing analy-ses analy-sis a-no-ny-mi-ty + ap-pen-dix apple ap-pli-ca-tion ar-chive ar-chiv-ing ar-chiv-ist + arity aspect assume asyn-chro-nous asyn-chro-nous-ly + au-to-mat-ic au-to-ma-tion au-ton-o-mous + back-gam-mon berth-ing bio-che-mist bio-che-mists bio-med-i-cine + bio-poly-mer bio-poly-mers bit-map book-reader brows-ers + buff-er buff-er-ed buff-er-ing + cat-a-stroph-ic chi-ca-go ci-gar cig-a-rette cig-a-rettes + co-in-cide co-in-cides + co-iso-tro-pic col-umns com-pen-dium cor-vette cor-vettes + cross-over crypto-sys-tem crypto-sys-tems cur-vi-linear cy-to-cha-la-sin + data-base data-bases data-set data-sets date-stamp de-mon-strate de-mon-strates + der-i-va-tion dijk-stra di-lem-ma dis-tinc-tive + dump-ling dump-lings + eco-nom-ic eco-nom-ics econ-o-mies e-con-o-mist e-con-o-mists ec-ua-dor + ei-gen-space ei-gen-spaces elec-tro-dif-fu-sion en-gland + en-tre-pre-neur en-tre-pre-neurs en-tre-pre-neur-ship + e-pis-te-mol-o-gy e-pis-te-mo-log-i-cal + fashion fi-bo-nac-ci frame-work + geo-graph-ic ge-om-e-try geo-stro-phic graph-ics + he-mo-glo-bin hexa-dec-i-mal horse-rad-ish + ide-ol-o-gy ide-ol-o-gies ide-ol-o-gize idiom im-ped-ance im-plic-it + keynes-ian + leaf-lets li-chen life-style light-weight li-quid-i-ty li-thog-ra-phy lon-gi-tu-di-nal + look-ahead + ma-caque + mac-ro-eco-nom-ic mac-ro-eco-nom-ics mac-ro-eco-nom-ist mac-ro-eco-nom-ists + mac-ro-mol-e-cule mac-ro-mol-e-cules + man-u-script man-u-scripts mar-gin-al mas-sa-chu-setts + me-chan-i-cal me-di-um me-di-ter-ra-ne-an meta-bolic me-tab-o-lism + meta-lin-guis-tic met-a-phor met-a-phors met-a-phor-ic met-a-phor-i-cal + meth-od-ol-o-gy + mic-ro-eco-nom-ic mic-ro-eco-nom-ics mic-ro-eco-nom-ist mic-ro-eco-nom-ists + mini-tab mne-mon-ic meth-od-o-log-i-cal mol-ecule mol-ecules + mono-chrome mono-pole mono-poles mo-nop-o-ly + mono-sac-cha-rides mul-ti-pli-ca-tion mul-ti-pli-ca-tive + name-space noisi-ness noisy none-the-less not-with-stand-ing + often ol-i-gop-o-ly ol-i-gop-o-list-ic olym-pi-ad olym-pi-ads + om-e-lette om-e-lettes + op-er-and op-er-ands oper-ator over-view + paper pa-rab-o-la par-a-digm para-mag-ne-tic pa-ram-e-trized + patho-gen patho-gen-ic patho-gens people pe-ri-od per-suad-ed per-suad-ing + phoe-nix pho-neme pho-to-graphs pho-to-mi-cro-graph phys-i-co-chem-i-cal + phys-ics piano pic-to-graph pic-to-graph pic-to-graph-ic poly-sac-cha-rides + Post-Script pov-er-ty pow-er prayer pre-dimmed pref-er-a-ble pref-er-a-bly + pri-meval pro-cess pro-ces-sor pro-cure-ment + pro-gram-ma-ble prop-o-si-tion py-thag-o-re-an + qua-drat-ic qua-lia + ra-tional real-ly rec-tan-gu-lar re-pack-age re-pack-aged rep-er-toire + re-start re-start-ed re-start-able + sa-li-ent sched-ul-ing sche-nec-ta-dy scoun-drel scoun-drels ser-geant ser-geants + sha-pir-o small-talk so-lo-ist spec-tros-co-py stag-horn ste-reo-spe-cif-ic + sto-chas-tic syn-chro-nous syn-chro-nous-ly + table tem-po-rar-ily theo-rem time-stamp time-stamps to-ma-to + un-pre-dict-able uti-li-za-tion + water wave-guide wave-guides weap-on weap-ons which-ever white-space wild-life + woman women woman-kind + xe-rog-ra-phy +} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzindexv1.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzindexv1.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c809d20c9fc --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzindexv1.tex @@ -0,0 +1,379 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Indexing Facilities, version 1 +% +% Synopsis: This file contains the tools for producing an index. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 20 May 2006 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Index Version +% ----- ------- + + +\def \indexversion #1{% + \input zzindexv#1\relax} + +% Define Index Locator Types +% ------ ----- ------- ----- + + +% This list contains the definition of each locator. New ones must be +% added to the end, and any program looking at the definitions must assume +% that duplicates may exist, and that the last one prevails. + +\def \zixloclist {} + + +%~ This command is deprecated in favor of |\definelocator|. + +\def \definelocatortype #1#2#3#4#5#6{% {name}{attributes}{precedence} + % {beginning-punc}{templates} + % {ending-punc} + {\setflag \pg = \true + \let \page = \relax + \def \nopage {\setflag \pg = \false}% + \setflag \txt = \false + \def \text {\setflag \txt = \true}% + \let \notext = \relax + #2% + \def \bpunc {#4}% + \def \temp {#5}% + \def \epunc {#6}% + \edef \znext {% + \noexpand\append{{#1}{\pg}{\txt}{#3}% + {\expandafter\zdefof \meaning\bpunc\zmark}% + {\expandafter\zdefof \meaning\temp\zmark}% + {\expandafter\zdefof \meaning\epunc\zmark}}}% + \znext{\zixloclist}% + \if \txt + \withname\gdef{\x#1}##1##2{\zixindex{#1}{##1}{S}{##2}}% + \if \pg + \withname\gdef{\x#1begin}##1##2{\zixindex{#1}{##1}{B}{##2}}% + \withname\gdef{\x#1end}##1##2{\zixindex{#1}{##1}{E}{##2}}% + \fi + \else + \withname\gdef{\x#1}##1{\zixindex{#1}{##1}{S}{}}% + \if \pg + \withname\gdef{\x#1begin}##1{\zixindex{#1}{##1}{B}{}}% + \withname\gdef{\x#1end}##1{\zixindex{#1}{##1}{E}{}}% + \fi + \fi}} + + +% This command is deprecated. + +\def \defineindexlocator #1#2#3#4#5#6{% {name}{attributes}{precedence} + % {punctuation}{single-template} + % {range-template} +} + +% Builtin Locator Types +% ------- ------- ----- + + +% Precedences 0--1 and 6--9 are reserved for specific books. + +\definelocatortype{term}{\page\notext}{2.3} + {, |}{\bold{~P}|\bold{~P--~Q}|, }{. |} +\definelocatortype{biblio}{\page\notext}{2.5} + {, |}{~P|~P--~Q|, }{. |} +\definelocatortype{cite}{\page\notext}{2.5} + {, |}{~P|~P--~Q|, }{. |} +\definelocatortype{page}{\page\notext}{2.5} + {, |}{~P|~P--~Q|, }{. |} +\definelocatortype{figure}{\page\notext}{2.7} + {, |}{~P\+\emph{f}|~P--~Q\+\emph{f}|, }{. |} +\definelocatortype{glossary}{\page\notext}{2.7} + {, |}{~P\+\emph{g}|~P--~Q\+\emph{g}|, }{. |} +\definelocatortype{note}{\page\notext}{2.8} + {, |}{~P\+\emph{n}|~P--~Q\+\emph{n}|, }{. |} +\definelocatortype{sidebar}{\page\notext}{2.7} + {, |}{~P\+\emph{s}|~P--~Q\+\emph{s}|, }{. |} +\definelocatortype{table}{\page\notext}{2.7} + {, |}{~P\+\emph{t}|~P--~Q\+\emph{t}|, }{. |} +\definelocatortype{see}{\nopage\text}{3} + {. |\See\ }{~T||; }{. |} +\definelocatortype{seealso}{\nopage\text}{4} + {. |\Seealso\ }{~T||; }{. |} +\definelocatortype{consult}{\nopage\text}{5} + {. |\Consult\ }{~T||; }{. |} + +% Index Preparation File +% ----- ----------- ---- + + +% The \produceindex command must appear before the \document command. + +\setflag \zindexing = \false + + +\def \produceindex #1#2{% {type}{prep-file} + {\processdesign{\index}{#1}% + \immediate\openout \zwritea = #2.zzh\relax + \immediate\write \zwritea {root \jobname}% + \immediate\write \zwritea {type #1}% + \immediate\write \zwritea {divisions {\the\divisions}}% + \immediate\write \zwritea {locators {\the\locators}}% + \immediate\write \zwritea {\the\indexparams}% + \maplist{\immediate\write \zwritea {define-locator ##1}}{\zixloclist}% + \immediate\closeout \zwritea}% + \global\setflag \zindexing = \true} + +% Index File Handling +% ----- ---- -------- + +\definewrite{\zixrootfile} +\definewrite{\zixdivfile} +\setflag \zixdivopen = \false + + +\def \zindexinit {% + \if \zindexing + \immediate\openout \zixrootfile = \jobname.zzi\relax + \immediate\write \zixrootfile + {\zcomment Raw index entry file for book `\jobname'.}% + \fi} + +\def \zindexfinal {% + \if \zindexing + \immediate\write \zixrootfile {\zcomment [end]}% + \immediate\closeout \zixrootfile + \fi} + +\def \zindexdivinit #1{% {division} + \if \zindexing + \immediate\openout \zixdivfile = #1.zzi\relax + \immediate\write \zixdivfile + {\zcomment Raw index entry file for book `\jobname', division `#1'.}% + \global\setflag \zixdivopen = \true + \fi} + +\def \zindexdivfinal {% + \if \zixdivopen + \immediate\write \zixdivfile {\zcomment [end]}% + \immediate\closeout \zixdivfile + \global\setflag \zixdivopen = \false + \fi} + +% Generate Index Entry +% -------- ----- ----- + + +% This macro is called from the indexing macros generated by +% \definelocatortype. + +\def \zixindex #1#2#3#4{% {locator}{level}{page-code}{text} + \tcounta = #2\relax + \if \notp{\rangep{\tcounta}{1}{3}}% + \error{invindexlvl}{Invalid index level '#2' specified}% + \tcounta = 1 + \fi + \name{\zixindex\romannumeral\tcounta}{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}} + +\def \zixindexi #1#2#3#4#5{% + \zixindexw{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{}{}{\noexpand\folio}} +\def \zixindexii #1#2#3#4#5#6{% + \zixindexw{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}{}{\noexpand\folio}} +\def \zixindexiii #1#2#3#4#5#6#7{% + \zixindexw{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}{#7}{\noexpand\folio}} + +\catcode"B8 = \catother + +\gdef \zixindexw #1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% {locator}{level}{page-code}{text} + % {heading1}{heading2}{heading3}{page} + \if \notp{\zindexing}% + \warning{notindexing}{An indexing command was encountered, + but no \string\produceindex}% + \fi + \zbeginhidewrite + \def \zhdx {#5}% + \def \zhdy {#6}% + \def \zhdz {#7}% + \def \ztxt {#4}% + \edef \znext {#1^^b8% + #2^^b8% + \expandafter\zdefof \meaning\zhdx\zmark^^b8% + \expandafter\zdefof \meaning\zhdy\zmark^^b8% + \expandafter\zdefof \meaning\zhdz\zmark^^b8% + #3^^b8% + #8^^b8% + \expandafter\zdefof \meaning\ztxt\zmark}% + \write \if \zixdivopen \zixdivfile \else \zixrootfile \fi + \expandafter{\znext}% + \if \vmodep \repeatpenalty \fi % In case glue follows write. + \zendhidewrite} + +\catcode"B8 = \catinvalid + +% Discussion of Index Formatting +% ---------- -- ----- ---------- + + +% An index is formatted inside an index block, which is more or less +% like a text block. Within the index block are occurences of the +% \indexentry macro, one for each entry. In addition, the +% \alphabreak macro can be used to produce breaks preceding the `A' +% entries, `B' entries, etc. +% +% In an index block, parts 4 and 5 of the mark are used to remember +% index entries so they can be carried forward to subsequent columns +% or pages. The mark is used as follows: +% +% Part Subpart Usage +% 4 1 Boolean, true if in the midst of a first-level entry. +% 4 2 The first-level entry text. +% 5 1 Boolean, true if in the midst of a second-level entry. +% 5 2 The second-level entry text. + +% Index Block +% ----- ----- + + +\defineblock{\index}{\endindex}{\false}{} + +%~block index Type +% \def \alphaformat ##1{...} % Alpha break formatter. +% \bodyfont = {\size\style} % Body font. +% \clubpenalty = penalty % Club penalty is often different. +% \columngutter = glue % Column gutter. +% \divisions = {...} % Which divisions to include. +% \leftindent = glue % Left indentation. +% \locators = {...} % Which locators to include. +% \indexparams = {...} % Parameters for index generator. +% \parhang = glue % Paragraph hang. +% \parindent = dimen % Paragraph indent. +% \parrag = dimen % Paragraph raggedness. +% \parskip = glue % Paragraph skip. +% \position = {...} % Position and number of columns. +% \rightindent = glue % Right indentation. +%~end + +\definetoks{\locators} +\definetoks{\indexparams} + +\definecount{\previndexlevel}{0} +\definecount{\zixcols}{0} + + +\def \index #1{% {type} + \blockcantbein{\index}{\index}% + \beginblockscope{index}% + \global\increment \indexdepth + \clubpenalty = \breakallowed %~default soft + \parskip = 0pt %~default soft + \processdesign{\index}{#1}% + \global\increment \indexnumber + \def \zixtype {#1}% + \zixparsepos + \indexformat} + +\def \indexformat {% + \the\bodyfont + \alterindentation{\leftindent}{\rightindent}% + \setparrag{\parrag}% + \setpagecolumns{\zixpageuse}{\the\zixcols}{\columngutter}% + \everycolumn = {\zixcarryover}% + \begingroup + \let \zfullcolumnbreak = \fullcolumnbreak + \let \fullcolumnbreak = \indexbreak + \let \shortcolumnbreak = \indexbreak + \global\previndexlevel = 0\relax} + +\def \endindex {% + \endgraf % End last entry. + \vbox{}% % Force start of column if not already. + \endgroup + \clearindexmarks + \everycolumn = {}% + \setpagecolumns{\usetextmeasure}{1}{0pt}% + \global\decrement \indexdepth + \endblockscope{index}} + +\def \zixparsepos {% + \zixcols = 1 + \let \oneup = \relax + \def \twoup {\zixcols = 2}% + \def \threeup {\zixcols = 3}% + \def \zixpageuse {\usetextmeasure}% + \let \textarea = \relax + \def \typearea {\def \zixpageuse {\usetypewidth}}% + \let \leftmargin = \typearea + \the\position} + +% Index Entries +% ----- ------- + + +\setflag \zixbreak = \false + + +\def \indexentry #1#2#3{% level{heading}{locators} + \endgraf + \ifcase #1% + \or % Level 1 heading: + \clearindexmarks + \zixmaybebreak + \hangindent = \parhang \hangafter = 1 + {\name{\index\zixtype entryiformat}{#2\setmarkinfo{4}{\true}{#2}}{#3}}% +%%% \setmarkinfo{4}{\true}{#2}% + \or % Level 2 heading: + \setmarkinfo{5}{\false}{}% + \zixmaybebreak + \hangindent = \parhang \hangafter = 1 + {\name{\index\zixtype entryiiformat}{#2\setmarkinfo{5}{\true}{#2}}{#3}}% +%%% \setmarkinfo{5}{\true}{#2}% + \or % Level 3 heading: + \zixmaybebreak + \hangindent = \parhang \hangafter = 1 + {\name{\index\zixtype entryiiiformat}{#2}{#3}}% + \fi + \global\previndexlevel = #1\relax} + +\def \alphabreak #1{% {text} + \endgraf + \clearindexmarks + \zixmaybebreak + \alphaformat{#1}% + \endgraf} + +\def \indexbreak {% + \setflag \zixbreak = \true} + +\def \clearindexmarks {% + \setmarkinfo{4}{\false}{}% + \setmarkinfo{5}{\false}{}} + +\def \zixmaybebreak {% + \if \zixbreak + \zfullcolumnbreak + \setflag \zixbreak = \false + \fi} + + +% This macro is invoked at the beginning of each column to perform +% any first- and second-level entry carryovers. It only includes +% carryovers on the first column of versos. + +\def \zixcarryover {% + \if \andp{\evenpagep}{\firstcolumnp}% + {\setflag \znext = {\markinfo{\bottommark}{4}{1}}% + \if \znext + \hangindent = \parhang \hangafter = 1 + \name{\index\zixtype carryiformat}{\markinfo{\bottommark}{4}{2}}% + \setflag \znext = {\markinfo{\bottommark}{5}{1}}% + \if \znext + \hangindent = \parhang \hangafter = 1 + \name{\index\zixtype carryiiformat}{\markinfo{\bottommark}{5}{2}}% + \fi + \endgraf + \tdimena = \zoutputcoldepth % Compensate for depth of + \advance \tdimena by -\prevdepth % previous column v. depth + \kern \tdimena % of carryover line(s). + \fi}% + \fi} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzindexv2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzindexv2.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e17a73102e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzindexv2.tex @@ -0,0 +1,448 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Indexing Facilities, version 2 +% +% Synopsis: This file contains the facilities for generating index +% parameter files, raw entry files, and for setting the indexes. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 13 June 2013 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Define Index Locators +% ------ ----- -------- + + +% This list contains the definition of each locator. New ones must be +% added to the end, and any program looking at the definitions must assume +% that duplicates may exist and that the last one prevails. + +\def \zixloclist {} + + +\def \definelocator #1#2#3{% {type}{attributes}{[format-args]} + {\setflag \pg = \false + \setflag \rng = \false + \setflag \txt = \false + \def \page {\setflag \pg = \true}% + \def \nopage {\setflag \pg = \false}% + \def \range {\setflag \pg = \true \setflag \rng = \true}% + \def \norange {\setflag \rng = \false}% + \def \text {\setflag \txt = \true}% + \def \notext {\setflag \txt = \false}% + #2% + {\def \attr {#2}% + \edef \znext {% + \noexpand\append{{#1}{\expandafter\zdefof \meaning\attr\zmark}}}% + \znext{\zixloclist}}% + \if \andp{\pg}{\notp{\txt}}% + \withname\gdef{\x#1}##1{\zixindex{#1}{S}{##1}{}}% + \if \rng + \withname\gdef{\x#1begin}##1{\zixindex{#1}{B}{##1}{}}% + \withname\gdef{\x#1end}##1{\zixindex{#1}{E}{##1}{}}% + \fi + \else\if \txt + \withname\gdef{\x#1}##1##2{\zixindex{#1}{S}{##1}{##2}}% + \if \rng + \withname\gdef{\x#1begin}##1##2{\zixindex{#1}{B}{##1}{##2}}% + \withname\gdef{\x#1end}##1##2{\zixindex{#1}{E}{##1}{##2}}% + \fi + \else + \error{locattr}{Invalid index locator attributes}% + \fi\fi + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#3}}% + \definelocatorformat{#1}#3\relax + \fi}} + +% Define Locator Formats +% ------ ------- ------- + + +% This list contains the definition of each locator format. It works like +% the locator list above. + +\def \zixformatlist {} + +\def \definelocatorformat #1#2#3#4{% {name}{rank.order}{level-1-items}{level-2-items} + {\def \lvli {#3}% + \def \lvlii {#4}% + \edef \znext {% + \noexpand\append{{#1}{#2}% + {\expandafter\zdefof \meaning\lvli\zmark}% + {\expandafter\zdefof \meaning\lvlii\zmark}}}% + \znext{\zixformatlist}}} + +% Builtin Locator Types +% ------- ------- ----- + + +% These locators are built-in for ease of use. Ranks 0, 1, and 5 and higher +% are reserved for the user. Ranks 10 and higher result in deferred +% locators. + +\definelocator{page}{\page\range} + {{2.1}{prefix1:, |tmplt:?P|rtmplt:?P--?Q|sep:, }{}} + +\definelocator{figure}{\page\range} + {{2.3}{prefix1:, |tmplt:?P\emph{f}|rtmplt:?P--?Q\emph{f}|sep:, }{}} + +\definelocator{note}{\page} + {{2.5}{prefix1:, |tmplt:?P\emph{n}|sep:, }{}} + +\definelocator{table}{\page\range} + {{2.7}{prefix1:, |tmplt:?P\emph{t}|rtmplt:?P--?Q\emph{t}|sep:, }{}} + +\definelocator{see}{\nopage\text} + {{3}{prefix1:. \emph{See} |tmplt:?T|sep:; }{}} + +\definelocator{seealso}{\nopage\text} + {{4}{prefix1:. \emph{See also} |tmplt:?T|sep:; }{}} + +% Generate Indexes +% -------- ------- + + +\def \zixnamelist {} +\setflag \zindexing = \false + + +\def \generateindex #1{% {name} + \append{#1}{\zixnamelist}% + \global\setflag \zindexing = \true} + +% Index File Handling +% ----- ---- -------- + +%\definewrite{\zixrootfile} +%\definewrite{\zixdivfile} +\setflag \zixdivopen = \false + + +\def \zindexinit {% + \if \zindexing + \maplist{\zixwritezzp{##1}}{\zixnamelist}% + \immediate\openout \zixrootfile = \jobname.zzi\relax + \immediate\write \zixrootfile + {\zcomment Raw index entry file for book `\jobname' root.}% + \fi} + +\def \zindexfinal {% + \if \zindexing + \immediate\write \zixrootfile {\zcomment [end]}% + \immediate\closeout \zixrootfile + \fi} + +\def \zindexdivinit #1{% {division} + \if \zindexing + \immediate\openout \zixdivfile = #1.zzi\relax + \immediate\write \zixdivfile + {\zcomment Raw index entry file for book `\jobname', division `#1'.}% + \global\setflag \zixdivopen = \true + \fi} + +\def \zindexdivfinal {% + \if \zixdivopen + \immediate\write \zixdivfile {\zcomment [end]}% + \immediate\closeout \zixdivfile + \global\setflag \zixdivopen = \false + \fi} + +\def \zixwritezzp #1{% {name} + \begingroup + \processdesign{\index}{#1}% + \immediate\openout \zwritea = #1.zzp\relax + \immediate\write \zwritea {root \jobname;}% + \immediate\write \zwritea {index #1;}% + \immediate\write \zwritea {divisions \the\divisions;}% + \maplist{\immediate\write \zwritea {define-locator ##1;}}{\zixloclist}% + \maplist{\immediate\write \zwritea {define-format ##1;}}{\zixformatlist}% + \immediate\write \zwritea {locators \the\locators;}% + \immediate\write \zwritea {\the\indexparams}% + \immediate\closeout \zwritea + \endgroup} + +% Write Raw Index Entry +% ----- --- ----- ----- + + +% This macro is called from the indexing macros defined by +% \definelocator. + +\def \zixindex #1#2#3#4{% {locator}{page-code}{headings}{[text]} + \zixindexb {#1}{#2}{#4}#3|||\zmark} + +\catcode"B8 = \catother + +\def \zixindexb #1#2#3#4|#5|#6|#7\zmark{% {locator}{page-code}{text} + % head1|head2|head3|...\zmark + \if \zindexing + \zbeginhidewrite + \def \zhdx {#4}% + \def \zhdy {#5}% + \def \zhdz {#6}% + \def \ztxt {#3}% + \edef \znext {#1^^b8% + #2^^b8% + \noexpand\folio^^b8% + \expandafter\zdefof \meaning\zhdx\zmark^^b8% + \expandafter\zdefof \meaning\zhdy\zmark^^b8% + \expandafter\zdefof \meaning\zhdz\zmark^^b8% + \expandafter\zdefof \meaning\ztxt\zmark}% + \write \if \zixdivopen \zixdivfile \else \zixrootfile \fi + \expandafter{\znext}% + \if \vmodep \repeatpenalty \fi % In case glue follows write. + \zendhidewrite + \fi} + +\catcode"B8 = \catinvalid + +% Discussion of Index Formatting +% ---------- -- ----- ---------- + + +% An index is formatted inside an index block, which is more or less +% like a text block. Within the index block are occurences of the +% \indexentry macro, one for each entry. In addition, the +% \alphabreak macro can be used to produce breaks preceding the 'A' +% entries, 'B' entries, etc. +% +% In an index block, parts 4 and 5 of the mark are used to remember +% index headings so they can be carried forward to subsequent columns +% or pages. The mark is used as follows: +% +% Part Subpart Usage +% 4 1 Boolean, true if in the midst of a first-level entry. +% 4 2 The first-level entry heading. +% 5 1 Boolean, true if in the midst of a second-level entry. +% 5 2 The second-level entry heading. + +% Index Block +% ----- ----- + + +\defineblock{\index}{\endindex}{\false}{redefine} + +%~block index Type +% \def \alphaformat ##1{...} % Alphabetic break formatter. +% \bodyfont = {\size\style} % Body font. +% \clubpenalty = penalty % Club penalty is often different. +% \columngutter = glue % Column gutter. +% \divisions = {...} % Which divisions to include. +% \leftindent = glue % Left indentation. +% \locators = {...} % Which locators to include. +% \indexparams = {...} % Parameters for index generator. +% \parhang = glue % Paragraph hang. +% \parindent = dimen % Paragraph indent. +% \parrag = dimen % Paragraph raggedness. +% \parskip = glue % Paragraph skip. +% \position = {...} % Position and number of columns. +% \rightindent = glue % Right indentation. +%~end + +%\definetoks{\locators} +%\definetoks{\indexparams} + +%\definecount{\previndexlevel}{0} +%\definecount{\zixcols}{0} + + +\def \index #1{% {type} + \blockcantbein{\index}{\index}% + \beginblockscope{index}% + \global\increment \indexdepth + \clubpenalty = \breakallowed %~default soft + \parskip = 0pt %~default soft + \processdesign{\index}{#1}% + \global\increment \indexnumber + \def \zixname {#1}% + \zixparsepos + \indexformat} + +\def \indexformat {% + \the\bodyfont + \alterindentation{\leftindent}{\rightindent}% + \setparrag{\parrag}% + \setpagecolumns{\zixpageuse}{\the\zixcols}{\columngutter}% + \everycolumn = {\zixcarryover}% + \begingroup + \let \zfullcolumnbreak = \fullcolumnbreak + \let \fullcolumnbreak = \zixcolumnbreak + \let \shortcolumnbreak = \zixcolumnbreak + \global\previndexlevel = 0\relax} + +\def \endindex {% + \endgraf % End last entry. + \vbox{}% % Force start of column if not already. + \endgroup + \zclearindexmarks + \everycolumn = {}% + \setpagecolumns{\usetextmeasure}{1}{0pt}% + \global\decrement \indexdepth + \endblockscope{index}} + +\def \zixparsepos {% + \zixcols = 1 + \def \zixpageuse {\usetextmeasure}% + \setflag \zixrunin = \false + \let \oneup = \relax + \let \outline = \relax + \def \runin {\setflag \zixrunin = \true}% + \def \threeup {\zixcols = 3}% + \def \twoup {\zixcols = 2}% + \let \usetextmeasure = \relax + \let \usetextwidth = \relax + \def \usetypewidth {\def \zixpageuse {\usetypewidth}}% + \the\position} + +% Format Index Entries +% ------ ----- ------- + + +\setflag \zixbreak = \false + + +% This macro formats the main portion of an index entry. + +\def \indexentry #1#2#3{% level{heading}{locators} + \ifcase #1% + \or % Level 1 heading: + \endgraf + \zclearindexmarks + \zixmaybeforcebreak + \hangindent = \parhang \hangafter = 1 + {\name{\index\zixname entryiformat}{#2\setmarkinfo{4}{\true}{#2}}{#3}}% + \or % Level 2 heading: + \if \notp{\zixrunin}% + \endgraf + \if \eqlp{\previndexlevel}{1}\vpenalty{\breaknever}\fi + \fi + \setmarkinfo{5}{\false}{}% + \zixmaybeforcebreak + \hangindent = \parhang \hangafter = 1 + {\name{\index\zixname entryiiformat}{#2\setmarkinfo{5}{\true}{#2}}{#3}}% + \or % Level 3 heading: + \if \notp{\zixrunin}\endgraf \fi + \zixmaybeforcebreak + \hangindent = \parhang \hangafter = 1 + {\name{\index\zixname entryiiiformat}{#2}{#3}}% + \fi + \global\previndexlevel = #1\relax + \ignorespaces} + +% This macro format any deferred locators. + +\def \indexdeferred #1#2{% level{locators} + \ifcase #1% + \or % Level 1 deferred locators: + \if \notp{\zixrunin}\endgraf \fi + \setmarkinfo{5}{\false}{}% + \zixmaybeforcebreak + \hangindent = \parhang \hangafter = 1 + {\name{\index\zixname deferrediformat}{#2}}% + \or % Level 2 deferred locators: + \if \notp{\zixrunin}\endgraf \fi + \zixmaybeforcebreak + \hangindent = \parhang \hangafter = 1 + {\name{\index\zixname deferrediiformat}{#2}}% + \fi + \ignorespaces} + +\def \alphabreak #1{% {text} + \endgraf + \zclearindexmarks + \zixmaybeforcebreak + \alphaformat{#1}% + \endgraf} + +\def \zclearindexmarks {% + \setmarkinfo{4}{\false}{}% + \setmarkinfo{5}{\false}{}} + +\def \zixcolumnbreak {% + \setflag \zixbreak = \true} + +\def \zixmaybeforcebreak {% + \if \zixbreak + \zfullcolumnbreak + \setflag \zixbreak = \false + \fi} + + +% This macro is invoked at the beginning of each column to perform +% any first- and second-level entry carryovers. It only includes +% carryovers on the first column of versos. + +\def \zixcarryover {% + \if \andp{\evenpagep}{\firstcolumnp}% + {\setflag \znext = {\markinfo{\bottommark}{4}{1}}% + \if \znext + \hangindent = \parhang \hangafter = 1 + \name{\index\zixname carryoveriformat}{\markinfo{\bottommark}{4}{2}}% + \setflag \znext = {\markinfo{\bottommark}{5}{1}}% + \if \znext + \hangindent = \parhang \hangafter = 1 + \name{\index\zixname carryoveriiformat}{\markinfo{\bottommark}{5}{2}}% + \fi + \endgraf + \tdimena = \zoutputcoldepth % Compensate for depth of + \advance \tdimena by -\prevdepth % previous column v. depth + \kern \tdimena % of carryover line(s). + \fi}% + \fi} + +% Built-in Entry Formats +% -------- ----- ------- + + +% These entry formats and carryovers are for a typical outliine style index. + +\def \indexoutlineentryiformat #1#2{% + \noindent #1#2\par} + +\def \indexoutlineentryiiformat #1#2{% + \indent #1#2\par} + +\def \indexoutlineentryiiiformat #1#2{% + \indent\indent #1#2\par} + +\def \indexoutlinedeferrediformat #1{% + \indent #1\par} + +\def \indexoutlinedeferrediiformat #1{% + \indent\indent #1\par} + +\def \indexoutlinecarryoveriformat #1{% + \noindent #1 \tie{\emph{(continued)}}\par} + +\def \indexoutlinecarryoveriiformat #1{% + \indent #1 \tie{\emph{(continued)}}\par} + +% These entry formats and carryovers are for a typical run-in style index. + +\setflag \zixplain = \false + +\def \indexruninentryiformat #1#2{% + \noindent #1#2% + \global\setflag \zixplain = {\emptyargp{#2}}% + \if \zixplain :\space \fi} + +\def \indexruninentryiiformat #1#2{% + \if \notp{\zixplain};\space \fi + \global\setflag \zixplain = \false + #1#2} + +\def \indexruninentryiiiformat #1#2{% + \error{runiniii}{It makes no sense to have level-3 entries in a run-in index}} + +\def \indexrunindeferrediformat #1{% + . #1} + +\def \indexrunincarryoveriformat #1{% + \noindent #1 \tie{\emph{(continued)}}\par} + +\def \indexrunincarryoveriiformat #1{% + \relax} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzio.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzio.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..04a3fbbfac1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzio.tex @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX I/O Facilities +% +% Synopsis: +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 9 September 1989 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Terminal & Log I/O +% -------- - --- --- + +% \message writes to the terminal and the log file, without newlines. +% This macro adds a newline feature: + +\def \messagenl #1{% {text} + {\newlinechar = `\_% + \message{#1}}} + +% This macro writes a line to the log file, with a newline at the end. + +\def \writelog {\immediate\write -1} + +% \ask combines a prompt using \messagenl with a read from the terminal. + +\def \ask #1#2{% {\result-macro}{question} + {\messagenl{_#2}% + \endlinechar = -1 + \global\read 16 to #1}} + +% Including Files +% --------- ----- + + +\def \include #1{% {file} + {\checkfile{\zifile}{#1}% + \if \zifile + \gdef \znext {\input #1\relax}% + \else + \warning{noinclfile}{File `#1' does not exist}% + \ask{\newfile}{Enter a new file name, or a period (.) to skip it.}% + \stringeql{\znext}{\newfile}{.}% + \if \znext + \xdef \znext {}% + \else + \xdef \znext {\noexpand\include{\newfile}}% + \fi + \fi}% + \znext + \endgraf} + +\def \zportionid {} + +\def \includeportion #1#2{% {file}{portion-id} + \gdef \zportionid {#2}% + \include{#1}% + \gdef \zportionid {}} + +\def \portion #1{% {portion-id} + \stringeql{\znext}{#1}{\zportionid}% + \if \znext} + +\let \endportion = \fi + +\def \includeifexists #1{% {file} + \checkfile{\zifile}{#1}% + \if \zifile + \input #1\relax + \endgraf + \fi} + +% Utilities +% --------- + + +\def \checkfile #1#2{% {\result-flag}{file} + \openin \zreada #2\relax + \setflag #1= {\notp{\eofp{\zreada}}}% + \closein \zreada} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzlist.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzlist.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..197090d153e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzlist.tex @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX List Facilities +% +% Synopsis: +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 12 September 1989 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% List Block +% ---- ----- + + +\defineblock{\list}{\endlist}{\false}{} +\resetinvcontext{\list} + +%~block list Type, Level +% \abovepenalty = integer % Penalty above list. +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above list. +% \setflag \allowitemtag = flag % Allow \tag command on item. +% \belowpenalty = integer % Penalty below list. +% \belowskip = glue % Space b/b below list. +% \bodyfont = {...} % Font for text. +% \def \endpartext {...} % Text at end of each paragraph. +% \interitemskip = skip % Extra space between items. +% \itemnumber = integer % Number of first item. +% \def \labelformat ##1{...} % Item label formatter. +% \labelshift = dimen % Horizontal shift of label. +% \def \labeltext {...} % Label text or \arg if \item{...}. +% \labelwidth = dimen % Width of label or \naturalwidth. +% \leftindent = glue % Left indentation. +% \parindent = glue % Paragraph indent. +% \parrag = dimen % Paragraph raggedness. +% \parskip = glue % Paragraph skip. +% \rightindent = glue % Right indentation. +% \def \tagcomptext {...} % Composite text for tag, if not label. +% \width = dimen % Width of text. +%~end + +\defineskip{\interitemskip}{0pt} +\definedimen{\labelshift}{0pt} +\definedimen{\labelwidth}{0pt} + +\definecount{\nextitemnumber}{0} + + +\def \list #1{% {type} + \endgraf + \beginblockscope{list}% + \global\increment \listdepth + \abovepenalty = \breakgood %~default hard + \setflag \allowitemtag = \false %~default soft + \belowpenalty = \breakgood %~default hard + \def \endpartext {}% %~default hard + \itemnumber = 1 %~default with + \def \tagcomptext {}% %~default soft + \processdesign{\list}{#1\romannumeral\listdepth}% + \global\increment \listnumber + \decrement \itemnumber + \listformat + \def \par {\endpartext \endgraf}% + \settaginfo{}{}} % No tag info so far. + +\def \endlist {% + \par + \futurelet\nexttoken \zendlist} + +\def \zendlist {% + \closeifinblock{\item}{\enditem}% + \endlistformat + \if \onep{\listdepth}% + \global\nextitemnumber = \itemnumber + \global\increment \nextitemnumber + \fi + \global\decrement \listdepth + \endblockscope{list}% + \parnext} + +\def \listformat {% + \the\bodyfont + \bbskipabove{\abovepenalty}{\aboveskip}% + \alterindentation{\leftindent}{\rightindent}% + \settextwidth{\width}% + \setparrag{\parrag}% + \advance \interitemskip by \baselineskip} + +\def \endlistformat{% + \bbskipbelowblockpar{\nexttoken}{\belowpenalty}{\belowskip}} + + +% This macro helps with a list design that involves measuring some text. + +\def \setmeasuredlabel #1#2#3{% {extra-indent}{template}{formatter} + \def \labelformat ##1{#3}% + \measuretextwidth{\labelwidth}{#2}% + \labelshift = -\labelwidth + \leftindent = \labelwidth + \advance \leftindent by #1\relax} + +\def \adjustinteritemskip #1{% {amount} %^modifier + \with{\advance\interitemskip by #1}} + +%~ This modifier on |\list| is used when a list immediately follows +%~ an |\item| command; that is, when an item is a sublist. +%~ It eliminates the vertical space above the sublist. + +\def \immediatesublist {% %^modifier + \with{\abovepenalty = \breaknever + \aboveskip = 0pt}} + +% Item Block +% ---- ----- + +% The \item block is subordinate to the \list block, and thus inherits all +% of its design parameters from \list. + + +\defineblock{\item}{\enditem}{\false}{} + +%~block item +% \difficulty = integer % Level of difficulty. +%~end + +\def \item {% [{label}] + \blockmustbein{\item}{\list}% + \closeifinblock{\item}{\enditem}% + % Don't bother with block scope. + \difficulty = 0 %~default with + \zprocesswith % Instead of \processdesign. + \increment \itemnumber + \bbskipabove{\breakgood}{\interitemskip}% + \def \zarg {\arg}% + \if \tokeqlp{\labeltext}{\zarg}% + \def \znext {\itemformat}% + \else + \def \znext {\itemformat{\labeltext}}% + \fi + \znext} + +\def \enditem {% + \par} + +\def \itemformat #1{% {label} + \noindent + \kern \labelshift + \if \dimeqlp{\labelwidth}{\naturalwidth}% + {\labelformat{#1}}% + \else + \hbox to \labelwidth{\labelformat{#1}}% + \fi + \if \allowitemtag + \if \emptydefp{\tagcomptext}% + \settaginfo{#1}{???}% + \else + \settaginfo{\tagcomptext}{???}% + \fi + \fi + \ignorespaces} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzltrspc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzltrspc.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7fcd6e5d72d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzltrspc.tex @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: Letterspacing Facility +% +% Synopsis: This module provides a fairly comprehensive letterspacing +% facility for ZzTeX. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 10 July 1997 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Letterspacing Commands +% ------------- -------- + + +\defineskip{\zlspamount}{0pt} +\defineskip{\zlspace}{0pt} + + +\def \letterspace #1#2{% {amount[,space]}{text} + {\zlspparse #1,,\zmark + \zletterspace{#2}}} + +\def \eletterspace #1#2{% {amount[,space]}{text} + \edef \znext {\noexpand\letterspace{#1}{#2}}% + \znext} + +\def \zlspparse #1,#2,#3\zmark{% + \zlspamount = #1\relax + \if \emptyargp{#2}% + \measurespacewidth{\zlspace}% + \advance \zlspace by \zlspamount + \else + \zlspace = #2\relax + \fi} + +% These commands can be used in letterspaced text, but must do nothing +% when letterspacing is not in progress. + +\let \lsp = \relax +\let \nolsp = \relax +\def \lspspace {\space}% +\def \zlspoff {\relax}% +\def \lspoff {\zlspoff}% +\def \zlspon {\relax}% +\def \lspon {\zlspon}% + +% Letterspacing Engine +% ------------- ------ + + +\def \zletterspace #1{% {text} + \def \lsp {\nobreak\hskip \zlspamount}% + \def \lspspace {\hskip \zlspace}% + \def \zzlspoff {\zlspoff}% + \def \zzlspon {\zlspon}% + \setflag \zlsping = \true + \let \zlspprev = \relax + \setflag \zlspprevchar = \false + \let \zmark = \relax + {\zlspa #1\zmark}} + +\def \zlspa {\futurelet\zlspcur \zlspb} + +\def \zlspb {% + \let \znext = \zlspc + \if \tokeqlp{\zlspcur}{\zmark}% + \let \znext = \relax + \else\if \cateqlp{\noexpand\zlspcur}{\zspacetoken}% + \if \zlsping \aftergroup\lspspace \else \aftergroup\space \fi + \else\if \cateqlp{\noexpand\zlspcur}{\bgroup}% + \aftergroup{% + \else\if \cateqlp{\noexpand\zlspcur}{\egroup}% + \aftergroup}% + \else\if \tokeqlp{\zlspcur}{\zzlspoff}% + \setflag \zlsping = \false + \else\if \tokeqlp{\zlspcur}{\zzlspon}% + \setflag \zlsping = \true + \else + \let \znext = \zlspd + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \znext} + +\def \zlspc {% Discard current token. + \let \zlspprev = \zlspcur + \setflag \zlspprevchar = \false + \afterassignment\zlspa \let\zlspcur = } + +\long\def \zlspd #1{% Process current token. + \let \zlspprev = \zlspcur + \if \cateqlp{\noexpand#1}{\relax}% + \setflag \zlspprevchar = \false + \aftergroup#1% + \else\if \cateqlp{\noexpand#1}{\noexpand~}% + \setflag \zlspprevchar = \false + \if \zlsping \aftergroup\lspspace \else \aftergroup\space \fi + \else\if \orp{\andp{\codeeqlp{\zlspprev}{-}}{\codeeqlp{\zlspcur}{-}}} + {\orp{\andp{\codeeqlp{\zlspprev}{`}}{\codeeqlp{\zlspcur}{`}}} + {\andp{\codeeqlp{\zlspprev}{'}}{\codeeqlp{\zlspcur}{'}}}}% + \setflag \zlspprevchar = \true + \aftergroup#1% + \else + \if \andp{\zlspprevchar}{\zlsping}\aftergroup\lsp \fi + \setflag \zlspprevchar = \true + \aftergroup#1% + \fi\fi\fi + \zlspa} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzlucida.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzlucida.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6bfc5e55540 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzlucida.tex @@ -0,0 +1,140 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Lucida Math Font Support +% +% Synopsis: This module contains various definitions and redefinitions +% necessary to use the Lucida math fonts. +% +% Note: This module assumes the user is generating PostScript output. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 27 June 1992 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Type Styles +% ---- ------ + +\setstyleskewchar{\msy}{"7F} +\setstyleskewchar{\msy}{"30} + +% Redefine Math Characters +% -------- ---- ---------- + + +\zmchar \Gamma \classvarfam \mexfam {D0} +\zmchar \Delta \classvarfam \mexfam {D1} +\zmchar \Theta \classvarfam \mexfam {D2} +\zmchar \Lambda \classvarfam \mexfam {D3} +\zmchar \Xi \classvarfam \mexfam {D4} +\zmchar \Pi \classvarfam \mexfam {D5} +\zmchar \Sigma \classvarfam \mexfam {D6} +\zmchar \Upsilon \classvarfam \mexfam {D7} +\zmchar \Phi \classvarfam \mexfam {D8} +\zmchar \Psi \classvarfam \mexfam {D9} +\zmchar \Omega \classvarfam \mexfam {DA} + +\zmchar {`=} \classrel \msyfam {83} +\zmchar {`+} \classbinop \msyfam {82} + +\definemathdelimiter {`/} \classord \mitfam {3D} \mexfam {0E} + +\zmchar {`(} \classopen \mitfam {84} +\definemathdelimiter {`(} \classord \mitfam {84} \mexfam {00} +\zmchar {`)} \classclose \mitfam {85} +\definemathdelimiter {`)} \classord \mitfam {85} \mexfam {01} + +\zmchar {`[} \classopen \mitfam {86} +\definemathdelimiter {`[} \classord \mitfam {86} \mexfam {02} +\zmchar {`]} \classclose \mitfam {87} +\definemathdelimiter {`]} \classord \mitfam {87} \mexfam {03} + +\zmchar \angle \classord \msyfam {8B} +\zmchar \bowtie \classrel \mitfam {F6} +\zmchar \cong \classrel \msyfam {9B} +\zmchar \doteq \classrel \msyfam {C9} +\zmchar \models \classrel \msyfam {EE} + + \if \zusemar +\zmchar \hbar \classord \mitfam {9D} +\zmchar \hookleftarrow \classrel \marfam {3C} +\zmchar \hookrightarrow \classrel \marfam {3E} +\zmchar \leftrightharpoons \classrel \marfam {79} +\zmchar \mapsto \classrel \marfam {2C} +\zmchar \neq \classrel \marfam {94} +\zmchar \rightleftharpoons \classrel \marfam {7A} + \fi + +% New Math Characters +% --- ---- ---------- + + + \if \zusemar +\zmchar \notapprox \classrel \marfam {98} +\zmchar \notasymp \classrel \marfam {F3} +\zmchar \notcong \classrel \marfam {99} +\zmchar \noteq \classrel \marfam {94} +\zmchar \notequiv \classrel \marfam {95} +\zmchar \notgeq \classrel \marfam {9D} +\zmchar \notgreater \classrel \marfam {9B} +\zmchar \notin \classrel \marfam {1D} +\zmchar \notleq \classrel \marfam {9C} +\zmchar \notless \classrel \marfam {9A} +\zmchar \notmid \classrel \marfam {F6} +\zmchar \notmodels \classrel \marfam {F9} +\zmchar \notni \classrel \marfam {1F} +\zmchar \notparallel \classrel \marfam {F7} +\zmchar \notprec \classrel \marfam {E5} +\zmchar \notpreceq \classrel \marfam {E7} +\zmchar \notsim \classrel \marfam {96} +\zmchar \notsimeq \classrel \marfam {97} +\zmchar \notsqsubseteq \classrel \marfam {D4} +\zmchar \notsqsupseteq \classrel \marfam {D5} +\zmchar \notsubset \classrel \marfam {C6} +\zmchar \notsubseteq \classrel \marfam {C8} +\zmchar \notsucc \classrel \marfam {E6} +\zmchar \notsucceq \classrel \marfam {E8} +\zmchar \notsupset \classrel \marfam {C7} +\zmchar \notsupseteq \classrel \marfam {C9} +\zmchar \notvdash \classrel \marfam {F8} + \fi + +% Redefine General Tools +% -------- ------- ----- + + +\def \big #1{{\hbox{$\left#1\vbox to 8.2pt{}\right.\zmnosp$}}} +\def \Big #1{{\hbox{$\left#1\vbox to 10.8pt{}\right.\zmnosp$}}} +\def \bigg #1{{\hbox{$\left#1\vbox to 13.42pt{}\right.\zmnosp$}}} +\def \Bigg #1{{\hbox{$\left#1\vbox to 16.03pt{}\right.\zmnosp$}}} +\def \biggg #1{{\hbox{$\left#1\vbox to 17.72pt{}\right.\zmnosp$}}} +\def \Biggg #1{{\hbox{$\left#1\vbox to 21.25pt{}\right.\zmnosp$}}} + +\def \bigggl {\mathopen\biggg} +\def \Bigggl {\mathopen\Biggg} +\def \bigggr {\mathclose\biggg} +\def \Bigggr {\mathclose\Biggg} + +\def \joinrel {\mathrel{\mkern -4mu}} + +\def \mathstrut {\vphantom{f}} + +\def \matrix #1{% + \null\nonscript\,% + \vcenter{\normalbaselines + \ialign{\hfil $##$\hfil&& \quad \hfil $##$\hfil \crcr + \mathstrut\crcr + \noalign{\kern -0.9\baselineskip}% + #1\crcr + \mathstrut\crcr + \noalign{\kern -0.9\baselineskip}}}% + \nonscript\,} + +\def \zroot #1#2{% {\style}{radicand} + \setbox\zboxa = \hbox{$#1\sqrt{#2}$}% + \tdimena = \ht\zboxa + \advance \tdimena by -\dp\zboxa + \mkern 5mu \raise .6\tdimena \copy\zrootbox \mkern -8mu \box\zboxa} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmath.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmath.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9a39dd2f0b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmath.tex @@ -0,0 +1,1919 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Mathematics Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This file provides the mathematics facilities of +% ZzTeX. All of the Plain TeX math stuff is included. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 14 November 1990 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Math Version +% ---- ------- + + +\definecount{\zmathver}{0} + + +\def \mathversion #1{% + \global\zmathver = #1\relax + \input zzmathv#1\relax} + +% Alternate Math Fonts +% --------- ---- ----- + + +\outer\def \ComputerModernmathfonts {% + \input zzcmmath\relax} + +\outer\def \Lucidamathfonts #1{% {arrows?} + \setflag \zusemar = #1\relax + \input zzlucida\relax} + +\outer\def \MathTimefonts {% + \input zzmtime\relax} + +% Spacing +% ------- + + +% Note major uses of each kind of space: +% thin: around large operators; after punctuation +% medium: around binary operators +% thick: around relational operators + +\def \setmathspaces #1#2#3{% {thin}{medium}{thick} + \global\thinmuskip = #1\relax + \global\medmuskip = #2\relax + \global\thickmuskip = #3\relax} + +\def \mthickspace {\mkern 2\thinmuskip} + +\def \mthinspace {\mkern \thinmuskip} +\def \mnegthinspace {\mkern -\thinmuskip} + +\def \mspace #1{\mkern #1\relax}% {mu} + +% Math mode \, \; \! are in ZZHMODE. + +\def \setTeXmathspaces {% + \setmathspaces{3mu}{4mu plus 2mu minus 4mu}{5mu plus 5mu}} + +% Character Definition +% --------- ---------- + + +% These are the math character classes: + +\chardef \classord = 0 % An ordinary symbol (\alpha). %^math_class +\chardef \classlargeop = 1 % A large operator (\sum).. %^math_class +\chardef \classbinop = 2 % A binary operator (+). %^math_class +\chardef \classrel = 3 % A relation (=). %^math_class +\chardef \classopen = 4 % An opening fence ([). %^math_class +\chardef \classclose = 5 % A closing fence (]). %^math_class +\chardef \classpunc = 6 % A punctuation character (,). %^math_class +\chardef \classvarfam = 7 % A character that varies with \fam (\Gamma). %^math_class +\chardef \classactive = 8 % An active character ('). %^math_class + + +\def \definemathaccent #1#2#3#4{% {name}{class}{family}{hex-code} + {\zcalcmathcode{#2}{#3}{#4}% + \xdef #1{\mathaccent \the\tcounta\relax}}% + \ignorespaces} + +\def \definemathchar #1#2#3#4{% {name}{class}{family}{hex-code} + {\zcalcmathcode{#2}{#3}{#4}% + \zdefmathch#1\zmark + \if \znext + \global\mathcode #1= \tcounta + \else + \global\mathchardef #1= \tcounta + \fi}% + \ignorespaces} + +\def \definemathdelimiter #1#2#3#4#5#6{% {name}{class}{fam1}{hex1}{fam2}{hex2} + {\zcalcmathcode{#2}{#3}{#4}% + \multiply \tcounta by 16 + \advance \tcounta by #5 + \multiply \tcounta by 256 + \advance \tcounta by "#6\relax + \zdefmathch#1\zmark + \if \znext + \global\delcode #1= \tcounta + \else + \xdef #1{\delimiter\the\tcounta\relax}% + \fi}% + \ignorespaces} + +\def \definemathjoinedsymbol #1#2#3#4#5{% {name}{atom}{char1}{char2}{sep} + \gdef #1{#2{{#3}\mspace{#5mu}{#4}}}} + +\def \definemathlabeledarrow #1#2#3#4{% {name}{atom}{label}{arrow} + \gdef #1{#2{\mathop{#4}\limits^{#3}}}} + +\def \definemathstackedsymbol #1#2#3#4#5{% {name}{atom}{char1}{char2}{sep} + \gdef #1{#2{\mathpalette\zstksym{{#3}{#4}{#5}}}}} + + +\def \zcalcmathcode #1#2#3{% {class}{family}{hex-code} + \tcounta = #1 + \multiply \tcounta by 16 + \advance \tcounta by #2 + \multiply \tcounta by 256 + \advance \tcounta by "#3\relax} + +\def \zdefmathch #1#2\zmark{% + \setflag\znext = {\if `\noexpand#1\true \else \false \fi}} + +\definedimen{\muwidth}{0pt} + +\def \zstksym #1#2{% {style}{{char1}{char2}{sep}} + \zstksymb #1#2} + +\def \zstksymb #1#2#3#4{% {style}{char1}{char2}{sep} + \vcenter{\baselineskip = 0pt + \lineskiplimit = -\maxdimen + \setbox \zboxa = \hbox{$#1\mkern 1mu$}% + \muwidth = \wd\zboxa + \ialign{\hfil ##\hfil\cr + \raise #4\muwidth \hbox{$#1#2$}\cr + $#1#3$\cr}}} + +% Character Styles +% --------- ------ + + +\definecount{\zmstyfam}{0} + + +\def \setmathdigitstyle #1{% {style} + {\tcounta = "\the\classvarfam0 + \advance \tcounta by \name{#1fam}% + \multiply \tcounta by 256 + \advance \tcounta by `\0% + \tcountb = `0 + \loop + \global\mathcode \tcountb = \tcounta + \increment \tcounta + \increment \tcountb + \if \lssp{\tcountb}{`\:}\repeat}} + +\def \setmathletterstyle #1{% {\style} + {\tcounta = "\the\classvarfam0 + \advance \tcounta by \name{#1fam}% + \multiply \tcounta by 256 + \advance \tcounta by `\A% + \tcountb = `A + \loop + \global\mathcode \tcountb = \tcounta + \increment \tcounta + \increment \tcountb + \if \lssp{\tcountb}{`\[}\repeat + \advance \tcounta by 6 + \tcountb = `\a + \loop + \global\mathcode \tcountb = \tcounta + \increment \tcounta + \increment \tcountb + \if \lssp{\tcountb}{`\{}\repeat}% + \if \zcommonencoding + \def \znext {#1}% + \def \zit {\it}% + \if \tokeqlp{\znext}{\zit}\setstyleskewchar{#1}{7}\fi + \fi} + +\def \setmathucgreekstyle #1{% {style} + {\zmstyfam = \name{#1fam}% +\definemathchar \Alpha \classvarfam \rmfam {41} +\definemathchar \Beta \classvarfam \rmfam {42} +\definemathchar \Gamma \classvarfam \zmstyfam {00} +\definemathchar \Delta \classvarfam \zmstyfam {01} +\definemathchar \Epsilon \classvarfam \rmfam {45} +\definemathchar \Zeta \classvarfam \rmfam {5A} +\definemathchar \Eta \classvarfam \rmfam {48} +\definemathchar \Theta \classvarfam \zmstyfam {02} +\definemathchar \Iota \classvarfam \rmfam {49} +\definemathchar \Kappa \classvarfam \rmfam {4B} +\definemathchar \Lambda \classvarfam \zmstyfam {03} +\definemathchar \Mu \classvarfam \rmfam {4D} +\definemathchar \Nu \classvarfam \rmfam {4E} +\definemathchar \Xi \classvarfam \zmstyfam {04} +\definemathchar \Omicron \classvarfam \rmfam {4F} +\definemathchar \Pi \classvarfam \zmstyfam {05} +\definemathchar \Rho \classvarfam \rmfam {50} +\definemathchar \Sigma \classvarfam \zmstyfam {06} +\definemathchar \Tau \classvarfam \rmfam {54} +\definemathchar \Upsilon \classvarfam \zmstyfam {07} +\definemathchar \Phi \classvarfam \zmstyfam {08} +\definemathchar \Chi \classvarfam \rmfam {58} +\definemathchar \Psi \classvarfam \zmstyfam {09} +\definemathchar \Omega \classvarfam \zmstyfam {0A}}} + +\def \zmtextstyle {\rm} +\def \zmtextfam {\rmfam} + +\def \setmathtextstyle #1{% {style} + \gdef \zmtextstyle {#1}% + \xdef \zmtextfam {\name{#1fam}}} + +\def \zmfunstyle {\rm} + +\def \setmathfunctionstyle #1{% {style} + \gdef \zmfunstyle {#1}} + +\def \zmvarstyle {\it} + +\def \setmathmvarstyle #1{% {style} + \gdef \zmvarstyle {#1}} + +\def \setmathpunctuationstyle #1{% {style} + {\zmstyfam = \name{#1fam}% + \definemathchar {`.} \classord \zmstyfam {2E} + \definemathchar {`,} \classpunc \zmstyfam {2C} + \definemathchar {`;} \classpunc \zmstyfam {3B}}} + +% Characters +% ---------- + + +\let \zmchar = \definemathchar + + +% Letters: + +% INITEX does the following for each letter: +% +% \definemathchar{letter}{\classvarfam}{\mit}{xx} +% +% This can be changed using the \setmathletterstyle command above. + + +% Figures (digits): + +% INITEX does the following for each digit: +% +% \definemathchar{digit}{\classvarfam}{\rm}{xx} +% +% This can be changed using the \setmathdigitstyle command above. + + +% Uppercase Greek letters: + +% This can be changed using the \setmathucgreekstyle command above. + +\setmathucgreekstyle{\rm} + + +% Lowercase Greek letters: + +\zmchar \alpha \classord \mitfam {0B} +\zmchar \beta \classord \mitfam {0C} +\zmchar \gamma \classord \mitfam {0D} +\zmchar \delta \classord \mitfam {0E} +\zmchar \epsilon \classord \mitfam {0F} +\zmchar \zeta \classord \mitfam {10} +\zmchar \eta \classord \mitfam {11} +\zmchar \theta \classord \mitfam {12} +\zmchar \iota \classord \mitfam {13} +\zmchar \kappa \classord \mitfam {14} +\zmchar \lambda \classord \mitfam {15} +\zmchar \mu \classord \mitfam {16} +\zmchar \nu \classord \mitfam {17} +\zmchar \xi \classord \mitfam {18} +\zmchar \omicron \classord \mitfam {6F} +\zmchar \pi \classord \mitfam {19} +\zmchar \rho \classord \mitfam {1A} +\zmchar \sigma \classord \mitfam {1B} +\zmchar \tau \classord \mitfam {1C} +\zmchar \upsilon \classord \mitfam {1D} +\zmchar \phi \classord \mitfam {1E} +\zmchar \chi \classord \mitfam {1F} +\zmchar \psi \classord \mitfam {20} +\zmchar \omega \classord \mitfam {21} + +\zmchar \varepsilon \classord \mitfam {22} +\zmchar \vartheta \classord \mitfam {23} +\zmchar \varpi \classord \mitfam {24} +\zmchar \varrho \classord \mitfam {25} +\zmchar \varsigma \classord \mitfam {26} +\zmchar \varphi \classord \mitfam {27} + + +% Ordinary symbols: + +\zmchar {`.} \classord \rmfam {2E} +\zmchar {`/} \classord \mitfam {3D} +\zmchar \zmbackslash \classord \msyfam {6E} +\zmchar {`|} \classord \msyfam {6A} +\zmchar \aleph \classord \msyfam {40} +\zmchar \bot \classord \msyfam {3F} +\zmchar \clubsuit \classord \msyfam {7C} +\zmchar \diamondsuit \classord \msyfam {7D} +\zmchar \ell \classord \mitfam {60} +\zmchar \emptyset \classord \msyfam {3B} +\zmchar \exists \classord \msyfam {39} +\zmchar \flat \classord \mitfam {5B} +\zmchar \forall \classord \msyfam {38} +\zmchar \heartsuit \classord \msyfam {7E} +\zmchar \Im \classord \msyfam {3D} +\zmchar \imath \classord \mitfam {7B} +\zmchar \infinity \classord \msyfam {31} +\let \infty = \infinity +\zmchar \jmath \classord \mitfam {7C} +\zmchar \nabla \classord \msyfam {72} +\zmchar \natural \classord \mitfam {5C} +\zmchar \neg \classord \msyfam {3A} +\let \lnot = \neg +\zmchar \partial \classord \mitfam {40} +\zmchar \prime \classord \msyfam {30} +\zmchar \Re \classord \msyfam {3C} +\zmchar \sharp \classord \mitfam {5D} +\zmchar \spadesuit \classord \msyfam {7F} +\zmchar \surd \classord \msyfam {70} +\zmchar \top \classord \msyfam {3E} +\zmchar \triangle \classord \msyfam {34} +\zmchar \wp \classord \mitfam {7D} + + +% Large operations: + +\zmchar \bigcap \classlargeop \mexfam {54} +\zmchar \bigcup \classlargeop \mexfam {53} +\zmchar \bigodot \classlargeop \mexfam {4A} +\zmchar \bigoplus \classlargeop \mexfam {4C} +\zmchar \bigotimes \classlargeop \mexfam {4E} +\zmchar \bigsqcup \classlargeop \mexfam {46} +\zmchar \biguplus \classlargeop \mexfam {55} +\zmchar \bigvee \classlargeop \mexfam {57} +\zmchar \bigwedge \classlargeop \mexfam {56} +\zmchar \coprod \classlargeop \mexfam {60} +\zmchar \intop \classlargeop \mexfam {52} +\zmchar \ointop \classlargeop \mexfam {48} +\zmchar \prod \classlargeop \mexfam {51} +\zmchar \smallint \classlargeop \msyfam {73} +\zmchar \sum \classlargeop \mexfam {50} + + +% Binary operations: + +\zmchar {`*} \classbinop \msyfam {03} +\zmchar {`+} \classbinop \rmfam {2B} +\zmchar {`-} \classbinop \msyfam {00} +\zmchar \amalg \classbinop \msyfam {71} +\zmchar \ast \classbinop \msyfam {03} +\zmchar \bigcirc \classbinop \msyfam {0D} +\zmchar \bigtriangledown \classbinop \msyfam {35} +\zmchar \bigtriangleup \classbinop \msyfam {34} +\zmchar \zmbullet \classbinop \msyfam {0F} +\zmchar \cap \classbinop \msyfam {5C} +\zmchar \cdot \classbinop \msyfam {01} +\zmchar \circ \classbinop \msyfam {0E} +\let \compose = \circ +\zmchar \cup \classbinop \msyfam {5B} +\zmchar \zmdagger \classbinop \msyfam {79} +\zmchar \zmddagger \classbinop \msyfam {7A} +\zmchar \diamond \classbinop \msyfam {05} +\zmchar \div \classbinop \msyfam {04} +\zmchar \mp \classbinop \msyfam {07} +\zmchar \odot \classbinop \msyfam {0C} +\zmchar \ominus \classbinop \msyfam {09} +\zmchar \oplus \classbinop \msyfam {08} +\zmchar \oslash \classbinop \msyfam {0B} +\zmchar \otimes \classbinop \msyfam {0A} +\zmchar \pm \classbinop \msyfam {06} +\zmchar \setminus \classbinop \msyfam {6E} +\zmchar \sqcap \classbinop \msyfam {75} +\zmchar \sqcup \classbinop \msyfam {74} +\zmchar \star \classbinop \mitfam {3F} +\zmchar \times \classbinop \msyfam {02} +\let \cross = \times +\zmchar \triangleleft \classbinop \mitfam {2F} +\zmchar \triangleright \classbinop \mitfam {2E} +\zmchar \uplus \classbinop \msyfam {5D} +\zmchar \vee \classbinop \msyfam {5F} +\let \lor = \vee +\zmchar \wedge \classbinop \msyfam {5E} +\let \land = \wedge +\zmchar \wr \classbinop \msyfam {6F} + + +% Relations: + +\zmchar {`:} \classrel \rmfam {3A} +\zmchar {`<} \classrel \mitfam {3C} +\zmchar {`=} \classrel \rmfam {3D} +\zmchar {`>} \classrel \mitfam {3E} +\zmchar \approx \classrel \msyfam {19} +\zmchar \asymp \classrel \msyfam {10} +\zmchar \dashv \classrel \msyfam {61} +\zmchar \equiv \classrel \msyfam {11} +\zmchar \frown \classrel \mitfam {5F} +\zmchar \geq \classrel \msyfam {15} +\let \ge = \geq +\let \gets = \leftarrow +\zmchar \gg \classrel \msyfam {1D} +\zmchar \in \classrel \msyfam {32} +\zmchar \Leftarrow \classrel \msyfam {28} +\zmchar \leftarrow \classrel \msyfam {20} +\zmchar \leftharpoondown \classrel \mitfam {29} +\zmchar \leftharpoonup \classrel \mitfam {28} +\zmchar \Leftrightarrow \classrel \msyfam {2C} +\zmchar \leftrightarrow \classrel \msyfam {24} +\zmchar \leq \classrel \msyfam {14} +\let \le = \leq +\zmchar \lhook \classrel \mitfam {2C} +\zmchar \ll \classrel \msyfam {1C} +\zmchar \mapstochar \classrel \msyfam {37} +\zmchar \mid \classrel \msyfam {6A} +\let \given = \mid +\zmchar \nearrow \classrel \msyfam {25} +\zmchar \ni \classrel \msyfam {33} +\zmchar \not \classrel \msyfam {36} +\zmchar \nwarrow \classrel \msyfam {2D} +\let \owns = \ni +\zmchar \parallel \classrel \msyfam {6B} +\zmchar \perp \classrel \msyfam {3F} +\zmchar \prec \classrel \msyfam {1E} +\zmchar \preceq \classrel \msyfam {16} +\zmchar \propto \classrel \msyfam {2F} +\zmchar \rhook \classrel \mitfam {2D} +\zmchar \Rightarrow \classrel \msyfam {29} +\zmchar \rightarrow \classrel \msyfam {21} +\zmchar \rightharpoondown \classrel \mitfam {2B} +\zmchar \rightharpoonup \classrel \mitfam {2A} +\zmchar \searrow \classrel \msyfam {26} +\zmchar \sim \classrel \msyfam {18} +\zmchar \simeq \classrel \msyfam {27} +\zmchar \smile \classrel \mitfam {5E} +\zmchar \subset \classrel \msyfam {1A} +\zmchar \subseteq \classrel \msyfam {12} +\zmchar \succ \classrel \msyfam {1F} +\zmchar \succeq \classrel \msyfam {17} +\zmchar \supset \classrel \msyfam {1B} +\zmchar \supseteq \classrel \msyfam {13} +\zmchar \swarrow \classrel \msyfam {2E} +\zmchar \sqsubseteq \classrel \msyfam {76} +\zmchar \sqsupseteq \classrel \msyfam {77} +\let \to = \rightarrow +\zmchar \vdash \classrel \msyfam {60} + + +% Openers: + +\zmchar {`(} \classopen \rmfam {28} +\zmchar {`[} \classopen \rmfam {5B} +\zmchar {`\{} \classopen \msyfam {66} + + +% Closers: + +\zmchar {`!} \classclose \rmfam {21} +\zmchar {`)} \classclose \rmfam {29} +\zmchar {`?} \classclose \rmfam {3F} +\zmchar {`]} \classclose \rmfam {5D} +\zmchar {`\}} \classclose \msyfam {67} + + +% Punctuation: + +\zmchar {`,} \classpunc \rmfam {2C} +\zmchar {`;} \classpunc \rmfam {3B} +\zmchar \cdotp \classpunc \msyfam {01} +\zmchar \maps \classpunc \rmfam {3A} +\let \colon = \maps +\zmchar \ldotp \classpunc \mitfam {3A} + + +% Active characters: + +\zmchar {` } \classactive \rmfam {00} +\zmchar {`'} \classactive \rmfam {00} + +{\catcode`\' = \catactive +\gdef '{^\bgroup \zmprima} +} % \catcode + +\def \zmprima {\prime \futurelet\znext \zmprimb} +\def \zmprimb {% + \if \tokeqlp{\znext}{'}% + \let \znext = \zmprimc + \else \if \tokeqlp{\znext}{^}% + \let \znext = \zmprimd + \else + \let \znext = \egroup + \fi\fi + \znext} +\def \zmprimc #1{\zmprima} +\def \zmprimd #1#2{#2\egroup} + +% Delimiters +% ---------- + +% IniTeX does the following for each character: +% +% \delcode`x = -1 + +\definemathdelimiter{`(}{\classord}{\rmfam}{28}{\mexfam}{00} +\definemathdelimiter{`)}{\classord}{\rmfam}{29}{\mexfam}{01} +\definemathdelimiter{`/}{\classord}{\rmfam}{2F}{\mexfam}{0E} +\definemathdelimiter{`<}{\classord}{\msyfam}{68}{\mexfam}{0A} +\definemathdelimiter{`>}{\classord}{\msyfam}{69}{\mexfam}{0B} +\definemathdelimiter{`[}{\classord}{\rmfam}{5B}{\mexfam}{02} +\definemathdelimiter{`]}{\classord}{\rmfam}{5D}{\mexfam}{03} +\definemathdelimiter{`|}{\classord}{\msyfam}{6A}{\mexfam}{0C} + +\definemathdelimiter{\Arrowvert}{\classord}{\mexfam}{3D}{\rmfam}{00} +\definemathdelimiter{\arrowvert}{\classord}{\mexfam}{3C}{\rmfam}{00} +\definemathdelimiter{\bracevert}{\classord}{\mexfam}{3E}{\rmfam}{00} +\definemathdelimiter{\Downarrow}{\classrel}{\msyfam}{2B}{\mexfam}{7F} +\definemathdelimiter{\downarrow}{\classrel}{\msyfam}{23}{\mexfam}{79} +\definemathdelimiter{\langle}{\classopen}{\msyfam}{68}{\mexfam}{0A} +\definemathdelimiter{\lceil}{\classopen}{\msyfam}{64}{\mexfam}{06} +\definemathdelimiter{\lfloor}{\classopen}{\msyfam}{62}{\mexfam}{04} +\definemathdelimiter{\lgroup}{\classopen}{\rmfam}{00}{\mexfam}{3A} +\definemathdelimiter{\lmoustache}{\classopen}{\rmfam}{00}{\mexfam}{40} +\definemathdelimiter{\rangle}{\classclose}{\msyfam}{69}{\mexfam}{0B} +\definemathdelimiter{\rceil}{\classclose}{\msyfam}{65}{\mexfam}{07} +\definemathdelimiter{\rfloor}{\classclose}{\msyfam}{63}{\mexfam}{05} +\definemathdelimiter{\rgroup}{\classclose}{\rmfam}{00}{\mexfam}{3B} +\definemathdelimiter{\rmoustache}{\classclose}{\rmfam}{00}{\mexfam}{41} +\definemathdelimiter{\Uparrow}{\classrel}{\msyfam}{2A}{\mexfam}{7E} +\definemathdelimiter{\uparrow}{\classrel}{\msyfam}{22}{\mexfam}{78} +\definemathdelimiter{\Updownarrow}{\classrel}{\msyfam}{6D}{\mexfam}{77} +\definemathdelimiter{\updownarrow}{\classrel}{\msyfam}{6C}{\mexfam}{3F} +\definemathdelimiter{\Vert}{\classord}{\msyfam}{6B}{\mexfam}{0D} +\definemathdelimiter{\vert}{\classord}{\msyfam}{6A}{\mexfam}{0C} +\definemathdelimiter{\zmbackslash}{\classord}{\msyfam}{6E}{\mexfam}{0F} +\definemathdelimiter{\zmlbrace}{\classopen}{\msyfam}{66}{\mexfam}{08} +\definemathdelimiter{\zmrbrace}{\classclose}{\msyfam}{67}{\mexfam}{09} + +% Accents +% ------- + + +\definemathaccent{\acute}{\classvarfam}{\rmfam}{13} +\definemathaccent{\bar}{\classvarfam}{\rmfam}{16} +\definemathaccent{\breve}{\classvarfam}{\rmfam}{15} +\definemathaccent{\check}{\classvarfam}{\rmfam}{14} +\definemathaccent{\ddot}{\classvarfam}{\rmfam}{7F} +\definemathaccent{\dot}{\classvarfam}{\rmfam}{5F} +\definemathaccent{\grave}{\classvarfam}{\rmfam}{12} +\definemathaccent{\zmhat}{\classvarfam}{\rmfam}{5E} +\definemathaccent{\zmtilde}{\classvarfam}{\rmfam}{7E} +\definemathaccent{\ring}{\classvarfam}{\rmfam}{17} +\definemathaccent{\widetilde}{\classord}{\mexfam}{65} +\definemathaccent{\widehat}{\classord}{\mexfam}{62} +\definemathaccent{\vec}{\classord}{\mitfam}{7E} + +\def \widebar #1{% {math} %~ Wide bar accent. %^math_accent + \mathpalette\zwidebar{#1}} + +\def \zwidebar #1#2{% {style}{math} + \rlap{\measuretextwidth{\tdimena}{$#1#2$}% + \kern .2\tdimena + $\overline{\vphantom{#1#2}\kern .6\tdimena}$}% + #2} + +% Defined Characters +% ------- ---------- + + +\def \angle {% + {\vbox{\ialign{$\scriptstyle##$\cr + \not \mathrel{\mkern 14mu}\cr + \noalign{\nointerlineskip}% + \mkern 2.5mu \leaders \hrule height .34pt \hfill + \mkern 2.5mu\cr}}}} + +\definemathjoinedsymbol{\bowtie}{\mathrel}{\triangleright}{\triangleleft}{-3} + +\definemathstackedsymbol{\cong}{\mathrel}{\sim}{=}{6} + +\def \degree {^\circ} + +\let \degrees = \degree + +\def \defeq{% + \mathrel{\mathop{=}\limits^{\mathscriptscriptstyle{\roman{def}}}}} + +\definemathstackedsymbol{\Deltaeq}{\mathrel}{\mathscriptscriptstyle{\Delta}}{=}{9} + +\definemathstackedsymbol{\doteq}{\mathrel}{.}{=}{9} + +\definemathstackedsymbol{\gel}{\mathrel}{\zge}{<}{11} + +\definemathstackedsymbol{\zge}{\mathrel}{>}{=}{7.5} + +\definemathstackedsymbol{\gl}{\mathrel}{>}{<}{5.5} + +\def \hbar {\mathord{h \llap{$\mathchar"16 \mkern 3.5mu$}}} + +\definemathjoinedsymbol{\hookleftarrow}{\mathrel}{\leftarrow}{\rhook}{-3} + +\definemathjoinedsymbol{\hookrightarrow}{\mathrel}{\lhook}{\rightarrow}{-3} + +\def \int {\intop\nolimits} + +\def \iint {\zint2} + +\def \iiint {\zint3} + +\def \iiiint {\zint4} + +\def \idotsint {\zint0} + +\def \zint #1{% + \mkern -9mu \mathchoice{\mkern -5mu}{}{}{}% + \mathop{% + \mkern 9mu \mathchoice{\mkern 5mu}{}{}{}% + \intop + \ifcase #1% + \mkern -4mu \cdots \mkern -4mu + \or \relax \or + \zintkern + \or + \zintkern \intop \zintkern + \or + \zintkern \intop \zintkern \intop \zintkern + \fi}% + \intop\nolimits} + +\def \zintkern {\mkern -8mu \mathchoice{\mkern -3mu}{}{}{}} + +\let \join = \bowtie + +\definemathstackedsymbol{\leftrightarrows}{\mathrel}{\leftarrow}{\rightarrow}{6} + +\definemathstackedsymbol{\leftrightharpoons}{\mathrel}{\leftharpoonup}{\rightharpoondown}{4} + +\definemathstackedsymbol{\ltgt}{\mathrel}{<}{>}{5.5} + +\definemathjoinedsymbol{\Longleftarrow}{\mathrel}{\Leftarrow}{\Relbar}{-3} + +\definemathjoinedsymbol{\longleftarrow}{\mathrel}{\leftarrow}{\relbar}{-3} + +\definemathjoinedsymbol{\Longleftrightarrow}{\mathrel}{\Leftarrow}{\Rightarrow}{-3} +\let \iff = \Longleftrightarrow + +\definemathjoinedsymbol{\longleftrightarrow}{\mathrel}{\leftarrow}{\rightarrow}{-3} + +\def \longmapsto {\mapstochar \longrightarrow} + +\definemathjoinedsymbol{\Longrightarrow}{\mathrel}{\Relbar}{\Rightarrow}{-3} + +\definemathjoinedsymbol{\longrightarrow}{\mathrel}{\relbar}{\rightarrow}{-3} + +\definemathjoinedsymbol{\longrightleftarrow}{\mathrel}{\rightarrow}{\leftarrow}{-3} + +\def \oint {\ointop\nolimits} + +\def \mapsto {\mapstochar \rightarrow} + +\definemathjoinedsymbol{\models}{\mathrel}{|}{=}{-3} + +\def \neq {\not=} +\let \ne = \neq + +\def \nexists {\mathord{\raise .2ex \hbox{$\not\mkern 1.5mu$}\exists}} + +\def \notin {\not\in} +\let \nin = \notin + +\def \nparallel {\mathrel{\not\mkern 2mu\parallel}} + +\definemathstackedsymbol{\rightleftarrows}{\mathrel}{\rightarrow}{\leftarrow}{6} + +\definemathstackedsymbol{\rightleftharpoons}{\mathrel}{\rightharpoonup}{\leftharpoondown}{4} + +\definemathjoinedsymbol{\semijoin}{\mathrel}{\triangleright}{<}{-4} + +% Functions +% --------- + + +\def \definemathfunction #1#2#3{% {\name}{text}{limits} + \def #1{\mathop{\zmfunstyle #2}#3}} + +\definemathfunction{\ad}{ad}{\nolimits} % adjoint +\definemathfunction{\Ai}{Ai}{\nolimits} % Airy function +\definemathfunction{\arccos}{arccos}{\nolimits} % arc cosine +\definemathfunction{\arccosh}{arccosh}{\nolimits} % hyperbolic arc cosine +\definemathfunction{\arccot}{arccot}{\nolimits} % arc cotangent +\definemathfunction{\arcsec}{arcsec}{\nolimits} % arc secant +\definemathfunction{\arcsin}{arcsin}{\nolimits} % arc sine +\definemathfunction{\arctan}{arctan}{\nolimits} % arc tangent +\definemathfunction{\arg}{arg}{\nolimits} % argument +\definemathfunction{\argmax}{arg\,max}{\displaylimits} % argument maximum +\definemathfunction{\argmin}{arg\,min}{\displaylimits} % argument maximum +\definemathfunction{\Bd}{Bd}{\nolimits} % Bound +\definemathfunction{\cl}{cl}{\nolimits} % closure +\definemathfunction{\codim}{codim}{\nolimits} % co-dimension +\definemathfunction{\coker}{coker}{\nolimits} % cokernel +\definemathfunction{\conj}{conj}{\nolimits} % conjugate +\definemathfunction{\cos}{cos}{\nolimits} % cosine +\definemathfunction{\cosec}{cos}{\nolimits} % cosecant +\definemathfunction{\cosh}{cosh}{\nolimits} % hyperbolic cosine +\definemathfunction{\cot}{cot}{\nolimits} % cotangent +\definemathfunction{\coth}{coth}{\nolimits} % hyperbolic cotangent +\definemathfunction{\csc}{csc}{\nolimits} % cosecant +\definemathfunction{\csch}{csch}{\nolimits} % hyperbolic cosecant +\definemathfunction{\curl}{curl}{\nolimits} % curl +\definemathfunction{\deg}{deg}{\nolimits} % degree +\definemathfunction{\det}{det}{\displaylimits} % determinant +\definemathfunction{\diag}{diag}{\nolimits} % diagonal +\definemathfunction{\dim}{dim}{\nolimits} % dimension +\definemathfunction{\dist}{dist}{\nolimits} % distance +\definemathfunction{\erf}{erf}{\nolimits} % error function +\definemathfunction{\erfc}{erfc}{\nolimits} % error function comp. +\definemathfunction{\exp}{exp}{\nolimits} % exponential +\definemathfunction{\gcd}{gcd}{\displaylimits} % greatest common div. +\definemathfunction{\GL}{GL}{\nolimits} % General Linear +\definemathfunction{\glb}{glb}{\nolimits} % greatest lower bound +\definemathfunction{\gr}{gr}{\nolimits} % group +\definemathfunction{\grad}{grad}{\nolimits} % gradient +\definemathfunction{\hom}{hom}{\nolimits} % homology +\definemathfunction{\id}{id}{\nolimits} % identity +\definemathfunction{\inf}{inf}{\displaylimits} % infinum +\definemathfunction{\injlim}{inj\,lim}{\displaylimits} % injected limit +\definemathfunction{\ker}{ker}{\nolimits} % kernel +\definemathfunction{\lcm}{lcm}{\displaylimits} % least common mult. +\definemathfunction{\length}{length}{\nolimits} % length +\definemathfunction{\lg}{lg}{\nolimits} % natural logarithm +\definemathfunction{\lim}{lim}{\displaylimits} % limit +\definemathfunction{\liminf}{lim\,inf}{\displaylimits} % limit infinum +\definemathfunction{\limsup}{lim\,sup}{\displaylimits} % limit supremum +\definemathfunction{\ln}{ln}{\nolimits} % natural logarithm +\definemathfunction{\Log}{Log}{\nolimits} % principal logarithm +\definemathfunction{\log}{log}{\nolimits} % logarithm +\definemathfunction{\lub}{lub}{\nolimits} % least upper bound +\definemathfunction{\max}{max}{\displaylimits} % maximum +\definemathfunction{\min}{min}{\displaylimits} % minimum +\definemathfunction{\mod}{mod}{\nolimits} % modulus +\definemathfunction{\Pr}{Pr}{\displaylimits} % Probability +\definemathfunction{\Prob}{Prob}{\displaylimits} % Probability +\definemathfunction{\projlim}{proj\,lim}{\displaylimits}% projected limit +\definemathfunction{\rank}{rank}{\nolimits} % rank +\definemathfunction{\sec}{sec}{\nolimits} % secant +\definemathfunction{\sech}{sech}{\nolimits} % hyperbolic secant +\definemathfunction{\sgn}{sgn}{\nolimits} % sign +\definemathfunction{\sign}{sign}{\nolimits} % sign +\definemathfunction{\sin}{sin}{\nolimits} % sine +\definemathfunction{\sinc}{sinc}{\nolimits} % cardinal sine +\definemathfunction{\sinh}{sinh}{\nolimits} % hyperbolic sine +\definemathfunction{\SL}{SL}{\nolimits} % Special Linear +\definemathfunction{\sup}{sup}{\displaylimits} % supremum +\definemathfunction{\Szg}{Sz(g)}{\nolimits} % Suzuki group +\definemathfunction{\tan}{tan}{\nolimits} % tangent +\definemathfunction{\tanh}{tanh}{\nolimits} % hyperbolic tangent +\definemathfunction{\tr}{tr}{\nolimits} % trace +\definemathfunction{\trace}{trace}{\nolimits} % trace +\definemathfunction{\wstar}{w*}{\nolimits} % weak star + + +% For the occasional one-timer: + +\def \mathfunction #1{\mathop{\rm #1}\nolimits} + +\let \mfun = \mathfunction + +% Display/Text/Script Styles +% ------------------- ------ + + +\def \mathdisplaystyle #1{{\displaystyle #1}}% {subequation} +\def \mathtextstyle #1{{\textstyle #1}} +\def \mathscriptstyle #1{{\scriptstyle #1}} +\def \mathscriptscriptstyle #1{{\scriptscriptstyle #1}} + +\def \mathpalette #1#2{% {\macro}{text} + \mathchoice{#1\displaystyle{#2}}% + {#1\textstyle{#2}}% + {#1\scriptstyle{#2}}% + {#1\scriptscriptstyle{#2}}} + +\def \mtext #1{% + {\mathchoice{\hbox{\zmtextstyle #1}} + {\hbox{\zmtextstyle #1}} + {\hbox{\the\scriptfont\zmtextfam #1}} + {\hbox{\the\scriptscriptfont\zmtextfam #1}}}} + +\everymath = {\let\text=\mtext}% + +% This is specifically designed to work in math or in text. + +\def \mvar #1{{\zmvarstyle #1\if \textmodep \/\fi}}% {text} + +% General Tools +% ------- ----- + + +\def \aboverule #1{\above #1\relax}% {rule-height} + +\def \abs #1{\left|#1\right|}% {expression} + +\def \big #1{{\hbox{$\left#1\vbox to 8.5pt{}\right.\zmnosp$}}} +\def \Big #1{{\hbox{$\left#1\vbox to 11.5pt{}\right.\zmnosp$}}} +\def \bigg #1{{\hbox{$\left#1\vbox to 14.5pt{}\right.\zmnosp$}}} +\def \Bigg #1{{\hbox{$\left#1\vbox to 17.5pt{}\right.\zmnosp$}}} +\def \zmnosp {\nulldelimiterspace = 0pt} + +\def \bigl {\mathopen\big} +\def \Bigl {\mathopen\Big} +\def \bigm {\mathrel\big} +\def \Bigm {\mathrel\Big} +\def \bigr {\mathclose\big} +\def \Bigr {\mathclose\Big} +\def \biggl {\mathopen\bigg} +\def \Biggl {\mathopen\Bigg} +\def \biggm {\mathrel\bigg} +\def \Biggm {\mathrel\Bigg} +\def \biggr {\mathclose\bigg} +\def \Biggr {\mathclose\Bigg} + +\def \binomial #1#2{{{#1} \atopwithdelims() {#2}}} + +\let \binom = \binomial + +\def \bmod {\mathbin{\rm mod}} + +\def \bordermatrix #1{% + {\setbox \zboxa = \hbox{\mex B}% + \tdimena = \wd\zboxa + \setbox \zboxa = \vbox{% + \def \cr {\crcr \noalign{\kern 0pt \global\let \cr = \completerow}}% + \ialign{$##$\hfil \kern 2pt \kern \tdimena& + \thinspace \hfil $##$\hfil&& + \quad \hfil $##$\hfil \crcr + \omit \strut \hfil \crcr + \noalign{\kern -\baselineskip}% + #1\crcr + \omit \strut \cr}}% + \setbox \zboxc = \vbox{% + \unvcopy \zboxa \global\setbox \zboxb = \lastbox}% + \setbox \zboxc = \hbox{% + \unhbox \zboxb \unskip \global\setbox \zboxb = \lastbox}% + \setbox \zboxc = \hbox{% + $\kern \wd\zboxb \kern -\tdimena \left(\kern -\wd\zboxb + \global\setbox \zboxb = \vbox{\box\zboxb \kern 8pt}% + \vcenter{\kern -\ht\zboxb \unvbox\zboxa \kern -\baselineskip}\,% + \right)$}% + \null\;\vbox{\kern \ht\zboxb \box\zboxc}}} + +\def \brace {\atopwithdelims\{\}} + +\def \bracematrix #1{% {row...} + \left\{ \matrix{#1} \right\}} + +\def \brack {\atopwithdelims[]} + +\def \bracketmatrix #1{% {row...} + \left[ \matrix{#1} \right]} + +\def \bracketmatrixfl #1{% {row...} + \left[ \matrixfl{#1} \right]} + +\def \bracketmatrixfr #1{% {row...} + \left[ \matrixfr{#1} \right]} + +\def \cases #1{% {row...} + \left\{ \,% + \vcenter{\matrixbaselines + \ialign{$##$\hfil& + \quad {\rm ##}\hfil \crcr + #1\crcr}}% + \right.} + +% This version of \cases has math in both columns. + +\def \mcases #1{% {row...} + \left\{ \,% + \vcenter{\matrixbaselines + \ialign{$##$\hfil& + \quad $##$\hfil \crcr + #1\crcr}}% + \right.} + +\def \cdots {\mathinner{\cdotp\cdotp\cdotp}} + +\def \ddots {% + \if \newdots + \vbox{\baselineskip = 4pt \lineskiplimit = 0pt + \hbox{.} + \hbox{\kern .4em .} + \hbox{\kern .8em .}}% + \else + \mathinner{\mkern 1mu \raise 7pt \vbox{\kern 7pt \hbox{.}}% + \mkern 2mu \raise 4pt \hbox{.}% + \mkern 2mu \raise 1pt \hbox{.}% + \mkern 1mu}% + \fi} + +\def \detmatrix #1{% {row...} + \left| \matrix{#1} \right|} + +\def \displayfrac #1#2{% {numerator}{denominator} + {\displaystyle \frac{#1}{#2}}} + +\def \displaylines #1{% {row...} + \openup \jot + \global\setflag \zdtop = \true + \everycr = {\noalign{\if \zdtop + \vskip -\lineskiplimit + \vskip \normallineskiplimit + \global\setflag \zdtop = \false + \else + \penalty \interdisplaylinepenalty + \fi}}% + \halign{\hbox to \displaywidth{$\tabskip = 0pt \everycr = {}% + \hfil \displaystyle ##\hfil$}\cr + #1\crcr}} + +\def \eqalign #1{% {row...} + \vcenter{% + \ialign{&\mathstrut \hfil $\displaystyle ##{}$& + $\displaystyle {}##$\hfil\cr + #1\crcr}}} + +\def \equalfill {% + $\mathord =\mkern -6mu + \cleaders \hbox{$\mkern -2mu \mathord =\mkern -2mu$}\hfill + \mkern -6mu \mathord =$} + +% All other fraction macros should use \frac. + +\def \frac #1#2{% {numerator}{denominator} + {{\mskip\fracbarhang #1\mskip\fracbarhang} \over + {\mskip\fracbarhang #2\mskip\fracbarhang}}} + +\def \fromunder #1{% {math} + \mathrel{\mathop{\longleftarrow}\limits^{#1}}} + +\def \hphantom {% + \setflag \zhphant = \true + \setflag \zvphant = \false + \zphanta} + +\def \joinrel {\mathrel{\mkern -3mu}} + +\def \largefrac #1#2{% {numerator}{denominator} + {\mathchoice{\mathdisplaystyle{\frac{#1}{#2}}} + {\mathdisplaystyle{\frac{#1}{#2}}} + {\mathtextstyle{\frac{#1}{#2}}} + {\mathscriptstyle{\frac{#1}{#2}}}}} + +\def \ldots {\mathinner{\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp}} + +\def \leftarrowfill {\zleftarrowfill{\textstyle}} +\def \leftrightarrowfill {\zleftrightarrowfill{\textstyle}} +\def \rightarrowfill {\zrightarrowfill{\textstyle}} +\def \Rightarrowfill {\zRightarrowfill{\textstyle}} + +\def \zleftarrowfill #1{% {style} + \setbox\zboxa = \hbox{$#1-$}% + \ht\zboxa = 0pt + $#1\mathord\leftarrow \mkern -6mu + \cleaders \hbox{$#1\mkern -2mu \copy\zboxa \mkern -2mu$}\hfill + \mkern -6mu \box\zboxa$} + +\def \zleftrightarrowfill #1{% {style} + \setbox\zboxa = \hbox{$#1-$}% + \ht\zboxa = 0pt + $#1\mathord\leftarrow \mkern -6mu + \cleaders \hbox{$#1\mkern -2mu \box\zboxa \mkern -2mu$}\hfill + \mkern -6mu \mathord\rightarrow$} + +\def \zRightarrowfill #1{% {style} + \setbox\zboxa = \hbox{$#1=$}% + \ht\zboxa = 0pt + $#1\copy\zboxa \mkern -6mu + \cleaders \hbox{$#1\mkern -2mu \box\zboxa \mkern -2mu$}\hfill + \mkern -6mu \mathord\Rightarrow$} + +\def \zrightarrowfill #1{% {style} + \setbox\zboxa = \hbox{$#1-$}% + \ht\zboxa = 0pt + $#1\copy\zboxa \mkern -6mu + \cleaders \hbox{$#1\mkern -2mu \box\zboxa \mkern -2mu$}\hfill + \mkern -6mu \mathord\rightarrow$} + +\let \leqalignno = \eqalignno + +\def \mathstrut {\vphantom(} + +\def \matrix #1{% {row...} + \null\nonscript\,% + \vcenter{\matrixbaselines + \ialign{\hfil $##$\hfil&& \quad \hfil $##$\hfil \crcr + \mathstrut\crcr + \noalign{\kern -\baselineskip}% + #1\crcr + \mathstrut\crcr + \noalign{\kern -\baselineskip}}}% + \nonscript\,} + +\let \adjustmatrix = \noalign + +\def \matrixfl #1{% {row...} + \null\nonscript\,% + \vcenter{\matrixbaselines + \ialign{$##$\hfil && \quad $##$\hfil \crcr + \mathstrut\crcr + \noalign{\kern -\baselineskip}% + #1\crcr + \mathstrut\crcr + \noalign{\kern -\baselineskip}}}% + \nonscript\,} + +\def \matrixfr #1{% {row...} + \null\nonscript\,% + \vcenter{\matrixbaselines + \ialign{\hfil $##$&& \quad \hfil $##$\crcr + \mathstrut\crcr + \noalign{\kern -\baselineskip}% + #1\crcr + \mathstrut\crcr + \noalign{\kern -\baselineskip}}}% + \nonscript\,} + +\def \matrixbaselines {% + \baselineskip = \the\matrixspread\normalbaselineskip + \lineskiplimit = \normallineskiplimit + \lineskip = \normallineskip} + +\def \ontopof #1#2{{{#1} \atop {#2}}}% {numerator}{denominator} + +\def \openup {\afterassignment\zopenup \tdimena=} + +\def \zopenup {% + \advance \baselineskip by \tdimena + \advance \lineskiplimit by \tdimena + \advance \lineskip by \tdimena} + +\def \overbrace #1{% + \mathop{% + \vbox{\ialign{##\cr + \noalign{\kern 3pt}% + \downbracefill\cr + \noalign{\kern 3pt \nointerlineskip}% + $\hfil \displaystyle{#1}\hfil$\cr}}}\limits} + +\def \overleftarrow {\mathpalette\zoverleftarrow} +\def \overleftrightarrow {\mathpalette\zoverleftrightarrow} +\def \overRightarrow {\mathpalette\zoverRightarrow} +\def \overrightarrow {\mathpalette\zoverrightarrow} + +\def \zoverleftarrow #1#2{% {style}{math} + \vbox{\ialign{##\cr + \zleftarrowfill{\scriptscriptstyle}\cr + \noalign{\nointerlineskip}% + $\hfil #1#2\hfil$\crcr}}} + +\def \zoverleftrightarrow #1#2{% {style}{math} + \vbox{\ialign{##\cr + \zleftrightarrowfill{\scriptscriptstyle}\cr + \noalign{\nointerlineskip}% + $\hfil #1#2\hfil$\crcr}}} + +\def \zoverRightarrow #1#2{% {style}{math} + \vbox{\ialign{##\cr + \zRightarrowfill{\scriptscriptstyle}\cr + \noalign{\nointerlineskip}% + $\hfil #1#2\hfil$\crcr}}} + +\def \zoverrightarrow #1#2{% {style}{math} + \vbox{\ialign{##\cr + \zrightarrowfill{\scriptscriptstyle}\cr + \noalign{\nointerlineskip}% + $\hfil #1#2\hfil$\crcr}}} + +\def \overset #1#2{ + \mathbin{\mathop{#2}\limits^{#1}}} + +\def \parenmatrix #1{% {row...} + \left( \matrix{#1} \right)} + +\let \pmatrix = \parenmatrix + +\def \parenmatrixfl #1{% {row...} + \left( \matrixfl{#1} \right)} + +\def \parenmatrixfr #1{% {row...} + \left( \matrixfr{#1} \right)} + +\def \phantom {% + \setflag \zhphant = \true + \setflag \zvphant = \true + \zphanta} + +\def \zphanta {% + \if \mathmodep + \def \znext {\mathpalette\zphantb}% + \else + \let \znext = \zphantc + \fi + \znext} +\def \zphantb #1#2{% + \setbox \zboxa = \hbox{$#1{#2}$}% + \zphantd} +\def \zphantc #1{% + \setbox \zboxa = \hbox{#1}% + \zphantd} +\def \zphantd {% + \setbox \zboxb = \hbox{}% + \if \zhphant \wd\zboxb = \wd\zboxa \fi + \if \zvphant \ht\zboxb = \ht\zboxa \dp\zboxb = \dp\zboxa \fi + \box \zboxb} + +\def \plainTeXmathdisplay {% + \global\everydisplay = {}} + +\def \pmod #1{\allowbreak \,({\rm mod}\,#1)} + +\def \Relbar {\mathrel =} +\def \relbar {\mathrel{\smash -}} + +\definebox{\zrootbox} + +\def \nthroot #1{% {n} + \setbox\zrootbox = \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle{#1}$}% + \mathpalette\zroot} + +\def \zroot #1#2{% {\style}{radicand} + \setbox\zboxa = \hbox{$#1\sqrt{#2}$}% + \tdimena = \ht\zboxa + \advance \tdimena by -\dp\zboxa + \mkern 5mu \raise .6\tdimena \copy\zrootbox \mkern -10mu \box\zboxa} + +\def \skew #1#2#3{% {amount}{accent}{char} + {\zmuskipa = #1mu + \divide \zmuskipa by 2 + \mkern \zmuskipa + #2{\mkern -\zmuskipa{#3}\mkern \zmuskipa}% + \mkern -\zmuskipa}{}} + +\def \smallfrac #1#2{% {numerator}{denominator} + {\mathchoice{\mathtextstyle{\frac{#1}{#2}}} + {\mathscriptstyle{\frac{#1}{#2}}} + {\mathscriptscriptstyle{\frac{#1}{#2}}} + {\mathscriptscriptstyle{\frac{#1}{#2}}}}} + +\def \smash {% + \relax + \if \mathmodep + \def \znext {\mathpalette\zsmasha}% + \else + \let \znext = \zsmashb + \fi + \znext} + +\def \zsmasha #1#2{% + \setbox \zboxa = \hbox{$#1{#2}$}% + \zsmashc} +\def \zsmashb #1{% + \setbox \zboxa = \hbox{#1}% + \zsmashc} +\def \zsmashc {% + \ht\zboxa = 0pt + \dp\zboxa = 0pt + \box \zboxa} + +\def \sqrt {\radical"270370 } + +\let \sub = _ +\let \super = ^ + +\def \Tounder #1{% {math} + \mathrel{\mathop{\Longrightarrow}\limits^{#1}}} + +\def \tounder #1{% {math} + \mathrel{\mathop{\longrightarrow}\limits^{#1}}} + +\def \underbrace #1{% {text} + \mathop{% + \vtop{\ialign{##\cr + $\hfil \displaystyle{#1}\hfil$\cr + \noalign{\kern 3pt \nointerlineskip}% + \upbracefill\cr + \noalign{\kern 3pt}}}}\limits} + +\def \underset #1#2{ + \mathbin{\mathop{#2}\limits_{#1}}} + +\def \unit #1{% {text} + \if \mathmodep + {\nonscript\,\mtext{#1}}% + \else + \,#1% + \fi} + +\def \vdots {% + \if \newdots + \vbox{\baselineskip = 4pt \lineskiplimit = 0pt + \hbox{.} + \hbox{.} + \hbox{.}}% + \else + \vbox{\baselineskip = 4pt \lineskiplimit = 0pt + \kern 6pt + \hbox{.} + \hbox{.} + \hbox{.}}% + \fi} + +\def \vphantom {% + \setflag \zhphant = \false + \setflag \zvphant = \true + \zphanta} + +% Block Matrices +% ----- -------- + + +\def \blockmatrix #1{% {rows} + \zblockmatrix{\false}{#1}} + +\def \blockmatrixvr #1{% {rows} + \zblockmatrix{\true}{#1}} + +\def \zblockmatrix #1#2{% {verticals?}{rows} + \left[ + \vcenter{% + \defineatsigncommand @R{\colrule}% + \defineatsigncommand @N{\nocolrule}% + \offinterlineskip + \tdimena = \ht\strutbox \advance \tdimena by .2ex + \tdimenb = \dp\strutbox \advance \tdimenb by .4ex + \setbox \strutbox \hbox{\vrule width 0pt height \tdimena depth \tdimenb}% + \ialign{\hfil \strut \thirdspace $##$\thirdspace \hfil&& + \hspace{.35em}% + \vrule \if #1\colrule \else \nocolrule \fi + ##\relax + \hspace{.35em}& + \hfil \strut \thirdspace $##$\thirdspace \hfil\crcr + #2\crcr}}% + \right]} + +\def \rowrule {% + \noalign{% + \vskip .5ex + \hrule height .1ex\relax + \vskip .7ex}} + +\def \colrule {% + width .1ex } + +% Math Displays +% ---- -------- + + +\defineblock{\mathdisplay}{\endmathdisplay}{\true}{} + +%~block mathdisplay +% \abovepenalty = integer % Penalty above display. +% \aboveskip = glue % Visual space above display. +% \belowpenalty = integer % Penalty below display. +% \belowskip = glue % Visual space below display. +% \bodyfont = {...} % Font for display. +% \def \comptextformat {...} % Composite number text formatter. +% \diagramdiagarrowstyle = {...} % Style for diagonal arrows in diagrams. +% \diagramgutter = dimen % Gutter between diagram columns. +% \diagraminterrowskip = glue % Interrowskip for diagrams. +% \diagramminarrow = dimen % Minimum length of arrow in diagram. +% \hfuzz = dimen % Overhang allowed at end of line. +% \interrowskip = glue % Extra visual space between equations. +% \leftindent = dimen % Left indentation for \alignleft. +% \matrixspread = {decimal} % Spread factor for matrices. +% \def \numberformat {...} % Equation number formatter. +% \position = {...} % Positioning options. +% \rightindent = dimen % Right indentation for \alignright. +% \textcolor = {...} % Color of text. +%~end + +\definetoks{\diagramdiagarrowstyle} +\definedimen{\diagramgutter}{0pt} +\defineskip{\diagraminterrowskip}{0pt} +\definedimen{\diagramminarrow}{0pt} + +% Positioning options are: +% \alignleft Left aligned, with \leftindent. +% \alignright Right aligned, with \rightindent. +% \center Centered. +% \numberleft Equation number on left. +% \numberright Equation number on right. + +% These parameters are calculated: + +\definetoks{\mathdisplayeqno} % Text following \eqno marker. +\definecount{\mathdisplayprevgraf}{-1} % Previous display's ending \prevgraf. +\definecount{\mathdisplayprevpenalty}{0}% Previous display's \belowpenalty. +\defineskip{\mathdisplayprevskip}{0pt} % Previous display's \belowskip. + +\declareeverypar{\global\mathdisplayprevgraf=-1} +\zdeclareeveryvcontext{\zsavevcontext{\mathdisplayprevgraf=-1}} + +%~ This marker specifies that the following text is the equation number +%~ for the math display. + +\definemarker{\eqno} + + +\everydisplay = {\mathdisplay} + +\def \mathdisplay #1$${% equation $$ + \advance \displayindent by \leftskip + \advance \displaywidth by -\leftskip + \advance \displaywidth by -\rightskip + % \beginblockscope is unnecessary. + \global\increment \mathdisplaydepth + \abovepenalty = 5000 %~default hard + \belowpenalty = \breakallowed %~default hard + \hfuzz = 1pt %~default hard + \leftindent = 0pt %~default soft + \matrixspread = {1.0} %~default soft + \rightindent = 0pt %~default soft + \textcolor = {}% %~default soft + \processdesign{\mathdisplay}{}% + % \mathdisplaynumber is incremented by \eqno, if appropriate. + \if \eqlp{\prevgraf}{\mathdisplayprevgraf}% + \aboveskip = -\belowskip + \advance \aboveskip by \interrowskip + \fi + \let \text = \mtext + \zmdparams + \settaginfo{}{}% % No tag info so far. + \if \notp{\emptytoksp{\textcolor}}\color{\the\textcolor}\fi + \mathdisplayformat{#1}% + \endmathdisplay} + +\def \endmathdisplay {% + \global\mathdisplayprevgraf = \prevgraf + \global\advance \mathdisplayprevgraf by 3 + \global\mathdisplayprevpenalty = \belowpenalty + \global\mathdisplayprevskip = \belowskip + \global\decrement \mathdisplaydepth + \if \notp{\emptytoksp{\textcolor}}\endcolor \fi% + % \endblockscope is unnecessary. + $$} + +\definecount{\zmdhpos}{0} + +\def \zmdparams {% + \abovedisplayskip = \aboveskip + \abovedisplayshortskip = \aboveskip + \belowdisplayskip = \belowskip + \belowdisplayshortskip = \belowskip + \predisplaypenalty = \abovepenalty + \postdisplaypenalty = \belowpenalty + \zmdhpos = 0 + \let \center = \relax + \def \alignleft {\zmdhpos = 1}% + \def \alignright {\zmdhpos = 2}% + \setflag \zmdnumleft = \false + \def \numberleft {\setflag \zmdnumleft = \true}% + \let \numberright = \relax + \the\position} + +\def \mathdisplayformat #1{% {display} + \the\bodyfont + \zmdparse#1\eqno\eqno\zmark + {\lineskiplimit = \maxdimen % Force \interrowskip between + \lineskip = \interrowskip % each row of multi-line display. + \ifcase \zmdhpos + \if \zmdnumleft % Centered display. + \hbox to \displaywidth {% + \rlap{\hspace{-1\leftskip}\zmdeqno}% + \hfil $\displaystyle \zmdeq$\hfil}% + \else + \hbox to \displaywidth {% + \hfil $\displaystyle \zmdeq$\hfil + \llap{\zmdeqno\hspace{-1\rightskip}}}% + \fi + \or + \if \zmdnumleft % Left-aligned display. + \hbox to \displaywidth {% + \hbox to \leftindent{\hspace{-1\leftskip}\zmdeqno\hss}% + $\displaystyle \zmdeq$\hfil}% + \else + \hbox to \displaywidth{% + \kern \leftindent $\displaystyle \zmdeq$\hfil + \llap{\zmdeqno\hspace{-1\rightskip}}}% + \fi + \or + \if \zmdnumleft % Right-aligned display. + \hbox to \displaywidth {% + \rlap{\hspace{-1\leftskip}\zmdeqno}% + \hfil $\displaystyle \zmdeq$\kern \rightindent}% + \else + \hbox to \displaywidth{% + \hfil $\displaystyle \zmdeq$% + \hbox to \rightindent{\hss\zmdeqno\hspace{-1\rightskip}}}% + \fi + \fi}} + +\def \zmdparse #1\eqno#2\eqno#3\zmark{% equation\eqno number\eqno ???\zmark + \def \zmdeq {#1}% + \if \andp{\emptyargp{#2}}{\emptyargp{#3}}% + \let \zmdeqno = \relax + \else + \def \zmdeqno {\zmdformeqno#2\tag\tag\zmark}% + \fi} + +% This macro is invoked to format equation numbers in both positions: +% at the end of the display and at the end of \eqaligned rows. + +\def \zmdformeqno #1\tag#2\tag#3\zmark{% number\tag{xxx}\tag ???\zmark + \if \emptyargp{#1}% + \global\increment \mathdisplaynumber + \mathdisplayeqno = \expandafter{\number\mathdisplaynumber}% + \setcomptext{\mathdisplaycomptext}% + \else + \zmdexpliciteqno #1 \zmark + \fi + \settaginfo{\the\mathdisplaycomptext}{???}% + \hbox{\numberformat}% + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#3}}\zmdtageqno#2\zmark \fi} + +\def \zmdexpliciteqno #1#2 #3\zmark{% + \if \codeeqlp{#1}{!}% + \mathdisplayeqno = {#2}% + \mathdisplaycomptext = {#2}% + \else\if \codeeqlp{#1}{+}% + \global\increment \mathdisplaynumber + \mathdisplayeqno = \expandafter{\number\mathdisplaynumber #2}% + \setcomptext{\mathdisplaycomptext}% + \else\if \codeeqlp{#1}{,}% + \mathdisplayeqno = \expandafter{\number\mathdisplaynumber #2}% + \setcomptext{\mathdisplaycomptext}% + \else\if \codeeqlp{#1}{:}% + \global\increment \mathdisplaynumber + \mathdisplayeqno = {#2}% + \setcomptext{\mathdisplaycomptext}% + \else\if \codeeqlp{#1}{=}% + \zmdseteqno #2\zmark + \setcomptext{\mathdisplaycomptext}% + \else\if \codeeqlp{#1}{>}% + \zmdrefeqno #2;;\zmark +%%% \mathdisplayeqno = {\ref{#2}}% +%%% \mathdisplaycomptext = {\ref{#2}}% + \else + \mathdisplayeqno = {#1#2}% + \setcomptext{\mathdisplaycomptext}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} + +\def \zmdseteqno #1;#2\zmark{% + \global\mathdisplaynumber = #1\relax + \mathdisplayeqno = \expandafter{\number\mathdisplaynumber #2}} + +\def \zmdrefeqno #1;#2;#3\zmark{% + \if \emptyargp{#2}% + \mathdisplayeqno = {\ref{#1}}% + \mathdisplaycomptext = {\ref{#1}}% + \else + \mathdisplayeqno = {\ref{#1}\,#2}% + \mathdisplaycomptext = {\ref{#1}\,#2}% + \fi} + +\def \zmdtageqno #1#2\zmark{% + \def \znext { }% + \if \znext#2\tag{#1}\else \tag{#1#2}\fi} + +\def \setmathdisplaynumber #1{% + \global\mathdisplaynumber = #1\relax + \global\decrement \mathdisplaynumber} + +%~ This modifier for |$$| is used when the display is the first thing +%~ after a head, the first thing in a list item, the first thing in +%~ a float, etc. It eliminates the vertical space above the display. + +\def \immediatemathdisplay {% %^modifier + \with{\abovepenalty = \breaknever + \aboveskip = 0pt}} + +% Aligned Equations +% ------- --------- + + +% This tool can only be used inside a math display. + + +\defineskip{\zeqaltabskip}{0pt} +\definedimen{\zeqnoshift}{0pt} + +\def \eqaligned #1{% {rows...} + \vcenter{% + \zeqalinit + \halign to \tdimena {% + \hfil $\displaystyle ##{}$\tabskip = 0pt& + $\displaystyle {}##$\hfil \tabskip = \zeqaltabskip& + \relax \zeqaleqno ##\zmark% \relax prevents expansion of \zeqaleqno. + \tabskip = \if \zmdnumleft \displaywidth \else 0pt \fi \cr + #1\crcr}}} + +\def \eqalignedpairs #1{% {rows...} + \vcenter{% + \zeqalinit + \halign to \tdimena {% + \hfil $\displaystyle ##{}$\tabskip = 0pt& + $\displaystyle {}##$\hfil& + \hfil $\displaystyle ##{}$& + $\displaystyle {}##$\hfil \tabskip = \zeqaltabskip& + \relax \zeqaleqno ##\zmark% \relax prevents expansion of \zeqaleqno. + \tabskip = \if \zmdnumleft \displaywidth \else 0pt \fi \cr + #1\crcr}}} + +\def \eqalignedtriples #1{% {rows...} + \vcenter{% + \zeqalinit + \halign to \tdimena {% + \hfil $\displaystyle ##{}$\tabskip = 0pt& + $\displaystyle {}##$\hfil& + \hfil $\displaystyle ##{}$& + $\displaystyle {}##$\hfil& + \hfil $\displaystyle ##{}$& + $\displaystyle {}##$\hfil \tabskip = \zeqaltabskip& + \relax \zeqaleqno ##\zmark% \relax prevents expansion of \zeqaleqno. + \tabskip = \if \zmdnumleft \displaywidth \else 0pt \fi \cr + #1\crcr}}} + +\def \eqalignedquadruples #1{% {rows...} + \vcenter{% + \zeqalinit + \halign to \tdimena {% + \hfil $\displaystyle ##{}$\tabskip = 0pt& + $\displaystyle {}##$\hfil& + \hfil $\displaystyle ##{}$& + $\displaystyle {}##$\hfil& + \hfil $\displaystyle ##{}$& + $\displaystyle {}##$\hfil& + \hfil $\displaystyle ##{}$& + $\displaystyle {}##$\hfil \tabskip = \zeqaltabskip& + \relax \zeqaleqno ##\zmark% \relax prevents expansion of \zeqaleqno. + \tabskip = \if \zmdnumleft \displaywidth \else 0pt \fi \cr + #1\crcr}}} + +\def \zeqalinit {% + \def \eqno {&\relax}% \relax prevents expansion of stuff after \eqno. + \tdimena = \displaywidth + \advance \tdimena by -\leftindent + \advance \tdimena by -\rightindent + \zeqaltabskip = \if \eqlp{\zmdhpos}{2}0pt \else \centerindent \fi + \if \zmdnumleft + \zeqnoshift = \leftskip \advance \zeqnoshift by \leftindent + \else + \zeqnoshift = \rightskip \advance \zeqnoshift by \rightindent + \fi + \tabskip = \if \eqlp{\zmdhpos}{1}0pt \else \centerindent \fi} + +\def \zeqaleqno \relax#1\zmark{% \relax [\eqno [text]][\tag]\zmark + \if \zmdnumleft + \kern -\displaywidth + \rlap{\zmdformeqno#1\tag\tag\zmark}% + \else + \llap{\zmdformeqno#1\tag\tag\zmark \hspace{-\zeqnoshift}}% + \fi} + +\let \adjustmathdisplay = \noalign + +% Diagrams +% -------- + + +% This tool can only be used inside a math display. + + +\def \diagram #1{% {rows...} + \zdiagcmds + \null\,% + \vcenter{% + \lineskip = \diagraminterrowskip + \lineskiplimit = \lineskip + \tabskip = -\diagramgutter + \halign{% + &\kern \diagramgutter \hfil $\displaystyle ##$\hfil \tabskip = 0pt \cr + #1\crcr}}% + \,} + +\def \zdiagcmds {% + \defineatsigncommand @>##1>##2>{\zdiagra{##1}{##2}}% + \defineatsigncommand @<##1<##2<{\zdiagla{##1}{##2}}% + \defineatsigncommand @X##1X##2X{\zdiaglra{##1}{##2}}% + \defineatsigncommand @=##1=##2={\zdiaghb{##1}{##2}}% + \defineatsigncommand @V##1V##2V{% + \zdiagva{c}{}{\hbox}{\big\downarrow}{##1}{##2}}% + \defineatsigncommand @A##1A##2A{% + \zdiagva{c}{}{\hbox}{\big\uparrow}{##1}{##2}}% + \defineatsigncommand @|##1|##2|{% + \zdiagva{c}{}{\hbox}{\big|}{##1}{##2}}% + \defineatsigncommand @H##1|##2|{% + \zdiagva{c}{}{\hbox}{\big\Vert}{##1}{##2}}% + \defineatsigncommand @1##11##21##31{% + \zdiagva{##1}{l}{r}{\the\diagramdiagarrowstyle \mathchar "7025}{##2}{##3}}% + \defineatsigncommand @3##13##23##33{% + \zdiagva{##1}{l}{r}{\the\diagramdiagarrowstyle \mathchar "7026}{##2}{##3}}% + \defineatsigncommand @5##15##25##35{% + \zdiagva{##1}{r}{l}{\the\diagramdiagarrowstyle \mathchar "702E}{##2}{##3}}% + \defineatsigncommand @7##17##27##37{% + \zdiagva{##1}{r}{l}{\the\diagramdiagarrowstyle \mathchar "702D}{##2}{##3}}% + \defineatsigncommand @"##1"##2"{\zdiagwd{##1}{##2}}} + +\def \zdiagra #1#2{% + {\setbox \zboxa = \hbox{$\scriptstyle \;{#1}\;\;\;$}% + \setbox \zboxb = \hbox{$\scriptstyle \;{#2}\;\;\;$}% + \setbox \zboxc = \hbox{$#2$}% + \tdimena = \diagramminarrow + \if \dimgtrp{\wd\zboxa}{\tdimena}\tdimena = \wd\zboxa \fi + \if \dimgtrp{\wd\zboxb}{\tdimena}\tdimena = \wd\zboxb \fi + \mathrel{\mathop{\hbox to \tdimena {\rightarrowfill}}% + \limits^{#1}\if \dimposp{\wd\zboxc}_{#2}\fi}}} + +\def \zdiagla #1#2{% + {\setbox \zboxa = \hbox{$\scriptstyle \;\;\;{#1}\;$}% + \setbox \zboxb = \hbox{$\scriptstyle \;\;\;{#2}\;$}% + \setbox \zboxc = \hbox{$#2$}% + \tdimena = \diagramminarrow + \if \dimgtrp{\wd\zboxa}{\tdimena}\tdimena = \wd\zboxa \fi + \if \dimgtrp{\wd\zboxb}{\tdimena}\tdimena = \wd\zboxb \fi + \mathrel{\mathop{\hbox to \tdimena {\leftarrowfill}}% + \limits^{#1}\if \dimposp{\wd\zboxc}_{#2}\fi}}} + +\def \zdiaglra #1#2{% + {\setbox \zboxa = \hbox{$\scriptstyle \;\;\;{#1}\;\;\;$}% + \setbox \zboxb = \hbox{$\scriptstyle \;\;\;{#2}\;\;\;$}% + \setbox \zboxc = \hbox{$#2$}% + \tdimena = \diagramminarrow + \if \dimgtrp{\wd\zboxa}{\tdimena}\tdimena = \wd\zboxa \fi + \if \dimgtrp{\wd\zboxb}{\tdimena}\tdimena = \wd\zboxb \fi + \mathrel{\mathop{\hbox to \tdimena {\leftrightarrowfill}}% + \limits^{#1}\if \dimposp{\wd\zboxc}_{#2}\fi}}} + +\def \zdiaghb #1#2{% + {\setbox \zboxa = \hbox{$\scriptstyle \;{#1}\;$}% + \setbox \zboxb = \hbox{$\scriptstyle \;{#2}\;$}% + \setbox \zboxc = \hbox{$#2$}% + \tdimena = \diagramminarrow + \if \dimgtrp{\wd\zboxa}{\tdimena}\tdimena = \wd\zboxa \fi + \if \dimgtrp{\wd\zboxb}{\tdimena}\tdimena = \wd\zboxb \fi + \mathrel{\mathop{\hbox to \tdimena {\equalfill}}% + \limits^{#1}\if \dimposp{\wd\zboxc}_{#2}\fi}}} + +\def \zdiagva #1#2#3#4#5#6{% {centering}{h-overlap}{t-overlap} + % {arrow}{left-label}{right-label} + \if \codeeqlp{#1}{h}% + \if \codeeqlp{#2}{l}% + \llap{$\scriptstyle{#5}\mkern 2mu{#4}$}% + \rlap{$\mkern 2mu \scriptstyle #6$}% + \else + \llap{$\scriptstyle{#5}\mkern 2mu$}% + \rlap{${#4}\mkern 2mu \scriptstyle{#6}$}% + \fi + \else\if \codeeqlp{#1}{t}% + \if \codeeqlp{#3}{l}% + \llap{$\scriptstyle{#5}\mkern 2mu{#4}$} + \rlap{$\mkern 2mu \scriptstyle #6$}% + \else + \llap{$\scriptstyle{#5}\mkern 2mu$} + \rlap{${#4}\mkern 2mu \scriptstyle #6$}% + \fi + \else + \llap{$\scriptstyle{#5}\mkern 2mu$}{#4}% + \rlap{$\mkern 2mu \scriptstyle #6$}% + \fi\fi} + +\def \zdiagwd #1#2{% + \setbox \zboxa = \hbox{$\scriptstyle #2$}% + \hbox to \wd\zboxa {\hfil $\scriptstyle #1$\hfil}} + +% Enunciation Definition +% ----------- ---------- + + +\setlist \zenuntypelist = {} + + +\def \defineenunciationtype #1#2{% {type}{association} + \if \emptyargp{#2}% + \if \withname\undefinedp{\enunciation#1number}% + \withname\definecount{\enunciation#1number}{0}% + \withname\declaresnapitem{\enunciation#1number}% + \fi + \else + \defineenunciationtype{#2}{}% + \edef \znext {% + \global\withname\let{\enunciation#1number}=\name{\enunciation#2number}}% + \znext + \fi + \append{#1}{\zenuntypelist}} + +%~ Use this command to define a new type of enunciation. + +\def \defineenunciation #1#2#3{% {type}{association}{design} + \defineenunciationtype{#1}{#2}% + \withname\def {\enunciation#1design}{#3}} + + +% This is deprecated in favor of \defineenunciation. + +\def \defineenunciationtypedesign #1#2#3{% {type}{assocation}{design} + \defineenunciationtype{#1}{#2}% + \withname\def {\enunciation#1design}{#3}} + +\def \resetenunciationnumbers {% + \maplist{\global\name{\enunciation##1number}=0\relax}{\zenuntypelist}} + +% Enunciation Block +% ----------- ----- + + +\defineblock{\enunciation}{\endenunciation}{\false}{} + +%~block enunciation Type +% \abovepenalty = integer % Penalty above block +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above block. +% \setflag \allowclubline = flag % True if club allowed below. +% \setflag \allownesting = flag % True if blocks can be nested. +% \attribution = {...} % Attribution text (no longer used). +% \setflag \attributionarg = flag % True if \enunciation takes attribution argument. +% \autoqed = {,,,} % Automatic QED at end. +% \belowpenalty = integer % Penalty below block. +% \belowskip = glue % Space b/b below block. +% \bodyfont = {...} % Font for text. +% \def \comptextformat {...} % Composite number text formatter. +% \continue = integer % Continued or continuation. +% \difficulty = integer % Level of difficulty. +% \def \endformat {...} % End of enunciation formatter. +% \def \labelformat ##1{...} % Enunciation label formatter. +% \leftindent = glue % Left indentation. +% \parindent = dimen % Paragraph indent. +% \parrag = dimen % Paragraph raggedness. +% \parskip = glue % Paragraph skip. +% \rightindent = glue % Right indentation. +% \width = dimen % Width of text. +%~end + +\definetoks{\attribution} +\definecount{\attributiontype}{0} % 0: none; 1: attribution; 2: new title +\definetoks{\autoqed} + +\setflag \zautoqeddone = \false + + +\def \enunciation #1{% {type}{optional-attribution} + \beginblockscope{enunciation}% + \global\increment \enunciationdepth + \abovepenalty = \breakgood %~default hard + \setflag \allowclubline = \false %~default soft + \setflag \allownesting = \false %~default soft + \attribution = {}% %~default with + \setflag \attributionarg = \false %~default soft + \autoqed = {}% %~default soft + \belowpenalty = \breakgood %~default hard + \continue = 0 %~default with + \setflag \continuation = \false % Deprecated + \difficulty = 0 %~default with + \def \endformat {}% %~default soft + \processdesign{\enunciation}{#1}% + \zsetcontinue % Handle old \continuation. + \if \andp{\notp{\allownesting}}{\gtrp{\enunciationdepth}{1}}% + \error{blkcantnest} + {An enunciation cannot be nested inside itself}% + \fi + \if \attributionarg + \let \znext = \enunciationarg + \else + \let \znext = \enunciationb + \fi + \znext{#1}} + +\def \enunciationarg #1#2{% {type}{attribution} + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#2}}\attribution = {#2}\fi + \enunciationb{#1}} + +\def \enunciationb #1{% {type} + \attributiontype = 0\relax + \global\setflag \zautoqeddone = \false + \if \notp{\emptytoksp{\attribution}}% + \expandafter\zparseenunattr \the\attribution \zmark + \fi + \if \notp{\continuationp}% + \global\withname\increment{\enunciation#1number}% + \fi + \global\withname\enunciationnumber{\enunciation#1number}% + \setcomptext{\enunciationcomptext}% + \enunciationformat + \settaginfo{\the\enunciationcomptext}{???}% + \ignorespaces} + +\def \endenunciation {% + \futurelet\nexttoken \zendenunciation} + +\def \zendenunciation {% + \endenunciationformat + \global\decrement \enunciationdepth + \endblockscope{enunciation}% + \parnext} + +\def \enunciationformat {% + \endgraf + \the\bodyfont + \bbskipabove{\abovepenalty}{\aboveskip}% + \alterindentation{\leftindent}{\rightindent}% + \settextwidth{\width}% + \setparrag{\parrag}% + \expandafter\labelformat\expandafter{\the\attribution}% + \if \notp{\allowclubline}\overrideclubpenalty{\breaknever}\fi} + +\def \endenunciationformat{% + \if \notp{\zautoqeddone}\the\autoqed \fi + \endgraf + \endformat + \bbskipbelowblockpar{\nexttoken}{\belowpenalty}{\belowskip}} + +%~ This marker indicates that the enunciation title completely +%~ replaces the default title. + +\definemarker{\title} + +\def \zparseenunattr #1#2\zmark{% + \def \znext {#1}% + \def \ztitle {\title}% + \if \tokeqlp{\znext}{\ztitle}% + \attribution = {#2}% + \attributiontype = 2\relax + \else + \attributiontype = 1\relax + \fi} + +%~ This command is used in enunciation design macros to select the +%~ title format based on the |\enunciation| *attribution* argument. + +\long\def \attributiontypecase #1#2#3{% {format1}{format2}{format3} + \ifcase \attributiontype + #1% no attribution + \or + #2% normal attribution + \or + #3% title override + \fi}% + +% QED Definition +% --- ---------- + + +%~ This command defines an end-of-enunciation dingbat for use +%~ with enunciations. + +\def \defineeoedingbat #1#2#3{% {name}{text}{space} + \withname\gdef {#1dingbat}{#2}% + \gdef #1{\zformateoe{#2}#3\zmark}% + \withname\gdef {\no\expandafter\discardtok\string#1}{% + \global\setflag \zautoqeddone = \true}} + +\def \zformateoe #1#2#3\zmark{% + {\def \znext {#2}% + \def \zfr {\flushright}% + \if \tokeqlp{\znext}{\zfr}% + \if \vmodep + \rightline{#1}% + \else\if \mathmodep + \hskip #3{#1}% + \else + \hskip #3\retain \nobreak \hfill {#1}% + \fi\fi + \else + \if \vmodep + \rightline{#1}% + \else\if \mathmodep + \hskip #2#3{#1}% + \else + \unskip \hskip #2#3\hskip 0pt plus -1fill \retain \nobreak \hfill {#1}% + \fi\fi + \fi + \global\setflag \zautoqeddone = \true}} + + +%~ This command is deprecated in favor of |\defineeoedingbat|. + +\def \defineqed #1#2#3#4{% {\name}{text}{space}{min-space} + \withname\gdef {#1dingbat}{#2}% + \gdef #1{\zformatqed{#2}{#3}{#4}}% + \withname\gdef{\no\expandafter\discardtok\string#1}{% + \global\setflag \zautoqeddone = \true}} + +\def \zformatqed #1#2#3{% {text}{space}{min-space} + {\def \znext {#2}% + \def \zfr {\flushright}% + \if \tokeqlp{\znext}{\zfr}% + \hspace{#3}\retain \nobreak \hfill {#1}% + \else + \if \vmodep + \noindent #1\par + \else + \hspace{#2}{#1}% + \fi + \fi + \global\setflag \zautoqeddone = \true}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmathv3.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmathv3.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a30a797bc2e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmathv3.tex @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX New Mathematics Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This file provides the mathematics facilities for "new math" +% version 3, which supercedes version 2. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 7 June 2003 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Math Spaces +% ---- ------ + + +\setmathspaces{4mu plus .25mu minus .5mu} + {4mu plus .25mu minus .5mu} + {4mu plus .25mu minus .5mu}% + +% Math Font Selections +% ---- ---- ---------- + + +\outer\def \ComputerModernmathfonts {% + \input zzcmmath\relax + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\mit}{\rm}} + +\outer\def \Lucidamathfonts #1{% {arrows?} + \setflag \zusemar = #1\relax + \input zzlucida\relax + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\mit}{\rm}} + +\outer\def \MathTimefonts #1{% {text face is Times?} + \input zzmtime\relax + \if #1% + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\mit}{\rm}% + \else + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\rm}{\rm}% + \fi} + +\outer\def \Stonemathfonts {% + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\rm}{\rm}} + +% Punctuation Style +% ----------- ----- + + +% Here we deal with the style for comma, period, semicolon, and colon. +% The default punctuation style for all four is \rm. + + +% This macro defines the math characters \zmperiod, \zmcomma, +% colon, and semicolon to use the specified style. +% If the style is \mit, then it's different. + +\def \setmathpunctuationstyle #1#2{% {\style1}{\style2} + {\zmstyfam = \name{#1fam}% + \if \eqlp{\zmstyfam}{\mitfam}% + \definemathchar {`.} \classord \mitfam {3A} + \definemathchar {`,} \classpunc \mitfam {3B} + \else + \definemathchar {`.} \classactive \rmfam {00} + \definemathchar {`,} \classactive \rmfam {00} + \definemathchar {\zmperiod} \classord \zmstyfam {2E} + \definemathchar {\zmcomma} \classpunc \zmstyfam {2C} + \fi + \zmstyfam = \name{#2fam}% + \definemathchar {`;} \classpunc \zmstyfam {3B} + \definemathchar {`:} \classrel \zmstyfam {3A}}} + +% When period and comma are active in math, this is what they do. + +{ +\catcode `\. = \catactive +\gdef .{\mathpalette\zmactperiod{}} + +\catcode `\, = \catactive +\gdef ,{\mathpalette\zmactcomma{}} +} + +\def \zmactperiod #1#2{% + \mathord{\hbox to .275em{\hfil $#1\zmperiod$\kern .06em\hfil}}} + +\def \zmactcomma #1#2{% + \mathpunct{\hbox to .331em{\kern .045em $#1\zmcomma$\hfil}}} + +% Dot-Related Commands +% ----------- -------- + + +\def \cdotp {\mathpunct{\vcenter{\hbox{$.$}}}} + +\def \ldotp {\mathpunct{.}} + +\def \cdots {\mathinner{\cdotp\cdotp\cdotp}} + +\def \ddots {% + \vbox{\baselineskip = 4pt \lineskiplimit = 0pt + \hbox{.}% + \hbox{\kern .4em .}% + \hbox{\kern .8em .}% + \vskip -.25ex}} + +\def \ldots {\mathinner{\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp}} + +\def \vdots {% + \vbox{\baselineskip = 4pt \lineskiplimit = 0pt + \hbox{.}% + \hbox{.}% + \hbox{.}% + \vskip -.25ex}} + +% Colon Commands +% ----- -------- + + +\def \maps {\mathpunct{:}} + +\let \colon = \maps diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmathv4.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmathv4.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a5c5a0c411e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmathv4.tex @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX New Mathematics Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This file provides the mathematics facilities for "new math" +% version 4. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 24 September 2003 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Document Parameters +% -------- ---------- + + +\delimitershortfall = 2pt + +% Math Spaces +% ---- ------ + + +\setmathspaces{4mu plus .25mu minus .5mu} + {4mu plus .25mu minus .5mu} + {4mu plus .25mu minus .5mu}% + +% Math Font Selections +% ---- ---- ---------- + + +\outer\def \ComputerModernmathfonts {% + \input zzcmmath\relax + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\mit}{\rm}} + +\outer\def \Lucidamathfonts #1{% {arrows?} + \setflag \zusemar = #1\relax + \input zzlucida\relax + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\mit}{\rm}} + +\outer\def \MathTimefonts #1{% {text face is Times?} + \input zzmtime\relax + \if #1% + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\mit}{\rm}% + \else + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\rm}{\rm}% + \fi} + +\outer\def \Stonemathfonts {% + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\rm}{\rm}} + +% Punctuation Style +% ----------- ----- + + +% Here we deal with the style for comma, period, semicolon, and colon. +% The default punctuation style for all four is \rm. + + +% This macro defines the math characters \zmperiod, \zmcomma, +% colon, and semicolon to use the specified style. +% If the style is \mit, then it's different. + +\def \setmathpunctuationstyle #1#2{% {\style1}{\style2} + {\zmstyfam = \name{#1fam}% + \if \eqlp{\zmstyfam}{\mitfam}% + \definemathchar {`.} \classord \mitfam {3A} + \definemathchar {`,} \classpunc \mitfam {3B} + \else + \definemathchar {`.} \classactive \rmfam {00} + \definemathchar {`,} \classactive \rmfam {00} + \definemathchar {\zmperiod} \classord \zmstyfam {2E} + \definemathchar {\zmcomma} \classpunc \zmstyfam {2C} + \fi + \zmstyfam = \name{#2fam}% + \definemathchar {`;} \classpunc \zmstyfam {3B} + \definemathchar {`:} \classrel \zmstyfam {3A}}} + +% When period and comma are active in math, this is what they do. + +{ +\catcode `\. = \catactive +\gdef .{\mathpalette\zmactperiod{}} + +\catcode `\, = \catactive +\gdef ,{\mathpalette\zmactcomma{}} +} + +\def \zmactperiod #1#2{% + \mathord{\hbox to .275em{\hfil $#1\zmperiod$\kern .06em\hfil}}} + +\def \zmactcomma #1#2{% + \mathpunct{\hbox to .331em{\kern .045em $#1\zmcomma$\hfil}}} + +% Dot-Related Commands +% ----------- -------- + + +\def \cdotp {\mathpunct{\vcenter{\hbox{$.$}}}} + +\def \ldotp {\mathpunct{.}} + +\def \cdots {\mathinner{\cdotp\cdotp\cdotp}} + +\def \ddots {% + \vbox{\baselineskip = 4pt \lineskiplimit = 0pt + \hbox{.}% + \hbox{\kern .4em .}% + \hbox{\kern .8em .}% + \vskip -.25ex}} + +\def \ldots {\mathinner{\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp}} + +\def \vdots {% + \vbox{\baselineskip = 4pt \lineskiplimit = 0pt + \hbox{.}% + \hbox{.}% + \hbox{.}% + \vskip -.25ex}} + +% Colon Commands +% ----- -------- + + +\def \maps {\mathpunct{:}} + +\let \colon = \maps diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmathv5.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmathv5.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e7a8f90b2d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmathv5.tex @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX New Mathematics Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This file provides the mathematics facilities for "new math" +% version 5. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 24 September 2003 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Document Parameters +% -------- ---------- + + +\delimitershortfall = 2pt + +% Math Spaces +% ---- ------ + + +\setmathspaces{4mu plus .25mu minus .5mu} + {4mu plus .25mu minus .5mu} + {4mu plus .25mu minus .5mu}% + +% Math Font Selections +% ---- ---- ---------- + + +\outer\def \ComputerModernmathfonts {% + \input zzcmmath\relax + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\mit}{\rm}} + +\outer\def \Lucidamathfonts #1{% {arrows?} + \setflag \zusemar = #1\relax + \input zzlucida\relax + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\mit}{\rm}} + +\outer\def \MathTimefonts #1{% {text face is Times?} + \input zzmtime\relax + \if #1% + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\mit}{\rm}% + \else + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\rm}{\rm}% + \fi} + +\outer\def \Stonemathfonts {% + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\rm}{\rm}} + +% Punctuation Style +% ----------- ----- + + +% Here we deal with the style for comma, period, semicolon, and colon. +% The default punctuation style for all four is \rm. + + +% This macro defines the math characters \zmperiod, \zmcomma, +% colon, and semicolon to use the specified style. +% If the style is \mit, then it's different. + +\def \setmathpunctuationstyle #1#2{% {\style1}{\style2} + {\zmstyfam = \name{#1fam}% + \if \eqlp{\zmstyfam}{\mitfam}% + \definemathchar {`.} \classord \mitfam {3A} + \definemathchar {`,} \classpunc \mitfam {3B} + \else + \definemathchar {`.} \classactive \rmfam {00} + \definemathchar {`,} \classactive \rmfam {00} + \definemathchar {\zmperiod} \classord \zmstyfam {2E} + \definemathchar {\zmcomma} \classpunc \zmstyfam {2C} + \fi + \zmstyfam = \name{#2fam}% + \definemathchar {`;} \classpunc \zmstyfam {3B} + \definemathchar {`:} \classrel \zmstyfam {3A}}} + +% When period and comma are active in math, this is what they do. + +{ +\catcode `\. = \catactive +\gdef .{\mathpalette\zmactperiod{}} + +\catcode `\, = \catactive +\gdef ,{\mathpalette\zmactcomma{}} +} + +\def \zmactperiod #1#2{% + \mathord{\hbox to .275em{\hfil $#1\zmperiod$\hfil}}} + +\def \zmactcomma #1#2{% + \mathpunct{\hbox to .331em{\kern .045em $#1\zmcomma$\hfil}}} + +% Dot-Related Commands +% ----------- -------- + + +\def \cdotp {\mathpunct{\vcenter{\hbox{$.$}}}} + +\def \ldotp {\mathpunct{.}} + +\def \cdots {\mathinner{\cdotp\cdotp\cdotp}} + +\def \ddots {% + \vbox{\baselineskip = 4pt \lineskiplimit = 0pt + \hbox{.}% + \hbox{\kern .4em .}% + \hbox{\kern .8em .}% + \vskip -.25ex}} + +\def \ldots {\mathinner{\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp}} + +\def \vdots {% + \vbox{\baselineskip = 4pt \lineskiplimit = 0pt + \hbox{.}% + \hbox{.}% + \hbox{.}% + \vskip -.25ex}} + +% Colon Commands +% ----- -------- + + +\def \maps {\mathpunct{:}} + +\let \colon = \maps diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmathv6.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmathv6.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c47f22ae2dd --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmathv6.tex @@ -0,0 +1,180 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX New Mathematics Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This file provides the mathematics facilities for "new math" +% version 5. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 24 September 2003 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Document Parameters +% -------- ---------- + + +\delimitershortfall = 2pt + +% Math Spaces +% ---- ------ + + +\setmathspaces{4mu plus .25mu minus .5mu} + {4mu plus .25mu minus .5mu} + {4mu plus .25mu minus .5mu}% + +% Math Font Selections +% ---- ---- ---------- + + +\outer\def \ComputerModernmathfonts {% + \input zzcmmath\relax + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\mit}{\rm}} + +\outer\def \Lucidamathfonts #1{% {arrows?} + \setflag \zusemar = #1\relax + \input zzlucida\relax + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\mit}{\rm}} + +\outer\def \MathTimefonts #1{% {text face is Times?} + \input zzmtime\relax + \setmathucgreekstyles{\mit}{\boldgreekunavailable}% + \if #1% + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\mit}{\rm}% + \else + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\rm}{\rm}% + \fi} + +\outer\def \Stonemathfonts {% + \setmathpunctuationstyle{\rm}{\rm}} + +% Greek Letter Style +% ----- ------ ----- + + +\def \zmucgreekstyler {} +\def \zmucgreekstyleb {} + + +% Note the "s" at the end of the name, versus \setmathucgreekstyle. + +\def \setmathucgreekstyles #1#2{% {regular-style}{bold-style} + \gdef \zmucgreekstyler {#1}% + \gdef \zmucgreekstyleb {#2}% +\definemathchar \Alpha \classvarfam \rmfam {41}% +\definemathchar \Beta \classvarfam \rmfam {42}% +\zdefucgreekchar \Gamma {30}% +\zdefucgreekchar \Delta {31}% +\definemathchar \Epsilon \classvarfam \rmfam {45}% +\definemathchar \Zeta \classvarfam \rmfam {5A}% +\definemathchar \Eta \classvarfam \rmfam {48}% +\zdefucgreekchar \Theta {32}% +\definemathchar \Iota \classvarfam \rmfam {49}% +\definemathchar \Kappa \classvarfam \rmfam {4B}% +\zdefucgreekchar \Lambda {33}% +\definemathchar \Mu \classvarfam \rmfam {4D}% +\definemathchar \Nu \classvarfam \rmfam {4E}% +\zdefucgreekchar \Xi {34}% +\definemathchar \Omicron \classvarfam \rmfam {4F}% +\zdefucgreekchar \Pi {35}% +\definemathchar \Rho \classvarfam \rmfam {50}% +\zdefucgreekchar \Sigma {36}% +\definemathchar \Tau \classvarfam \rmfam {54}% +\zdefucgreekchar \Upsilon {37}% +\zdefucgreekchar \Phi {38}% +\definemathchar \Chi \classvarfam \rmfam {58}% +\zdefucgreekchar \Psi {39}% +\zdefucgreekchar \Omega {7F}} + +\def \zdefucgreekchar #1#2{% {\name}{code} + \gdef #1{% + \if \eqlp{\fam}{-1}% + {\zmucgreekstyler \mathchar "70#2}% + \else\if \eqlp{\fam}{\bffam}% + {\zmucgreekstyleb \mathchar "70#2}% + \else + \error{invgrkstyle}{The current math family precludes using bold Greek}% + \fi\fi}} + +% Punctuation Style +% ----------- ----- + + +% Here we deal with the style for comma, period, semicolon, and colon. +% The default punctuation style for all four is \rm. + + +% This macro defines the math characters \zmperiod, \zmcomma, +% colon, and semicolon to use the specified style. +% If the style is \mit, then it's different. + +\def \setmathpunctuationstyle #1#2{% {\style1}{\style2} + {\zmstyfam = \name{#1fam}% + \if \eqlp{\zmstyfam}{\mitfam}% + \definemathchar {`.} \classord \mitfam {3A}% + \definemathchar {`,} \classpunc \mitfam {3B}% + \else + \definemathchar {`.} \classactive \rmfam {00}% + \definemathchar {`,} \classactive \rmfam {00}% + \definemathchar {\zmperiod} \classord \zmstyfam {2E}% + \definemathchar {\zmcomma} \classpunc \zmstyfam {2C}% + \fi + \zmstyfam = \name{#2fam}% + \definemathchar {`;} \classpunc \zmstyfam {3B}% + \definemathchar {`:} \classrel \zmstyfam {3A}}} + +% When period and comma are active in math, this is what they do. + +{ +\catcode `\. = \catactive +\gdef .{\mathpalette\zmactperiod{}} + +\catcode `\, = \catactive +\gdef ,{\mathpalette\zmactcomma{}} +} + +\def \zmactperiod #1#2{% + \mathord{\hbox to .275em{\hfil $#1\zmperiod$\hfil}}} + +\def \zmactcomma #1#2{% + \mathpunct{\hbox to .331em{\kern .045em $#1\zmcomma$\hfil}}} + +% Dot-Related Commands +% ----------- -------- + + +\def \cdot {\mathbin{\vcenter{\hbox{$.$}}}} + +\def \cdotp {\mathpunct{\vcenter{\hbox{$.$}}}} + +\def \ldotp {\mathpunct{.}} + +\def \cdots {\mathinner{\cdotp\cdotp\cdotp}} + +\def \ddots {% + \vbox{\baselineskip = 4pt \lineskiplimit = 0pt + \hbox{.}% + \hbox{\kern .4em .}% + \hbox{\kern .8em .}% + \vskip -.25ex}} + +\def \ldots {\mathinner{\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp}} + +\def \vdots {% + \vbox{\baselineskip = 4pt \lineskiplimit = 0pt + \hbox{.}% + \hbox{.}% + \hbox{.}% + \vskip -.25ex}} + +% Colon Commands +% ----- -------- + + +\def \maps {\mathpunct{:}} + +\let \colon = \maps diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmerge.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmerge.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..05ef863971b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmerge.tex @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Merge Print +% +% Synopsis: This module provides a simple merge print facility for ZzTeX. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 17 October 2000 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Merge Fields +% ----- ------ + + +\setlist \zmrgfields = {} +\definecount{\zmrgcount}{0} + +\def \mergefields #1{% + \commalist{\zmrgfields}{#1}% + \zmrgcount = 0 + \maplist{\increment \zmrgcount + \withname\edef {\zmrgfmap:##1}{\the\zmrgcount}} + {\zmrgfields}} + +% Merge Text +% ----- ---- + + +\definetoks{\zmrgtoks} + +\long\def \mergetext #1\endmergetext{% + \zmrgtoks = {#1}} + +% Merge Print +% ----- ----- + + +\definecount{\zmrgi}{0} + + +\def \mergeprint {% + \zmrgi = 0 + \zmrgprinta} + +\def \zmrgprinta #1{% + \if \lssp{\zmrgi}{\zmrgcount}% + \increment \zmrgi + \withname\def {\zmrgvmap:\the\zmrgi}{#1}% + \let \znext = \zmrgprinta + \else + \let \znext = \zmrgprintb + \fi + \znext} + +\def \zmrgprintb {% + \freshpage{\short\floats\any}% + \the\zmrgtoks} + +% Merge a Field +% ----- - ----- + + +\def \merge #1{% + \edef \tcounta {\name{\zmrgfmap:#1}}% + \edef \znext {\name{\zmrgvmap:\the\tcounta}}% + \znext} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmisc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmisc.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1813a3f5725 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmisc.tex @@ -0,0 +1,292 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Miscellaneous Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This module contains miscellaneous facilities that do not +% seem to belong in any other file. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 26 August 1989 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Character Categories +% --------- ---------- + + +% The following list contains characters with category codes other +% than endofline, ignored, space, letter, other, and invalid: + +\setlist \zcatlist = {} + + +\def \establishcatcode #1#2{% {`\c}{\catname} + \zdelcat{#1}% + \catcode #1 = #2% + {\setflag \znext = \true + \if \eqlp{#2}{\catendofline}\setflag \znext = \false \fi + \if \eqlp{#2}{\catignored}\setflag \znext = \false \fi + \if \eqlp{#2}{\catspace}\setflag \znext = \false \fi + \if \eqlp{#2}{\catletter}\setflag \znext = \false \fi + \if \eqlp{#2}{\catother}\setflag \znext = \false \fi + \if \eqlp{#2}{\catinvalid}\setflag \znext = \false \fi + \if \znext \append{#1}{\zcatlist}\fi}} + +\def \zdelcat #1{% + {\setlist \znewcatlist = {}% + \maplist{\def \zcata {##1}\def \zcatb{#1}% + \if \notp{\tokeqlp{\zcata}{\zcatb}}\append{##1}{\znewcatlist}\fi}% + {\zcatlist}% + \setlist \zcatlist = \znewcatlist}} + +% Initialize the character list: + +\establishcatcode{`\^^L}{\catactive} +\establishcatcode{`\#}{\catparameter} +\establishcatcode{`\$}{\catmath} +\establishcatcode{`\&}{\catalign} +\establishcatcode{`\%}{\catcomment} +\establishcatcode{`\@}{\catactive} +\establishcatcode{`\\}{\catescape} +\establishcatcode{`\^}{\catsuperscript} +\establishcatcode{`\_}{\catsubscript} +\establishcatcode{`\{}{\catbegin} +\establishcatcode{`\}}{\catend} +\establishcatcode{`\~}{\catactive} + +\def \uncatcode #1#2#3{% {allow-commands}{allow-at-commands}{allow-math} + \maplist{\catcode##1=\catother}{\zcatlist}% + \if #1% + \catcode`\\ = \catescape + \catcode`\{ = \catbegin + \catcode`\} = \catend + \fi + \if #2% + \catcode`\@ = \catactive + \fi + \if #3% + \catcode`\$ = \catmath + \catcode`\^ = \catsuperscript + \catcode`\_ = \catsubscript + \fi} + +\def \catcodemath {% + \catcode `\ = \catspace + \catcode `\$ = \catmath + \catcode `\^ = \catsuperscript + \catcode `\_ = \catsubscript} + +\def \catcoderange #1#2#3{% {first}{last}{\catname} + \tcounta = #1\relax + \tcountb = #2\relax \increment \tcountb + \loop + \ifnum \tcounta < \tcountb + \catcode \tcounta = #3% + \increment \tcounta + \repeat} + +% Make the upper half of the ASCII characters invalid. + +\catcoderange{"80}{"FF}{\catinvalid} + +% Conditional Text +% ----------- ---- + + +\let \setif = \if +\let \endsetif = \fi + +\def \ignore {% + \if \notp{\zemptyblockstackp}\todo{$\ignore command.}\fi + \setif \false} + +\let \endignore = \endsetif + +% Date & Time +% ---- - ---- + + +% \year, \month, and \day are TeX parameters. + +\definecount{\weekday}{0} + +% \time is a TeX parameter, the number of minutes since midnight. + +\definecount{\hour}{0} +\definecount{\minute}{0} + + +\def \zdtinit {% + \zwdinit + \hour = \time + \divide \hour by 60 + \minute = \time + \divide \minute by 60 + \multiply \minute by -60 + \advance \minute by \time} + +\def \zwdinit {% + \tcounta = \year + \if \lssp{\month}{3}\advance \tcounta by -1 \fi + \tcountb = \tcounta + \divide \tcountb by 100 + \tcountc = \tcountb + \multiply \tcountc by -100 + \advance \tcountc by \tcounta + \tcounta = \month + \if \lssp{\month}{3}\advance \tcounta by 9 \else \advance \tcounta by -3 \fi + \multiply \tcountb by 146097 + \divide \tcountb by 4 + \multiply \tcountc by 1461 + \divide \tcountc by 4 + \advance \tcountb by \tcountc + \multiply \tcounta by 153 + \advance \tcounta by 2 + \divide \tcounta by 5 + \advance \tcountb by \tcounta + \advance \tcountb by \day + \advance \tcountb by -693902 + \weekday = \tcountb + \divide \weekday by 7 + \multiply \weekday by -7 + \advance \weekday by \tcountb} + + +\def \formattime {% + \number\hour:% + \if \lssp{\minute}{10}0\fi + \number\minute} + +% Fancy Names +% ----- ----- + + +\def \AMSTeX {AMS\TeX} + +\def \BibTeX {Bib\TeX} + +\def \LaTeX {L\kern-.3em \raise .4ex \hbox{a}\kern-.05em \TeX} + +% Hiding Writes +% ------ ------ + + +% These macros help to hide the \write's that are performed by commands +% like \tag and \xpage. + +\definedimen{\zhidewriteskip}{0pt} + +\def \zbeginhidewrite {% + \zhidewriteskip = \lastskip + \begingroup + \if \hmodep \edef \zsf {\spacefactor=\the\spacefactor}\fi} + +\def \zendhidewrite {% + \if \hmodep \zsf \fi + \endgroup + \if \andp{\hmodep}{\dimposp{\zhidewriteskip}}\ignorespaces \fi} + +% Initialization File +% -------------- ---- + + +\def \zloadinifile {% + \gdef \inicompositor {???}% + \gdef \iniinitials {???}% + \gdef \ininame {???} + \gdef \iniorganization {(none)}% + \checkfile{\zini}{zztex.ini}% + \if \zini + \writelog{(loading ini file)}% + \zloadinifilea + \else + \writelog{(no ini file)}% + \fi} + +\def \zloadinifilea {% + \begingroup + \catcode \endlinechar = \catcomment + \catcode `\; = \catcomment + \openin \zreada zztex.ini\relax + \setflag \zinireg = \false + \loop + \read \zreada to \zline + \if \notp{\emptydefp{\zline}}\expandafter\zloadinifileb \zline\zmark \fi + \if \notp{\eofp{\zreada}}\repeat + \closein \zreada + \endgroup} + +\def \zloadinifileb #1#2\zmark {% + \if \codeeqlp{#1}{[}% + \zloadinifilec #2\zmark + \else\if \zinireg + \zloadinifiled #1#2\zmark + \fi\fi} + +\def \zloadinifilec #1]#2\zmark {% + \stringeql{\zinireg}{#1}{registration}} + +\def \zloadinifiled #1=#2\zmark {% + \withname\gdef {\ini#1}{#2}} + +% Penalties +% --------- + + +% The following symbolic penalties should be used everywhere so they +% can be adjusted without any recoding. The trailing spaces are +% like \relax but don't screw up \ifnum. + +\def \breaknever {10000 } %~ Never break here. %^penalty +\def \breakworst {500 } %~ Worst place to break. %^penalty +\def \breakworse {300 } %~ Worse place to break. %^penalty +\def \breakbad {100 } %~ Bad place to break. %^penalty +\def \breakallowed {0 } %~ Break allowed here. %^penalty +\def \breakgood {-100 } %~ Good place to break. %^penalty +\def \breakbetter {-300 } %~ Better place to break. %^penalty +\def \breakbest {-500 } %~ Best place to break. %^penalty +\def \breakalways {-10000 } %~ Always break here. %^penalty + + +\def \allowbreak {\penalty \breakallowed} %~ Allow page break here. +\def \break {\penalty \breakalways} %~ Force page break here. +\def \nobreak {\penalty \breaknever} %~ Disallow page break here. +\let \unbreakable = \nobreak + +% Versions +% -------- + + +% I have no idea what my intention was here. + + +\def \defineversion #1#2{% {\name}{status} + \if #2% + \let \znext = \zletiftrue + \else + \let \znext = \zletiffalse + \fi + \withname\let {\end \expandafter\discardtok\string#1} = \fi + \znext{#1}} + +\def \zletiftrue #1{% + \let #1 = \iftrue} + +\def \zletiffalse #1{% + \let #1 = \iffalse} + + +\defineversion{\ignore}{\false} + +% Translator Flags +% ---------- ----- + + +\def \XTran<#1>{% + \error{xtran}{XTran flag: #1}} + +\def \ZzTran[#1]{% + \error{zztran}{ZzTran flag: #1}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmtime.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmtime.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fd198712576 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzmtime.tex @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX MathTime Font Support +% +% Synopsis: This module contains various definitions and redefinitions +% necessary to use the MathTime fonts by The TeXplorators Corp. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 24 March 1993 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Type Styles +% ---- ------ + +\setstyleskewchar{\mit}{"2D} + +% Redefine Text Accents +% -------- ---- ------- + + +\def \t #1{% %~ Tie-after accent. %^accent + {\edef \znext {\the\font}\the\textfont2 \accent "41 \znext #1}} + +% Redefine Math Characters +% -------- ---- ---------- + + +\zmchar \Gamma \classord \mitfam {30} +\zmchar \Delta \classord \mitfam {31} +\zmchar \Theta \classord \mitfam {32} +\zmchar \Lambda \classord \mitfam {33} +\zmchar \Xi \classord \mitfam {34} +\zmchar \Pi \classord \mitfam {35} +\zmchar \Sigma \classord \mitfam {36} +\zmchar \Upsilon \classord \mitfam {37} +\zmchar \Phi \classord \mitfam {38} +\zmchar \Psi \classord \mitfam {39} +\zmchar \Omega \classord \mitfam {7F} + +\zmchar \varkappa \classord \mitfam {7E} + +\zmchar {`+} \classbinop \msyfam {43} +\zmchar \compose \classbinop \msyfam {42} +\zmchar \capprod \classbinop \msyfam {5A} +\zmchar \cupprod \classbinop \msyfam {59} +% Do not define \zmdagger and \zmddagger. +\zmchar \setdiff \classbinop \msyfam {58} + +\zmchar \triangleleft \classbinop \msyfam {47} +\zmchar \triangleright \classbinop \msyfam {46} + +\zmchar {`=} \classrel \msyfam {44} + +\zmchar {`(} \classopen \mitfam {2E} +\definemathdelimiter {`(} \classord \mitfam {2E} \mexfam {00} + +\zmchar {`)} \classclose \mitfam {2F} +\definemathdelimiter {`)} \classord \mitfam {2F} \mexfam {01} + +\def \hbar {\mathord{h \llap{$\mathchar"024E \mkern 3.5mu$}}} + +\def \acute {\zmtaccent{024B}{7013}} %~ Acute accent. %^math_accent +\def \bar {\zmtaccent{024E}{7016}} %~ Bar accent. %^math_accent +\def \breve {\zmtaccent{024D}{7015}} %~ Breve accent. %^math_accent +\def \check {\zmtaccent{024C}{7014}} %~ Check accent. %^math_accent +\def \ddot {\zmtaccent{0252}{????}} %~ Double dot accent. %^math_accent +\def \dot {\zmtaccent{0250}{700B}} %~ Dot accent. %^math_accent +\def \grave {\zmtaccent{024A}{7012}} %~ Grave accent. %^math_accent +\def \zmhat {\zmtaccent{024F}{7007}} %~ Hat accent. %^math_accent +\def \zmtilde {\zmtaccent{0251}{700F}} %~ Tilde accent. %^math_accent +\def \vec {\mathaccent "0245\relax} %~ Vector accent. %^math_accent +\def \widebar {\mathaccent "0253\relax} %~ Wide bar accent. %^math_accent + +\def \zmtaccent #1#2{% + \if \eqlp{\fam}{-1}% + \mathaccent "#1\relax + \else + \mathaccent "#2\relax + \fi} + +% Redefine General Tools +% -------- ------- ----- + + +\zmchar \Relbar \classrel \msyfam {48} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zznewmath.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zznewmath.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..583bb3d63af --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zznewmath.tex @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX New Mathematics Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This file provides the mathematics facilities for "new math" +% modes 1 and 2. It is loaded after the design file. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 16 October 2002 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Punctuation +% ----------- + + +\if \eqlp{\newmath}{1}% + +\def \ldotp {\hbox to .42em{\hfil.\hfil}} + +\else\if \gtrp{\newmath}{1}% + +% This macro defines the math characters \zmperiod, \zmcomma, +% colon, and semicolon to use the specified style. +% If the style is \mit, then it's different. + +\def \setmathpunctuationstyle #1{% {style} + {\zmstyfam = \name{#1fam}% + \definemathchar {\zmperiod} \classord \zmstyfam {2E} + \definemathchar {\zmcomma} \classpunc \zmstyfam {2C} + \definemathchar {`;} \classpunc \zmstyfam {3B} + \definemathchar {`:} \classrel \zmstyfam {3A}}} + +% Now establish \rm as the default punctuation style. + +\setmathpunctuationstyle{\rm} + +% Period and comma must be active in math. + +\definemathchar {`.} \classactive \rmfam {00} + +\definemathchar {`,} \classactive \rmfam {00} + +% When period and comma are active in math, this is what they do. + +{ +\catcode `\. = \catactive +\gdef .{\mathpalette\zmactperiod{}} + +\catcode `\, = \catactive +\gdef ,{\mathpalette\zmactcomma{}} +} + +\def \zmactperiod #1#2{% + \mathord{\hbox to .28em{\hfil $#1\zmperiod$\hfil}}} + +\def \zmactcomma #1#2{% + \mathpunct{\hbox to .33em{\hfil $#1\zmcomma$\kern .03em\hfil}}} + +% Now we can define all the dot-oriented math commands. + +\def \cdotp {\mathpunct{\vcenter{\hbox{$.$}}}} + +\def \ldotp {\mathpunct{.}} + +\def \cdots {\mathinner{\cdotp\cdotp\cdotp}} + +\def \ddots {% + \vbox{\baselineskip = 4pt \lineskiplimit = 0pt + \hbox{.}% + \hbox{\kern .4em .}% + \hbox{\kern .8em .}% + \vskip -.25ex}} + +\def \ldots {\mathinner{\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp}} + +\def \vdots {% + \vbox{\baselineskip = 4pt \lineskiplimit = 0pt + \hbox{.}% + \hbox{.}% + \hbox{.}% + \vskip -.25ex}} + +% Make \maps and \colon do the right thing. + +\def \maps {\mathpunct{:}} + +\let \colon = \maps + +\fi\fi diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zznote.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zznote.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..412d46c98a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zznote.tex @@ -0,0 +1,522 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Notes Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This module defines various blocks that produce "notes", such +% as footnotes. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 28 September 1989 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Footnotes +% --------- + + +\defineblock{\footnote}{\endfootnote}{\true}{} + +% The footnote parameters are used at two different times: when the +% \footnote macro appears, and when the page is output. + +% The \referencing parameter takes the following values: +% 0: Produce neither a reference nor an intro number. +% 1: Produce an intro number, but no reference. +% 2: Produce both a reference and an intro number. + +%~block footnote +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above first footnote line. +% \setflag \abutting = flag % True if note abutts previous one. +% \bodyfont = {...} % Font for footnote text. +% \def \comptextformat {...} % Composite number text formatter. +% \internoteskip = glue % Extra space between footnotes. +% \leftindent = glue % Left indentation. +% \height = dimen % Maximum height on page. +% \interlinepenalty = penalty % Penalty between footnote lines. +% \def \noteintroformat {...} % Footnote intro formatter. +% \def \noterefformat {...} % Footnote reference formatter. +% \parindent = dimen % Paragraph indent. +% \parrag = dimen % Paragraph raggedness. +% \parskip = glue % Paragraph skip. +% \referencing = integer % How the footnote is referenced. +% \rightindent = glue % Right indentation. +% \rulecolor = {...} % Color of rule. +% \rulewidth = dimen % Width of rule. +% \ruleheight = dimen % Height of rule. +% \ruleshift = dimen % Horizontal shift of rule. +% \ruleskip = dimen % Space b/b below rule. +% \def \spilloverride {...} % Override parameters on spillover. +% \textcolor = {...} % Color of text. +%~end + +\defineskip{\internoteskip}{0pt} +\definecount{\referencing}{0} + +\defineinsert{\zfninsert} + + +\def \footnote {% {text} + \blockcantbein{\footnote}{\footnote}% + \beginblockscope{footnote}% + \global\increment \footnotedepth + \setflag \abutting = \false %~default with + \referencing = 2 %~default with + \interlinepenalty = \breakworse %~default hard + \rulecolor = {black}% %~default soft + \ruleshift = 0pt %~default soft + \def \spilloverride {}% %~default soft + \textcolor = {black}% %~default soft + \processdesign{\footnote}{}% + \if \posp{\referencing}% + \global\increment \footnotenumber + \setcomptext{\footnotecomptext}% + \else + \footnotecomptext = {???}% + \fi + \settaginfo{\the\footnotecomptext}{???}% + \if \andp{\hmodep}{\eqlp{\referencing}{2}}% + {\edef \zsf {\spacefactor=\the\spacefactor}% + \/% + \if \DVIWindoinuse \colorspecial{ifview color push rgb 1 0 1}\fi + \noterefformat + \if \DVIWindoinuse \colorspecial{ifview color pop}\fi + \zsf}% + \fi + \footnoteinsert} + +\def \footnoteinsert {% + \the\bodyfont + \global\count\zfninsert = 1000 + \global\dimen\zfninsert = \height + \global\skip\zfninsert = \aboveskip + \global\advance \skip\zfninsert by -\internoteskip + \global\advance \skip\zfninsert by -\ht\strutbox % of footnote text. + \insert \zfninsert \bgroup + \zpushvcontext + \color{\the\textcolor}% + \setindentation{\leftindent}{\rightindent}% + \setparrag{\parrag}% + \parfillskip = \normalparfillskip + \spaceskip = 0pt \xspaceskip = 0pt + \splittopskip = \ht\strutbox + \advance \splittopskip by \internoteskip + \splitmaxdepth = \dp\strutbox + \floatingpenalty = 20000\relax % Reference on same page as note. + \if \posp{\referencing}% + \noteintroformat + \else + \indent + \fi + \vbox to \splittopskip{}% % Strut in first line. + \bgroup + \aftergroup\endfootnote + \let \znext} % Eat open brace of footnote text. + % Absorb footnote text. + % \bgroup matches close brace. + +\def \endfootnote {% + \if \hmodep \strut \fi % Strut in last line. + \endgraf + \unskip + \endcolor + \zpopvcontext + \egroup % \insert + \global\decrement \footnotedepth + \endblockscope{footnote}} + +% This macro is invoked by the output routine to format footnotes. + +\def \zfootnoteformat #1{% {body-depth} + \beginblockscope{footnote}% + \ruleshift = 0pt + \def \spilloverride {}% + % We used to do the \processdesign here, but that does a \processwith + % that can end up processing some other block's pending \with. Oops. + \footnotedesign \relax % \processdesign{\footnote}{} + \if \notp{\emptydefp{\spilloverride}}% + \setbox \zboxa = \vtop{\unvcopy \zfninsert}% + \if \dimzerop{\ht\zboxa}\spilloverride \fi + \fi + \vskip \skip\zfninsert + \vskip -#1\relax + \if \andp{\dimposp{\ruleheight}}{\dimposp{\rulewidth}}% + \the\bodyfont + \tdimena = \ruleskip + \advance \tdimena by -\ht\strutbox + \advance \tdimena by -\internoteskip + \vskip -\tdimena + \vskip -\ruleheight + \nointerlineskip + \noindent \hspace{\ruleshift}% + \color{\the\rulecolor}\rule{height \ruleheight depth 0pt width \rulewidth}% + \endcolor\par + \vskip \tdimena + \fi + \unvbox \zfninsert + \endblockscope{footnote}} + +% Endnote +% ------- + + +\defineblock{\endnote}{\endendnote}{\true}{} + +% The endnote parameters are used at two different times: when the +% \endnote command appears, and when the \endnotes command is used +% to typeset the notes. + +%~block endnote +% \setflag \abutting = flag % True if note abutts previous one. +% \def \comptextformat {...} % Composite number text formatter. +% \endnoteclass = integer % Class of endnote. +% \def \noterefformat {...} % Footnote reference formatter. +% \referencing = integer % How the endnote is referenced. +%~end + +\definecount{\endnoteclass}{0} +\definetoks{\zendtoks} + + +\def \endnote {% {text} + \blockcantbein{\endnote}{\endnote}% + \beginblockscope{endnote}% + \global\increment \endnotedepth + \setflag \abutting = \false %~default with + \endnoteclass = 0 %~default with + \referencing = 2 %~default with + \processdesign{\endnote}{}% + \global\increment \endnotenumber + \setcomptext{\endnotecomptext}% + \if \andp{\hmodep}{\eqlp{\referencing}{2}}% + {\edef \zsf {\spacefactor = \the\spacefactor}% + \/% + \if \DVIWindoinuse \colorspecial{ifview color push rgb 1 0 1}\fi + \noterefformat + \if \DVIWindoinuse \colorspecial{ifview color pop}\fi + \zsf}% + \fi + \afterassignment \endendnote + \zendtoks =} + +\def \endendnote {% + \edef \zendtext {\the\zendtoks}% + \edef \znext {\noexpand\xref{end}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\endnotecomptext} + {\expandafter\zdefof \meaning\zendtext\zmark} + {\the\divisionname,\the\endnoteclass}}% + \znext + \global\decrement \endnotedepth + \endblockscope{endnote}} + +% Endnotes +% -------- + + +\defineblock{\endnotes}{\endendnotes}{\false}{} + +%~block endnotes +% \setflag \abutting = flag % True if note abutts previous one. +% \def \comptextformat {...} % Composite number text formatter. +% \endnoteclass = integer % Class of endnote. +% \def \noterefformat {...} % Footnote reference formatter. +% \referencing = integer % How the endnote is referenced. +%~end + +\definecount{\endnotepage}{0} +\definetoks{\zenddivlist} +\definetoks{\zenddiv} +\definecount{\zendclass}{0} + +\def \endnotes #1{% {division-list} + \blockcantbein{\endnotes}{\endnotes}% + \blockmustbein{\endnotes}{\list}% + \beginblockscope{endnotes}% + \global\increment \endnotesdepth + \endnoteclass = 0 %~default with + \processdesign{\endnote}{}% % Use endnote block's design. + \global\increment \endnotesnumber + \zenddivlist = {#1}% + \zxloadcomp{\xrefloadendmode}% + \endendnotes} + +\def \endendnotes {% + \endgraf + \fakepar + \setlist \zendadjlist = {}% + \global\decrement \endnotesdepth + \endblockscope{endnotes}} + +% This macro is called for each endnote entry in the cross-reference file. + +\long\def \xrefend #1#2#3#4{% + \ifnum \xrefmode=\xrefloadendmode + \xrefendb{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}% + \fi} + +\long\def \xrefendb #1#2#3#4{% {page}{number}{text}{division,class} + \def \znext ##1,##2,##3\zmark{% + \zenddiv={##1}\zendclass=##2}% + \znext #4,0,\zmark \relax + \if \eqlp{\zendclass}{\endnoteclass}% + \edef \znext {\noexpand\inclusionlist\noexpand\zendtest + {\the\zenddiv}{\the\zenddivlist}}% + \znext + \if \zendtest + \setbox \zboxa = \hbox{\zendclass=0#1}% + \endnotepage = \if \dimzerop{\wd\zboxa}#1\else 0 \fi + \let \xrefmode = \xrefrunmode + \zchkendadj{#2}% + \item{#2}#3\par + \let \xrefmode = \xrefloadendmode + \fi + \fi} + +% This macro allows the compositor to noninvasively adjust pages between +% endnotes. + +\setlist \zendadjlist = {} + +\long\def \endnotesadjustment #1#2{% {division.number}{commands} + \append{{#1}{#2}}{\zendadjlist}} + +\long\def \zchkendadj #1{% {number} + \maplist{\zchkendadjb{#1}##1}{\zendadjlist}} + +\long\def \zchkendadjb #1#2#3{% {number}{division.number}{commands} + \stringeql{\znext}{\the\zenddiv.#1}{#2}% + \if \znext #3\relax \fi} + +% Margin Notes +% ------ ----- + + +\defineblock{\marginnote}{\endmarginnote}{\true}{} + +%~block marginnote Type +% \def \beginformat {...} % Beginning of text formatter. +% \bodyfont = {...} % Font for note text. +% \def \comptextformat {...} % Composite number text formatter. +% \def \endformat {...} % End of text formatter. +% \leftindent = glue % Left indentation. +% \margingutter = dimen % Gutter for note in right margin. +% \def \noteintroformat {...} % Note intro formatter. +% \def \noterefformat {...} % Note reference formatter. +% \parindent = dimen % Paragraph indent. +% \parrag = dimen % Paragraph raggedness. +% \parskip = glue % Paragraph skip. +% \position = {...} % Position (see below). +% \referencing = integer % How the margin note is referenced. +% \rightindent = glue % Right indentation. +% \textcolor = {...} % Color of text. +% \vshift = dimen % Vertical shift for note. +% \width = dimen % Width of text in box. +%~end + +\definedimen{\margingutter}{0pt} +\definecount{\marginnotepage}{0} + +\definecount{\zdivmncounter}{0} +\definedimen{\zmnshift}{0pt} +\definetoks{\zmntoks} +\definebox{\zmnbox} +\definedimen{\zmnprevdepth}{0pt} + + +\def \marginnote #1{% {type} + \blockcantbein{\marginnote}{\marginnote}% + \beginblockscope{marginnote}% + \global\increment \marginnotedepth + \global\increment \zdivmncounter + \whichpage{\marginnotepage}{zM:\the\divisionname-\the\zdivmncounter}% + \def \beginformat {}% %~default soft + \def \endformat {}% %~default soft + \leftindent = 0pt %~default soft + \referencing = 0 %~default soft + \rightindent = 0pt %~default soft + \textcolor = {black}% %~default soft + \vshift = 0pt %~default soft + \processdesign{\marginnote}{#1}% + \zparsemnpos{\the\position}% + \if \posp{\referencing}% + \global\increment \marginnotenumber + \setcomptext{\marginnotecomptext}% + \else + \marginnotecomptext = {???}% + \fi + \settaginfo{\the\marginnotecomptext}{???}% + \if \andp{\hmodep}{\eqlp{\referencing}{2}}% + {\edef \zsf {\spacefactor=\the\spacefactor}% + \/% + \if \DVIWindoinuse \colorspecial{ifview color push rgb 1 0 1}\fi + \noterefformat + \if \DVIWindoinuse \colorspecial{ifview color pop}\fi + \zsf}% + \fi + \afterassignment \endmarginnote + \zmntoks =} + +\def \endmarginnote {% + \setbox \zmnbox = \vtop{% + \zpushvcontext + \color{\the\textcolor}% + \the\bodyfont + \setindentation{\leftindent}{\rightindent}% + \settextwidth{\width} + \setparrag{\parrag}% + \beginformat + \if \posp{\referencing}\noteintroformat \fi + \the\zmntoks + \endgraf + \endformat + \endcolor + \zpopvcontext}% + \marginnoteformat + \global\decrement \marginnotedepth + \endblockscope{marginnote}} + +\def \marginnoteformat {% + \if \vmodep + \zmnprevdepth = \prevdepth + \nointerlineskip + \else + \vadjust + \fi + \bgroup + \moveright \zmnshift \vtop to 0pt{% + \vskip \vshift + \box \zmnbox + \vss + \tagpageonly{\uniquetag{zM}{\the\zdivmncounter}}}% + \egroup + \if \vmodep \prevdepth = \zmnprevdepth \fi} + +% This macro sets up variables that specify the position of a margin note +% according to the \position design parameter: +% +% \ifevenpage Use next position only on even page. +% \ifoddpage Use next position only on odd page. +% \leftmargin Shift note to left margin. +% \outsidemargin Shift note to outside margin. +% \rightmargin Shift note to right margin. + +\definecount{\zmnhpos}{0} + +\def \zparsemnpos #1{% {options...} + \global\zmnhpos = 0 + {\def \ifevenpage ##1{\if \evenp{\marginnotepage}##1\fi}% + \def \ifoddpage ##1{\if \oddp{\marginnotepage}##1\fi}% + \def \leftmargin {\global\zmnhpos=1\relax}% + \def \outsidemargin{\ifevenpage{\leftmargin}\ifoddpage{\rightmargin}}% + \def \rightmargin {\global\zmnhpos=2\relax}% + #1\relax}% + \ifcase \zmnhpos + \error{nomnpos} + {No horizontal position has been specified for a margin note}% + \or + \if \evenp{\marginnotepage}% + \zmnshift = -\evenlefttextmargin + \else + \zmnshift = -\oddlefttextmargin + \fi + \or + \calculate \zmnshift = {\textmeasure,+,\margingutter}% + \fi} + +% This macro is invoked at the beginning of each division. + +\def \zmndivinit {% + \global\zdivmncounter = 0\relax} + +% Proof Notes +% ----- ----- + + +\defineblock{\proofnote}{\endproofnote}{\true}{} + +%~block proofnote +% \bodyfont = {...} % Font for note text. +% \evenshift = dimen % Horizontal shift for even pages. +% \oddshift = dimen % Horizontal shift for odd pages. +% \textcolor = {...} % Color of note. +% \vshift = dimen % Vertical shift for note. +% \width = dimen % Width of note. +%~end + +\definedimen{\evenshift}{0pt} +\definedimen{\oddshift}{0pt} + +\definecount{\zdivpncounter}{0} +\definecount{\zpnpage}{0} + + +\def \proofnote {% {text} + \blockcantbein{\proofnote}{\proofnote}% + \beginblockscope{proofnote}% + \global\increment \proofnotedepth + \global\increment \zdivpncounter + \whichpage{\zpnpage}{zP:\the\divisionname-\the\zdivpncounter}% + \parindent = 0pt + \parskip = 2pt + \textcolor = {black}% %~default soft + \vshift = 0pt %~default soft + \processdesign{\proofnote}{}% + \afterassignment \endproofnote + \zmntoks =} + +\def \endproofnote {% + \zcalcpnshift + \setbox \zmnbox = \vtop{% + \zpushvcontext + \color{\the\textcolor}% + \the\bodyfont + \settextwidth{\width} + \setparrag{.4\width}% + \def \endpartext {}% % Prevent end-of-paragraph text. + \the\zmntoks + \endgraf + \endcolor + \zpopvcontext}% + \proofnoteformat + \long\edef \znext {\noexpand\todo{.Proof note: \the\zmntoks}}% + \znext + \global\decrement \proofnotedepth + \endblockscope{proofnote}} + +\def \proofnoteformat {% + \if \vmodep + \zmnprevdepth = \prevdepth + \nointerlineskip + \else + \vadjust + \fi + \bgroup + \moveright \zmnshift \vtop to 0pt{% + \vskip -\parskip + \vskip \vshift + \box \zmnbox + \vss + \tagpageonly{\uniquetag{zP}{\the\zdivpncounter}}}% + \egroup + \if \vmodep \prevdepth = \zmnprevdepth \fi} + +\def \zcalcpnshift {% + \if \evenp{\zpnpage}% + \if \negp{\evenshift}% + \zmnshift = \evenshift + \else + \calculate \zmnshift = {\textmeasure,+,\evenshift}% + \fi + \else + \if \negp{\oddshift}% + \zmnshift = \oddshift + \else + \calculate \zmnshift = {\textmeasure,+,\oddshift}% + \fi + \fi} + +% This macro is invoked at the beginning of each division. + +\def \zpndivinit {% + \global\zdivpncounter = 0\relax} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzoverlay.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzoverlay.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e957ebd35e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzoverlay.tex @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Page Overlay Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This file provides the ability to overlay text and rules +% on each page. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 29 March 2006 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Overlay & Proof Identification +% ------- - ----- -------------- + + +\setflag \zoverlayset = \false +\definetoks{\zoverlay} +\zoverlay = {blind} +\definetoks{\zproofid} +\zproofid = {} + +\def \setpageoverlay #1{% {name} + \global\setflag \zoverlayset = \true + \global\zoverlay = {#1}} + +\def \proofidentification #1{% {text} + \zproofid = {#1}} + +\def \zproofidfile {% + \immediate\openout \zwritea = \jobname.zzq\relax + \immediate\write \zwritea {\the\zproofid}% + \immediate\closeout \zwritea} + +% Builtin Overlays +% ------- -------- + + +\definedimen{\zoverlaythickness}{.4pt} + + +\def \pageoverlayblind {} + +\def \pageoverlaytrimbox {% + \smashbox{% + \vbox to \trimheight{% + \topcornermarks{\trimwidth}{.5\trimheight}{\zoverlaythickness}% + \vss + \bottomcornermarks{\trimwidth}{.5\trimheight}{\zoverlaythickness}}}% + \zpagelengthmarks + \zslugline} + +\def \pageoverlaytrimmarks {% + \smashbox{% + \vbox to \trimheight{% + \topcornermarks{\trimwidth}{.75pc}{\zoverlaythickness}% + \vss + \bottomcornermarks{\trimwidth}{.75pc}{\zoverlaythickness}}}% + \zpagelengthmarks + \zslugline} + +% Page Length Marks +% ---- ------ ----- + + +\def \zpagelengthmarks {% + \smashbox{% + \calculate \tdimena = {\headmargin,+,\typeareaheight,-,\footerheight}% + \vskip \tdimena + \hbox to \trimwidth{% + \llap{\vrule height \zoverlaythickness width .75pc}\hfil + \rlap{\vrule height \zoverlaythickness width .75pc}}}} + +% Slug Line +% ---- ---- + + +\definedimen{\zslugindent}{.25in} + + +\def \zslugline {% + \if \notp{\emptytoksp{\zproofid}}% + \kern \trimheight + \if \dimgtrp{\trimheight}{10.75in}\kern -.25in \fi + \kern -8pt + \hbox to \trimwidth{% + \hspace{\zslugindent}% + \zannofont + \the\zproofid \quad + \number\year/\number\month/\number\day\space \formattime \quad + p. \folio \hspace{5pt}% + \if \notp{\emptytoksp{\divisionname}}(\the\divisionname)\fi + \hfill + \inicompositor, \iniinitials \quad + \ZzTeX\ \ZzTeXversion + \hspace{\zslugindent}}% + \fi} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzpage.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzpage.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a666c18094d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzpage.tex @@ -0,0 +1,908 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Page Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This module contains all the user facilities for +% specifying things about the page layout. It also +% contains the output routines. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 7 March 1990 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Tracing Page Makeup +% ------- ---- ------ + + +\def \tracepagemakeup #1{% + \if \posp{\tracingpagemakeup}% + \writelog{ZzTeX page \the\pagenumber: #1}% + \fi} + +% Initialize Page Parameters +% ---------- ---- ---------- + + +% Here we assume that the type area width is the same on both pages. + +\def \zpageinit {% + \gcalculate \trimplusbleedheight = {\standardbleed,+,\trimheight,+,% + \standardbleed}% + \gcalculate \trimplusbleedwidth = {\standardbleed,+,\trimwidth,+,% + \standardbleed}% + \gcalculate \typeareawidth = {\oddlefttextmargin,+,\textmeasure,+,% + \oddrighttextmargin}% + \gcalculate \evenoutermargin = {\trimwidth,-,\typeareawidth,-,% + \eveninnermargin}% + \gcalculate \evenbleedshift = {-\evenlefttextmargin,-,\evenoutermargin,-,% + \standardbleed}% + \gcalculate \oddoutermargin = {\trimwidth,-,\typeareawidth,-,% + \oddinnermargin}% + \gcalculate \oddbleedshift = {-\oddlefttextmargin,-,\oddinnermargin,-,% + \standardbleed}} + +% Page Number +% ---- ------ + + +\countdef \pagenumber = 0 + +\declaresnapitem{\pagenumber} + +\def \setpagenumber #1{% {number} + \global\pagenumber = #1\relax + \setcolumnnumber{1}} + +\def \evenpagep {\evenp{\pagenumber}} +\def \oddpagep {\oddp{\pagenumber}} + +\def \folio {} + +\def \setfoliostyle #1{% {\style} + \ztoksa = \expandaftertwice{\name{#1folio}}% + \xdef \folio {\the\ztoksa}} + +\def \chapterpagefolio {\the\chaptercomptext-\number\pagenumber} +\def \arabicfolio {\number\pagenumber} +\let \decimalfolio = \arabicfolio +\def \letterfolio {\ucletter\pagenumber} +\def \partpagefolio {\the\partcomptext-\number\pagenumber} +\def \romanfolio {\romannumeral\pagenumber} + +% Marks +% ----- + + +% These macros hold the five parts of the current mark, each part having +% three subparts. When a part is saved, the first subpart is expanded and +% the second and third subparts are not. + +\definetoks{\zmarki} \zmarki = {{???}{???}{???}} +\definetoks{\zmarkii} \zmarkii = {{???}{???}{???}} +\definetoks{\zmarkiii} \zmarkiii = {{???}{???}{???}} +\definetoks{\zmarkiv} \zmarkiv = {{???}{???}{???}} +\definetoks{\zmarkv} \zmarkv = {{???}{???}{???}} + + +\def \setmarkinfothree #1#2#3#4{% {part}{text1}{text2}{text3} + {\tcounta = #1\relax + \edef \znext {{#2}}% + \global\name{\zmark\romannumeral\tcounta} = \expandafter{\znext{#3}{#4}}% + \mark{\noexpand\or \the\zmarki \noexpand\or \the\zmarkii + \noexpand\or \the\zmarkiii \noexpand\or \the\zmarkiv + \noexpand\or \the\zmarkv}}% + \if \vmodep \repeatpenalty \fi} % In case glue follows the mark. + +\def \setmarkinfo #1#2#3{% {part}{text1}{text2} + \setmarkinfothree{#1}{#2}{#3}{???}} + + +\let \firstnewmark = \firstmark +\let \bottommark = \botmark + +\def \markinfo #1#2#3{% {mark}{part}{subpart} + \ifcase #3% + \relax + \or + \expandafter\zoneofthree + \ifcase #2\expandafter\relax #1\else {???}{???}{???}\fi + \or + \expandafter\ztwoofthree + \ifcase #2\expandafter\relax #1\else {???}{???}{???}\fi + \or + \expandafter\zthreeofthree + \ifcase #2\expandafter\relax #1\else {???}{???}{???}\fi + \else + \error{invsubpart}{The subpart `#3' is invalid}% + \fi} + +% Page Screen +% ---- ------ + + +\def \fullpagescreen #1{% {color} + \if \inbackground + \vskip -\standardbleed + \moveleft \standardbleed \vbox{% + \colorrule{#1}{width \trimplusbleedwidth height \trimplusbleedheight}}% + \else + \hrule width 0pt + \vsinkfromtrim{-\standardbleed} + \smashbox{% + \colorparrule{#1} + {\if \evenp{\pagenumber}\evenbleedshift \else \oddbleedshift \fi} + {width \trimplusbleedwidth height 0pt depth \trimplusbleedheight}}% + \fi} + +% New Headers & Footers Scheme +% --- ------- - ------- ------ + + +% Most of the definitions are in zzrunner.tex, but these need to be in +% here so they can be used in design files. + + +\def \headerblindformat {} + +\def \footerblindformat {} + +\def \headercornermarkformat {% + \line{\vrule height .5pt depth 0pt width 6pt \hfil + \vrule height .5pt depth 0pt width 6pt}% + \nointerlineskip + \line{\vrule height 6pt depth 0pt width .5pt \hfil + \vrule height 6pt depth 0pt width .5pt}% + \vfil} + +\def \footercornermarkformat {% + \vfil + \line{\vrule height 6pt depth 0pt width .5pt \hfil + \vrule height 6pt depth 0pt width .5pt}% + \nointerlineskip + \line{\vrule height .5pt width 6pt \hfil + \vrule height .5pt width 6pt}} + +% Old Headers & Footers Scheme +% --- ------- - ------- ------ + + +\def \zcurheader{\normalheader} +\def \zcurfooter{\normalfooter} + +\setflag \zoverrunners = \false +\let \zsaveheader = \relax +\let \zsavefooter = \relax + + +\def \setrunners #1#2{% {header}{footer} + \if \zoverrunners + \gdef \zsaveheader {#1}% + \gdef \zsavefooter {#2}% + \else + \gdef \zcurheader {#1}% + \gdef \zcurfooter {#2}% + \fi} + +\def \overriderunners #1#2{% {header}{footer} + \if \notp{\zoverrunners}% + \global\let \zsaveheader = \zcurheader + \global\let \zsavefooter = \zcurfooter + \global\setflag \zoverrunners = \true + \fi + \gdef \zcurheader {#1}% + \gdef \zcurfooter {#2}} + +\def \blindrunners {% + \overriderunners{\blindheader}{\blindfooter}} + +\def \zsetrunnerstoks #1{% {tokens} + \expandafter\overriderunners \the#1} + +\def \zoverriderunnerstoks #1{% {tokens} + \expandafter\overriderunners \the#1} + +% The following macro is used to initialize the \runners parameter. + +\def \zoldrunners #1{% + \runners = {#1}} + +% The following macro is called from the output routine. + +\def \znextpagerunners {% + \if \zoverrunners + \global\let \zcurheader = \zsaveheader + \global\let \zcurfooter = \zsavefooter + \global\setflag \zoverrunners = \false + \fi} + + +% The following macros provide some standard, simple header and footer +% formats. + +\def \blindheader {} + +\def \blindfooter {} + +\def \cornermarkheader {\headercornermarkformat} + +\def \cornermarkfooter {\footercornermarkformat} + +% The following header and footer formats are provided by the design. +% Just in case they are forgotten: + +\def \normalheader {% + \warning{noheadfoot}{No normal header format has been specified}} +\def \normalfooter {% + \warning{noheadfoot}{No normal footer format has been specified}} +\def \chapterheader {% + \warning{noheadfoot}{No chapter header format has been specified}} +\def \chapterfooter {% + \warning{noheadfoot}{No chapter footer format has been specified}} + +% Multiple Columns +% -------- ------- + + +% The following parameters are calculated by the \setpagecolumns command: + +\setflag \zdofullbreak = \false % True if doing a full break. +\setflag \zusetypewidth = \false % True if using type area width. + +\definecount{\columncount}{0} % Number of columns on page. +\definecount{\columnnumber}{0} % Current column number. +% \hsize +% \vsize + + +% The \setpagecolumns command accepts the following options: +% +% \fullbreak +% \shortbreak +% \usetextmeasure +% \usetextwidth +% \usetypewidth + +\def \setpagecolumns #1#2#3{% {options}{columns}{gutter-width} + \endgraf + {\def \fullbreak {\global\setflag \zdofullbreak = \true}% + \def \shortbreak {\global\setflag \zdofullbreak = \false}% + \def \usetextmeasure {\global\setflag \zutw = \false}% + \def \usetextwidth {\global\setflag \zutw = \false}% + \def \usetypewidth {\global\setflag \zutw = \true}% + \global\setflag \zdofullbreak = \false + \global\setflag \zutw = \false + #1}% + \if \andp{\zusetypewidth}{\notp{\zutw}}% + \zejectcolpage + \else\if \onep{\columncount}% + \if \orp{\gtrp{#2}{1}}{\zutw}\penalty \zpenoneton \fi + \else\if \neqlp{#2}{\columncount}% + \zejectcolpage + \fi\fi\fi + \global\columncount = #2\relax + \global\setflag \zusetypewidth = \zutw + \tdimena = \if \zusetypewidth \typeareawidth \else \textmeasure \fi + \calculate \tdimenb = {-#3,*,\columncount,+,#3,+,\tdimena,/,\columncount}% + \settextwidth{\tdimenb}% + \global\hsize = \hsize % Make these two parameters global. + \global\parfillskip = \parfillskip + \setcolumnnumber{1}% + \tracepagemakeup{Columns: \the\columncount; width: \the\hsize; gutter: #3.}} + +\def \zejectcolpage {% + \if \zdofullbreak + \freshpage{\full\floats\any}% + \else + \freshpage{\short\floats\any}% + \fi + \global\vsize = \textareaheight} % Needed even if no page eject. + + +\def \setcolumnnumber #1{% {number} + \global\columnnumber = #1\relax + \if \andp{\oddpagep}{\lastcolumnp}% + \global\brokenpenalty = \oddbrokenpenalty + \else + \global\brokenpenalty = \evenbrokenpenalty + \fi} + +\def \firstcolumnp {\eqlp{\columnnumber}{1}} +\def \lastcolumnp {\eqlp{\columnnumber}{\columncount}} + + +%----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +% +% This old command is deprecated, although it will work forever. + + +\def \setcolumns #1#2#3{% {count}{gutter-width}{use-type-area} + \endgraf + \if \andp{\zusetypewidth}{\notp{#3}}% + \freshpage{\short\floats\any}% + \global\vsize = \textareaheight % Needed even if no page eject. + \else \if \eqlp{\columncount}{1}% + \if \orp{\gtrp{#1}{1}}{#3}% + \penalty \zpenoneton + \fi + \else \if \neqlp{#1}{\columncount}% + \freshpage{\short\floats\any}% + \global\vsize = \textareaheight % Needed even if no page eject. + \fi\fi\fi + \global\columncount = #1\relax + \global\setflag \zusetypewidth = #3\relax + {\zpageinit + \tdimena = #2\relax + \multiply \tdimena by \columncount + \advance \tdimena by -#2\relax + \if \zusetypewidth + \advance \tdimena by -\typeareawidth + \else + \advance \tdimena by -\textmeasure + \fi + \divide \tdimena by -\columncount + \settextwidth{\tdimena}% + \global\hsize = \hsize % Make these two parameters global. + \global\parfillskip = \parfillskip}% + \setcolumnnumber{1}% + \tracepagemakeup{Columns: \the\columncount; width: \the\hsize; gutter: #2.}} + +% Column Breaks +% ------ ------ + + +\def \columnbreak #1{% {penalty} + \penalty #1\relax} + +\def \freshcolumn #1{% {options} + {\let \zfill = \relax + \let \full = \relax \def \short {\def \zfill {\vfill}}% + #1\relax% + \if \notp{\dimzerop{\lastskip}}\vskip -\lastskip \fi + \zfill + \penalty \zpenfreshcol}} + +\def \fullcolumnbreak {\freshcolumn{\full}} +\def \shortcolumnbreak {\freshcolumn{\short}} + +\def \blankcolumn {% + \line{}% + \shortcolumnbreak} + +% Page Breaks +% ---- ------ + + +%~ This command starts a new page. The options specify the +%~ exact behavior: +%~ & |\any|& Start an even or odd page. +%~ & |\even|& Start an even page. +%~ & |\floats|& Place all floats before new page. +%~ & |\full|& Current page is bottomed out. +%~ & |\nofloats|& No need to place all floats. +%~ & |\odd|& Start an odd page. +%~ & |\short|& Run current page short. +%~ &. + +\def \freshpage #1{% {options} %^page_makeup + \if \vmodep + {\let \zfill = \vfill + \let \short = \relax \def \full {\let \zfill = \relax}% + \let \zflush = \zpenfreshpage + \let \nofloats = \relax \def \floats {\let \zflush = \zpenflushpage}% + \let \zpage = \relax + \let \any = \relax + \def \odd {\def \zpage {\if \evenpagep \blankpage \fi}}% + \def \even {\def \zpage {\if \oddpagep \blankpage \fi}}% + #1\relax% + \if \notp{\dimzerop{\lastskip}}\vskip -\lastskip \fi + \zfill + \if \notp{\lastcolumnp}% + \penalty \zpenfreshcol + \if \notp{\lastcolumnp}% + \loop + \blankcolumn + \if \notp{\lastcolumnp}\repeat + \fi + \line{}% + \vfill + \fi + \penalty \zflush + \zpage}% + \else + \error{pagepar}{Page break requested in the middle of a paragraph}% + \fi} + +%~ This command starts a new page, bottoming out the current page. + +\def \fullpagebreak {\freshpage{\full\nofloats\any}} %^page_makeup + +%~ This command starts a new page, leaving the current page short. +%~ The argument specifies the number of lines short, or, if +%~ specified as |\asap|, runs the page as short as possible. + +\def \shortpagebreak #1{% {lines} %^page_makeup + {\def \zarg {#1}\def \zasap {\asap}% + \if \tokeqlp{\zarg}{\zasap}% + \freshpage{\short\nofloats\any}% + \else + \kern -\dp\strutbox + \kern #1\baselineskip + \fullpagebreak + \fi}} + +\def \blankpage {% + \blindrunners + \pagehint{(blank)}% + \hrule width 0pt + \freshpage{\short\nofloats\any}} + +\def \blankleaf {% + \freshpage{\short\floats\odd} + \blankpage + \freshpage{\short\even} + \blankpage} + +% Overriding Text Area Height +% ---------- ---- ---- ------ + + +\definedimen{\zortahsave}{0pt} % Saved normal text area height. +\definecount{\zortahcount}{0} % Number of overridden pages. + + +%~ This command changes the number of lines on the specified number +%~ of pages, beginning with the current page. The nominal line count +%~ is increased or decreased by the specified number of lines, +%~ which should be coded with a plus or minus sign. A fractional +%~ number of lines is allowed. It is best to change two pages (a spread) +%~ with each command. + +\def \overridetextareaheight #1#2{% {pages}{lines} %^page_makeup + \if \posp{\zortahcount}% + \warning{overortah}{Text area height overridden during previous override}% + \zresetortah + \fi + {\global\zortahsave = \textareaheight + \global\zortahcount = #1\relax + \global\advance \textareaheight by #2\baselineskip + \global\vsize = \textareaheight + \if \dimneqlp{\pagegoal}{\maxdimen}% + \tdimena = \textareaheight + \advance \tdimena by -\zortahsave + \advance \tdimena by \pagegoal + \global\pagegoal = \tdimena + \fi}% + \tracepagemakeup{Overriding text area height: pages: #1, vsize: \the\vsize, + goal: \the\pagegoal.}} + +\def \zresetortah {% + \global\zortahcount = 0 + \global\textareaheight = \zortahsave + \global\vsize = \textareaheight +%%% \global\pagegoal = \vsize + \tracepagemakeup{Un-overriding text area height: vsize: \the\vsize.}} + +\def \zortahdivfinal {% + \if \posp{\zortahcount}% + \warning{divortah}{Text area height overridden across a division}% + \zresetortah + \fi} + +% Text Margins +% ---- ------- + + +% The following two macros are really bogus, because TeX doesn't +% always know what page it's on, except in the output routine. + +\def \thislefttextmargin {% + \if \evenpagep \evenlefttextmargin \else \oddlefttextmargin \fi} + +\def \thisrighttextmargin {% + \if \evenpagep \evenrighttextmargin \else \oddrighttextmargin \fi} + +\definedimen{\typeareashift}{0pt} +\definecount{\ztaspage}{0} + +\def \determinetypeareashift #1{% {page} + \global\typeareashift = \if \evenp{#1}-\evenlefttextmargin \else + -\oddlefttextmargin \fi} + +% Layout Summary +% ------ ------- + + +{\catcode`\_ = \catactive + +\gdef \zlayoutsummary {% + {\def _{\space}% + \writelog{}% + \writelog{Layout:}% + \writelog{}% + \tdimena = .013837\trimwidth + \tdimenb = .013837\trimheight + \writelog{Trim: \thefactor\tdimena"_x_\thefactor\tdimenb"}% + \tdimena = .013837\headmargin + \writelog{Head margin: \thefactor\tdimena"}% + \tdimena = .083333\typeareawidth + \tdimenb = .083333\typeareaheight + \writelog{Type area: \thefactor\tdimena pc_x_\thefactor\tdimenb pc}% + \tdimena = .013837\eveninnermargin + \tdimenb = .013837\oddinnermargin + \writelog{Inside margins: even \thefactor\tdimena", odd \thefactor\tdimenb"}% + \tdimena = .013837\evenoutermargin + \tdimenb = .013837\oddoutermargin + \writelog{Outside margins: even \thefactor\tdimena", odd \thefactor\tdimenb"}% + \tdimena = .083333\evenlefttextmargin + \tdimenb = .083333\oddlefttextmargin + \writelog{Left text margins: even \thefactor\tdimena pc, + odd \thefactor \tdimenb pc}% + \tdimena = .083333\evenrighttextmargin + \tdimenb = .083333\oddrighttextmargin + \writelog{Right text margins: even \thefactor\tdimena pc, + odd \thefactor\tdimenb pc}% + \tdimena = .083333\textmeasure + \tdimenb = .083333\textareaheight + \writelog{Text area: \thefactor\tdimena pc_x_\thefactor\tdimenb pc}% + \writelog{Top skip: \the\topskip, delta: \the\topdelta}% + \writelog{}}} + +}% \catcode + +% Debugging +% --------- + + +\def \zlogoutf {-1} % First page to log. +\def \zlogoutl {-1} % Last page to log. + + +\def \logoutput #1#2{% {first-page}{last-page} + \global\def \zlogoutf {#1}% + \global\def \zlogoutl {#2}} + +% Output Routine +% ------ ------- + + +% The following definitions are for special penalties that control +% page makeup: + +\def \zpennormal {-10000\relax} % Normal page break. +\def \zpenoneton {-10001\relax} % Switch from 1 to n columns. +\def \zpenfreshcol {-10002\relax} % Fresh column. +\def \zpenfreshpage {-10003\relax} % Fresh page. +\def \zpenflushpage {-10004\relax} % Fresh page, and flush floats. +\def \zpenfloatpage {-10005\relax} % Page of floats scheduled. + +% We need to put the depth of box 255 in a convenient place. + +\definedimen{\zoutputcoldepth}{0pt} + +% We must save \mathdisplayprevgraf across the output routine. + +\definecount{\zsavemdpg}{0} + +% The following boxes hold parts of the page: + +\definebox{\zcolbox} % One column's worth. +\definebox{\zbodybox} % The body, multiple columns' worth. +\definebox{\zonetonbox} % Stuff preceding 1- to n-column switch. +\setflag \zonetontype = \false % True if 1-to-n text uses type area width. + +% This toks register is invoked at the beginning of every column, so that +% things like index carryovers can be performed. + +\definetoks{\everycolumn} +\everycolumn = {\relax} + + +\output = {\zoutput} + +\def \zoutput {% + \if \andp{\notp{\lssp{\pagenumber}{\zlogoutf}}}% + {\notp{\gtrp{\pagenumber}{\zlogoutl}}}% + \tracingoutput = 1 + \showboxdepth = 1000 \showboxbreadth = 1000\relax + \fi + \tracepagemakeup{[Output routine invoked for column \the\columnnumber; + penalty: \the\outputpenalty.}% + \tracepagemakeup{Vsize: \the\vsize; + Box 255: \the\ht255+\the\dp255 \space x \the\wd255.}% + \zoutputcoldepth = \dp255\relax + \let \zsavewith = \zwith % Save these items across the + \let \zsavevariant = \zvariant % output routine in case they + \zsavemdpg = \mathdisplayprevgraf % are altered within it. + \normalbaselines + \let \par = \endgraf + \everyparagraph = {}% + \spaceskip = 0pt + \tcounta = \outputpenalty + \if \eqlp{\tcounta}{-'10000000000}\tcounta = \zpenflushpage \fi + \if \gtrp{\tcounta}{-10000}\tcounta = -10000\relax \fi + \negate \tcounta + \advance \tcounta by -10000\relax + \ifcase \tcounta + \zpagenormal \or + \zpageoneton \or + \zpagefreshcol \or + \zpagefreshpage \or + \zpageflushpage \or + \zpagefloatpage \else + \zzerror{Invalid page break penalty: \the\outputpenalty}% + \fi + \global\let \zvariant = \zsavevariant + \global\let \zwith = \zsavewith + \global\mathdisplayprevgraf = \zsavemdpg + \tracepagemakeup{Output routine complete.]}} + +\def \zpagenormal {% + \tracepagemakeup{Process normal column.}% + \zcolumnsave + \if \lastcolumnp + \zpagecontents + \setcolumnnumber{1}% + \else + \tcounta = \columnnumber \increment \tcounta + \setcolumnnumber{\tcounta}% + \fi + \zfloatinit + \zschedulefloats{\zfloatcount}{\true}{\false}% + \if \gtrp{\zfloatcount}{99}% + \zfltpage{\zpenfloatpage}% + \else + \zeverycol + \fi} + +\def \zpageoneton {% + \tracepagemakeup{Process 1- to n-column transition.}% + \zonetoncolumnbody + \global\setflag \zonetontype = \zusetypewidth + \global\advance \vsize by -\ht\zonetonbox + \global\advance \vsize by -\dp\zonetonbox + \tracepagemakeup{Space remaining on page: \the\vsize.}} + +\def \zpagefreshcol {% + \tracepagemakeup{Process `fresh column' request.}% + \zpagenormal} + +\def \zpagefreshpage {% + \tracepagemakeup{Process `fresh page' request.}% + \zpagenormal} + +\def \zpageflushpage {% + \tracepagemakeup{Process `fresh page, flush floats' request.}% + \zcolumnsave + \if \lastcolumnp + \zpagecontents + \setcolumnnumber{1}% + \else + \tcounta = \columnnumber \increment \tcounta + \setcolumnnumber{\tcounta}% + \fi + \zfloatinit + \zschedulefloats{\zfloatcount}{\true}{\true}% + \if \posp{\zfloatcount}% + \zfltpage{\zpenflushpage}% + \else + \zeverycol + \fi} + +\def \zpagefloatpage {% + \tracepagemakeup{Process page of floats.}% + \zcolumnsave + \if \lastcolumnp + \zpagecontents + \setcolumnnumber{1}% + \else + \tcounta = \columnnumber \increment \tcounta + \setcolumnnumber{\tcounta}% + \fi + \zfloatinit + \zschedulefloats{\zfloatcount}{\true}{\false}% + \if \gtrp{\zfloatcount}{99}% + \zfltpage{\zpenfloatpage}% + \fi} + +\def \zfltpage #1{% {penalty} + \if \notp{\emptytoksp{\zfltrunners}}% + \zoverriderunnerstoks{\zfltrunners}% + \fi + {\leftskip = 0pt \rightskip = 0pt + \line{}}% + \kern -\topskip % Why bother to do this? + \nobreak \vfill + \penalty #1} + +\def \zeverycol {% + {\zadjtitle = \zadjtitlemark % \adjusttitle should adjust mark. + \def \zadjloc {\mark}% + \the\everycolumn}} + +% Page Makeup: Column +% ---- ------- ------ + + +\def \zcolumnsave {% + \zcolumnbody + \if \firstcolumnp + \global\setbox \zbodybox = \hbox to \zbodyboxwidth {\box\zcolbox \hss}% + \ztoksa = \expandafter{\topmark}% + \xdef \topmarki {\the\ztoksa}% + \ztoksa = \expandafter{\firstnewmark}% + \xdef \firstnewmarki {\the\ztoksa}% + \ztoksa = \expandafter{\bottommark}% + \xdef \bottommarki {\the\ztoksa}% + \else + \global\setbox \zbodybox = \hbox to \zbodyboxwidth {% + \unhbox\zbodybox \hfill \box\zcolbox}% + \fi} + +\def \zbodyboxwidth {% + \if \zusetypewidth \typeareawidth \else \textmeasure \fi} + +\def \zcolumnbody {% + \tracepagemakeup{Wrapping up the column; hsize: \the\hsize.}% + {\vbadness = 10000\relax + \global\setbox \zcolbox = \vbox to \vsize {% + \setindentation{0pt}{0pt}% + \boxmaxdepth = \maxdepth + \if \notp{\voidboxp{\ztopcolinsert}}\unvbox \ztopcolinsert \fi + \unvbox 255 % Page built by TeX. + \if \risingfootnotes + \if \notp{\voidboxp{\zfninsert}}\zfootnoteformat{\zoutputcoldepth}\fi + \fi + \if \risingbottomfloats + \if \notp{\voidboxp{\zbotcolinsert}}\unvbox \zbotcolinsert \fi + \fi + \if \raggedbottom + \kern -\zoutputcoldepth \vfill + \fi + \if \notp{\risingfootnotes}% + \if \notp{\voidboxp{\zfninsert}}\zfootnoteformat{\zoutputcoldepth}\fi + \fi + \if \notp{\risingbottomfloats}% + \if \notp{\voidboxp{\zbotcolinsert}}\unvbox \zbotcolinsert \fi + \fi}}} + +% This is a special version of \zcolumnbody for the 1- to n-column +% transition. + +\def \zonetoncolumnbody {% + \global\setbox \zonetonbox = \vbox{% + \setindentation{0pt}{0pt}% + \boxmaxdepth = \maxdepth + \if \notp{\voidboxp{\ztopcolinsert}}\unvbox \ztopcolinsert \fi + \unvbox 255 % Page built by TeX. + \vskip \baselineskip + \vskip -\topskip + % Ignore footnotes. + % Ignore bottom style. + % Ignore bottom floats. + % Don't produce text area bottom rule. + }} + +% Page Makeup: Page +% ---- ------- ---- + + +\def \zpagecontents {% + \tracepagemakeup{Shipping out the final page.}% + \shipout \vbox to \trimheight {% + \parskip = 0pt \parindent = 0pt + \setindentation{0pt}{0pt}% + \zpageheadmargin + \nointerlineskip + \zpagetypearea + \vfil + \nointerlineskip + \zpageoverlay}% + \if \posp{\zortahcount}% % If overriding text area height: + \global\decrement \zortahcount + \if \zerop{\zortahcount}\zresetortah \fi + \fi + \tcounta = \pagenumber \increment \tcounta + \setpagenumber{\tcounta}% + \global\vsize = \textareaheight % In case it was reset for this page. + \znextpagerunners} + +\def \zpagelengthmarks {% + \tdimena = \headmargin + \advance \tdimena by \typeareaheight + \advance \tdimena by -\footerheight + \vskip \tdimena + \vbox to 0pt{% + \hbox to \trimwidth{% + \llap{\vrule height .5pt width .75pc}\hfil + \rlap{\vrule height .5pt width .75pc}}% + \vss} + \vskip -\tdimena + \nointerlineskip} + +\setflag \inbackground = \false + +\def \zpageheadmargin {% + \vbox to \headmargin {% + \hrule height 0pt width \trimwidth + \nointerlineskip + \smashbox{% + \setflag \inbackground = \true + \zcurback}% + \nointerlineskip + \vfil + \zmakeuprule{\trimwidth}{.5pt}}} + +\def \zpagetypearea {% + \if \evenpagep + \negate \eveninnermargin + \advance \eveninnermargin by \trimwidth + \advance \eveninnermargin by -\evenlefttextmargin + \advance \eveninnermargin by -\textmeasure + \advance \eveninnermargin by -\evenrighttextmargin + \fi + \moveright \if \oddpagep \oddinnermargin \else \eveninnermargin \fi + \vbox to \typeareaheight {% + \zadjtitle = \zadjtitlemark % \adjusttitle should adjust mark. + \def \zadjloc {\mark}% + \zpageheader + \nointerlineskip + \ztextandmargins + \zmakeuprule{\typeareawidth}{.5pt}% + \vss % Allows text area height to vary. + \vbox to \footerheight{% + \vss + \zpagefooter}}} + +\def \zpageheader {% + \vbox to \headerheight {% + \hsize = \typeareawidth + \zoutputbeginblack + \zcurheader + \zoutputendblack + \vfil + \zmakeuprule{\typeareawidth}{.5pt}}} + +\def \ztextandmargins {% + \hbox to \typeareawidth {% + \if \notp{\zusetypewidth}% + \hbox to \thislefttextmargin{\hss}% + \fi + \vbox{% + \boxmaxdepth = \maxdepth + \if \andp{\zusetypewidth}{\notp{\zonetontype}}% + \moveright \thislefttextmargin + \fi + \box\zonetonbox + \nointerlineskip + \vbox{\box\zbodybox}}% + \hss}} + +\def \zpagefooter {% + \hsize = \typeareawidth + \zoutputbeginblack + \zcurfooter + \zoutputendblack + \if \PDFhyperlinks \PDFmark{P:\folio}\fi} + +% This macro invokes the page overlay after positioning to the +% upper-left corner of the trim. + +\def \zpageoverlay {% + \vbox to 0pt{% + \offinterlineskip + \kern -\trimheight + \name{\pageoverlay\the\zoverlay}% + \vss}} + +\def \zmakeuprule #1#2{% {width}{height} + \if \DVIWindoinuse + \colorspecial{ifview color push rgb 0 1 0}% + \tdimena = #1\tcounta = \tdimena + \tdimena = #2\tcountb = \tdimena + \special{viewrule: \the\tcounta\space \the\tcountb}% + \colorspecial{ifview color pop}% + \fi} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzplain.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzplain.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a24aa80139b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzplain.tex @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Plain TeX Compatibility +% +% Synopsis: This module contains definitions necessary for +% compatibility with Plain TeX. The only goal is to +% allow ZzTeX to run on top of Plain TeX. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 24 July 1991 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\if \definedp{\dospecials} + \let \znext = \relax +\else + \let \znext = \endinput +\fi +\znext + +\def \zplainerror {% + \error{plaintex}{Cannot use this Plain TeX feature in ZzTeX}} + +% Definitions +% ----------- + + +\catcode`\@ = \catletter +\zremovePlaindef \p@ +\definedimen{\p@}{1pt} +\zremovePlaindef \z@ +\definedimen{\z@}{0pt} +\zremovePlaindef \z@skip +\defineskip{\z@skip}{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt} +\catcode`\@ = \catactive + +\let \beginsection = \zplainerror + +\let \bye = \zplainerror + +\let \eject = \zplainerror + +\let \leavevmode = \ensurepar + +\let \normalbottom = \zplainerror + +\let \raggedright = \zplainerror + +\let \supereject = \zplainerror + +\let \ttraggedright = \zplainerror + +% Eliminate Fonts +% --------- ----- + + \tcounta = 0 + \loop + \zclearfam{\tcounta}% + \increment \tcounta + \if \lssp{\tcounta}{16}\repeat + + \let \rm = \relax + \let \mit = \relax + \let \it = \relax + \let \sl = \undefined \let \slfam = \undefined + \let \bf = \relax + \let \tt = \relax diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzprog.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzprog.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..10b655bf0c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzprog.tex @@ -0,0 +1,228 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZZTeX Programming Constructs +% +% Synopsis: This module contains definitions for ZZTeX's programming +% constructs. These constructs provide various extensions +% to TeX's sometimes meager repertoire of programming +% features. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 27 March 1989 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Token Hackery +% ----- ------- + + +% We need a name for a space token. + +\def \\{\let \zspacetoken = } \\ % Now \zspacetoken is a space token. + +% This macro discards the next token. + +\def \discardtok #1{}% token + +% This macro removes the `pt' following a dimension. + +{\catcode `\p = \catother \catcode `\t = \catother + +\gdef \zremovedu #1pt{#1} + +} % \catcode + +% Using that macro, we can define a macro that "converts" a dimen register +% into a factor. + +\def \thefactor #1{\expandafter\zremovedu \the#1} + +% This macro extracts the contents of a macro and returns it as plain text. +% Usage: \expandafter\zdefof \meaning\macro\zmark + +\def \zdefof #1:->#2\zmark{#2} + +% Control Sequence Names +% ------- -------- ----- + + +\def \name #1{% {\tokens} + \csname \expandafter\discardtok \string#1\endcsname} + +\def \withname #1#2{% {\command}{\tokens} + \expandafter#1\csname \expandafter\discardtok \string#2\endcsname} + +% Macro Expansion +% ----- --------- + + +\def \expandaftertwice {\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter} +\def \expandafterthrice {\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter + \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter} + +\def \zoneoftwo #1#2{#1}% {first}{second} +\def \ztwooftwo #1#2{#2}% {first}{second} + +\def \zoneofthree #1#2#3{#1}% {first}{second}{third} +\def \ztwoofthree #1#2#3{#2}% {first}{second}{third} +\def \zthreeofthree #1#2#3{#3}% {first}{second}{third} + +\def \zoneoffour #1#2#3#4{#1}% {first}{second}{third}{fourth} +\def \ztwooffour #1#2#3#4{#2}% {first}{second}{third}{fourth} +\def \zthreeoffour #1#2#3#4{#3}% {first}{second}{third}{fourth} +\def \zfouroffour #1#2#3#4{#4}% {first}{second}{third}{fourth} + +% Flags (Booleans) +% ----- ---------- + +% The boolean literals \true and \false are appropriate for use with +% the \if command, which tests the codes of the next two characters. + +\def \true {TT} +\def \false {FL} + +\def \setflag #1=#2{\edef #1{#2}}% \flag = boolean + +% IF and Predicates +% -- --- ---------- + +% A "predicate" is a macro that returns \true or \false as its value. +% Such values are suitable for use with the \if conditional. For example: +% +% \if \oddp{\x} <then-clause> \else <else-clause> \fi + +% A predicate can be used with \setflag as follows: +% +% \setflag \flag = {<predicate>} + +% Here are the predicates for TeX's repertoire of conditional +% commands. These might be more appropriately interspersed with +% other definitions in this module, but what the heck. +% Some additional "obvious" predicates are defined. + + +\def \eqlp #1#2{\ifnum #1 = #2\true \else \false \fi} +\def \neqlp #1#2{\ifnum #1 = #2\false \else \true \fi} +\def \lssp #1#2{\ifnum #1 < #2\true \else \false \fi} +\def \gtrp #1#2{\ifnum #1 > #2\true \else \false \fi} +\def \zerop #1{\ifnum #1 = 0\true \else \false \fi} +\def \onep #1{\ifnum #1 = 1\true \else \false \fi} +\def \posp #1{\ifnum #1 > 0\true \else \false \fi} +\def \negp #1{\ifnum #1 < 0\true \else \false \fi} +\def \oddp #1{\ifodd #1\true \else \false \fi} +\def \evenp #1{\ifodd #1\false \else \true \fi} +\def \rangep #1#2#3{\if \orp{\lssp{#1}{#2}}{\gtrp{#1}{#3}}\false \else + \true \fi} +\def \tensp #1{\rangep{#1}{10}{19}} + +\def \dimeqlp #1#2{\ifdim #1 = #2\true \else \false \fi} +\def \dimneqlp #1#2{\ifdim #1 = #2\false \else \true \fi} +\def \dimlssp #1#2{\ifdim #1 < #2\true \else \false \fi} +\def \dimgtrp #1#2{\ifdim #1 > #2\true \else \false \fi} +\def \dimzerop #1{\ifdim #1 = 0pt\true \else \false \fi} +\def \dimposp #1{\ifdim #1 > 0pt\true \else \false \fi} +\def \dimnegp #1{\ifdim #1 < 0pt\true \else \false \fi} + +\def \vmodep {\ifvmode \true \else \false \fi} +\def \hmodep {\ifhmode \true \else \false \fi} +\def \mathmodep {\ifmmode \true \else \false \fi} +\def \textmodep {\ifmmode \false \else \true \fi} +\def \innermodep {\ifinner \true \else \false \fi} + +\long\def \codeeqlp #1#2{\if #1#2\true \else \false \fi} + +\long\def \cateqlp #1#2{\ifcat #1#2\true \else \false \fi} + +\long\def \tokeqlp #1#2{\ifx #1#2\true \else \false \fi} +\long\def \xtokeqlp #1#2{\expandafter\ifx #1#2\true \else \false \fi} + +\long\def \definedp #1{% + \expandafter\ifx \csname \expandafter\discardtok \string#1\endcsname + \relax \false \else \true \fi} + +\long\def \undefinedp #1{% + \expandafter\ifx \csname \expandafter\discardtok \string#1\endcsname + \relax \true \else \false \fi} +\def \zempty {} +\def \emptydefp #1{\ifx #1\zempty \true \else \false \fi}% {\name} + +\let \emptylistp = \emptydefp + +\long\def \emptyargp #1{% {#n} + \zempargp #1\zempargq\zmark} +\long\def \zempargp #1#2\zmark{% + \ifx #1\zempargq \true \else \false \fi} +\def \zempargq {\zempargq} + +\def \emptytoksp #1{% {\tokenreg} + \expandafter\zemptoksp \the#1\zmark} + +\long\def \zemptoksp #1\zmark{\emptyargp{#1}} + +\def \voidboxp #1{\ifvoid #1\true \else \false \fi} +\def \hboxp #1{\ifhbox #1\true \else \false \fi} +\def \vboxp #1{\ifvbox #1\true \else \false \fi} + +\def \eofp #1{\ifeof #1\true \else \false \fi} + + +% Flags can also be used as predicates, as in: +% +% \if \flaga <then-clause> \else <else-clause> \fi + + +% Now here we have predicates for the common logical operators. + +\def \notp #1{\if #1\false \else \true \fi} + +\def \andp #1#2{\if #1#2\else \false \fi}% {boolean1}{boolean2} + +\def \orp #1#2{\if #1\true \else #2\fi}% {boolean1}{boolean2} + +% Pseudo-Predicates +% ----------------- + + +\def \stringeql #1#2#3{% {\return-flag}{string1}{string2} + \edef \zstra {#2}% + \edef \zstrb {#3}% + \edef #1{\ifx \zstra\zstrb \true \else \false \fi}} + + +\def \gluevaries #1#2{% {\return-flag}{glue} + \zskipa = #2\relax + \tdimena = \zskipa + \stringeql{#1}{\the\zskipa}{\the\tdimena}% + \edef #1{\if #1\false \else \true \fi}} + +% Arithmetic +% ---------- + + +\def \negate #1{\multiply #1 by -1\relax}% {\register} + +\def \increment #1{\advance #1 by 1\relax}% {\count} + +\def \decrement #1{\advance #1 by -1\relax}% {\count} + +% Looping +% ------- + + +\def \loop #1\repeat{% body [actions] \if condition [actions] \repeat + \def \zloopbody {#1}% + \zloop} + +\def \zloop {% + \zloopbody + %\if condition + \let \zloopnext = \zloop + \else + \let \zloopnext = \relax + \fi + \zloopnext} + +\let \repeat = \fi
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzps.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzps.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f90d6e7ab98 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzps.tex @@ -0,0 +1,251 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX PostScript Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This module contains any and all facilities that rely on +% PostScript output. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 21 January 1994 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Extra Encoded Characters +% ----- ------- ---------- + + +\def \PSbackslash {\char 134\relax} +\def \PSbar {\char 138\relax} +\def \PSbullet {\char 142\relax} +\def \PSbraceleft {\char 137\relax} +\def \PSbraceright {\char 139\relax} +\def \PScent {\char 148\relax} +\def \PScopyright {\char 145\relax} +\def \PScurrency {\char 149\relax} +\def \PSdagger {\char 140\relax} +\def \PSddagger {\char 141\relax} +\def \PSdollar {\char 131\relax} +\def \PSgreater {\char 133\relax} +\def \PSless {\char 132\relax} +\def \PSordfeminine {\char 155\relax} +\def \PSordmasculine {\char 156\relax} +\def \PSparagraph {\char 143\relax} +\def \PSperthousand {\char 157\relax} +\def \PSpolishL {\char "A1\relax} +\def \PSpolishl {\char "A2\relax} +\def \PSregistered {\char 146\relax} +\def \PSsection {\char 144\relax} +\def \PSsterling {\char 158\relax} +\def \PStrademark {\char 147\relax} +\def \PSunderscore {\char 136\relax} +\def \PSudquote {\char 135\relax} +\def \PSusquote {\char 160\relax} +\def \PSyen {\char 159\relax} + +% Import EPS File +% ------ --- ---- + + +% The illustration \special is compatible with DVIPSONE, and with TeXtures +% if clip? is false. +% The scale is interpreted as follows: +% <= 33.333: normal scale, 1.0 = 100% +% > 33.333: TeX scale factor, 1000 = 100% + +\def \specialimportartfile #1#2#3{% {name}{scale}{clip?} + \special{illustration #1 scaled #2 + \if #3clip\fi}} + +% This macro is a better variant of the preceding one. The scale +% argument is a true scale specified in points. + +\def \specialplaceepsfile #1#2#3{% {name}{scale}{clip?} + {\tdimena = #2% + \if \dimgtrp{\tdimena}{33.333pt}% % Compensate for bizarre + \multiply \tdimena by 1000\relax % design of scaled option. + \fi + \special{illustration #1 scaled \thefactor\tdimena + \if #3\space clip\fi}}} + +% This macro is used to import an EPS file for a glyph. The scale +% is specified as a percentage IN POINTS. + +\def \specialplaceglyph #1#2#3{% {name}{percentage}{clip?} + {\tdimena = #2% + \divide \tdimena by 100 + \special{illustration #1 scaled \thefactor\tdimena + \if #3\space clip\fi}}} + +% Read EPS Bounding Box +% ---- --- -------- --- + + +\definedimen{\zbbxorigin}{0pt} +\definedimen{\zbbyorigin}{0pt} + + +{\catcode`\%=\catother +\gdef \zpercent {%} +} % \catcode + +\edef \zboundingbox {\zpercent\zpercent BoundingBox} +\def \zatend {atend} +\definecount{\zbbstate}{0} + + +\def \zreadepsbb #1#2#3{% {\width}{\height}{file} + \def \zbbinfo {}% + \begingroup + \zsetepscatcodes + \openin \zreada #3\relax + \zbbstate = 0 + \loop + \read \zreada to \zline + \ifeof \zreada + \zbbstate = 2 + \else + \expandafter\zcheckbb \zline:.\zmark + \fi + \ifnum \zbbstate < 2 \repeat + \closein \zreada + \endgroup + \zsetbbsizes{#1}{#2}{#3}} + +\def \zsetepscatcodes {% + \catcoderange{0}{"1F}{\catcomment}% + \catcode `\^^I = \catspace + \catcode \endlinechar = \catendofline + \uncatcode{\false}{\false}{\false}% + \catcode `\: = \catother + \catcoderange{"7E}{"FF}{\catcomment}} + +\long \def \zcheckbb #1:#2#3\zmark{% + \def \znext {#1}% + \ifx \znext \zboundingbox + \zcheckatend #2#3()\zmark + \fi} + +\long \def \zcheckatend #1(#2)#3\zmark{% + \def \znext {#2}% + \ifx \znext \zatend + \zbbstate = 1 + \else + \gdef \zbbinfo {#1}% + \ifnum \zbbstate = 0 \zbbstate = 2\fi + \fi} + +\def \zsetbbsizes #1#2#3{% + \if \emptydefp{\zbbinfo}% + \warning{missbb}{Art file `#3' has no bounding box}% + #1 = 20pc #2 = 10pc + \else + \expandafter \zcalcbb \zbbinfo \zmark{#1}{#2}% + \fi} + +\def \zcalcbb #1 #2 #3 #4 #5\zmark#6#7{% + \calculate #6= {#3pt,-,#1pt,+,1pt}% + \calculate #7= {#4pt,-,#2pt,+,1pt}% + \global\zbbxorigin = #1pt + \global\zbbyorigin = #2pt\relax} + +% Rotate Boxes +% ------ ----- + + +\def \rotatebox #1#2{% {\box}{degrees} + \special{CTM: push rotate #2}% + \box #1% + \special{CTM: pop}} + +\def \rotatetext #1#2{% {text}{degrees} + \setbox \zboxa = \hbox{#1}% + \rotatebox{\zboxa}{#2}} + +% Colors +% ------ + + +\def \colorspecial #1{% + \if \allowcolor + \special{#1}% + \fi} + +% These commands are called in the output routine to make sure that +% everything added in the output routine is black. + +\def \zoutputbeginblack {% + \colorspecial{color push gray 0}} + +\def \zoutputendblack {% + \colorspecial{color pop}} + +% Color Block +% ---- ------ + + +\defineblock{\color}{\endcolor}{\false}{} + +%~block color Type +% \colorspec = {...} % Color specifier. +%~end + +\definetoks{\colorspec} + + +\def \color #1{% {type} + \beginblockscope{color}% + \global\increment \colordepth + \processdesign{\color}{#1}% + \global\increment \colornumber + \colorspecial{color push}% + \the\colorspec\zmark + \if \vmodep \vpenalty{\breaknever}\fi} + +\def \endcolor {% + \global\decrement \colordepth + \endblockscope{color}% + \colorspecial{color pop}} + + +\def \setcolor #1{% + \begingroup + \processdesign{\color}{#1}% + \the\colorspec\zmark + \endgroup} + +% Color specifiers: + +\def \cmykcolor #1 #2 #3 #4\zmark{% c m y k\zmark + \colorspecial{color cmyk #1 #2 #3 #4}} + +\def \graycolor #1\zmark{% gray\zmark + \colorspecial{color gray #1}} + +\def \rgbcolor #1 #2 #3\zmark{% r g b\zmark + \colorspecial{color rgb #1 #2 #3}} + +% Built-in colors: + +\def \colorblackdesign {% + \colorspec = {\graycolor 0}} + +\def \colorwhitedesign {% + \colorspec = {\graycolor 1}} + +\def \colorproofnotereddesign {% + \colorspec = {\rgbcolor .5 0 0}} + +% A useful shorthand: + +\def \colortext #1#2{% {color}{text} + \color{#1}#2\endcolor} + +% TeXtures +% -------- + + +\def \TeXtures {% + \input zztures\relax} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzreg.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzreg.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c50f9e74d8f --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzreg.tex @@ -0,0 +1,437 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Register Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This module provides facilities for defining and manipulating +% TeX registers. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 13 August 1989 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Register Definition +% -------- ---------- + + +% The following constant specifies the number of the first insert register +% set. Such a set is composed of a count, dimen, skip, and box. + +\chardef \zfirstinsert = 245 + +% Establish counters to keep track of the most recently allocated +% registers. The registers are initialized to the first available +% register. + +\count10 = 20 % Count registers. +\count11 = 0 % Dimen registers. +\count12 = 0 % Skip registers. +\count13 = 0 % Muskip registers. +\count14 = 1 % Box registers (Plain TeX uses box 0). +\count15 = 0 % Toks registers. +\count16 = 0 % Read streams. +\count17 = 0 % Write streams. +\count18 = 0 % Math families. +\count19 = \zfirstinsert % Insertion register sets. + + +% There is one macro for each type of register, used to allocate one. + +\def \definecount #1#2{% {\name}{initial} + \zalloc{\count}{10}{\zfirstinsert}{\countdef}{#1}% + #1 = #2} + +\def \definedimen #1#2{% {\name}{initial} + \zalloc{\dimen}{11}{\zfirstinsert}{\dimendef}{#1}% + #1 = #2} + +\def \defineskip #1#2{% {\name}{initial} + \zalloc{\skip}{12}{\zfirstinsert}{\skipdef}{#1}% + #1 = #2} + +\def \definemuskip #1#2{% {\name}{initial} + \zalloc{\muskip}{13}{255}{\muskipdef}{#1}% Muskip 255 is scratch. + #1 = #2} + +\def \definebox #1{% {\name} + \zalloc{\box}{14}{\zfirstinsert}{\chardef}{#1}} + +\def \definetoks #1{% {\name} + \zalloc{\toks}{15}{256}{\toksdef}{#1}% + #1 = {}} + +\def \defineread #1{% {\name} + \zalloc{\read}{16}{16}{\chardef}{#1}} + +\def \definewrite #1{% {\name} + \zalloc{\write}{17}{16}{\chardef}{#1}} + +% Families are not defined directly by the user, but via \definetypestyle. + +\def \zdeffam #1{% {\name} + \if \lssp{\count18}{15}% + \zalloc{\fam}{18}{16}{\chardef}{#1}% + \else + \global\chardef #1=\count18 + \fi} + +\def \defineinsert #1{% {\name} + \zalloc{\insert}{19}{255}{\chardef}{#1}} % Registers 255 are scratch. + + +\def \zalloc #1#2#3#4#5{% {type}{counter}{limit}{\def-er}{\name} + \if \eqlp{\count#2}{#3}% + \error{noregsleft}{All `\string#1' registers have been allocated}% + \fi + \if \definedp{#5}% + \error{dupreg}{The register `\string#5' is already defined}% + \fi + \global#4 #5=\count#2 + \global\increment {\count#2}} + +% Register Statistics +% -------- ---------- + + +{\catcode`\_ = \catactive + +\gdef \zregstats {% + {\def _{\space}% + \writelog{}% + \writelog{Register Statistics:}% + \writelog{}% + \writelog{Type_____Used / Total}% + \writelog{----_____------------}% + \zrsone{Count_}{10}{\zfirstinsert}{}% + \zrsone{Dimen_}{11}{\zfirstinsert}{}% + \zrsone{Skip__}{12}{\zfirstinsert}{}% + \zrsone{Muskip}{13}{255}{}% + \zrsone{Box___}{14}{\zfirstinsert}{}% + \zrsone{Toks__}{15}{256}{}% + \zrsone{Read__}{16}{16}{}% + \zrsone{Write_}{17}{16}{}% + \zrsone{Family}{18}{256}{(15 for math)}% + \zrsone{Insert}{19}{255}{(starts at \the\zfirstinsert)}% + \writelog{}}} + +\gdef \zrsone #1#2#3#4{% {name}{counter}{ex-limit}{comment} + \tcounta = #3 + \advance \tcounta by -1 + \writelog{#1___\the\count#2 _/_\the\tcounta_#4}} + +} % \catcode + +% Constant Registers +% -------- --------- + + +\definecount{\maxcount}{2147483647} +\definecount{\mincount}{-\maxcount} +\zremovePlaindef \maxdimen +\definedimen{\maxdimen}{16383.99999pt} +\definedimen{\mindimen}{-\maxdimen} +\definedimen{\naturalwidth}{\mindimen} + +\defineskip{\centerindent}{0pt plus 10000pt} +\let \centering = \centerindent + +\defineskip{\normalparfillskip}{0pt plus 1fil} + +\definebox{\voidbox} % Permanently void box register. + +% Temporary Internal Registers +% --------- -------- --------- + + +\definecount{\tcounta}{0} +\definecount{\tcountb}{0} +\definecount{\tcountc}{0} + +\definedimen{\tdimena}{0pt} +\definedimen{\tdimenb}{0pt} +\definedimen{\tdimenc}{0pt} +\definedimen{\tdimend}{0pt} + +\defineskip{\zskipa}{0pt} +\defineskip{\zskipb}{0pt} +\defineskip{\zskipc}{0pt} + +\definemuskip{\zmuskipa}{0mu} +\definemuskip{\zmuskipb}{0mu} +\definemuskip{\zmuskipc}{0mu} + +\definebox{\zboxa} +\definebox{\zboxb} +\definebox{\zboxc} + +\definetoks{\ztoksa} +\definetoks{\ztoksb} +\definetoks{\ztoksc} + +\defineread{\zreada} + +\definewrite{\zwritea} + +% Manipulating Boxes +% ------------ ----- + + +\def \shiftboxbaseline #1#2{% {\box}{amount} + {\tdimena = #2% + \tdimenb = \ht#1% + \advance \tdimenb by \tdimena + \ht#1= \tdimenb + \tdimenb = \dp#1% + \advance \tdimenb by -\tdimena + \dp#1= \tdimenb}} + +% Lists +% ----- + + +% These macros support the manipulation of lists in the following format: +% +% \:{<element-0>}\:{<element-1>}\: ... +% +% All lists are global! + +% We need two toks registers, which will be used just for lists. + +\definetoks{\zlta} +\definetoks{\zltb} + + +\def \setlist #1=#2{% \listname = {value} + \zlta = \expandafter{#2}% + \xdef #1{\the\zlta}} + +\long\def \append #1#2{% {item}{\list-name} + {\zlta = {\:{#1}}% + \zltb = \expandafter{#2}% + \xdef #2{\the\zltb\the\zlta}}} + +\long\def \appendlf #1#2{% {\list-name}{item} + {\zlta = {\:{#2}}% + \zltb = \expandafter{#1}% + \xdef #1{\the\zltb\the\zlta}}} + +\long\def \prepend #1#2{% {item}{\list-name} + {\zlta = {\:{#1}}% + \zltb = \expandafter{#2}% + \xdef #2{\the\zlta\the\zltb}}} + +\let \push = \prepend + +\def \pop #1#2{% {\return-macro}{\list-name} + \expandafter\zpop #2\zmark#1#2} + +\long\def \zpop \:#1#2\zmark#3#4{% + \def #3{#1}% + \gdef #4{#2}} + +\def \listtop #1#2{% {\return-macro}{\list-name} + \expandafter\zlisttop #2\zmark#1} + +\long\def \zlisttop \:#1#2\zmark#3{% + \def #3{#1}} + +\definecount{\zmapldepth}{0} + +\def \maplist #1#2{% {body}{\listname} + \increment \zmapldepth + \withname\let{\zmapl\romannumeral\zmapldepth}=\:% + \long\def \:##1{#1}% + #2% + \expandafter\let + \expandafter\:\csname zmapl\romannumeral\zmapldepth\endcsname + \decrement \zmapldepth} + +\def \maplistlf #1#2{% {\listname}{body} + \increment \zmapldepth + \withname\let{\zmapl\romannumeral\zmapldepth}=\:% + \long\def \:##1{#2}% + #1% + \expandafter\let + \expandafter\:\csname zmapl\romannumeral\zmapldepth\endcsname + \decrement \zmapldepth} + +\def \exitmaplist {\def \:##1{}} + +\def \listlength #1#2{% {\result-count}{\list} + #1= 0 + \maplist{\increment #1}{#2}} + +\def \member #1#2#3{% {\result-flag}{item}{\list} + \setflag #1= \false + \maplist{\stringeql{#1}{##1}{#2}\if #1\exitmaplist \fi} + {#3}} + +\def \commalist #1#2{% {\result-name}{comma-list} + \setlist #1={}% + \expandafter\zcomma #2,\zmark#1} + +\def \zcomma #1,#2\zmark#3{% + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#1}}\append{#1}{#3}\fi + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#2}}% + \def \znext {\zcomma #2\zmark#3}% + \else + \let \znext = \relax + \fi + \znext} + +\def \inclusionlist #1#2#3{% {\result}{item}{inclusion-list} + \zincla {#1}{#2}#3\zmark} + +\let \all = \relax +\let \allbut = \relax +\def \zallname {\all} +\def \zallbutname {\allbut} + +\def \zincla #1#2#3#4\zmark{% {\result}{item}{token1}{tokens...} + \def \znext {#3}% + \if \tokeqlp{\znext}{\zallname}% + \setflag #1= \true + \else \if \tokeqlp{\znext}{\zallbutname}% + \commalist{\zincllist}{#4}% + \member{#1}{#2}{\zincllist}% + \setflag #1= {\notp{#1}}% + \else + \commalist{\zincllist}{#3#4}% + \member{#1}{#2}{\zincllist}% + \fi\fi} + +% New Expression Evaluation +% --- ---------- ---------- + + +% These macros provide a rudimentary expression evaluation facility. +% The accumulator can be a count, dimen, or skip register. The expression +% is in the form {operand0,op1,operand1,op2,operand2,...}. +% +% WARNING: The \register cannot be used in the expression except possibly +% as the first operand. + + +\definedimen{\zcalct}{0pt} + + +\def \calculate #1=#2{% \register = {expression} + \let \zaccum = #1% + \zcalca =,#2,;,,\zmark} + +\def \gcalculate #1=#2{% \register = {expression} + \let \zaccum = #1% + \zcalca =,#2,;,,\zmark + \global \zaccum = \zaccum} + +\def \zcalca #1,#2,#3\zmark{% + \def \znext{\zcalca #3\zmark}% + \if #1=\zaccum = #2% % Assignment + \else\if #1+\advance \zaccum #2% % Addition + \else\if #1-\advance \zaccum -#2% % Subtraction + \else\if #1*\multiply \zaccum #2% % Multiplication + \else\if #1/\divide \zaccum #2% % Division + \else\if #1N\if \dimlssp{#2}{\zaccum}\zaccum = #2\fi % Minimum + \else\if #1P\divide \zaccum 100 % Percentage + \expandafter\zaccum #2\zaccum + \else\if #1R\zcalct = #2% % Ratio + \divide \zcalct by 4096 + \divide \zaccum by \zcalct + \multiply \zaccum by 16\relax + \else\if #1S\zaccum = \thefactor#2\zaccum % Scale + \else\if #1X\if \dimgtrp{#2}{\zaccum}\zaccum = #2\fi % Maximum + \else\if #1;\let \znext = \relax % Done + \else + \error{invoper}{Invalid operator `#1' in expression}% + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \znext} + +% Calculating Values +% ----------- ------ + +%%%\defineskip{\zcaccum}{0pt} +%%%\setflag \zexprpos = \true +%%% +%%%\def \calculate #1=#2{% {\reg} = {expression} +%%% \commalist{\zexprlist}{#2}% +%%% \zcaccum = 0pt +%%% \def \zoper {+}% +%%% \setflag \zexprpos = \true +%%% \maplist{\zcalc{##1}}{\zexprlist}% +%%% #1=\zcaccum} +%%% +%%%\def \gcalculate #1=#2{% {\reg} = {expression} +%%% \commalist{\zexprlist}{#2}% +%%% \zcaccum = 0pt +%%% \def \zoper {+}% +%%% \setflag \zexprpos = \true +%%% \maplist{\zcalc{##1}}{\zexprlist}% +%%% \global #1=\zcaccum} +%%% +%%%\def \zcalc #1{% {token} +%%% \if \zexprpos +%%% \zcalcb{#1}% +%%% \setflag \zexprpos = \false +%%% \else +%%% \def \zoper {#1}% +%%% \setflag \zexprpos = \true +%%% \fi} +%%% +%%%\def \zcalcb #1{% {operand} +%%% \if \codeeqlp{\zoper}{+}% % Add. +%%% \advance \zcaccum by #1% +%%% \else\if \codeeqlp{\zoper}{-}% % Subtract. +%%% \advance \zcaccum by -#1% +%%% \else\if \codeeqlp{\zoper}{*}% % Multiply. +%%% \multiply \zcaccum by #1% +%%% \else\if \codeeqlp{\zoper}{/}% % Divide. +%%% \divide \zcaccum by #1% +%%% \else\if \codeeqlp{\zoper}{P}% +%%% \divide \zcaccum by 100 +%%% \expandafter \zcaccum #1\zcaccum +%%% \else\if \codeeqlp{\zoper}{R}% % Compute ratio (in points). +%%% \zcalct = #1% +%%% \divide \zcalct by 4096 +%%% \divide \zcaccum by \zcalct +%%% \multiply \zcaccum by 16\relax +%%% \else\if \codeeqlp{\zoper}{S}% % Scale (in points). +%%% \zcaccum = \thefactor#1\zcaccum +%%% \else +%%% \error{invoper}{Invalid operator `\zoper' in expression}% +%%% \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} + +% The Vertical Context +% --- -------- ------- + + +% This is in here because we need registers. Otherwise it would be +% in ZZTEX.TEX + + +\definecount{\zvcontextdepth}{0} + +\definetoks{\zeveryvcontext} +\global\zeveryvcontext = {} + + +\def \zdeclareeveryvcontext #1{% + \global\zeveryvcontext = \expandafter{\the\zeveryvcontext #1}} + +\def \zpushvcontext {% + \global\increment \zvcontextdepth + \withname\gdef{\zvcontextstack\romannumeral\zvcontextdepth}{}% + \the\zeveryvcontext} + +\def \zpopvcontext {% + {\globaldefs = 1\relax + \name{\zvcontextstack\romannumeral\zvcontextdepth}}% + \global\decrement \zvcontextdepth} + +\def \zsavevcontext #1{% + {\ztoksa = \expandafterthrice{% + \name{\zvcontextstack\romannumeral\zvcontextdepth}}% + \withname\xdef{\zvcontextstack\romannumeral\zvcontextdepth}% + {\the\ztoksa #1}}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzrunner.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzrunner.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c0427cbddcf --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzrunner.tex @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX New Running Head/Foot Scheme +% +% Synopsis: The new running head/foot scheme is an improvement over the +% original scheme. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 26 November 1997 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Data Structures +% ---- ---------- + + +\def \zdefrun {normal} + +\setlist \zrunlist = {} + +\setflag \zoverrun = \false + +\def \zcurback {% + \if \definedp \backgroundnormalformat \backgroundnormalformat \fi} +\def \zcurheader {\headernormalformat} +\def \zcurfooter {\footernormalformat} + +% Specify Runners +% ------- ------- + + +%~ This command discards any current runner styles and sets up to use style +%~ *style1* on the current page, *style2* on the next, *style3* on the one after +%~ that, and so forth. The last style specified is used as the style for all +%~ subsequent pages (it becomes the default style). No spaces are allowed in the +%~ list. + +\def \setrunners #1{% {style1,style2,style3,...} %^runners + {\if \zoverrun \pop{\zoverstyle}{\zrunlist}\fi + \commalist{\zrunlist}{#1}% + \maplist{\gdef \zdefrun {##1}}{\zrunlist}% + \if \zoverrun \expandafter\overriderunners\expandafter{\zoverstyle}\fi + \zsetcurrun}} + +%~ This command overrides the style for the current page, using style *style* +%~ instead. After the current page, runner styles revert to those established +%~ by the last |\setrunners| command. + +\def \overriderunners #1{% {style} %^runners + \if \notp{\emptylistp{\zrunlist}}% + \pop{\znext}{\zrunlist}% + \fi + \push{#1}{\zrunlist}% + \global\setflag \zoverrun = \true + \zsetcurrun} + +%~ This command is simply a shorthand for |\overriderunners{blind}|. + +\def \blindrunners {% %^runners + \overriderunners{blind}} + +% Internal Common Macros +% -------- ------ ------ + + +\def \zsetrunnerstoks #1{% {\token-reg} + \expandafter\setrunners\expandafter{\the#1}} + +\def \zoverriderunnerstoks #1{% {\token-reg} + \expandafter\overriderunners\expandafter{\the#1}} + +\def \zoldrunners #1{} + +% Output Routine Interface +% ------ ------- --------- + + +\def \zsetcurrun {% + \if \emptylistp{\zrunlist}% + \edef \znext {\zdefrun}% + \else + \listtop{\znext}{\zrunlist}% + \fi + \ztoksa = \expandaftertwice{\name{\background\znext format}}% + \xdef \zcurback {% + \noexpand\if \noexpand\definedp\the\ztoksa \the\ztoksa \noexpand\fi}% + \ztoksa = \expandaftertwice{\name{\header\znext format}}% + \xdef \zcurheader {\the\ztoksa}% + \ztoksa = \expandaftertwice{\name{\footer\znext format}}% + \xdef \zcurfooter {\the\ztoksa}} + +\def \znextpagerunners {% + \if \notp{\emptylistp{\zrunlist}}\pop{\znext}{\zrunlist}\fi + \zsetcurrun + \global\setflag \zoverrun = \false} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzsect.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzsect.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..280d2ecc5b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzsect.tex @@ -0,0 +1,806 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Sectioning Facilities +% +% Synopsis: +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 25 August 1989 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Part and Chapter Texts +% ---- --- ------- ----- + + +\long\def \setauthortext #1{% {text} %^modifier + \with{\authortext = {#1}}} + +\long\def \setopenertext #1{% {text} %^modifier + \with{\openertext = {#1}}} + +% Part +% ---- + + +\defineblock{\part}{\endpart}{\true}{} + +%~block part +% \setflag \allowintoc = flag % Allow in ToC? +% \authortext = {...} % Author needed for opener. +% \def \comptextformat {...} % Composite number text formatter. +% \def \paging {...} % Paging before part opener. +% \def \partformat ##1{...} % Part page formatter. +% \openertext = {...} % Special text needed for opener. +% \def \providemark ##1{...} % Mark provider. +% \resetnumber = {...} % List of numbers to reset. +% \runners = {style,...} % Running head/foot styles. +% \style = {...} % Heading style. +%~end + +\def \part #1{% {title} + \closeanychapter + \beginblockscope{part}% + \global\increment \partdepth + \authortext = {}% %~default hard + \openertext = {}% %~default hard + \runners = {blind,normal}% %~default soft + \zoldrunners{\blindheader\blindfooter}% + \style = {Caps/lowercase, \noindent} %~default soft + \processdesign{\part}{}% + \global\increment \partnumber + \setcomptext{\partcomptext}% + \paging + \remark{Starting PART \number\partnumber.}% + % Next three things are done first, in case opener is more than one page. + \providemark{#1}% + \zpartchaptoc{\the\partcomptext}{#1}{80}% + \settaginfo{\the\partcomptext}{#1} + \zsetrunnerstoks{\runners}% + {\partformat{#1}}% + \endgraf} + +\def \endpart {% + \global\decrement \partdepth + \endblockscope{part}} + +\def \setpartnumber #1{% {number} + \global\partnumber = #1\relax + \global\decrement \partnumber} + +% Quasi-Part +% ---------- + + +\defineblock{\quasipart}{\endquasipart}{\true}{} + +%~block quasipart +% \setflag \allowintoc = flag % Allow in ToC? +% \openertext = {...} % Special text needed for opener. +% \def \paging {...} % Paging before part opener. +% \def \quasipartformat ##1{...} % Part page formatter. +% \def \providemark ##1{...} % Mark provider. +% \resetnumber = {...} % List of numbers to reset. +% \runners = {style,...} % Running head/foot styles. +% \style = {...} % Heading style. +%~end + +\def \quasipart #1{% {title} + \closeanychapter + \beginblockscope{quasipart}% + \global\increment \quasipartdepth + \openertext = {}% %~default hard + \runners = {blind,normal}% %~default soft + \zoldrunners{\blindheader\blindfooter}% + \style = {Caps/lowercase, \noindent}% %~default soft + \processdesign{\quasipart}{}% + \global\increment \quasipartnumber + \paging + \def \znext {#1}% + \remark{Starting QUASIPART `\expandafter\zdefof \meaning\znext\zmark'.}% + % Next three things are done first, in case opener is more than one page. + \providemark{#1}% + \zpartchaptoc{}{#1}{85}% + \settaginfo{}{#1}% + \zsetrunnerstoks{\runners}% + {\quasipartformat{#1}}% + \endgraf} +%%% \endquasipart} + +\def \endquasipart {% + \global\decrement \quasipartdepth + \endblockscope{quasipart}} + +% Chapter +% ------- + +\defineblock{\chapter}{\endchapter}{\true}{} + +%~block chapter +% \setflag \allowintoc = boolean % Allow in ToC? +% \authorlevel = integer % Author ToC entry level. +% \authortext = {...} % Author text needed for opener. +% \def \comptextformat {...} % Composite number text formatter. +% \difficulty = integer % Level of difficulty. +% \numberfont = {...} % Font for number. +% \numberwordfont = {...} % Font for word like "chapter". +% \def \numberformat {...} % Number format. +% \numbersink = glue % Sinkage to number, or +% \numberskip = glue % Space b/b to number. +% \openertext = {...} % Special text needed for opener. +% \def \paging {...} % Initial paging. +% \def \providemark ##1{...} % Mark provider. +% \resetnumber = {...} % List of numbers to reset. +% \setflag \resetsection = boolean % Reset section number? +% \runners = {style,...} % Running head/foot styles. +% \style = {...} % Heading style. +% \textsink = sinkage % Sinkage to text, or +% \textskip = skip % Space b/b from rule to text. +% \titlefont = {...} % Title font. +% \def \titleformat ##1{...} % Title format. +% \titlesink = glue % Sinkage to title, or +% \titleskip = glue % Space b/b from number to title. +%~end + +\def \chapter #1{% {title} + \closeanychapter + \beginblockscope{chapter}% + \global\increment \chapterdepth + \authorlevel = 0 %~default hard + \authortext = {}% %~default hard + \difficulty = 0 %~default with + \openertext = {}% %~default hard + \setflag \resetsection = \true %~default hard + \runners = {chapter,normal}% %~default soft + \zoldrunners{\chapterheader\chapterfooter}% + \style = {Caps/lowercase, \noindent}% %~default soft + \processdesign{\chapter}{}% + \if \resetsection + \global\sectionnumber = 0 + \global\quasisectionnumber = 0 + \global\chapterappendixnumber = 0 + \fi + \global\simpleheadnumber = 0 + \global\increment \chapternumber + \setcomptext{\chaptercomptext}% + \paging + \remark{Starting chapter \if \emptytoksp{\chaptercomptext}'#1'\else + \the\chaptercomptext \fi.}% + \zsetrunnerstoks{\runners}% + \chapterformat{#1}% + \deferfloats{\true}% + \settaginfo{\the\chaptercomptext}{#1}} + +\def \endchapter {% + \closeanysection + \global\decrement \chapterdepth + \endblockscope{chapter}} + +\def \chapterformat #1{% + {\the\numberfont + \zsinkskip{\numbersink}{\breakbest}{\numberskip}% + \numberformat\par}% + {\the\titlefont + \zsinkskip{\titlesink}{\breaknever}{\titleskip}% + \titleformat{#1}\par}% + \providemark{#1}% + \zpartchaptoc{\the\chaptercomptext}{#1}{70}% + \zsinkskip{\textsink}{\breaknever}{\textskip}} + +\def \setchapternumber #1{% {number} + \global\chapternumber = #1\relax + \global\decrement \chapternumber} + +\def \setappendixnumber #1{% {number} + \global\appendixnumber = #1\relax + \global\decrement \appendixnumber} + +\def \setsectionnumber #1{% {number} + \global\sectionnumber = #1\relax + \global\decrement \sectionnumber} + +% Quasi-Chapter +% ------------- + + +\defineblock{\quasichapter}{\endquasichapter}{\true}{} + +%~block quasichapter +% \setflag \allowintoc = boolean % Allow in ToC? +% \authorlevel = integer % Author ToC entry level. +% \authortext = {...} % Author text needed for opener. +% \openertext = {...} % Special text needed for opener. +% \def \paging {...} % Initial paging. +% \def \providemark ##1{...} % Mark provider. +% \resetnumber = {...} % List of numbers to reset. +% \runners = {style,...} % Running head/foot styles. +% \style = {...} % Heading style. +% \textsink = sinkage % Sinkage to text, or +% \textskip = skip % Skip from rule to text. +% \titlefont = {...} % Title font. +% \def \titleformat ##1{...} % Title format. +% \titlesink = glue % Sinkage to title, or +% \titleskip = glue % Space b/b to title. +%~end + +\def \quasichapter #1{% {title} + \closeanychapter + \beginblockscope{quasichapter}% + \global\increment \quasichapterdepth + \authorlevel = 0 %~default hard + \authortext = {}% %~default hard + \openertext = {}% %~default hard + \runners = {chapter,normal}% %~default soft + \zoldrunners{\chapterheader\chapterfooter}% + \style = {Caps/lowercase, \noindent}% %~default soft + \processdesign{\quasichapter}{}% + \global\increment \quasichapternumber + \chaptercomptext = {}% + \paging + \def \znext {#1}% + \remark{Starting quasichapter `\expandafter\zdefof \meaning\znext\zmark'.}% + \zsetrunnerstoks{\runners}% + \quasichapterformat{#1}% + \deferfloats{\true}% + \settaginfo{}{#1}} + +\def \endquasichapter {% + \closeanysection + \global\decrement \quasichapterdepth + \endblockscope{quasichapter}} + +\def \quasichapterformat #1{% + {\the\titlefont + \zsinkskip{\titlesink}{\breaknever}{\titleskip}% + \titleformat{#1}\par} + \providemark{#1}% + \zpartchaptoc{}{#1}{75}% + \zsinkskip{\textsink}{\breaknever}{\textskip}} + +% Appendix +% -------- + + +\defineblock{\appendix}{\endappendix}{\true}{} + +%~block appendix +% \setflag \allowintoc = boolean % Allow in ToC? +% \authortext = {...} % Author text needed for opener. +% \def \comptextformat {...} % Composite number text formatter. +% \numberfont = {...} % Font for number. +% \numberwordfont = {...} % Font for word like "appendix". +% \def \numberformat {...} % Number format. +% \numbersink = glue % Sinkage to number, or +% \numberskip = glue % Space b/b to number. +% \openertext = {...} % Special text needed for opener. +% \def \paging {...} % Initial paging. +% \def \providemark ##1{...} % Mark provider. +% \resetnumber = {...} % List of numbers to reset. +% \setflag \resetsection = boolean % Reset section number? +% \runners = {style,...} % Running head/foot styles. +% \style = {...} % Heading style. +% \textsink = sinkage % Sinkage to text, or +% \textskip = skip % Space b/b from rule to text. +% \titlefont = {...} % Title font. +% \def \titleformat ##1{...} % Title format. +% \titlesink = glue % Sinkage to title, or +% \titleskip = glue % Space b/b from number to title. +%~end + +\def \appendix #1{% {title} + \closeanychapter + \beginblockscope{appendix}% + \global\increment \appendixdepth + \authortext = {}% %~default hard + \openertext = {}% %~default hard + \setflag \resetsection = \true %~default hard + \runners = {chapter,normal}% %~default soft + \zoldrunners{\chapterheader\chapterfooter}% + \style = {Caps/lowercase, \noindent}% %~default soft + \processdesign{\appendix}{}% + \if \resetsection + \global\sectionnumber = 0 + \global\quasisectionnumber = 0 + \global\chapterappendixnumber = 0 + \fi + \global\increment \appendixnumber + \setcomptext{\chaptercomptext}% % Not \appendixcomptext! + \paging + \remark{Starting appendix \the\chaptercomptext.}% + \zsetrunnerstoks{\runners}% + \appendixformat{#1}% + \deferfloats{\true}% + \settaginfo{\the\chaptercomptext}{#1}} + +\def \endappendix {% + \closeanysection + \global\decrement \appendixdepth + \endblockscope{appendix}} + +\def \appendixformat #1{% + {\the\numberfont + \zsinkskip{\numbersink}{\breakbest}{\numberskip}% + \numberformat\par}% + {\the\titlefont + \zsinkskip{\titlesink}{\breaknever}{\titleskip}% + \titleformat{#1}\par}% + \providemark{#1}% + \zpartchaptoc{\the\chaptercomptext}{#1}{71}% + \zsinkskip{\textsink}{\breaknever}{\textskip}} + +% Section +% ------- + + +\defineblock{\section}{\endsection}{\true}{} + +%~block section +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above title. +% \setflag \allowintoc = boolean % Allow in ToC? +% \def \comptextformat {...} % Composite number text formatter. +% \difficulty = integer % Level of difficulty. +% \numberfont = {...} % Number font. +% \def \providemark ##1{...} % Mark provider. +% \resetnumber = {...} % List of numbers to reset. +% \style = {...} % Heading style. +% \textskip = skip % Skip from title to text. +% \titlefont = {...} % Title font. +% \def \titleformat ##1{...} % Title format. +% \topadjust = dimen % Adjust if at top of page. +%~end + +\def \section #1{% {title} + \closeanysection + \beginblockscope{section}% + \global\increment \sectiondepth + \difficulty = 0 %~default with + \style = {Caps/lowercase, \noindent}% %~default soft + \topadjust = \mindimen %~default hard + \processdesign{\section}{}% + \global\subsectionnumber = 0 + \global\subsubsectionnumber = 0 + \global\subsubsubsectionnumber = 0 + \global\increment \sectionnumber + \setcomptext{\sectioncomptext}% + \sectionformat{#1}% + \settaginfo{\the\sectioncomptext}{#1}} + +\def \endsection {% + \closeanysubsection + \global\decrement \sectiondepth + \endblockscope{section}} + +\def \sectionformat #1{% + {\if \emptytoksp{\numberfont}\the\titlefont \else \the\numberfont \fi + \zskipabovehead{\breakbest}{\aboveskip}% + \titleformat{#1}\par}% + \providemark{#1}% + \ztocentry{\the\sectioncomptext}{#1}{60}{\allowintoc}% + \bbskipabove{\breaknever}{\textskip}% + \overrideclubpenalty{\breaknever}} + +% Quasi-Section +% ------------- + + +\defineblock{\quasisection}{\endquasisection}{\true}{} + +%~block quasisection +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above title. +% \setflag \allowintoc = boolean % Allow in ToC? +% \difficulty = integer % Level of difficulty. +% \def \providemark ##1{...} % Mark provider. +% \resetnumber = {...} % List of numbers to reset. +% \style = {...} % Heading style. +% \textskip = skip % Skip from title to text. +% \titlefont = {...} % Title font. +% \def \titleformat ##1{...} % Title format. +% \topadjust = dimen % Adjust if at top of page. +%~end + +\def \quasisection #1{% {tile} + \closeanysection + \beginblockscope{quasisection}% + \global\increment \quasisectiondepth + \difficulty = 0 %~default with + \style = {Caps/lowercase, \noindent}% %~default soft + \topadjust = \mindimen %~default hard + \processdesign{\quasisection}{}% + \global\increment \quasisectionnumber % In case needed for \tagpageonly. + \quasisectionformat{#1}% + \settaginfo{}{#1}} + +\def \endquasisection {% + \closeanysubsection + \global\decrement \quasisectiondepth + \endblockscope{quasisection}} + +\def \quasisectionformat #1{% + {\the\titlefont + \zskipabovehead{\breakbest}{\aboveskip}% + \titleformat{#1}\par} + \providemark{#1}% + \ztocentry{}{#1}{65}{\allowintoc}% + \bbskipabove{\breaknever}{\textskip}% + \overrideclubpenalty{\breaknever}} + +% Chapter Appendix +% ------- -------- + + +\defineblock{\chapterappendix}{\endchapterappendix}{\true}{} + +%~block chapterappendix +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above title. +% \setflag \allowintoc = boolean % Allow in ToC? +% \def \comptextformat {...} % Composite number text formatter. +% \difficulty = integer % Level of difficulty. +% \numberfont = {...} % Number font. +% \def \providemark ##1{...} % Mark provider. +% \resetnumber = {...} % List of numbers to reset. +% \style = {...} % Heading style. +% \textskip = skip % Skip from title to text. +% \titlefont = {...} % Title font. +% \def \titleformat ##1{...} % Title format. +% \topadjust = dimen % Adjust if at top of page. +%~end + +\def \chapterappendix #1{% {title} + \closeanysection + \beginblockscope{chapterappendix}% + \global\increment \chapterappendixdepth + \difficulty = 0 %~default with + \style = {Caps/lowercase, \noindent}% %~default soft + \topadjust = \mindimen %~default hard + \processdesign{\chapterappendix}{}% + \global\subsectionnumber = 0 + \global\subsubsectionnumber = 0 + \global\subsubsubsectionnumber = 0 + \global\increment \chapterappendixnumber + \setcomptext{\sectioncomptext}% % Not \chapterappendixcomptext! + \chapterappendixformat{#1}% + \settaginfo{\the\sectioncomptext}{#1}} + +\def \endchapterappendix {% + \closeanysubsection + \global\decrement \chapterappendixdepth + \endblockscope{chapterappendix}} + +\def \chapterappendixformat #1{% + {\if \emptytoksp{\numberfont}\the\titlefont \else \the\numberfont \fi + \zskipabovehead{\breakbest}{\aboveskip}% + \titleformat{#1}\par}% + \providemark{#1}% + \ztocentry{\the\sectioncomptext}{#1}{61}{\allowintoc}% + \bbskipabove{\breaknever}{\textskip}% + \overrideclubpenalty{\breaknever}} + +% Subsection +% ---------- + + +\defineblock{\subsection}{\endsubsection}{\false}{} + +%~block subsection +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above title. +% \setflag \allowintoc = flag % Allow in ToC? +% \def \comptextformat {...} % Composite number text formatter. +% \difficulty = integer % Level of difficulty. +% \numberfont = {...} % Font for number. +% \def \providemark ##1{...} % Mark provider. +% \style = {...} % Heading style. +% \textskip = skip % Skip from title to text. +% \titlefont = {...} % Title font. +% \def \titleformat ##1{...} % Title format. +% \topadjust = dimen % Adjust if at top of page. +%~end + +\def \subsection #1{% {title} + \closeanysubsection + \beginblockscope{subsection}% + \global\increment \subsectiondepth + \difficulty = 0 %~default with + \style = {Caps/lowercase, \noindent}% %~default soft + \topadjust = \mindimen %~default hard + \processdesign{\subsection}{}% + \global\subsubsectionnumber = 0 + \global\subsubsubsectionnumber = 0 + \global\increment \subsectionnumber + \setcomptext{\subsectioncomptext}% + \subsectionformat{#1}% + \settaginfo{\the\subsectioncomptext}{#1}% + \ignorespaces} + +\def \endsubsection {% + \closeanysubsubsection + \global\decrement \subsectiondepth + \endblockscope{subsection}} + +\def \subsectionformat #1{% + {\if \emptytoksp{\numberfont}\the\titlefont \else \the\numberfont \fi + \zskipabovehead{\breakbetter}{\aboveskip}% + \titleformat{#1}}% + \providemark{#1}% + \ztocentry{\the\subsectioncomptext}{#1}{50}{\allowintoc}% + \if \dimposp{\textskip}% + \par + \bbskipabove{\breaknever}{\textskip}% + \fi + \overrideclubpenalty{\breaknever}} + +% Quasi-Subsection +% ---------------- + + +\defineblock{\quasisubsection}{\endquasisubsection}{\false}{} + +%~block quasisubsection +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above title. +% \setflag \allowintoc = boolean % Allow in ToC? +% \difficulty = integer % Level of difficulty. +% \def \providemark ##1{...} % Mark provider. +% \style = {...} % Heading style. +% \textskip = skip % Skip from title to text. +% \titlefont = {...} % Title font. +% \def \titleformat ##1{...} % Title format. +% \topadjust = dimen % Adjust if at top of page. +%~end + +\def \quasisubsection #1{% {title} + \closeanysubsection + \beginblockscope{quasisubsection}% + \global\increment \quasisubsectiondepth + \difficulty = 0 %~default with + \style = {Caps/lowercase, \noindent}% %~default soft + \topadjust = \mindimen %~default hard + \processdesign{\quasisubsection}{}% + \quasisubsectionformat{#1}% + \settaginfo{}{#1}% + \ignorespaces} + +\def \endquasisubsection {% + \closeanysubsubsection + \global\decrement \quasisubsectiondepth + \endblockscope{quasisubsection}} + +\def \quasisubsectionformat #1{% + {\the\titlefont + \zskipabovehead{\breakbetter}{\aboveskip}% + \titleformat{#1}} + \providemark{#1}% + \ztocentry{}{#1}{55}{\allowintoc}% + \if \dimposp{\textskip}% + \par + \bbskipabove{\breaknever}{\textskip}% + \fi + \overrideclubpenalty{\breaknever}} + +% Subsubsection +% ------------- + + +\defineblock{\subsubsection}{\endsubsubsection}{\false}{} + +%~block subsubsection +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above title. +% \setflag \allowintoc = flag % Allow in ToC? +% \def \comptextformat {...} % Composite number text formatter. +% \difficulty = integer % Level of difficulty. +% \numberfont = {...} % Font for number. +% \def \providemark ##1{...} % Mark provider. +% \style = {...} % Heading style. +% \textskip = skip % Skip from title to text. +% \titlefont = {...} % Title font. +% \def \titleformat ##1{...} % Title format. +% \topadjust = dimen % Adjust if at top of page. +%~end + +\def \subsubsection #1{% {title} + \closeanysubsubsection + \beginblockscope{subsubsection}% + \global\increment \subsubsectiondepth + \difficulty = 0 %~default with + \style = {Caps/lowercase, \noindent}% %~default soft + \topadjust = \mindimen %~default hard + \processdesign{\subsubsection}{}% + \global\subsubsubsectionnumber = 0 + \global\increment \subsubsectionnumber + \setcomptext{\subsubsectioncomptext}% + \subsubsectionformat{#1}% + \settaginfo{\the\subsubsectioncomptext}{#1}% + \ignorespaces} + +\def \endsubsubsection {% + \closeanysubsubsubsection + \global\decrement \subsubsectiondepth + \endblockscope{subsubsection}} + +\def \subsubsectionformat #1{% + {\if \emptytoksp{\numberfont}\the\titlefont \else \the\numberfont \fi + \zskipabovehead{\breakgood}{\aboveskip}% + \titleformat{#1}}% + \providemark{#1}% + \ztocentry{\the\subsubsectioncomptext}{#1}{40}{\allowintoc}% + \if \dimposp{\textskip}% + \par + \bbskipabove{\breaknever}{\textskip}% + \fi + \overrideclubpenalty{\breaknever}} + +% Subsubsubsection +% ---------------- + + +\defineblock{\subsubsubsection}{\endsubsubsubsection}{\false}{} + +%~block subsubsubsection +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above title. +% \setflag \allowintoc = flag % Allow in ToC? +% \def \comptextformat {...} % Composite number text formatter. +% \difficulty = integer % Level of difficulty. +% \numberfont = {...} % Font for number. +% \def \providemark ##1{...} % Mark provider. +% \style = {...} % Heading style. +% \textskip = skip % Skip from title to text. +% \titlefont = {...} % Title font. +% \def \titleformat ##1{...} % Title format. +% \topadjust = dimen % Adjust if at top of page. +%~end + +\def \subsubsubsection #1{% {title} + \closeanysubsubsubsection + \beginblockscope{subsubsubsection}% + \global\increment \subsubsubsectiondepth + \difficulty = 0 %~default with + \style = {Caps/lowercase, \noindent}% %~default soft + \topadjust = \mindimen %~default hard + \processdesign{\subsubsubsection}{}% + \global\increment \subsubsubsectionnumber + \setcomptext{\subsubsubsectioncomptext}% + \subsubsubsectionformat{#1}% + \settaginfo{\the\subsubsubsectioncomptext}{#1}% + \ignorespaces} + +\def \endsubsubsubsection {% + \global\decrement \subsubsubsectiondepth + \endblockscope{subsubsubsection}} + +\def \subsubsubsectionformat #1{% + {\if \emptytoksp{\numberfont}\the\titlefont \else \the\numberfont \fi + \zskipabovehead{\breakgood}{\aboveskip}% + \titleformat{#1}}% + \providemark{#1}% + \ztocentry{\the\subsubsubsectioncomptext}{#1}{30}{\allowintoc}% + \if \dimposp{\textskip}% + \par + \bbskipabove{\breaknever}{\textskip}% + \fi + \overrideclubpenalty{\breaknever}} + +% Simple Head +% ------ ---- + + +\defineblock{\simplehead}{\endsimplehead}{\false}{} + +%~block simplehead Type +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above title. +% \setflag \allowclubline = flag % True if club allowed below. +% \setflag \allowintoc = boolean % Allow in ToC? +% \difficulty = integer % Level of difficulty. +% \style = {...} % Heading style. +% \textskip = skip % Skip from title to text. +% \titlefont = {...} % Title font. +% \def \titleformat ##1{...} % Title format. +% \tocentrylevel = integer % ToC entry level number (optional). +% \topadjust = dimen % Adjust if at top of page. +%~end + +\definecount{\tocentrylevel}{0} + + +\def \simplehead #1#2{% {type}{title} + \endgraf + \beginblockscope{simplehead}% + \global\increment \simpleheaddepth + \setflag \allowclubline = \false %~default soft + \setflag \allowintoc = \true %~default with + \difficulty = 0 %~default with + \style = {Caps/lowercase, \noindent}% %~default soft + \tocentrylevel = 0 %~default soft + \topadjust = \mindimen %~default hard + \processdesign{\simplehead}{#1}% + \global\increment \simpleheadnumber + \simpleheadformat{#2}% + \endsimplehead} + +\def \endsimplehead {% + \global\decrement \simpleheaddepth + \endblockscope{simplehead}% + \ignorespaces} + +\def \simpleheadformat #1{% + {\the\titlefont + \zskipabovehead{\breakgood}{\aboveskip}% + \titleformat{#1}}% + \if \dimzerop{\textskip}% + \nobreak + \else + \endgraf + \bbskipabove{\breaknever}{\textskip}% + \fi + \if \posp{\tocentrylevel}% + \ztocentry{}{#1}{\tocentrylevel}{\allowintoc}% + \fi + \if \notp{\allowclubline}\overrideclubpenalty{\breaknever}\fi} + +% Useful Utilities +% ------ --------- + + +\def \chapterorchapterappendixcomptext {% + \if \inblockp{\chapterappendix}% + \the\sectioncomptext + \else + \the\chaptercomptext + \fi} + +\def \textonlyhead {% %^modifier + \with{\setflag\allowintoc=\false + \def\providemark##1{}}} + +\def \closeanychapter {% + \closeifinblock{\part}{\endpart}% + \closeifinblock{\quasipart}{\endquasipart}% + \closeifinblock{\quasichapter}{\endquasichapter}% + \closeifinblock{\chapter}{\endchapter}% + \closeifinblock{\appendix}{\endappendix}} + +\def \closeanysection {% + \closeifinblock{\quasisection}{\endquasisection}% + \closeifinblock{\section}{\endsection}% + \closeifinblock{\chapterappendix}{\endchapterappendix}} + +\def \closeanysubsection {% + \closeifinblock{\quasisubsection}{\endquasisubsection}% + \closeifinblock{\subsection}{\endsubsection}} + +\def \closeanysubsubsection {% + \closeifinblock{\subsubsection}{\endsubsubsection}} + +\def \closeanysubsubsubsection {% + \closeifinblock{\subsubsubsection}{\endsubsubsubsection}} + +\def \zsinkskip #1#2#3{% {sink}{penalty}{skip} + \if \dimposp{#3}% + \bbskipabove{#2}{#3}% + \else + \vsinkfromtypearea{#1}% + \fi} + +\def \zskipabovehead #1#2{% {penalty}{skip} + \bbskipabove{#1}{#2}% + \if \dimneqlp{\topadjust}{\mindimen}% + \vskip -\topadjust + \tdimena = \prevdepth + \rule{height 0pt depth 0pt width 0pt}% + \prevdepth = \tdimena + \penalty \breaknever + \vskip \topadjust + \fi} + +% If the author level is negative, the ToC entry goes before the chapter's +% entry. Otherwise it goes after the chapter's entry. + +\def \zpartchaptoc #1#2#3{% + \edef \znext {\noexpand\tocentry{}{\the\authortext}}% + \if \andp{\notp{\emptytoksp{\authortext}}}{\negp{\authorlevel}}% + \znext{-\authorlevel}% + \fi + \ztocentry{#1}{#2}{#3}{\allowintoc}% + \if \andp{\notp{\emptytoksp{\authortext}}}{\posp{\authorlevel}}% + \znext{\authorlevel}% + \fi} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztabbing.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztabbing.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..08257a45f41 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztabbing.tex @@ -0,0 +1,266 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Tabbing Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This module contains the definition of the block that is +% used to format text with tab stops. +% +% Authors: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 27 May 2016 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Tabbing Block +% ------- ----- + + +\defineblock{\tabbing}{\endtabbing}{\false}{} +\resetinvcontext{\tabbing} + +%~block tabbing Type +% \abovepenalty = integer % Penalty above text. +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above text. +% \setflag \autocallout = boolean % Automatically number lines? +% \def \beginformat {...} % Beginning of text formatter. +% \belowpenalty = integer % Penalty below text. +% \belowskip = glue % Space b/b below text. +% \bodyfont = {font} % Body font. +% \def \calloutformat ##1{...} % Callout formatter. +% \calloutnumber = integer % Number of first callout. +% \def \callouttext {...} % Callout text or \arg. +% \defaulttabwidth = dimen % Default repeating tab width. +% \def \endformat {...} % End of text formatter. +% \leftindent = glue % Left indentation. +% \rightindent = glue % Right indentation. +% \tabbinggapskip = glue % Standard tabbing gap. +% \textcolor = {...} % Color of text. +% \width = dimen % Line width. +%~end + +\defineskip{\tabbinggapskip}{0pt} + +\def \tabbing #1{% {type} + \blockcantbein{\tabbing}{\tabbing}% + \beginblockscope{tabbing}% + \global\increment \tabbingdepth + \abovepenalty = \breakgood %~default hard + \setflag \autocallout = \false %~default soft + \def \beginformat {}% %~default soft + \belowpenalty = \breakgood %~default hard + \calloutnumber = 1 %~default with + \def \callouttext {\number\calloutnumber}% %~default soft + \defaulttabwidth = \mindimen %~default soft + \def \endformat {}% %~default soft + \tabbinggapskip = \enclosingbaselineskip %~default soft + \textcolor = {}% %~default soft + \parindent = 0pt + \parrag = 0pt + \parskip = 0pt + \processdesign{\tabbing}{#1}% + \global\increment \tabbingnumber + \tabbingformat + \def \zarg {\arg}% + \if \tokeqlp{\callouttext}{\zarg}% + \defineatsigncommand @##{\ztbngatcallout}% + \else + \defineatsigncommand @##{\ztbngatcallout{\callouttext}}% + \fi + \if \emptytoksp{\textcolor}% % Must have a group around \ztbnginit. + \bgroup + \else + \color{\the\textcolor}% + \fi + \ztbnginit + \ztbngstartline} + +\def \endtabbing {% + \ztbngfinal + \if \emptytoksp{\textcolor}% + \egroup % \tabbing group + \else + \endcolor + \fi + \futurelet\nexttoken \zendtabbing} + +\def \zendtabbing {% + \endtabbingformat + \global\decrement \tabbingdepth + \endblockscope{tabbing}% + \parnext} + +\def \tabbingformat {% + \endgraf + \the\bodyfont + \bbskipabove{\abovepenalty}{\aboveskip}% + \alterindentation{\leftindent}{\rightindent}% + \settextwidth{\width}% + \beginformat} + +\def \endtabbingformat {% + \endformat + \bbskipbelowblockpar{\nexttoken}{\belowpenalty}{\belowskip}} + +%~ Use this command in between lines in a |\tabbing| block to +%~ perform a vertical adjustment between those two lines. For example, +%~ +%~ \adjusttabbing{\fullpagebreak} + +\long\def \adjusttabbing #1{% {commands} + \ztbngadjust{#1}} + +% Initialize and Finalize +% ---------- --- -------- + + +\definecount{\ztbngstopcount}{0} +\definecount{\ztbngstopindex}{0} + +\definebox{\ztbngline} +\definebox{\ztbngfragment} + + +\def \ztbnginit {% + \let \par = \ztbngshouldntbepar + \def \nl {\ztbngfinishline{\false}}% + \defineatsigncommand @.{\ztbngatsetstop}% + \defineatsigncommand @>{\ztbngattab}% + \defineatsigncommand @C{\ztbngatclear}% + \defineatsigncommand @D{\ztbngatdiscard}% + \ztbngsetdefaultstops{\defaulttabwidth}} + +\def \ztbngsetdefaultstops #1{% {width} + \global\ztbngstopcount = 0 + \def \ztbngstop {0pt}% + \if \dimgtrp{#1}{0pt}% + \tdimena = 0pt + \loop + \global\increment \ztbngstopcount + \advance \tdimena by #1\relax + \withname\edef {\ztbngstop\romannumeral\ztbngstopcount}{\the\tdimena}% + \if \dimlssp{\tdimena}{\hsize}% + \repeat + \fi} + +\def \ztbngfinal {% + \ztbngfinishline{\true}} + +% Build Lines +% ----- ----- + + +\def \ztbngstartline {% + \ztbngstopindex = 0 + \setbox\ztbngline = \hbox{}% + \global\setflag \ztbngdiscardp = \false + \settaginfo{\number\calloutnumber}{???title???}% + \ztbngstartfragment} + +\def \ztbngstartfragment {% + \setbox \ztbngfragment = \hbox\bgroup + \ignorespaces} + +\def \ztbngfinishfragment {% + \egroup % \ztbngfragment box + \setbox\ztbngline = \hbox{% + \unhbox\ztbngline + \tdimena = \name{\ztbngstop\romannumeral\ztbngstopindex}% + \hskip \tdimena + \tdimenb = \hsize + \advance \tdimenb by -\tdimena + \hbox to \tdimenb{\copy\ztbngfragment \hfil}% + \hskip -\tdimenb + \hskip -\tdimena}} + +\def \ztbngfinishline #1{% {end-of-block?} + \ztbngfinishfragment + \if \notp{\ztbngdiscardp}% + \if \orp{\posp{\ztbngstopindex}}{\dimposp{\wd\ztbngfragment}}% + \noindent + \if \autocallout + \llap{\calloutformat{\the\calloutnumber}}% + \increment \calloutnumber + \fi + \box\ztbngline + \endgraf + \else\if \notp{#1}% + \vspace{\tabbinggapskip}% + \fi\fi + \fi + \if #1\let \znext = \relax \else \let \znext = \ztbngstartline \fi + \znext} + +% At-sign Commands +% ------- -------- + + +% @#{callout}text... + +\def \ztbngatcallout #1{% {callout} + \ztbngfinishfragment + \if \andp{\zerop{\ztbngstopindex}}{\dimzerop{\wd\ztbngfragment}} + \setbox\ztbngfragment = \hbox\bgroup + \llap{\calloutformat{#1}}% + \ztbngfinishfragment + \else + \error{badtabcallout}{Callout command (\noexpand@##) must appear + at the beginning of the line}% + \fi + \increment \calloutnumber + \ztbngstartfragment} + +% text@.more text... + +\def \ztbngatsetstop {% + \ztbngfinishfragment + \tdimena = \name{\ztbngstop\romannumeral\ztbngstopindex}% + \advance \tdimena by \wd\ztbngfragment + \increment \ztbngstopindex + \if \gtrp{\ztbngstopindex}{\ztbngstopcount}% + \withname\edef {\ztbngstop\romannumeral\ztbngstopindex}{\the\tdimena}% + \increment \ztbngstopcount + \else + \error{badtabstop}{There is already a tab stop}% + \fi + \ztbngstartfragment} + +% text@>more text... + +\def \ztbngattab {% + \ztbngfinishfragment + \if \lssp{\ztbngstopindex}{\ztbngstopcount}% + \increment \ztbngstopindex + \else + \warning{toomanytabs}{Too many tabs on line; extra tabs ignored}% + \fi + \ztbngstartfragment} + +% @Ctext...\nl + +\def \ztbngatclear {% + \if \zerop{\ztbngstopindex}% + \global\ztbngstopcount = 0\relax + \else + \error{badtabclear}{Tabs must be cleared at the beginning of the line}% + \fi} + +% text@D\nl + +\def \ztbngatdiscard {% + \global\setflag \ztbngdiscardp = \true \relax} + +% Adjustment +% ---------- + + +\long\def \ztbngadjust #1{% {commands} + \ztbngfinishfragment + \if \andp{\zerop{\ztbngstopindex}}{\dimzerop{\wd\ztbngfragment}} + #1% + \else + \error{badtabadjust}{The \noexpand\adjusttabbing command must appear + in between lines}% + \fi + \ztbngstartfragment} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztabularv1.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztabularv1.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..13fb536ab8e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztabularv1.tex @@ -0,0 +1,465 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Tabular Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This module contains all the facilities for producing +% tabular material. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 1990 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Tabular Block +% ------- ----- + + +\let \tabularcomptext = \relax +\let \tabulardepth = \relax +\let \tabularnumber = \relax + + +\defineblock{\tabular}{\endtabular}{\false}{} + +%~obsolete-block tabular Type +% \abovepenalty = integer +% \aboveskip = glue +% \setflag \allowbreaks = boolean +% \belowpenalty = integer +% \belowskip = glue +% \bodyfont = {...} +% \colheadaboveskip = glue +% \colheadbelowskip = glue +% \colheadfont = {...} +% \colsubheadfont = {...} +% \columngutter = glue +% \cutinheadaboveskip = glue +% \cutinheadbelowskip = glue +% \cutinheadfont = {...} +% \interrowskip = glue +% \leftindent = glue +% \parhang = dimen +% \parrag = dimen +% \rightindent = glue +% \rulecolwidth = dimen +% \spannerheadfont = {...} +% \spannerruleaboveskip = dimen +% \spannerrulebelowskip = dimen +% \spannerruleheight = dimen +% \def \tabnoteformat ##1{...} +% \tabrulecolor = {color}% +% \tabruleheight = dimen +% \width = dimen +%~end + +\defineskip{\colheadaboveskip}{0pt} +\let \headaboveskip = \colheadaboveskip +\let \headbelowskip = \colheadbelowskip +\definetoks{\colsubheadfont} +\defineskip{\cutinheadaboveskip}{0pt} +\defineskip{\cutinheadbelowskip}{0pt} +\definetoks{\cutinheadfont} + + +\definecount{\tabularcolcount}{0} % Number of columns in table. +\definebox{\rowstrutbox} % Strut for table rows. + + +\def \tabular #1#2{% {type}{template} + \endgraf + \beginblockscope{tabular}% + \global\increment \tabulardepth + \abovepenalty = \breakgood %~default hard + \belowpenalty = \breakbetter %~default hard + \tabrulecolor = {black}% %~default soft + \processdesign{\tabular}{#1}% + \global\increment \tabularnumber + \iffalse{\fi % Must be done with master + \tabularcolcount = 0 % counter > 0, to hide inner + \ztabcols #2&\zmark % \set and &. + \let \set = \span + \iffalse}\fi + \tabularformat + \fakepar + \nointerlineskip % We assume this below. + \if \notp{\allowbreaks}\vtop \fi \bgroup + \offinterlineskip + \everycr = {}% + \tabskip = \leftskip + \halign \if \dimneqlp{\width}{\naturalwidth}to \width \fi \bgroup + #2\tabskip = \rightskip \cr} + +\def \endtabular {% + \crcr + \egroup % \halign + \if \posp{\prevdepth}\kern -\interrowskip \fi % If last line has strut. + \egroup % \vtop + \prevdepth = \dp\strutbox % So row strut depth won't shine thru. + \futurelet\nexttoken \zendtabular} + +\def \zendtabular {% + \endtabularformat + \global\decrement \tabulardepth + \endblockscope{tabular}% + \parnext} + +\def \tabularformat {% + \endgraf + \the\bodyfont + \tdimena = \dp\strutbox + \advance \tdimena by \interrowskip + \setbox \rowstrutbox = \hbox{\vrule height \ht\strutbox depth \tdimena + width 0pt}% + \advance \aboveskip by \baselineskip % Compensate for absence + \advance \aboveskip by -\prevdepth % of interlineskip above + \advance \aboveskip by -\ht\rowstrutbox % first row of tabular. + \bbskipabove{\abovepenalty}{\aboveskip}% + \alterindentation{\leftindent}{\rightindent}} + +\def \endtabularformat{% + \bbskipbelowblockpar{\nexttoken}{\belowpenalty}{\belowskip}} + +\def \ztabcols #1\zmark{% + \increment \tabularcolcount + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#2}}\ztabcols #2\zmark \fi} + +% Template Facilities +% -------- ---------- + + +% The following macros are used to construct the tabular template. +% They are all used with the \set macro. + +\def \centercol {% + \hfil ##\rowstrut \hfil \tabskip=\columngutter} + +\def \centernumbercol #1{% {template} + \hfil \znumcell{#1}{##}\rowstrut \hfil \tabskip=\columngutter} + +\let \colgutter = \tabskip + +\def \customcol #1#2{% {left}{right} + #1\relax##\rowstrut #2\relax \tabskip=\columngutter} + +\def \customrulecol #1{% {width} + \color{\the\tabrulecolor}% + \vrule width #1 ##% + \endcolor \tabskip=\columngutter} + +\def \emptycol #1{% {width} + ##\rowstrut \hspace{#1}\tabskip=\columngutter} + +\def \leftcol {% + ##\rowstrut \hfil \tabskip=\columngutter} + +\def \leftnumbercol #1{% {template} + \znumcell{#1}{##}\rowstrut \hfil \tabskip=\columngutter} + +\def \parcol #1{% {width} + \vtop{\zpushvcontext + \zinitparcell{#1}{\parhang}% + \strut ##% + \if \hmodep \rowstrut \par \fi + \zpopvcontext}% + \tabskip=\columngutter} + +\def \rightcol {% + \hfil ##\rowstrut \tabskip=\columngutter} + +\def \rightnumbercol #1{% {template} + \hfil \znumcell{#1}{##}\rowstrut \tabskip=\columngutter} + +\def \rulecol {% + \color{\the\tabrulecolor}% + \vrule width \rulecolwidth ##% + \endcolor \tabskip=\columngutter} + +% Cell Facilities +% ---- ---------- + + +% The following macros help with tabular entries (cells). + +\def \0{\phantom{0}} + +\def \centercell #1{% {text} + \omit + \hfil #1\rowstrut \hfil} + +\def \centerhead #1{% {heading} + \centercell{\the\colheadfont #1}} + +\def \centernumbercell #1#2{% {template}{text} + \omit + \hfil \znumcell{#1}{#2}\rowstrut \hfil} + +\def \centersubhead #1{% {heading} + \centercell{\the\colsubheadfont #1}} + +\def \customspannerrule #1#2{% {columns}{height} + \multispan{#1}% + \rowstrut + \ruleleaders{\hrule height #2 depth 0pt}} + +\def \customspannerruleabut #1#2{% {columns}{height} + \multispan{#1}% + \ruleleaders{\hrule height #2 depth 0pt}} + +\def \cutinhead #1{% {heading} + \multispan{\tabularcolcount}% + \leftcell{\the\cutinheadfont #1}} + +\def \cutinpar #1#2{% {width}{text} + \multispan{\tabularcolcount}% + \parhang = 0pt \parcell{#1}{#2}} + +\zremovePlaindef \hideskip +\defineskip{\hideskip}{-1000pt plus 1fill} + +\def \hidewidth {\hskip \hideskip} + +\def \leftcell #1{% {text} + \omit + #1\rowstrut \hfil} + +\def \lefthead #1{% {heading} + \leftcell{\the\colheadfont #1}} + +\def \leftnumbercell #1#2{% {template}{text} + \omit + \znumcell{#1}{#2}\rowstrut \hfil} + +\def \leftsubhead #1{% {heading} + \leftcell{\the\colsubheadfont #1}} + +\def \multispan #1{% {columns} + \omit + \tcounta =#1\relax + \loop \ifnum \tcounta > 1 \zspan \repeat + \let \omit = \relax % In case the next thing is a \leftcell or whatever. + \ignorespaces} + +\def \zspan{\span\omit \decrement \tcounta} + +\def \nocolrule {% + width 0pt } + +\def \parcell #1#2{% {width}{text} + \omit + \vtop{\zpushvcontext + \zinitparcell{#1}{\parhang}% + \strut #2% + \if \hmodep \rowstrut \par \fi + \zpopvcontext}} + +\def \rightcell #1{% {text} + \omit + \hfil #1\rowstrut} + +\def \righthead #1{% {heading} + \rightcell{\the\colheadfont #1}} + +\def \rightnumbercell #1#2{% {template}{text} + \omit + \hfil \znumcell{#1}{#2}\rowstrut} + +\def \rightsubhead #1{% {heading} + \rightcell{\the\colsubheadfont #1}} + +\def \rowstrut {\unhcopy \rowstrutbox} + +\def \spannerhead #1#2{% {columns}{heading} + \multispan{#1}% + \centercell{\the\spannerheadfont #2}} + +\def \spannerrule #1{% {columns} + \multispan{#1}% + \rowstrut + \ruleleaders{\hrule height \spannerruleheight depth 0pt}} + +\def \spannerruleabut #1{% {columns} + \multispan{#1}% + \ruleleaders{\hrule height \spannerruleheight depth 0pt}} + +\def \spannerruleabutbelow #1{% {columns} + \multispan{#1}% + \vrule height \ht\rowstrutbox depth 0pt width 0pt\relax + \ruleleaders{\hrule height \spannerruleheight depth 0pt}} + +\def \tabnote #1{% {note-mark} + {\tabnoteformat{#1}}} + +\def \znumcell #1#2{% {template}{text} + \if \emptyargp{#2}% + \relax + \else + \znumcella{#1}{#2}% + \fi} + +\def \znumcella #1#2{% {template}{text} + {\ztoksa = {}\ztoksb = {}% + \setflag \znumpt = \false + \znumcellb #1\zmark + \setbox\zboxa = \hbox{\the\ztoksa}% + \tdimena = \wd\zboxa + \setbox\zboxa = \hbox{\the\ztoksb}% + \tdimenb = \wd\zboxa + \setflag \ztempt = \znumpt + \ztoksa = {}\ztoksb = {}% + \setflag \znumpt = \false + \znumcellb #2\zmark + \if \ztempt % Template had a decimal point. + \if \znumpt + \hbox to \tdimena{\hss \the\ztoksa}% + \the\decimalpoint + \hbox to \tdimenb{\the\ztoksb \hss}% + \else + \setbox\zboxa = \hbox{\the\decimalpoint}% + \hbox to \tdimena{\hss \the\ztoksa}% + \kern \wd\zboxa \kern \tdimenb + \fi + \else % Template had no decimal point. + \if \znumpt + \error{celldecpt}{Tabular template did not specify a decimal point}% + \else + \hbox to \tdimena{\hss \the\ztoksa}% + \fi + \fi}} + +\def \znumcellb #1#2\zmark{% t1 trest \zmark + \if \codeeqlp{\noexpand#1}{\the\decimalpoint}% + \setflag \znumpt = \true + \else + \if \znumpt + \ztoksb = \expandafter{\the\ztoksb #1}% + \else + \ztoksa = \expandafter{\the\ztoksa #1}% + \fi + \fi + \if \emptyargp{#2}% + \let \znext = \relax + \else + \def \znext {\znumcellb #2\zmark}% + \fi + \znext} + +% Inter-Row Facilities +% --------- ---------- + + +% The following macros perform various actions in between rows. + +\def \adjusttab #1{% + \if \notp{\vmodep}% + \error{badrowcmd}{The \string\adjusttab command cannot be used in a table row}% + \fi + \noalign{#1}} + +\def \customtabrule #1{% {height} + \multispan{\tabularcolcount}% + \rowstrut + \color{\the\tabrulecolor}% + \ruleleaders{\hrule height #1 depth 0pt}% + \endcolor + \cr} + +\def \customtabruleabut #1{% + \multispan{\tabularcolcount}% + \color{\the\tabrulecolor}% + \ruleleaders{\hrule height #1 depth 0pt}% + \endcolor + \cr} + +\def \customtabruleabutbelow #1{% + \multispan{\tabularcolcount}% + \vrule height \ht\rowstrutbox depth 0pt width 0pt\relax + \color{\the\tabrulecolor}% + \ruleleaders{\hrule height #1 depth 0pt}% + \endcolor + \cr} + +\def \nointerrowskip {\tabvspace{-\interrowskip}} + +\def \skipabovecolhead {% + \tabbbskip{\colheadaboveskip}} + +\def \skipbelowcolhead {% + \tabbbskip{\colheadbelowskip}} + +\def \skipabovespannerrule {% + \tabbbskip{\spannerruleaboveskip}} + +\def \skipbelowspannerrule {% + \tabbbskip{\spannerrulebelowskip}} + +\def \skipabovecutinhead {% + \tabbbskip{\cutinheadaboveskip}} + +\def \skipbelowcutinhead {% + \tabbbskip{\cutinheadbelowskip}} + +\def \tabbbskip #1{% {glue} + \adjusttab{\zskipa = #1\relax + \advance \zskipa by -\ht\rowstrutbox + \advance \zskipa by -\dp\rowstrutbox + \vskip \zskipa}} + +\def \tabrule {% + \multispan{\tabularcolcount}% + \rowstrut + \color{\the\tabrulecolor}% + \ruleleaders{\hrule height \tabruleheight depth 0pt}% + \endcolor + \cr} + +\def \tabruleabut {% + \multispan{\tabularcolcount}% + \color{\the\tabrulecolor}% + \ruleleaders{\hrule height \tabruleheight depth 0pt}% + \endcolor + \cr} + +\def \tabruleabutbelow {% + \multispan{\tabularcolcount}% + \vrule height \ht\rowstrutbox depth 0pt width 0pt\relax + \color{\the\tabrulecolor}% + \ruleleaders{\hrule height \tabruleheight depth 0pt}% + \endcolor + \cr} + +\def \tabvspace #1{\adjusttab{\vskip #1}}% {glue} + +% Alignment Utilities +% --------- --------- + + +\let \completerow = \cr + +\def \ialign {\everycr = {}\tabskip = 0pt \halign} + +\def \oalign #1{% {row...} + \ensurepar + \vtop{\baselineskip = 0pt + \lineskip = .25ex + \ialign{##\cr #1\crcr}}} + +\def \ooalign {% + \lineskiplimit = -\maxdimen + \oalign} + +\def \ozalign {% + \lineskiplimit = 0pt\relax + \oalign} + +\def \zinitparcell #1#2{% {width}{hang} + \baselineskip = \normalbaselineskip + \lineskiplimit = 0pt \lineskip = 0pt + \setindentation{0pt}{0pt}% + \settextwidth{#1}% + \setparrag{\parrag}% + \leftskip = #2 + \parindent = -#2 + \parfillskip = \normalparfillskip} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztabularv2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztabularv2.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..932a42f5d46 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztabularv2.tex @@ -0,0 +1,512 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX New Tabular Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This module contains all the facilities for producing +% tabular material. This is the second major version. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 30 April 2001 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Tabular Block +% ------- ----- + + +\let \tabularcomptext = \relax +\let \tabulardepth = \relax +\let \tabularnumber = \relax + + +\defineblock{\tabular}{\endtabular}{\false}{} + +%~obsolete-block tabular Type +% \abovepenalty = integer +% \aboveskip = glue +% \belowpenalty = integer +% \belowskip = glue +% \bodyfont = {...} +% \columngutter = glue +% \colheadaboveskip = glue +% \colheadbelowskip = glue +% \colheadfont = {...} +% \cutinheadfont = {...} +% \setflag \hastoprule = \false +% \interrowskip = glue +% \leftindent = glue +% \parhang = dimen +% \parrag = dimen +% \rightindent = glue +% \rulecolwidth = dimen +% \sectionheadaboveskip = glue +% \sectionheadbelowskip = glue +% \sideheadfont = {...} +% \spannerheadfont = {...} +% \spannerruleaboveskip = dimen +% \spannerrulebelowskip = dimen +% \spannerrulecolor = {color} +% \spannerruleheight = dimen +% \style = {...} +% \tabbottomruleaboveskip = dimen +% \tabheadrulebelowskip = dimen +% \def \tabnoteformat ##1{...} +% \tabrulecolor = {color} +% \tabruleheight = dimen +% \width = dimen +%~end + +\defineskip{\colheadaboveskip}{0pt} +%%%\defineskip{\colheadbelowskip}{0pt} +%%%\definetoks{\colheadfont} +\definetoks{\cutinheadfont} +%%%\definedimen{\rulecolwidth}{0pt} +\defineskip{\sectionheadaboveskip}{0pt} +\defineskip{\sectionheadbelowskip}{0pt} +%%%\definetoks{\sideheadfont} +%%%\definetoks{\spannerheadfont} +%%%\defineskip{\spannerruleaboveskip}{0pt} +%%%\defineskip{\spannerrulebelowskip}{0pt} +%%%\definetoks{\spannerrulecolor} +%%%\definedimen{\spannerruleheight}{0pt} +%%%\definedimen{\tabbottomruleaboveskip}{0pt} +%%%\definedimen{\tabheadrulebelowskip}{0pt} +%%%\definetoks{\tabrulecolor} +%%%\definedimen{\tabruleheight}{0pt} + + +%%%\definecount{\tabcolcount}{0} % Number of columns in table. + +\definetoks{\ztabspacetoks} % Special row for vertical spacing. +%%%\definebox{\zrowstrut} % Strut for table rows. +%%%\definebox{\zparcelltopstrut} % Strut for first line of par cell. +%%%\definebox{\zparcellbotstrut} % Strut for last line of par cell. + + +\def \tabular #1#2{% {type}{template} + \endgraf + \beginblockscope{tabular}% + \global\increment \tabulardepth + \abovepenalty = \breakgood %~default hard + \belowpenalty = \breakbetter %~default hard + \setflag \hastoprule = \false %~default soft + \parhang = 0pt %~default soft + \spannerrulecolor = {black}% %~default soft + \style = {top/head/bottom rules}% %~default soft + \tabrulecolor = {black}% %~default soft + \processdesign{\tabular}{#1}% + \global\increment \tabularnumber + \iffalse{\fi % Analyze the template with + \tabcolcount = 0 % master counter > 0 to hide + \ztabspacetoks = {}% % \set and &. + \zchecktabcols #2&\zmark + \let \set = \span + \iffalse}\fi + \tabularformat + \offinterlineskip + \everycr = {}% + \defineatsigncommand @A{\adjustcolrule}% + \defineatsigncommand @C{\nointerrowskip}% + \defineatsigncommand @N{\nocolrule}% + \defineatsigncommand @S{\skipabovespannerrule}% + \defineatsigncommand @T{\skipbelowspannerrule}% + \tabskip = \leftskip + \halign \if \dimneqlp{\width}{\naturalwidth}to \width \fi \bgroup + #2\tabskip = \rightskip\cr} + +\def \endtabular {% + \egroup % \halign + \if \posp{\prevdepth}% % Does the last line have a strut? + \kern -.5\interrowskip % To eliminate row strut depth. + \prevdepth = \dp\strutbox + \else + \prevdepth = \tabruleheight + \fi + \futurelet\nexttoken \zendtabular} + +\def \zendtabular {% + \endtabularformat + \global\decrement \tabulardepth + \endblockscope{tabular}% + \parnext} + +\def \tabularformat {% + \the\bodyfont + \calculate \tdimena = {\interrowskip,/,2,+,\ht\strutbox}% + \calculate \tdimenb = {\interrowskip,/,2,+,\dp\strutbox}% + \setbox \zrowstrut = \hbox{\vrule width 0pt + height \tdimena depth \tdimenb}% + \setbox \zparcelltopstrut = \hbox{\vrule width 0pt + height \tdimena depth 0pt}% + \setbox \zparcellbotstrut = \hbox{\vrule width 0pt + height 0pt depth \tdimenb}% + \bbskipabove{\abovepenalty}{\aboveskip}% + \fakepar % This fakes an empty paragraph + \hbox{}% % so the \bbskipabove works. + \nobreak + \vskip \if \hastoprule -\tabruleheight \else -\ht\zrowstrut \fi + \alterindentation{\leftindent}{\rightindent}} + +\def \endtabularformat{% + \bbskipbelowblockpar{\nexttoken}{\belowpenalty}{\belowskip}} + +\def \zchecktabcols #1#2#3\zmark{% + \if \notp{\tokeqlp{#1}{\set}}% + \error{misset}{A tabular column template must begin with \string\set}% + \fi + \if \posp{\tabcolcount}% + \ztabspacetoks = \expandafter{\the\ztabspacetoks &}% + \fi + \if \notp{\tokeqlp{#2}{\rulecol}}% + \ztabspacetoks = \expandafter{\the\ztabspacetoks \omit \ztabspacestrut}% + \fi + \increment \tabcolcount + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#4}}\zchecktabcols #4\zmark \fi} + +% Template Facilities +% -------- ---------- + + +% The following macros are used to construct the tabular template. +% They are all used with the \set macro. + +\def \centercol {% + \hfil ##\rowstrut \hfil \tabskip=\columngutter} + +\def \centernumbercol #1{% {template} + \hfil \znumcell{#1}{##}\rowstrut \hfil \tabskip=\columngutter} + +\let \gutter = \tabskip + +\def \customcol #1{% {template} + #1\rowstrut \tabskip=\columngutter} + +\def \customrulecol #1#2{% {color}{width} + \color{#1}% + \vrule width #2 ##% + \endcolor \tabskip=\columngutter} + +\def \emptycol #1{% {width} + ##\rowstrut \hspace{#1}\tabskip=\columngutter} + +\def \leftcol {% + ##\rowstrut \hfil \tabskip=\columngutter} + +\def \leftnumbercol #1{% {template} + \znumcell{#1}{##}\rowstrut \hfil \tabskip=\columngutter} + +\def \parcol #1{% {width} + \vtop{\zpushvcontext + \zinitparcell{#1}{\parhang}% + \unhcopy \zparcelltopstrut ##% + \if \hmodep \unhcopy \zparcellbotstrut \par \fi + \zpopvcontext}% + \tabskip=\columngutter} + +\def \rightcol {% + \hfil ##\rowstrut \tabskip=\columngutter} + +\def \rightnumbercol #1{% {template} + \hfil \znumcell{#1}{##}\rowstrut \tabskip=\columngutter} + +\def \rulecol {% + \color{\the\tabrulecolor}% + \vrule width \rulecolwidth ##% + \endcolor \tabskip=\columngutter} + +% Cell Facilities +% ---- ---------- + + +% The following macros help with tabular entries (cells). + +\def \0{\phantom{0}} + +\def \centercell #1{% {text} + \omit + \hfil #1\rowstrut \hfil} + +\def \centerhead #1{% {heading} + \centercell{\the\colheadfont #1}} + +\def \centernumbercell #1#2{% {template}{text} + \omit + \hfil \znumcell{#1}{#2}\rowstrut \hfil} + +\def \cutinhead #1{% {heading} + \skipabovetabsection + \multispan{\tabcolcount}% + \leftcell{\the\cutinheadfont #1}\cr + \skipbelowtabsection} + +\zremovePlaindef \hideskip +\defineskip{\hideskip}{-1000pt plus 1fill} + +\def \hidewidth {\hskip \hideskip} + +\def \leftcell #1{% {text} + \omit + #1\rowstrut \hfil} + +\def \lefthead #1{% {heading} + \leftcell{\the\colheadfont #1}} + +\def \leftnumbercell #1#2{% {template}{text} + \omit + \znumcell{#1}{#2}\rowstrut \hfil} + +\def \multispan #1{% {columns} + \omit + \tcounta = #1% + \loop \ifnum \tcounta > 1 \zspan \repeat + \let \omit = \relax % In case the next thing is a \leftcell or whatever. + \ignorespaces} + +\def \zspan {\span\omit \decrement \tcounta} + +\def \parcell #1#2{% {width}{text} + \omit + \vtop{\zpushvcontext + \zinitparcell{#1}{\parhang}% + \unhcopy \zparcelltopstrut #2% + \if \hmodep \unhcopy \zparcellbotstrut \par \fi + \zpopvcontext}} + +\def \rightcell #1{% {text} + \omit + \hfil #1\rowstrut} + +\def \righthead #1{% {heading} + \rightcell{\the\colheadfont #1}} + +\def \rightnumbercell #1#2{% {template}{text} + \omit + \hfil \znumcell{#1}{#2}\rowstrut} + +\def \rowstrut {% + \unhcopy \zrowstrut} + +\def \sidehead #1{% {heading} + \leftcell{\the\sideheadfont #1}} + +\def \spannerhead #1#2{% {columns}{heading} + \multispan{#1}% + \centercell{\the\spannerheadfont #2}} + +\def \tabnote #1{% {note-mark} + {\tabnoteformat{#1}}} + +\def \znumcell #1#2{% {template}{text} + \if \emptyargp{#2}% + \relax + \else + \znumcella{#1}{#2}% + \fi} + +\def \znumcella #1#2{% {template}{text} + {\ztoksa = {}\ztoksb = {}% + \setflag \znumpt = \false + \znumcellb #1\zmark + \setbox\zboxa = \hbox{\the\ztoksa}% + \tdimena = \wd\zboxa + \setbox\zboxa = \hbox{\the\ztoksb}% + \tdimenb = \wd\zboxa + \setflag \ztempt = \znumpt + \ztoksa = {}\ztoksb = {}% + \setflag \znumpt = \false + \znumcellb #2\zmark + \if \ztempt % Template had a decimal point. + \if \znumpt + \hbox to \tdimena{\hss \the\ztoksa}% + \the\decimalpoint + \hbox to \tdimenb{\the\ztoksb \hss}% + \else + \setbox\zboxa = \hbox{\the\decimalpoint}% + \hbox to \tdimena{\hss \the\ztoksa}% + \kern \wd\zboxa \kern \tdimenb + \fi + \else % Template had no decimal point. + \if \znumpt + \error{celldecpt}{Tabular template did not specify a decimal point}% + \else + \hbox to \tdimena{\hss \the\ztoksa}% + \fi + \fi}} + +\def \znumcellb #1#2\zmark{% t1 trest \zmark + \if \codeeqlp{\noexpand#1}{\the\decimalpoint}% + \setflag \znumpt = \true + \else + \if \znumpt + \ztoksb = \expandafter{\the\ztoksb #1}% + \else + \ztoksa = \expandafter{\the\ztoksa #1}% + \fi + \fi + \if \emptyargp{#2}% + \let \znext = \relax + \else + \def \znext {\znumcellb #2\zmark}% + \fi + \znext} + +% Rule Facilities +% ---- ---------- + + +\def \adjustcolrule #1,#2,#3;{% width,height,depth; + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#1}}width #1pt\fi + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#2}}height #2pt\fi + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#3}}depth #3pt\fi\relax} + +\def \custompartialtabrule #1#2#3{% {color}{thickness}{columns} + \multispan{#3}% + \color{#1}% + \ruleleaders{\hrule height #2 depth 0pt}% + \endcolor} + +\def \customspannerrule #1#2#3{% {color}{thickness}{columns} + \multispan{#3}% + \rowstrut + \color{#1}% + \ruleleaders{\hrule height #2 depth 0pt}% + \endcolor} + +\def \customtabrule #1#2{% {color}{thickness} + \multispan{\tabcolcount}% + \color{#1}% + \ruleleaders{\hrule height #2 depth 0pt}% + \endcolor\cr} + +\def \nocolrule {% + width 0pt } + +\def \partialtabrule #1{% {columns} + \custompartialtabrule{\the\tabrulecolor}{\tabruleheight}{#1}} + +\def \spannerrule #1{% {columns} + \customspannerrule{\the\spannerrulecolor}{\spannerruleheight}{#1}} + +\def \tabbottomrule {% + \tabbbskipaboverule{\tabbottomruleaboveskip}% + \tabrule} + +\def \tabheadrule {% + \tabbbskipaboverule{\colheadbelowskip}% + \tabrule + \tabbbskipbelowrule{\tabheadrulebelowskip}} + +\def \tabrule {% + \customtabrule{\the\tabrulecolor}{\tabruleheight}} + +\def \tabtoprule {% + \tabrule + \tabbbskipbelowrule{\colheadaboveskip}} + +% Spacing Facilities +% ------- ---------- + + +\definedimen{\zskipamount}{0pt} + + +\def \nointerrowskip {% + \tabvspace{-\interrowskip}} + +\def \skipabovecolhead {% + \tabbbskip{\colheadaboveskip}} + +\def \skipbelowcolhead {% + \tabbbskip{\colheadbelowskip}} + +\def \skipabovespannerrule {% + \tabbbskip{\spannerruleaboveskip}} + +\def \skipbelowspannerrule {% + \tabbbskip{\spannerrulebelowskip}} + +\def \skipabovetabsection {% + \tabbbskip{\sectionheadaboveskip}} + +\def \skipbelowtabsection {% + \tabbbskip{\sectionheadbelowskip}} + +\def \tabbbskip #1{% + \noalign{% + \calculate \zskipamount = {#1,-,\dp\zrowstrut,-,\ht\zrowstrut}% + \ztabvspace{\zskipamount}}% + \the\ztabspacetoks\cr} + +\def \tabbbskipaboverule #1{% + \noalign{% + \calculate \zskipamount = {#1,-,\dp\zrowstrut,-,\tabruleheight}% + \ztabvspace{\zskipamount}}% + \the\ztabspacetoks\cr} + +\def \tabbbskipbelowrule #1{% + \noalign{% + \calculate \zskipamount = {#1,-,\ht\zrowstrut,-,\tabruleheight}% + \ztabvspace{\zskipamount}}% + \the\ztabspacetoks\cr} + +\def \tabvspace #1{% + \noalign{\ztabvspace{#1}}% + \the\ztabspacetoks\cr} + +\def \ztabvspace #1{% + \if \dimnegp{#1}% + \vskip #1\relax + \global\zskipamount = 0pt + \else + \global\zskipamount = #1% + \fi} + +\def \ztabspacestrut {% + \vrule width 0pt height 0pt depth \zskipamount\relax} + +% Inter-Row Facilities +% --------- ---------- + + +\def \adjusttab #1{% + \if \notp{\vmodep}% + \error{badrowcmd}{The \string\adjusttab command cannot be used + in a table row}% + \fi + \noalign{#1}} + + +% Utilities +% --------- + + +\let \completerow = \cr + +\def \ialign {\everycr = {}\tabskip = 0pt \halign} + +\def \oalign #1{% {row...} + \ensurepar + \vtop{\baselineskip = 0pt + \lineskip = .25ex + \ialign{##\cr #1\crcr}}} + +\def \ooalign {% + \lineskiplimit = -\maxdimen + \oalign} + +\def \ozalign {% + \lineskiplimit = 0pt\relax + \oalign} + +\def \zinitparcell #1#2{% {width}{hang} + \baselineskip = \normalbaselineskip + \lineskiplimit = 0pt \lineskip = 0pt + \setindentation{0pt}{0pt}% + \settextwidth{#1}% + \setparrag{\parrag}% + \leftskip = #2 + \parindent = -#2 + \parfillskip = \normalparfillskip} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztabularv3.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztabularv3.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c7035daa73c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztabularv3.tex @@ -0,0 +1,771 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Tabular Facilities, version 3 +% +% Synopsis: This module contains all the facilities for producing +% tabular material. This is the third major version. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 4 June 2004 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Tabular Block +% ------- ----- + + +\defineblock{\tabular}{\endtabular}{\false}{} + +%~block tabular Type +% \abovepenalty = integer % Penalty above text. +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above text. +% \belowpenalty = integer % Penalty below text. +% \belowskip = glue % Space b/b below text. +% \bodyfont = {font} % Body font. +% \columngutter = glue % Width of column gutter. +% \colheadbelowskip = dimen % Space b/b below column heads. +% \colheadcolor = {color} % Color of Column heads. +% \colheadfont = {font} % Column head font. +% \interrowskip = dimen % Extra space between rows. +% \leftindent = glue % Left indentation. +% \parhang = dimen % Paragraph column hang. +% \parrag = dimen % Paragraph raggedness. +% \parskip = skip % Paragraph skip. +% \rightindent = glue % Right indentation. +% \rulecolcolor = {color} % Color of table rules. +% \rulecolwidth = dimen % Width of column rules. +% \sideheadaboveskip = dimen % Space b/b above side heads. +% \sideheadbelowskip = dimen % Space b/b below side heads. +% \sideheadcolor = {color} % Color of side heads. +% \sideheadfont = {font} % Side head font. +% \spannerheadcolor = {color} % Color of spanner heads. +% \spannerheadfont = {font} % Spanner head font. +% \spannerruleaboveskip = dimen % Space b/b above spanner rules. +% \spannerrulebelowskip = dimen % Space b/b below spanner rules. +% \spannerrulecolor = {color} % Color of spanner rules. +% \spannerruleheight = dimen % Spanner rule thickness. +% \style = {...} % Style description. +% \tabbottomruleaboveskip = dimen % Space b/b above bottom rules. +% \tabheadrulebelowskip = dimen % Space b/b below head rules. +% \def \tabnoteformat ##1{...} % Format of table note references. +% \tabrulecolor = {color} % Color of table rules. +% \tabruleheight = dimen % Table rule thickness. +% \tabtoprulebelowskip = dimen % Space b/b below top rules. +% \width = dimen % Width of tabular material. +%~end + +\defineskip{\colheadbelowskip}{0pt} +\definetoks{\colheadcolor} +\definetoks{\colheadfont} +\definetoks{\rulecolcolor} +\definedimen{\rulecolwidth}{0pt} +\definedimen{\sideheadaboveskip}{0pt} +\definedimen{\sideheadbelowskip}{0pt} +\definetoks{\sideheadcolor} +\definetoks{\sideheadfont} +\definetoks{\spannerheadcolor} +\definetoks{\spannerheadfont} +\definedimen{\spannerruleaboveskip}{0pt} +\definedimen{\spannerrulebelowskip}{0pt} +\definetoks{\spannerrulecolor} +\definedimen{\spannerruleheight}{0pt} +\definedimen{\tabbottomruleaboveskip}{0pt} +\definedimen{\tabheadrulebelowskip}{0pt} +\definetoks{\tabrulecolor} +\definedimen{\tabruleheight}{0pt} +\definedimen{\tabtoprulebelowskip}{0pt} + + +\def \tabular #1#2{% {type}{template} + \endgraf + \beginblockscope{tabular}% + \global\increment \tabulardepth + \abovepenalty = \breakgood %~default hard + \belowpenalty = \breakbetter %~default hard + \processdesign{\tabular}{#1}% + \global\increment \tabularnumber + \zsetuptabular{#2}% + \tabularformat + \defineatsigncommand @A{\adjustcolrule}% + \defineatsigncommand @C{\closeuprows}% + \defineatsigncommand @N{\nocolrule}% + \defineatsigncommand @S{\skipabovespannerrule}% + \defineatsigncommand @T{\skipbelowspannerrule}% + \offinterlineskip + \nobreak + \tabskip=\leftskip + \halign \if \dimneqlp{\width}{\naturalwidth}to \width \fi \bgroup + \span\the\zpreamble \tabskip=\rightskip \cr} + +\def \endtabular {% + \crcr + \egroup % \halign + \if \posp{\prevdepth}% % Does the last line have a strut? + \kern -.5\interrowskip % Yes, eliminate extra depth from + \prevdepth = \dp\strutbox % \interrowskip. + \else + \prevdepth = \tabruleheight % No, compensate for bottom rule. + \fi + \futurelet\nexttoken \zendtabular} + +\def \zendtabular {% + \endtabularformat + \global\decrement \tabulardepth + \endblockscope{tabular}% + \parnext} + +\def \tabularformat {% + \bbskipabove{\abovepenalty}{\aboveskip}% + \fakepar % This empty paragraph allows + \hbox{}% % the \bbskipabove to work. + \kern + \if \dimzerop{\tabtoprulebelowskip}-\ht\zrowstrut \else -\tabruleheight \fi + \alterindentation{\leftindent}{\rightindent}} + +\def \endtabularformat{% + \bbskipbelowblockpar{\nexttoken}{\belowpenalty}{\belowskip}} + +\def \adjustcolumngutter #1{% {amount} %^tabular + \with{\advance\columngutter by #1}} + +\def \adjustinterrowskip #1{% {amount} %^tabular + \with{\advance\interrowskip by #1}} + +% Set Up Tabular +% --- -- ------- + + +\definecount{\tabcolcount}{0} % Number of columns in table. +\definetoks{\zpreamble} % Preamble for \halign. +\definetoks{\ztabspacerow} % Special row for vertical spacing. +\definebox{\zrowstrut} % Strut for table rows. +\definebox{\zparcelltopstrut} % Strut for first line of par cell. +\definebox{\zparcellbotstrut} % Strut for last line of par cell. + +\def \zsetuptabular #1{% {template} + \zanaltemplate{#1}% + \the\bodyfont + \calculate \tdimena = {\interrowskip,/,2,+,\ht\strutbox}% + \calculate \tdimenb = {\interrowskip,/,2,+,\dp\strutbox}% + \setbox \zrowstrut = \hbox{\vrule width 0pt + height \tdimena depth \tdimenb}% + \setbox \zparcelltopstrut = \hbox{\vrule width 0pt + height \tdimena depth 0pt}% + \setbox \zparcellbotstrut = \hbox{\vrule width 0pt + height 0pt depth \tdimenb}% + \global\zprevrowclass = \zrcpream + \global\zcurrowclass = \zrcpream + \gdef \zcolrulegate {}% + \global\setflag \zcolrulesenabled = \false + \everycr = {\noalign{\ztabcr}}} + +% Analyze Template +% ------- -------- + + +\defineskip{\zpendgutter}{0pt} + + +\def \zanaltemplate #1{% {template} + \setbox\zboxa = \hbox{% + \defineatsigncommand @!{\zcustomrulecol}% + \defineatsigncommand @>{\zgutterspec}% + \defineatsigncommand @c{\zcentercol}% + \defineatsigncommand @C{\zcenternumbercol}% + \defineatsigncommand @e{\zemptycol}% + \defineatsigncommand @l{\zleftcol}% + \defineatsigncommand @L{\zleftnumbercol}% + \defineatsigncommand @p{\zparcol}% + \defineatsigncommand @r{\zrightcol}% + \defineatsigncommand @R{\zrightnumbercol}% + \defineatsigncommand @s{\zspecialcol}% + \defineatsigncommand @|{\zrulecol}% + \global\tabcolcount = 0 + \global\zpreamble = {}% + \global\ztabspacerow = {}% + #1}% + \tabcolcount = \tabcolcount + \zpreamble = \zpreamble + \ztabspacerow = \ztabspacerow} + +\def \zcentercol {% + \zstartcol{\false}% + \zappendpreamble{\hfil ##\rowstrut \hfil}} + +\def \zcenternumbercol #1{% + \zstartcol{\false}% + \zmeasuredanumber #1..\zmark + \edef \znext {% + \noexpand\zappendpreamble{% + \hfil \noexpand\zsetnumbercell{\the\tdimena}{\the\tdimenb}{####}\hfil}}% + \znext} + +\def \zcustomrulecol #1#2{% {color}{width} + \if \dimeqlp{\zpendgutter}{\mindimen}\zpendgutter = .5\columngutter \fi + \zstartcol{\true}% + \zappendpreamble{\zsetcolrule{#1}{#2}{##}}% + \zpendgutter = .5\columngutter} + +\def \zemptycol #1{% {width} + \zstartcol{\false}% + \zappendpreamble{##\rowstrut \hspace{#1}}} + +\def \zgutterspec #1{% {width} + \zparsegutterspec #1*\zmark} + +\def \zparsegutterspec #1*#2\zmark{% + \zpendgutter = #1\relax + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#2}}% + \advance \zpendgutter by \columngutter + \advance \zpendgutter by -1\columngutter + \fi} + +\def \zleftcol {% + \zstartcol{\false}% + \zappendpreamble{##\rowstrut \hfil}} + +\def \zleftnumbercol #1{% + \zstartcol{\false}% + \zmeasuredanumber #1..\zmark + \edef \znext {% + \noexpand\zappendpreamble{% + \noexpand\zsetnumbercell{\the\tdimena}{\the\tdimenb}{####}\hfil}}% + \znext} + +\def \zparcol #1{% {width} + \zstartcol{\false}% + \zappendpreamble{\zsetparcol{#1}{##}}} + +\def \zrightcol {% + \zstartcol{\false}% + \zappendpreamble{\hfil ##\rowstrut}} + +\def \zrightnumbercol #1{% + \zstartcol{\false}% + \zmeasuredanumber #1..\zmark + \edef \znext {% + \noexpand\zappendpreamble{% + \hfil \noexpand\zsetnumbercell{\the\tdimena}{\the\tdimenb}{####}}}% + \znext} + +\def \zrulecol {% + \if \dimeqlp{\zpendgutter}{\mindimen}\zpendgutter = .5\columngutter\relax \fi + \zstartcol{\true}% + \zappendpreamble{\zsetcolrule{}{}{##}}% + \zpendgutter = .5\columngutter\relax} + +\def \zspecialcol #1{% {template} + \zstartcol{\false}% + \zappendpreamble{#1\rowstrut}} + +\def \zstartcol #1{% {rule-column?} + \if \posp{\tabcolcount}% + \if \dimeqlp{\zpendgutter}{\mindimen}\zpendgutter = \columngutter \fi + \edef \znext {\noexpand\zappendpreamble{\tabskip=\the\zpendgutter &}}% + \znext + \global\ztabspacerow = \expandafter{\the\ztabspacerow &}% + \fi + \global\increment \tabcolcount + \if \notp{#1}% + \global\ztabspacerow = \expandafter{\the\ztabspacerow + \omit \copy \ztabvspacebox}% + \fi + \zpendgutter = \mindimen} + +\def \zappendpreamble #1{% {preamble stuff} + \global\zpreamble = \expandafter{\the\zpreamble #1}} + +% Preamble Helpers +% -------- ------- + + +\def \zmeasuredanumber #1.#2.#3\zmark{% + \measuretextwidth{\tdimena}{#1}% + \measuretextwidth{\tdimenb}{.#2}% + \if \andp{\emptyargp{#2}}{\emptyargp{#3}}\tdimenb = 0pt\fi} + +\def \zsetcolrule #1#2#3{% {color}{width}{adjustment} + \if \emptyargp{#1}\color{\the\tabrulecolor}\else \color{#1}\fi + \vrule width \if \emptyargp{#2}\rulecolwidth \else #2\fi + \zcolrulegate #3% + \endcolor} + +\def \zsetnumbercell #1#2#3{% {pre-width}{post-width}{text} + \gdef \zcellstyle {}% + \zsplitdanumber #3..\zmark + \if \dimzerop{#2}% + \if \emptytoksp{\ztoksb}% + \hbox to #1{\hfil \the\ztoksa}% + \else + \error{celldecpt}{Template picture did not include a decimal point}% + \fi + \else + \hbox to #1{\hfil \the\ztoksa}% + \hbox to #2{\zcellstyle \the\ztoksb \hfil}% + \fi + \rowstrut} + +\long\def \zsetparcol #1#2{% {width}{text} + \vtop{% + \zpushvcontext + \baselineskip = \normalbaselineskip + \lineskiplimit = 0pt \lineskip = 0pt +%%% \setindentation{0pt}{0pt}% + \settextwidth{#1}% + \setparrag{\parrag}% + \leftskip = \parhang + \parindent = -\parhang + \parfillskip = \normalparfillskip + \unhcopy \zparcelltopstrut + #2% + \if \hmodep \unhcopy \zparcellbotstrut \par \fi + \zpopvcontext}} + +\def \zsplitdanumber #1.#2.#3\zmark{% + \ztoksa = {#1}% + \ztoksb = {.#2}% + \if \andp{\emptyargp{#2}}{\emptyargp{#3}}\ztoksb = {}\fi} + +% Row Class +% --- ----- + + +\definecount{\zprevrowclass}{0} +\definecount{\zcurrowclass}{0} + +\chardef \zrcpream = 0 +\chardef \zrcdata = 1 +\chardef \zrchead = 2 +\chardef \zrcrule = 3 +\chardef \zrcvspace = 4 +\chardef \zrcbbskip = 5 + +\def \zsetrowclass #1{% + \if \gtrp{#1}{\zcurrowclass}\global\zcurrowclass = #1\relax \fi} + +\def \ztabcr {% + \global\zprevrowclass = \zcurrowclass + \global\zcurrowclass = \zrcdata + \global\setflag \zcolrulesenabled = \false} + +% Cell Facilities +% ---- ---------- + + +%~ This command produces a phantom zero, which is useful for aligning +%~ numbers when decimal-aligned columns are not being used. + +\def \0{\phantom{0}} %^tabular + +\zremovePlaindef \hideskip +\defineskip{\hideskip}{-1000pt plus 1fill} + +%~ This command "hides" the width of the cell from the column width calculation +%~ process. The cell does not participate in determining the widest cell of +%~ the column. If the cell is wider than the calculated column width, it will +%~ stick into the left or right column gutter, depending on the position of the +%~ |\hidewidth| command. + +\def \hidewidth {\hskip \hideskip} %^tabular + +%~ This command discards the templates for the specified number of columns and +%~ creates one cell that spans them all. The content of the cell is specified +%~ immediately following the command. This spanning cell has no template, so +%~ you must include all the required commands in the cell text. This is usually done +%~ using one of the cell override commands such as |\leftcell|. + +\def \multispan #1{% {columns} %^tabular + \omit + \tcounta = #1% + \loop \ifnum \tcounta > 1 \zspan \repeat + \let \omit = \relax % In case the next thing is a \leftcell or whatever. + \ignorespaces} + +\def \zspan {\span\omit \decrement \tcounta} + +\def \rowstrut {% + \unhcopy \zrowstrut} + +\def \zcellstyle {} + +\def \setcellstyle #1{% + #1% + \gdef \zcellstyle {#1}% + \ignorespaces} + +%~ This command sets a table note reference, usually a lowercase +%~ letter. The format of the reference is determined by the design. + +\def \tabnote #1{% {note-mark} %^tabular + {\tabnoteformat{#1}}} + +% Cell Overrides +% ---- --------- + + +%~ This command overrides the template for the column and sets +%~ a centered cell. It must appear immediately after the +%~ ampersand (|&&|) that begins the cell. + +\def \centercell #1{% {text} %^tabular + \omit + \hfil #1\rowstrut \hfil} + +%~ This command overrides the template for the column and sets +%~ a flush left cell. It must appear immediately after the +%~ ampersand (|&&|) that begins the cell. + +\def \leftcell #1{% {text} %^tabular + \omit + #1\rowstrut \hfil} + +%~ This command overrides the template for the column and sets +%~ a paragraph cell. It must appear immediately after the +%~ ampersand (|&&|) that begins the cell. + +\def \parcell #1#2{% {width}{text} %^tabular + \omit + \zsetparcol{#1}{#2}} + +%~ This command overrides the template for the column and sets +%~ a flush right cell. It must appear immediately after the +%~ ampersand (|&&|) that begins the cell. + +\def \rightcell #1{% {text} %^tabular + \omit + \hfil #1\rowstrut} + +% Column Heads +% ------ ----- + + +%~ This column head command produces a centered head. + +\def \centerhead #1{% {heading} %^tabular + \centercell{% + \the\colheadfont \colortext{\the\colheadcolor}{#1}% + \zchkadjheads}} + +%~ This column head command produces a flush left head. + +\def \lefthead #1{% {heading} %^tabular + \leftcell{% + \the\colheadfont \colortext{\the\colheadcolor}{#1}% + \zchkadjheads}} + +%~ This column head command produces a flush right head. + +\def \righthead #1{% {heading} %^tabular + \rightcell{% + \the\colheadfont \colortext{\the\colheadcolor}{#1}% + \zchkadjheads}} + +%~ This command produces a spanner head that spans the specified +%~ number of columns. + +\def \spannerhead #1#2{% {columns}{heading} %^tabular + \multispan{#1}% + \centercell{\the\spannerheadfont \colortext{\the\spannerheadcolor}{#2}}% + \zsetrowclass{\zrchead}} + +\def \zchkadjheads {% + \if \andp{\eqlp{\zprevrowclass}{\zrchead}}{\posp{\interrowskip}}% + \warning{adjheads}{Two adjacent rows of heads need to be closed up}% + \global\zprevrowclass = \zrcdata + \fi + \zsetrowclass{\zrchead}} + +% Side Heads +% ---- ----- + +%~ This command is a shorthand for producing a cut-in head that spans the +%~ entire width of the table. It is equivalent to: +%~ +%~ | \skipabovesidehead +%~ | \sidehead{*all-columns*}{*heading*}\cr +%~ | \skipbelowsidehead + +\def \cutinhead #1{% {heading} %^tabular + \skipabovesidehead + \sidehead{\tabcolcount}{#1}\cr + \skipbelowsidehead} + +%~ This command produces a side head that spans the specified number of +%~ columns. It is similar to |\spannerhead|. It is almost always the case that a +%~ |\sidehead| row should be preceded by a |\skipabovesidehead| and followed by a +%~ |\skipbelowsidehead|. + +\def \sidehead #1#2{% {columns}{heading} %^tabular + \multispan{#1}% + \leftcell{\the\sideheadfont \colortext{\the\sideheadcolor}{#2}}} + +% Vertical Spacing +% -------- ------- + + +%~ This command eliminates the inter-row space between two rows. It must be +%~ used between two consective rows of table heads. Shorthand: |@C|. + +\def \closeuprows {% %^tabular + \tabvspace{-\interrowskip}} + +%~ This command adds extra space between column heads and the first data row. +%~ It must be used in tables that do not have head rules. + +\def \skipbelowcolhead {% %^tabular + \zchkbelowhead + \tabbbskip{\colheadbelowskip}} + +%~ This command produces the appropriate vertical space above +%~ a spanner rule. Shorthand: |@S|. See also |\skipbelowspannerrule|. + +\def \skipabovespannerrule {% %^tabular + \tabbbskip{\spannerruleaboveskip}} + +%~ This command produces the appropriate vertical space below +%~ a spanner rule. Shorthand: |@T|. See also |\skipabovespannerrule|. + +\def \skipbelowspannerrule {% %^tabular + \tabbbskip{\spannerrulebelowskip}} + +%~ This command produces the appropriate vertical space above +%~ a side head. See also |\skipbelowsidehead|. + +\def \skipabovesidehead {% %^tabular + \tabbbskip{\sideheadaboveskip}} + +%~ This command produces the appropriate vertical space below +%~ a side head. See also |\skiabovewsidehead|. + +\def \skipbelowsidehead {% %^tabular + \tabbbskip{\sideheadbelowskip}} + +%~ This command produces extra vertical space so that the base-to-base space +%~ between the preceding and following rows is as specified. + +\def \tabbbskip #1{% {amount} %^tabular + \ztabbbskip{#1,-,\dp\zrowstrut,-,\ht\zrowstrut}% + \the\ztabspacerow\cr} + +%~ This command produces extra vertical space between a row and a rule. +%~ It must be used instead of |\tabbbskip| to obtain the desired results when +%~ spacing above horizontal rules. See also |\tabbbskipbelowrule|. + +\def \tabbbskipaboverule #1{% {amount} %^tabular + \noalign{\nobreak}% + \ztabbbskip{#1,-,\dp\zrowstrut,-,\tabruleheight}% + \noalign{\if \zcolrulesenabled \zsuppresscolrules \fi}% + \the\ztabspacerow \if \zcolrulesenabled \zallowcolrules \fi\cr + \noalign{\nobreak}} + +%~ This command produces extra vertical space between a rule and a row. +%~ It must be used instead of |\tabbbskip| to obtain the desired results when +%~ spacing below horizontal rules. See also |\tabbbskipaboverule|. + +\def \tabbbskipbelowrule #1{% {amount} %^tabular + \ztabbbskip{#1,-,\ht\zrowstrut}% + \the\ztabspacerow\cr} + +%~ This command produces the specified amount of extra vertical space +%~ between two rows of the table. + +\def \tabvspace #1{% {amount} %^tabular + \noalign{% + \zsetrowclass{\zrcvspace}% + \zsetvspacebox{#1}}% + \the\ztabspacerow\cr} + +\def \ztabbbskip #1{% + \noalign{% + \zsetrowclass{\zrcbbskip}% + \if \eqlp{\zprevrowclass}{\zrcbbskip}% + \tdimena = 0pt\relax + \else + \calculate \tdimena = {#1}% + \fi + \zsetvspacebox{\tdimena}}} + +\definebox{\ztabvspacebox} +\setbox \ztabvspacebox = \hbox{}% + +\def \zsetvspacebox #1{% + \if \dimnegp{#1}% + \vskip #1\relax + \dp\ztabvspacebox = 0pt + \else + \dp\ztabvspacebox = #1\relax + \fi} + +\def \zchkbelowhead {% + \noalign{% + \if \neqlp{\zprevrowclass}{\zrchead}% + \warning{needheads}{The previous row should be a row of column heads}% + \fi}} + +% Horizontal Rules +% ---------- ----- + + +%~ This command produces a custom version of the partial table rule +%~ (|\partialtabrule|). The color and thickness of the rules is specified +%~ explicitly. + +\def \custompartialtabrule #1#2#3{% {color}{thickness}{columns} %^tabular + \multispan{#3}% + \color{#1}% + \ruleleaders{\hrule height #2 depth 0pt}% + \endcolor} + +%~ This command produces a custom version of the table spanner rule +%~ (|\spannerrule|). The color and thickness of the rules is specified +%~ explicitly. + +\def \customspannerrule #1#2#3{% {color}{thickness}{columns} %^tabular + \multispan{#3}% + \rowstrut + \color{#1}% + \ruleleaders{\hrule height #2 depth 0pt}% + \endcolor} + +%~ This command produces a custom version of the table rule +%~ (|\tabrule|). The color and thickness of the rules is specified +%~ explicitly. + +\def \customtabrule #1#2{% {color}{thickness} %^tabular + \multispan{\tabcolcount}% + \color{#1}% + \ruleleaders{\hrule height #2 depth 0pt}% + \endcolor\cr} + +%~ This command produces a table rule across the specified number of columns. +%~ It is similar to |\spannerrule| but sets a rule of the same thickness +%~ as |\tabrule|. + +\def \partialtabrule #1{% {columns} %^tabular + \custompartialtabrule{\the\tabrulecolor}{\tabruleheight}{#1}} + +%~ This command produces a spanner rule across the specified number of columns. +%~ The color and thickness of the rule are determined by the design. A row with +%~ spanner rules is usually preceded and followed by |\skipabovespannerrule| and +%~ |\skipbelowspannerrule|. + +\def \spannerrule #1{% {columns} %^tabular + \customspannerrule{\the\spannerrulecolor}{\spannerruleheight}{#1}} + +%~ This command produces the standard bottom rule in a table. Which rules are +%~ required is specified in the |\style| parameter of the |\tabular| design. +%~ This command is not followed by |\cr|. + +\def \tabbottomrule {% %^tabular + \tabbbskipaboverule{\tabbottomruleaboveskip}% + \tabrule} + +%~ This command produces the standard head rule in a table. Which rules are +%~ required is specified in the |\style| parameter of the |\tabular| design. +%~ This command is not followed by |\cr|. + +\def \tabheadrule {% %^tabular + \zchkbelowhead + \tabbbskipaboverule{\colheadbelowskip}% + \tabrule + \tabbbskipbelowrule{\tabheadrulebelowskip}} + +%~ This command produces a table rule across the entire width of the table. The +%~ color and thickness of the rule are determined by the design. This command +%~ is not followed by |\cr|. + +\def \tabrule {% %^tabular + \customtabrule{\the\tabrulecolor}{\tabruleheight}} + +%~ This command produces the standard top rule in a table. Which rules are +%~ required is specified in the |\style| parameter of the |\tabular| design. +%~ This command is not followed by |\cr|. + +\def \tabtoprule {% %^tabular + \tabrule + \noalign{\nobreak}% + \tabbbskipbelowrule{\tabtoprulebelowskip}} + +% Vertical Rules +% -------- ----- + + +%~ This command is used in the normally empty cell corresponding to a vertical +%~ rule column. It adjusts the width, height, and/or depth of the rule in that +%~ cell. To adjust one of those dimensions, specify the new dimension in +%~ points, without the usual |pt|, in the appropriate argument position. +%~ Omitted dimensions will have their standard values. You must specify both +%~ commas and the semicolon. Shorthand: |@A*width*,*height*,*depth*;| + +\def \adjustcolrule #1,#2,#3;{% width,height,depth; %^tabular + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#1}}width #1pt\fi + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#2}}height #2pt\fi + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#3}}depth #3pt\fi\relax} + +%~ This command can be used between rows of a table to allow all vertical +%~ rules. This is typically done after the column head portion of a table. If +%~ |\allowcolrules| appears just before |\tabheadrule|, it is deferred until +%~ after the vertical space above the horizontal rule, so that the vertical +%~ rules recommence precisely at the horizontal rule. See also +%~ |\suppresscolrules|. + +\def \allowcolrules {% %^tabular + \noalign{% + \zallowcolrules + \global\setflag \zcolrulesenabled = \true}} + +\def \zallowcolrules {% + \gdef \zcolrulegate {}} + +%~ This command can be used between rows of a table to suppress all vertical +%~ rules. This is typically done for the column head portion of a table. +%~ See also |\allowcolrules|. + +\def \suppresscolrules {% %^tabular + \noalign{\zsuppresscolrules}} + +\def \zsuppresscolrules {% + \gdef \zcolrulegate {\nocolrule}} + +%~ This command is used in the normally empty cell corresponding to a vertical +%~ rule column. It suppresses the vertical rule in that cell. Shorthand: |@N|. + +\def \nocolrule {% %^tabular + width 0pt } + +% Inter-Row Facilities +% --------- ---------- + + +%~ This command can be used between rows of a table to insert vertical material +%~ that is independent of the rows themselves. It is rarely needed. + +\def \adjusttabular #1{% {commands} %^tabular + \noalign{#1}} + +\let \adjusttab = \adjusttabular + +% Low-Level Alignment Facilities +% --------- --------- ---------- + + +\let \completerow = \cr + +\def \ialign {\everycr = {}\tabskip=0pt \halign} + +\def \oalign #1{% {row...} + \ensurepar + \vtop{\baselineskip = 0pt + \lineskip = .25ex + \ialign{##\cr #1\crcr}}} + +\def \ooalign {% + \lineskiplimit = -\maxdimen + \oalign} + +\def \ozalign {% + \lineskiplimit = 0pt\relax + \oalign} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztag.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztag.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..32154dd8c4d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztag.tex @@ -0,0 +1,269 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Tag Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This module contains the definitions necessary to implement +% tags and references to them. +% +% Note: Tag names beginning with `zX:' are reserved for ZzTeX: +% +% zA: design alternative choices (obsolete) +% zB: bibliographic tags +% zE: frame page numbers +% zF: float page numbers +% zH: help text +% zM: margin note page numbers +% zP: proof note page numbers +% zR: margin rule page numbers +% zS: snapshot information +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 19 September 1989 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Tag Definition +% --- ---------- + + +\definetoks{\taginfonumber} +\taginfonumber = {???} +\definetoks{\taginfotitle} +\taginfotitle = {???} +\definecount{\zmistags}{0} + + +% The number is fully expanded, while the title is not expanded. +% Then we make sure they are never expanded again. + +\def \settaginfo #1#2{% {number}{title} + \edef \znext {\taginfonumber = {#1}}% + \znext + \taginfotitle = {#2}} + +\def \tag #1{% {name} + \if \emptytoksp{\taginfonumber}% + \warning{notaginfo}{ZzTeX reference: Misplaced tag '#1'}% + \global\increment \zmistags + \fi + \zbeginhidewrite + \edef \znext {\noexpand\xref{tag}{\noexpand\folio}% + {\the\taginfonumber}% + {\the\taginfotitle} + {#1}}% + \znext + \if \PDFhyperlinks \PDFmark{T:#1}\fi + \zendhidewrite} + +\def \tagwith #1#2{% {name}{reference-text} + \zbeginhidewrite + \edef \znext {\noexpand\xref{tag}{\noexpand\folio}% + {#2}% + {???notitle???} + {#1}}% + \znext + \if \PDFhyperlinks \PDFmark{T:#1}\fi + \zendhidewrite} + +% This is a special command when you just want to know the page number. + +\def \tagpageonly #1{% {name} + \zbeginhidewrite + \edef \znext {\noexpand\xref{tag}{\noexpand\folio}% + {???nonumber???}% + {???notitle???} + {#1}}% + \znext + \if \PDFhyperlinks \PDFmark{T:#1}\fi + \zendhidewrite} + +\def \uniquetag #1#2{% {prefix}{counter} + #1:\the\divisionname-#2} + +% Subtag Definition +% ------ ---------- + + +\definecount{\subtagnumber}{0} + + +\def \setsubtagnumber #1{% {integer} + \subtagnumber = #1\relax} + +\def \subtag #1#2{% {name}{subnumber} + \zparsesubnumber #2???\zmark + \tagwith{#1}{\zsubtagtext}} + +\def \zparsesubnumber #1?#2?#3?#4\zmark{% + \if \emptyargp{#2}% + \edef \zsubtagtext {\the\taginfonumber #1}% + \else + \increment \subtagnumber + \edef \zsubtagtext {\the\taginfonumber #1#2\subtagnumber#3}% + \fi} + +% Tag Reference +% --- --------- + + +% This counter keeps track of the number of undefined tag references. + +\definecount{\zuntagrefs}{0} + + +\def \refnumber #1{% {tag-name} + \zbeginrefhilight + \if \definedp{\=#1}% + \zreftext{#1}{\expandafterthrice\ztagdata \name{\=#1}\zmark1}% + \else + \zuntag{#1}{???}% + \fi + \zendrefhilight} + +\let \ref = \refnumber % Because it's so common. + +\def \refpage #1{% {tag-name} + \zbeginrefhilight + \if \definedp{\=#1}% + \zreftext{#1}{\expandafterthrice\ztagdata \name{\=#1}\zmark0}% + \else + \zuntag{#1}{???}% + \fi + \zendrefhilight} + +\def \reftitle #1{% {tag-name} + \zbeginrefhilight + \if \notp{\allowreftitle}% + \warning{noreftitle}{Use of \string\reftitle is not allowed}% + ???not allowed???% + \else \if \definedp{\=#1}% + {\zadjtitle = \zadjtitlenone + \zreftext{#1}{\expandafterthrice\ztagdata \name{\=#1}\zmark2}}% + \else + \zuntag{#1}{???title???}% + \fi\fi + \zendrefhilight} + +\def \zbeginrefhilight {% + \if \DVIWindoinuse + \colorspecial{ifview color push rgb 1 0 .25}% % Color the reference. + \fi} + +\def \zendrefhilight {% + \if \DVIWindoinuse + \colorspecial{ifview color pop}% % Done with color. + \fi} + +\def \zreftext #1#2{% {tag}{text} + \if \PDFhyperlinks + \tagbutton{#1}{#2}% + \else + #2% + \fi} + +\def \ztagdata #1\zmark#2\zmark#3\zmark#4{% + \ifcase #4 #1\or #2\or #3\fi} % Space after #4 is critical! + +\def \zuntag #1#2{% {tag}{what-to-set} + \writelog{ZzTeX reference: Undefined tag `#1'.}% + \zxwriteinfo{\false}{undef-tag}{#1}{}% + \global\increment \zuntagrefs + #2} + +% Determining the Page +% ----------- --- ---- + + +% This command allows us to use the tag facility to determine which page +% a particular element is on, in case the design of the element depends +% on whether it is on a recto or verso. + +\def \whichpage #1#2{% {\count-reg}{tag-name} + \def \zreg {#1}% + \if \definedp{\=#2}% + \edef \zpg {\expandafterthrice\ztagdata \name{\=#2}\zmark0}% + \expandafter\zwhichpagea \zpg--\zmark + \else + \zuntag{#2}{\relax}% + #1=\pagenumber + \fi\relax} + +\def \zwhichpagea #1-#2-#3\zmark{% + \if \emptyargp{#2}% + \zwhichpageb #1\zmark + \else + \zwhichpageb #2\zmark + \fi} + +\def \zwhichpageb #1\zmark{% + \setbox \zboxa=\hbox{\zreg=0#1}% + \if \dimzerop{\wd\zboxa}% + \zreg=#1% + \else + \zreg=\pagenumber + \fi} + +% Tag Cross-Reference +% --- --------------- + + +% These counters keep track of the number of duplicate tags, and the +% number of tags that have changed since the previous run. + +\definecount{\zduptags}{0} +\definecount{\zchangedtags}{0} + + +% Define the macro \=tag to contain the page, number, and title. +% However, use of the title is controlled by \allowreftitle. + +\def \xreftag #1#2#3#4{% {page}{number}{title}{tag} + \ifnum \xrefmode=\xrefloadtagmode + \if \definedp{\=#4}\zduptag{#4}\fi + \xreftagdef{#1}{#2}{#3}{\=#4}% + \else\ifnum \xrefmode=\xrefcopymode + \xreftagchk{#1}{#2}{#3}{\=#4}% + \fi\fi} + +\def \xreftagdef #1#2#3#4{% {page}{number}{title}{\name} + \if \allowreftitle + \withname\gdef{#4}{#1\zmark#2\zmark#3}% + \else + \withname\gdef{#4}{#1\zmark#2\zmark}% + \fi} + +\def \xreftagchk #1#2#3#4{% {page}{number}{title}{\name} + \xreftagdef{#1}{#2}{#3}{\zxrefchk}% + \expandaftertwice\ifx \name{#4}\zxrefchk + \else + \global\increment \zchangedtags + \fi} + +\def \zduptag #1{% {tag} + \writelog{ZzTeX reference: Duplicate tag `#1'.}% + \global\increment \zduptags} + +% Tag Cross-Reference Summary +% --- --------------- ------- + + +\def \ztagsummary {% + \if \posp{\zuntagrefs}% + \remark{Number of undefined tags in this run: \number\zuntagrefs.}% + \fi + \if \posp{\zduptags}% + \remark{Number of duplicate tags in this run: \number\zduptags._% + \space\space\space\space\space\space\space Eliminate duplicates % + and reprocess the book twice.}% + \fi + \if \posp{\zmistags}% + \remark{Number of misplaced tags in this run: \number\zmistags.}% + \fi + \if \posp{\zchangedtags}% + \remark{Number of tags changed since previous run: \number\zchangedtags._% + \space\space\space\space\space\space\space Reprocess the book % + to obtain correct cross-references.}% + \fi} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztex.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztex.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..203affbfac0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztex.tex @@ -0,0 +1,196 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Main Module +% +% Synopsis: This is the main module of ZzTeX. It sets up character +% categories and loads all the other modules. +% +% Note: ZzTeX assumes the use of DVIPSONE, the PostScript DVI program +% from Y&Y. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 27 March 1989 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% If ZzTeX is already loaded, quit immediately. + +\ifx \ZzTeX\zzzundefinedzzz \else \message{... using format}\endinput \fi + +% Character Categories +% --------- ---------- + + +% Character INITEX ZzTeX Notes +% +% NUL ignored invalid Ignored in Plain TeX. +% TAB invalid Space in Plain TeX. +% FORMFEED active: \par +% RETURN end of line end of line +% space space space +% # parameter +% $ math shift +% & alignment tab +% % comment comment +% @ other active: command +% letters letter letter +% \ escape escape +% ^ superscript +% _ subscript +% { begin group +% } end group +% ~ active: tie +% DELETE invalid invalid +% others other invalid + + +\chardef \catescape = 0 % Escape character (\). %^catcode +\chardef \catbegin = 1 % Begin group ({). %^catcode +\chardef \catend = 2 % End group (}). %^catcode +\chardef \catmath = 3 % Math mode ($). %^catcode +\chardef \catalign = 4 % Alignment tab (&). %^catcode +\chardef \catendofline = 5 % End of line. %^catcode +\chardef \catparameter = 6 % Parameter (#). %^catcode +\chardef \catsuperscript = 7 % Superscript (^). %^catcode +\chardef \catsubscript = 8 % Subscript (_). %^catcode +\chardef \catignored = 9 % Ignored character. %^catcode +\chardef \catspace = 10 % Space. %^catcode +\chardef \catletter = 11 % Letter. %^catcode +\chardef \catother = 12 % Other. %^catcode +\chardef \catactive = 13 % Active character (tilde). %^catcode +\chardef \catcomment = 14 % Comment (percent). %^catcode +\chardef \catinvalid = 15 % Invalid character. %^catcode +\chardef \catcsname = 16 + +\catcode`\^ = \catsuperscript +\catcode`\^^@ = \catinvalid +\catcode`\^^I = \catinvalid +\catcode`\^^L = \catactive +\catcode`\^^M = \catendofline +\catcode`\ = \catspace +\catcode`\# = \catparameter +\catcode`\$ = \catmath +\catcode`\& = \catalign +\catcode`\% = \catcomment +\catcode`\@ = \catactive +\catcode`\\ = \catescape +\catcode`\_ = \catsubscript +\catcode`\{ = \catbegin +\catcode`\} = \catend +\catcode`\~ = \catactive +\catcode`\^^? = \catinvalid + +% Characters "80--"FF are catcoded as invalid in zzmisc. + +\outer \def ^^L{\par} + +% Atsign Commands +% ------ -------- + + +% At-sign commands are reserved for extended commands within blocks. +% \defineatsigncommand makes a local definition! + + +\def \defineatsigncommand @#1{% char args {body} + \withname\def{\zat#1}} + +\def @#1{% char + %%%\relax % Stops \omit search in an alignment cell. + \if \undefinedp{\zat#1}% + \error{undefat}{The atsign command `\string@#1' is not defined + in this block}% + \fi + \name{\zat#1}} + +% Markers +% ------- + + +% This command does nothing, but it provides a name on which to +% hang a comment for ZzExplore. + +\def \definemarker #1{% {marker-name} + } + +% Paragraph Programs +% --------- -------- + + +% We maintain a list of little programs that must be executed +% at the beginning of every paragraph. A program is declared +% with `\declareeverypar'. The programs are executed with +% `\requiredeverypar'. + +\def \everyparlist {} + +\def \declareeverypar #1{% {code} + \append{#1}{\everyparlist}} + +\def \requiredeverypar {% + \maplist{##1}{\everyparlist}} + +% Modules +% ------- + + +\def \zremovePlaindef #1{% + \let #1= \relax} + +\input zzprog % Must be first. +\input zzreg % Must be second. +\input zzerror +\input zzhelp +\input zzio +\input zzfont +\input zzvmode +\input zzhmode +\input zzhmodeb +\input zzhyph +\input zzltrspc +\input zzblock +\input zzxref +\input zzdoc +\input zzdiv +\input zzpage +\input zzoverlay +\input zzindexv1 % Must precede body files. +\input zzsect +\input zztext +\input zztabbing +\input zznote +\input zzlist +\input zztabularv3 +\input zzfloat +\input zzart +\input zztag +\input zzmath +\input zzfront +\input zzps +\input zzhyper +\input zzmisc % Must be next to last. +\input zzplain % Must be last. + +% Identification +% -------------- + + +\def \TeX {T\kern-.1667em \lower .55ex \hbox{E}\kern-.1em X} +\def \ZzTeX {Z\kern -.02em z\kern -.05em \TeX} + +\input zzver\relax + +\everyjob = {\messagenl{__Welcome to ZzTeX version \ZzTeXversion__}} + +\def \fmtname {ZzTeX} +\edef \fmtversion {\ZzTeXversion} + + +\messagenl{__Welcome to ZzTeX version \ZzTeXversion__} + +\if \orp{\hmodep}{\posp{\pagetotal}} + \zzerror{Spurious paragraph text appears in the ZzTeX files}% +\fi diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztext.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztext.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8e37133039e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztext.tex @@ -0,0 +1,935 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX General Text Facilities +% +% Synopsis: This module contains definitions for blocks that are used to +% format text. +% +% Notes: The tabbing facility was implemented by Richard A. Wells and +% integrated into ZzTeX on 8/16/94. +% +% Authors: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos and Richard A. Wells +% Created: 14 March 1990 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Text Block +% ---- ----- + + +\defineblock{\text}{\endtext}{\false}{} +\resetinvcontext{\text} + +%~block text Type, Level +% \abovepenalty = integer % Penalty above text. +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above text. +% \def \beginformat {...} % Beginning of text formatter. +% \belowpenalty = integer % Penalty below text. +% \belowskip = glue % Space b/b below text. +% \bodyfont = {font} % Body font. +% \def \calloutformat ##1{...} % Callout formatter. +% \calloutnumber = integer % Number of first callout. +% \def \callouttext {...} % Callout text or \arg. +% \defaulttabwidth = dimen % Default repeating tab width. +% \setflag \enabletabbing = flag % Enable tabbing commands. +% \def \endformat {...} % End of text formatter. +% \leftindent = glue % Left indentation. +% \parindent = dimen % Paragraph indentation. +% \parrag = dimen % Paragraph raggedness. +% \parskip = glue % Paragraph skip. +% \rightindent = glue % Right indentation. +% \textcolor = {...} % Color of text. +% \setflag \verbatimlines = flag % Treat line breaks verbatim. +% \width = dimen % Line width. +%~end + +\definecount{\calloutnumber}{0} +\setflag \enabletabbing = \false +\definedimen{\defaulttabwidth}{0pt} +\setflag \verbatimlines = \false + + +\def \text #1{% {type} + \beginblockscope{text}% + \global\increment \textdepth + \abovepenalty = \breakgood %~default hard + \def \beginformat {}% %~default soft + \belowpenalty = \breakgood %~default hard + \calloutnumber = 1 %~default with + \def \callouttext {\number\calloutnumber}% %~default soft + \defaulttabwidth = \mindimen %~default soft + \setflag \enabletabbing = \false %~default soft + \def \endformat {}% %~default soft + \textcolor = {}% %~default soft + \setflag \verbatimlines = \false %~default soft + \processdesign{\text}{#1\romannumeral\textdepth}% + \global\increment \textnumber + \textformat + \def \zarg {\arg}% + \if \tokeqlp{\callouttext}{\zarg}% + \defineatsigncommand @##{\ztextcoformat}% + \else + \defineatsigncommand @##{\ztextcoformat{\callouttext}}% + \fi + \if \emptytoksp{\textcolor}% + \bgroup + \else + \color{\the\textcolor}% + \fi + \if \enabletabbing \ztabinittabbing \fi + \if \verbatimlines \obeylines \fi + \if \enabletabbing \ztabstarttabbing \fi} + +\def \endtext {% + % Must really be \par, not \endgraf, because might be redefined + % for tabbing. + \if \notp{\verbatimlines}% + % In \verbatimlines the line preceding \endtext{...} will put + % out a final \par, but if not we have to do it here. + \par + \fi + \if \enabletabbing \ztabfinaltabbing \fi + \if \emptytoksp{\textcolor}% + \egroup + \else + \endcolor + \fi + \futurelet\nexttoken \zendtext} + +\def \zendtext {% + \endtextformat + \global\decrement \textdepth + \endblockscope{text}% + \parnext} + +\def \textformat {% + \endgraf + \the\bodyfont + \bbskipabove{\abovepenalty}{\aboveskip}% + \alterindentation{\leftindent}{\rightindent}% + \settextwidth{\width}% + \setparrag{\parrag}% + \beginformat} + +\def \endtextformat {% + \endformat + \bbskipbelowblockpar{\nexttoken}{\belowpenalty}{\belowskip}} + +\def \ztextcoformat #1{% {text} + \calloutformat{#1}% + \global\increment \calloutnumber} + +% Tabbing Commands +% ------- -------- + +% These commands are available in a text block if \enabletabbing is turned on. + + +% \ztabinitalizetabbing +% - Redefines \par +% - Defines the @ commands for tabbing. (The real work is done in the +% in the \ztabcmd* macros, defined below.) +% - Initializes variables + +\def \ztabinittabbing {% + % Redefine \par to ship out the tabbed line, \endgraf it and start a + % new tabbed line + \let \par = \ztabpar + % Define tabbing commands + \def \adjusttabbing ##1{\ztabadjusttabbing{##1}}% + \defineatsigncommand @.{\ztabcmdset}% + \defineatsigncommand @>{\ztabcmdforwards}% + \defineatsigncommand @+{\ztabcmdindent}% + \defineatsigncommand @-{\ztabcmdoutdent}% + \defineatsigncommand @D{\ztabcmddiscard}% + \defineatsigncommand @C{\ztabcmdclear}% + \defineatsigncommand @E##1{\ztabcmdevery{##1}}% + % Initialize variables + \if \verbatimlines + % The line with \text{...} will put out the first \par, so we + % want to skip it. + \ztabdiscardtrue + \else + \ztabdiscardfalse + \fi + \global\ztabindentlevel=0\relax + % Clear all tab stops + \ztabcmdclear} + +\def \ztabparfinishpreviousline {% + % Set state checked by \ztabendtabcell + \ztabatnltrue + % End last tab cell with \ztabnltrue + \ztabendtabcell + \egroup% closes inner group started below in \ztabmaketabbedline + \egroup% closes outer group started below in \ztabmaketabbedline + % Unless discarding, deposit the line and remove the last box + \if \notp{\ztabdiscardp}% + \unvbox\zboxa\lastbox + \else + % Clear discarding flag + \ztabdiscardfalse + \fi + \endgroup% closes outermost group started by \ztabmaketabbedline + % We should be back in vertical mode now. + % + % Reset \ztabsbox. The new value is the set of tbd boxes + % followed by the done boxes. If not all of the tbd boxes were + % used this should result in the same set of boxes as the + % previous value of \ztabsbox. However, if the tbd boxes were used up + % then the done boxes may contain additional boxes built on the fly. + \setbox\ztabsbox\hbox{\unhbox\ztabstbdbox\unhbox\ztabsdonebox}} + +\def \ztabparstartnextline {% + \ztabmaketabbedline} + +\def \ztabpar {% macro used instead of \par in tabbing + \ztabparfinishpreviousline + \endgraf + \ztabparstartnextline} + +\def \ztabstarttabbing {% + \ztabparstartnextline} + +\def \ztabfinaltabbing {% + % Discard and finish last tabbed line started by last \ztabpar + \ztabdiscardtrue + \ztabparfinishpreviousline} + + + +% Variables shared by \ztab* macros + +% Counts and dimens for building tab boxes +\definecount{\ztabindentlevel}{0} +\definecount{\ztabindentcounter}{0} +\definedimen{\ztabcolwidth}{0pt} +\definedimen{\ztabtabpos}{0pt} +\definedimen{\ztabdimenii}{0pt} + +% Conditionals +% atnlp: are we at a \nl in tab processing? +\def \ztabatnlfalse {\global\setflag \ztabatnlp=\false}% +\def \ztabatnltrue {\global\setflag \ztabatnlp=\true}% +% discardp: are we discarding this line's output? +\def \ztabdiscardfalse {\global\setflag \ztabdiscardp=\false}% +\def \ztabdiscardtrue {\global\setflag \ztabdiscardp=\true}% +% settingp: are we setting? +\def \ztabsettingfalse {\global\setflag \ztabsettingp=\false}% +\def \ztabsettingtrue {\global\setflag \ztabsettingp=\true}% +% tabbingp: are we tabbing? +\def \ztabtabbingfalse {\global\setflag \ztabtabbingp=\false}% +\def \ztabtabbingtrue {\global\setflag \ztabtabbingp=\true}% + + +% Boxes to hold the tabs +\definebox{\ztabsbox}% hbox of hboxes for each tab column +\definebox{\ztabstbdbox}% hbox of hbox tab columns still "to be done" +\definebox{\ztabsdonebox}% hbox of hbox tab columns already done +\definebox{\ztabsindentbox}% hbox of indents + + +% The macros that implement the tabbing commands. \ztabcmd* are the +% top-level macros called by the @ commands. Other \ztab* macros are +% helpers. + +\def \ztabcmdset {% + % Set state checked by \ztabendtabcell + \ztabsettingtrue + % End the current cell with \ztabsettingtrue + \ztabendtabcell + % Start the next cell + \ztabbegintabcell\noindent\ignorespaces}% + +\def \ztabcmdforwards {% + % Set state checked by \ztabendtabcell + \ztabtabbingtrue + % End the current cell with \ztabsettingtrue + \ztabendtabcell + % Start the next cell + \ztabbegintabcell\noindent\ignorespaces}% + +\def \ztabcmdindent {\global\increment \ztabindentlevel\relax}% + + +\def \ztabcmdoutdent {% + \global\decrement \ztabindentlevel\relax + \if \negp{\ztabindentlevel}% + \zzerror{Attempt to tab dedent (with \string@-) to left of left margin}% + \fi} + +\def \ztabcmddiscard {% + \ztabdiscardtrue}% + +\def \ztabcmdclear {% {boolean: initialization} + % First clear all boxes + \ztabcleartabboxes + % Surprise! Clearing tabs might actually set them, if \defaulttabwidth + % has been set in the design + \if \neqlp{\defaulttabwidth}{\mindimen}% + \ztabcmdevery{\defaulttabwidth}% + \else + % Must clear indent level since we've cleared all tabs (note that + % we intentionally leave indent level alone if there is a + % \defaulttabwidth!) + \global\ztabindentlevel=0\relax + \fi\ignorespaces}% + +\def \ztabcmdevery #1{% + % First clear all tabs + \ztabcleartabboxes + % Set new tab columns of the specified width into \ztabsbox + \ztabsettabs{#1}% + % Re-init the boxes used by \ztabmaketabbedline + \ztabinittabboxes{\true}% Flag indicates this is a re-init + \ignorespaces} + + +% Implementation of the above commands + + +\def \ztabinittabboxes #1{% Init the tab boxes {boolean: re-init} + % First copy \ztabsbox into \ztabstbdbox and clear \ztabsdonebox + \global\setbox\ztabstbdbox\copy\ztabsbox + \global\setbox\ztabsdonebox\null + % Put all of the indent boxes that might be built into an hbox + % which we will emit later, but just before processing cells + \global\setbox\ztabsindentbox\hbox% + \bgroup% + % Initialize counter for loop + \ztabindentcounter=0\relax + % Iterate \ztabindentlevel times, moving tabboxes from \ztabstbdbox to + % \ztabsdone, maybe emitting hboxes per indent + \if \lssp{\ztabindentcounter}{\ztabindentlevel}% + \loop + \increment \ztabindentcounter\relax% increment loop counter + % Pull \lastbox off of \ztabstbdbox + \global\setbox\ztabstbdbox\hbox{% + \unhbox\ztabstbdbox + \global\setbox\zboxb\lastbox}% + \ifvoid\zboxb + % This is a problem. Not allowed to indent past set tabs. + \zzerror{Attempt to tab indent (with \string@+, [\the\ztabindentlevel]) past set tabs}% + \else + % Nothing wrong with the box: push it on \ztabsdonebox + % and maybe emit it + \global\setbox\ztabsdonebox\hbox{\copy\zboxb\unhbox\ztabsdonebox}% + \if \notp{#1}% Not re-initializing + \box\zboxb + \fi + \fi + % Loop test + \if \lssp{\ztabindentcounter}{\ztabindentlevel}\repeat + \fi + % End hbox + \egroup} + +\def \ztabcleartabboxes {% Clear the tab boxes and indent level + \setbox\ztabsbox\null + \global\setbox\ztabstbdbox\null + \global\setbox\ztabsdonebox\null} + +\def \ztabsettabs #1{% Deposit tab stops of a specified width in \ztabsbox + \ztabcolwidth=#1\relax + \ztabtabpos=0pt\relax + % Loop while \ztabtabpos is less than \hsize, setting another tab + \loop + \ztabsetanother + \if \dimlssp{\ztabtabpos}{\hsize}\repeat} + +\def \ztabsetanother {% Helper for \ztabsettabs, immediately preceding + % Advance the counter + \advance \ztabtabpos by \ztabcolwidth + % Set another tab by "pushing" another hbox into the \ztabsbox hbox + % followed by its old set of hboxes + \setbox\ztabsbox\hbox{\hbox to\ztabcolwidth{}\unhbox\ztabsbox}} + +\def \ztabmaketabbedline {% Build a line of tabbed text + % Start outermost group that redefines \nl + \begingroup + % Inittab boxes (this also builds \ztabsindentbox) + \ztabinittabboxes{\false}% Flag indicates NOT a re-init + % \nl is a synonym for modified \par + \let\nl=\par + % \zboxa will contain the entire tabbed line in a vbox. + % (It is unvboxed in \nl and may be discarded if a @D is encountered.) + \setbox\zboxa\vbox% + % start outer group closed by \nl that holds state of \ztabatnlp + \bgroup% + % don't want to indent a tabbed line + \noindent + % Init conditionals + \ztabatnlfalse + \ztabsettingfalse + \ztabtabbingfalse + % start inner group closed by \nl that surrounds set of tabboxes + % and uses \zboxc as an hbox for the current cell. + \bgroup% + % emit indentation box + \box\ztabsindentbox + % start the first cell + \ztabbegintabcell} + % material for a cell will follow here and be ended by + % either a @ command or \nl, all of which will deposit + % \ztabendtabcell. The @ commands will begin another tab cell and + % \nl will also finish all of the groups started by + % \ztabmaketabbedline and put out the line. + +\def \ztabbegintabcell {% + % \zboxc contains an hbox as the current cell of tabbed material. + % (It is deposited at the end of \ztabendtabcell.) + \setbox\zboxc\hbox% + \bgroup% opens group closed in \ztabendtabcell + \ignorespaces} + +\def \ztabendtabcell {% + \if \ztabatnlp + % Processing last cell in this row. Close group opened in + % \ztabbegintabcell w/o bothering to re-set tabboxes. + \egroup + \else + % Close this cell's group (opened in \ztabbegintabcell) with \hss, + % since this is not the last cell. + \hss\egroup + % "Pop" current tabbox from \ztabstbdbox, measure it, deposit tabbed + % material into properly sized box and then "push" tabbox onto \ztabsdonebox + % "Pop" from the end of \ztabstbdbox using \lastbox into \zboxb + \global\setbox\ztabstbdbox\hbox{% + \unhbox\ztabstbdbox + \global\setbox\zboxb\lastbox}% + % Process the current tabbox + \ifvoid\zboxb + \if \ztabtabbingp + \zzerror{Attempt to tab (with \string@>) past set tabs}% + \else + % The current tabbox is void, so we set it to a box that is the + % natural width of \zboxc (which contains the cell material). + \global\setbox\zboxb\hbox to\wd\zboxc{}% + \fi + \else + \if \ztabsettingp + % Re-set previously stored tabbox to natural width of the cell (\zboxc) + \global\setbox\zboxb\hbox to\wd\zboxc{}% + \fi + % Re-deposit the cell material into \zboxc using the width of the + % current tabbox. + \setbox\zboxc\hbox to\wd\zboxb{\unhbox\zboxc}% + \fi + % "Push" the current tabbox measure onto the \ztabsdonebox set of boxes. + % (Note that this might have come from \ztabstbdbox or been measured from + % \zboxc if there were no more tabboxes, so this is where an "on-the-fly" + % tab is added to \ztabsdone, which will later be copied back into + % \ztabsbox for the next line.) + \global\setbox\ztabsdonebox\hbox{\box\zboxb\unhbox\ztabsdonebox}% + \fi + % Clear conditional variables + \ztabsettingfalse + \ztabtabbingfalse + % emit box for this cell + \box\zboxc} + +\def \ztabadjusttabbing #1{% {vertical-mode material} + % Close and discard currently open tabbed line (empty, but started + % by end of previous line). + \ztabcmddiscard + \ztabparfinishpreviousline + % Insert vertical material + #1\relax + % If in verbatimlines must set this line to be discarded by + % the newline which ends the \adjusttabbing{...} line, which will also + % start the next line. + \if \verbatimlines + \ztabdiscardtrue + \fi + % Start next tabbed line + \ztabparstartnextline} + +% Builtin Text Blocks +% ------- ---- ------ + +% The following text block formats text in a completely normal fashion. +% It can be used with \with to make small changes to the text format. + +\def \textnormalidesign {% + \calculate \aboveskip = {\enclosingbaselineskip,+,\enclosingparskip}% + \belowskip = \aboveskip + \bodyfont = {}% + \leftindent = \enclosingleftss + \parindent = \enclosingparindent + \parrag = \enclosingparrag + \parskip = \enclosingparskip + \rightindent = \enclosingrightss + \setflag \verbatimlines = \false + \width = \naturalwidth} + +\def \textnormaliidesign {% + \textnormalidesign} +\def \textnormaliiidesign {% + \textnormalidesign} +\def \textnormalivdesign {% + \textnormalidesign} + +\def \setflushingleft {% + \leftindent = 0pt + \parfillskip = \normalparfillskip + \parindent = 0pt + \rightindent = 0pt + \width = \naturalwidth} + + +% This text block centers text relative to the current left and right +% indentation. + +\def \textcenteridesign {% + \textnormalidesign + \setcentering} + +\def \textcenteriidesign {% + \textcenteridesign} +\def \textcenteriiidesign {% + \textcenteridesign} +\def \textcenterivdesign {% + \textcenteridesign} + +\def \setcentering {% + \leftindent = \centerindent + \parfillskip = 0pt + \parindent = 0pt + \rightindent = \centerindent + \width = \naturalwidth} + + +% This text block positions text flush right. + +\def \textflushrightidesign {% + \textnormalidesign + \setflushingright} + +\def \textflushrightiidesign {% + \textflushrightidesign} +\def \textflushrightiiidesign {% + \textflushrightidesign} +\def \textflushrightivdesign {% + \textflushrightidesign} + +\def \setflushingright {% + \leftindent = \centerindent + \parfillskip = 0pt + \parindent = 0pt + \rightindent = 0pt + \width = \naturalwidth} + +% This text block squares off the last line of paragraphs. + +\def \textflushendidesign {% + \textnormalidesign + \parfillskip = 0pt} + +\def \textflushendiidesign {% + \textflushendidesign} +\def \textflushendiiidesign {% + \textflushendidesign} +\def \textflushendivdesign {% + \textflushendidesign} + +\def \flushendpar {% + \zskipa = \parfillskip + \parfillskip = 0pt + \par + \parfillskip = \zskipa} + +% This text block sets text in the full type width. + +\def \texttypeareaidesign {% + \textnormalidesign + \leftindent = -\oddlefttextmargin + \width = \typeareawidth} + +\def \texttypeareaiidesign {% + \texttypeareaidesign} + +% This command centers a single line or sets multiple lines in block format. + +\def \centerorblockpar #1#2{% {width}{text} + \measuretextwidth{\tdimena}{#2}% + \if \dimlssp{\tdimena}{#1}% + \centerline{#2}% + \else + \noindent #2\par + \fi} + +% Code Block +% ---- ----- + + +\defineblock{\code}{\endcode}{\false}{} + +%~block code Type +% \abovepenalty = integer % Penalty above code. +% \aboveskip = glue % Space b/b above code. +% \setflag \allowbreaks = boolean % Page breaks allowed? +% \setflag \allowatsigncommands = boolean % Allow at-sign commands. +% \setflag \allowcallouttag = boolean % Allow \tag for callout numbers. +% \setflag \allowTeXcommands = boolean % Allow commands with \ { } +% \setflag \allowTeXmath = boolean % Allow math with $ _ ^ +% \setflag \autocallout = boolean % Automatically number lines? +% \def \beginformat {...} % Beginning of code formatter. +% \belowpenalty = integer % Penalty below code. +% \belowskip = glue % Space b/b below code. +% \bodyfont = {...} % Font for text. +% \def \calloutformat ##1{...} % Callout formatter. +% \calloutnumber = integer % Number of first callout. +% \def \callouttext {...} % Callout text or \arg. +% \codegapskip = glue % Standard code gap (see \codegap). +% \def \endformat {...} % End of code formatter. +% \hfuzz = dimen % Amount text can exceed \hsize. +% \indentcolumns = integer % Standard indentation amount. +% \leftindent = glue % Left indentation. +% \metafont = {font} % Font for metasyntactic names. +% \rightindent = glue % Right indentation. +% \textcolor = {...} % Color of text. +% \setflag \verbatimchars = flag % Take all characters verbatim? +% \setflag \verbatimspaces = flag % Take all spaces verbatim? +% \width = dimen % Width of code. +%~end + +\defineskip{\codegapskip}{0pt} +\definecount{\indentcolumns}{0} +\definetoks{\metafont} + +\definecount{\codelinenumber}{0} + +\definecount{\zcodehyph}{0} % To remember hyphen character. + +\def \code #1{% {type} + \blockcantbein{\code}{\code}% + \beginblockscope{code}% + \global\increment \codedepth + \abovepenalty = \breakgood %~default hard + \setflag \allowatsigncommands = \false %~default soft + \setflag \allowcallouttag = \false %~default soft + \setflag \allowTeXcommands = \true %~default soft + \setflag \allowTeXmath = \false %~default soft + \setflag \autocallout = \false %~default soft + \def \beginformat {}% %~default soft + \belowpenalty = \breakbetter %~default hard + \calloutnumber = 1 %~default with + \def \callouttext {\number\calloutnumber}% %~default soft + \codegapskip = \mindimen %~default soft + \def \endformat {}% %~default soft + \indentcolumns = 3 %~default soft + \textcolor = {}% %~default soft + \setflag \verbatimchars = \true %~default soft + \setflag \verbatimspaces = \true %~default soft + \codelinenumber = 1\relax + \processdesign{\code}{#1}% + \global\increment \codenumber + \codeformat + \let \par = \zcodepar + \obeylines + \if \verbatimspaces \obeyspaces \fi + \let \zrealincl = \include + \let \include = \zcodeincl + \let \zrealfn = \footnote + \let \footnote = \zcodefn + \def \zarg {\arg}% + \if \tokeqlp{\callouttext}{\zarg}% + \def \!{\zcodecoformat}% + \else + \def \!{\zcodecoformat{\callouttext}}% + \fi + \settaginfo{}{}% % No tag information so far. + \if \notp{\emptytoksp{\textcolor}}\color{\the\textcolor}\fi + \begingroup % So we can undo the following things. + \if \autocallout \everyparagraph = {\!}\fi + \if \verbatimchars + \uncatcode{\allowTeXcommands}{\allowatsigncommands}{\allowTeXmath} + \fi + \zcodeflushline} + +{\catcode`\^^M = \catactive +\gdef \zcodeflushline #1^^M{}% + +\gdef \endcode^^M{% +%%% \columnbreak{\breakallowed}% % Allow break after last line. + \endgroup % Undo the \uncatcode, + \if \notp{\emptytoksp{\textcolor}}\endcolor \fi% + \futurelet\nexttoken \zendcode}% % and grab onto the next character. +} % \catcode + +\def \zendcode {% + \hyphenchar\font = \zcodehyph + \setlist \zcodeadjlist = {}% + \endformat + \forcenextpenalty + \bbskipbelowblockpar{\nexttoken}{\belowpenalty}{\belowskip}% + \global\decrement \codedepth + \endblockscope{code}% + \parnext} + +\def \codeformat {% + \endgraf + \alterindentation{\leftindent}{\rightindent}% + \settextwidth{\width}% + \setparrag{0pt}% + \the\bodyfont + \zcodehyph = \hyphenchar\font + \hyphenchar\font = -1 + \parskip = 0pt \parindent = 0pt + \bbskipabove{\abovepenalty}{\aboveskip} + \beginformat} + +\def \zcodepar {% + \increment \codelinenumber + \if \hmodep + \endgraf + \if \notp{\allowbreaks}\nobreak \relax \fi + \zchkcodeadj + \else + \if \notp{\allowbreaks}\nobreak \relax \fi + \zchkcodeadj + \vskip \baselineskip + \fi} + +% This macro allows the compositor to noninvasively adjust pages between +% lines of code. + +\setlist \zcodeadjlist = {} + +\long\def \codeadjustment #1#2{% {line-number}{commands} + \append{{#1}{#2}}{\zcodeadjlist}} + +\long\def \zchkcodeadj {% + \maplist{\zchkcodeadjb##1}{\zcodeadjlist}} + +\long\def \zchkcodeadjb #1#2{% {line-number}{commands} + \if \eqlp{#1}{\codelinenumber}% + #2\relax + \fi} + +\def \zcodecoformat #1{% {text} + \ensurepar + {\ztoksa = {}% + \zcodecocln #1\zmark + \calloutformat{\the\ztoksa}}% + \if \allowcallouttag \settaginfo{#1}{???}\fi + \global\increment \calloutnumber} + +\def \zcodecocln #1#2\zmark{% + \ifx #1\ \else \ztoksa = \expandafter{\the\ztoksa#1}\fi + \if \notp{\emptyargp{#2}}\zcodecocln #2\zmark \fi} + +% Code Tools +% ---- ----- + + +%~ This command is used to place a math expression in a +%~ code block that doesn't allow dollar signs. + +\def \codemath {% $math$ %^code + $% + \catcodemath + \let \znext = } % Discard opening $. + +%~ This command produces a vertical ellipsis in code, +%~ with optional text explaining the omission. + +\def \codeellipsis #1{% {text} %^code + \ensurepar + {\lower .85\baselineskip \hbox{% + \vbox{\baselineskip = .5\baselineskip \lineskiplimit = 0pt + \kern \baselineskip \hbox{.}\hbox{.}\hbox{.}\kern \baselineskip}}% + \unbreakable\quad {\the\metafont #1}}}% + +{\catcode`\^^M = \catactive + +% The \include macro is redefined to use this version, which eats +% the newline at the end of the line. + +\gdef \zcodeincl #1^^M{\zrealincl{#1}}% + +% The \footnote macro is redefined so that it turns off \obeylines. + +\gdef \zcodefn {% + \bgroup% + \let ^^M = \space% + \zcodefnb}% + +\gdef \zcodefnb #1{% + \zrealfn{#1}% + \egroup}% + +%~ This command allows a vertical adjustment between two lines +%~ of code. A typical use would be +%~ \adjustcode{\fullpagebreak} + +\gdef \adjustcode #1#2^^M{#1}% {command} %^code + +%~ Blank lines in code should be produced with this command. +%~ A regular blank line produces too much space. + +\gdef \codegap #1^^M{% %^code + \if \dimnegp{\codegapskip}% + \vspace{\baselineskip}% + \else% + \vspace{\codegapskip}% + \fi}% + +} % \catcode + +% Code Fragment +% ---- -------- + + +%~ A "code fragment" is a short sequence of program code in the running text. +%~ Most books use |\mono|, which is defined in terms of this command. + +\def \codefragment #1#2#3#4{% {prefix}{suffix}{font}{text} + {#1% + \measurespacewidth{\tdimena}% + #3% + \if \monoencodingp \spaceskip = 1.2\tdimena \fi + \relax #4% + #2}} + +% Multicolumn Block +% ----------- ----- + + +\defineblock{\multicolumn}{\endmulticolumn}{\false}{} + +%~block multicolumn Type +% \abovepenalty = integer % Penalty above block. +% \aboveskip = glue % Visual space above block. +% \belowpenalty = integer % Penalty below block. +% \belowskip = glue % Visual space below block. +% \brokenpenalty = penalty % For hyphenation at bottom of column. +% \columngutter = dimen % Width of column gutter. +% \columnrulecolor = {color} % Color of rule separating columns. +% \columnrulewidth = dimen % Width of rule. +% \columns = integer % Number of columns. +% \setflag \flushbottom = flag % Should bottoms be flush? +% \leftindent = glue % Indentation for left edge. +% \margins = {left,right,top,bottom} % Four margins. +% \parrag = dimen % Paragraph raggedness. +% \setflag \preservelistdepth = flag % Preserve list depth? +% \siderulecolor = {color} % Color of rules on sides. +% \siderulewidth = dimen % Width of rules. +% \vshift = dimen % Vertical shift for entire element. +% \width = dimen % Width of each column. +%~end + +\definetoks{\columnrulecolor} +\definedimen{\columnrulewidth}{0pt} +\definecount{\columns}{0} +\definetoks{\margins} +\definetoks{\siderulecolor} +\definedimen{\siderulewidth}{0pt} + +\definebox{\zmctext} +\definecount{\zmccolumn}{0} +\definecount{\zentrylistdepth}{0} +\definebox{\zmccoli} +\definebox{\zmccolii} +\definebox{\zmccoliii} +\definebox{\zmccoliv} +\definebox{\zmccolv} +\definebox{\zmccolvi} +\definebox{\zmccolvii} +\definebox{\zmccolviii} +\definedimen{\zmcmaxht}{0pt} +\definebox{\zmcbox} + + +\def \multicolumn #1{% {type} + \beginblockscope{multicolumn}% + \global\increment \multicolumndepth + \abovepenalty = \breakgood %~default hard + \belowpenalty = \breakgood %~default hard + \brokenpenalty = \breaknever %~default soft + \setflag \preservelistdepth = \false %~default soft + \vshift = 0pt %~default soft + \processdesign{\multicolumn}{#1}% + \global\increment \multicolumnnumber + \expandafter\zmcparse \the\margins\zmark + \setbox \zmctext = \vtop\bgroup + \zentrylistdepth = \listdepth + \zpushvcontext + \if \preservelistdepth \global\listdepth = \zentrylistdepth \fi + \settextwidth{\width}% + \setparrag{\parrag}} + +\def \endmulticolumn {% + \endgraf + \zpopvcontext + \egroup % \vtop + \zbuildmc + \global\decrement \multicolumndepth + \endblockscope{multicolumn}} + +\def \zbuildmc {% + \splitmaxdepth = \dp\strutbox + \vbadness = 10000 % Do we want this? + \setbox \zmctext = \vbox{% + \vskip \splittopskip + \vskip -\ht\zmctext + \unvbox \zmctext + \unskip \unpenalty \unskip}% + \zbuildmca + \zbuildmcb + \bbskipabove{\abovepenalty}{\aboveskip}% + \hfuzz=999pc + \hindent{\leftindent} \lower \vshift \box\zmcbox \par + \prevdepth = 0pt % Nothing better to do. + \bbskipbelowblock{\belowpenalty}{\belowskip}} + +\def \zbuildmca {% + \zmccolumn = \columns + \zmcmaxht = 0pt + \loop + \calculate \tdimena = + {\ht\zmctext,-,\splittopskip,/,\zmccolumn,+,\splittopskip}% + \setbox \name{\zmccol\romannumeral\zmccolumn} = + \if \onep{\zmccolumn}\box\zmctext \else + \vsplit \zmctext to \tdimena \fi + \tdimena = \ht\name{\zmccol\romannumeral\zmccolumn}% + \if \dimgtrp{\tdimena}{\zmcmaxht}\zmcmaxht = \tdimena \fi + \decrement \zmccolumn + \if \posp{\zmccolumn}\repeat} + +\def \zbuildmcb {% + \setbox \zmcbox = \hbox{% + \vrule width \siderulewidth + \hskip -\siderulewidth + \hskip \zmcleft + \zmccolumn = \columns + \loop + \tdimena = \dp\name{\zmccol\romannumeral\zmccolumn}% + \setbox \zboxa = \vbox to \zmcmaxht {% + \unvbox \name{\zmccol\romannumeral\zmccolumn}% + \if \notp{\flushbottom}\vfil \fi + \vskip -\tdimena + \vskip \zmcbottom}% + \calculate \tdimena = {\ht\zboxa,-,\splittopskip}% + \lower \tdimena \hbox{\box\zboxa}% + \if \gtrp{\zmccolumn}{1}% + \hskip .5\columngutter + \hskip -.5\columnrulewidth + \vrule width \columnrulewidth + \hskip -.5\columnrulewidth + \hskip .5\columngutter + \fi + \decrement \zmccolumn + \if \posp{\zmccolumn}\repeat + \hskip \zmcright + \hskip -\siderulewidth + \vrule width \siderulewidth}} + +\def \zmcparse #1,#2,#3,#4\zmark{% + \def \zmcleft {#1\relax}% + \def \zmcright {#2\relax}% + \splittopskip = #3\relax + \def \zmcbottom {#4\relax}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzttladj.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzttladj.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d23439bfe3a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzttladj.tex @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX New Title Adjustment Scheme +% +% Synopsis: The new title adjustment scheme is an improvement over the +% original scheme provided by \adjusttitle. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 9 July 1997 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Title Adjustment Commands +% ----- ---------- -------- + + +%~ This command provides an adjustment to the enclosing title +%~ when it appears in the body of the book. The argument text +%~ is included only when the title appears in the body. + +\def \adjustbodytitle #1{% {text} %^title_adj + \if \eqlp{\zadjtitle}{\zadjtitlebody}#1\fi} + +%~ This command provides an adjustment to the enclosing title +%~ when it appears in a running head or foot. The argument text +%~ is included only when the title appears in a runner. + +\def \adjustmarktitle #1{% {text} %^title_adj + \if \eqlp{\zadjtitle}{\zadjtitlemark}#1\fi} + +%~ This command provides an adjustment to the enclosing title +%~ when it appears in the table of contents. The argument text +%~ is included only when the title appears in the ToC. + +\def \adjusttoctitle #1{% {text} %^title_adj + \if \eqlp{\zadjtitle}{\zadjtitletoc}#1\fi} + +%~ This command provides an adjustment to the enclosing title +%~ when it appears in a mini-Toc. The argument text +%~ is included only when the title appears in a mini-ToC. + +\def \adjustminitoctitle #1{% {text} %^title_adj + \if \eqlp{\zadjtitle}{\zadjtitleminitoc}#1\fi} + +\def \adjusttitle {% + \error{obsolete}{The \noexpand\adjusttitle command is obsolete}} + +% Common Adjustment Commands +% ------ ---------- -------- + + +%~ This command is equivalent to |\adjustbodytitle{\nl}|. + +\def \titlenl;{\adjustbodytitle{\nl}} %^title_adj + +%~ This command is equivalent to |\adjustbodytitle{\tl}|. + +\def \titletl;{\adjustbodytitle{\tl}} %^title_adj + +%~ This command is equivalent to |\adjusttoctitle{\nl}|. + +\def \tocnl;{\adjusttoctitle{\nl}} %^title_adj + +%~ This command is equivalent to |\adjusttoctitle{\tl}|. + +\def \toctl;{\adjusttoctitle{\tl}} %^title_adj + +%~ This command is equivalent to |\adjustminitoctitle{\nl}|. + +\def \minitocnl;{\adjustminitoctitle{\nl}} %^title_adj + +%~ This command is equivalent to |\adjustminitoctitle{\tl}|. + +\def \minitoctl;{\adjustminitoctitle{\tl}} %^title_adj + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztures.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztures.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..60f86eb3673 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zztures.tex @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX TeXtures Interface +% +% Synopsis: This module provides replacement definitions for things +% that are different in TeXtures. +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 17 March 1994 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Unencodable Characters +% ----------- ---------- + + +\def \PSbackslash {$\backslash$} +\def \PSbar {$\vert$} +\def \PSbullet {$\bullet$} +\def \PSdollar {\char "24} +\def \PSunderscore {\kern .06em \vbox{\hrule width .3em}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzver.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzver.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7b3fd2bfa2c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzver.tex @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +\def \ZzTeXversion {17.7} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzvmode.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzvmode.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a81b33d2bd1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzvmode.tex @@ -0,0 +1,380 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Vertical Mode Facilities +% +% Synopsis: +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 21 September 1989 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Interline Skip +% --------- ---- + + +\def \nointerlineskip {% + \prevdepth = -1000pt} + +\def \offinterlineskip {% + \baselineskip = -1000pt + \lineskip = 0pt + \lineskiplimit = \maxdimen} + +% Vertical Skiping Environment +% -------- ------- ----------- + + +% The following registers make up the vertical skiping environment. + +\definecount{\zvskenvtype}{0} % Previous vertical skip type. +\definecount{\zvskenvpen}{0} % Previous columnbreak penalty. +\defineskip{\zvskenvreq}{0pt} % Previous required base-to-base skip. +\defineskip{\zvskenvskip}{0pt} % Previous actual skip amount. + +\chardef \zvskenvdiscard = 0 % Just initialized the environment. +\chardef \zvskenvpar = 1 % Previous element was a paragraph. +\chardef \zvskenvabove = 2 % Just finished an above skip. +\chardef \zvskenvbelow = 3 % Just finished a below skip. +\chardef \zvskenvmath = 4 % Previous element was a paragraph ending + % with a math display. + +\definecount{\zvskenvnopen}{20000\relax} + +\let \noskip = \mindimen + + +% The vertical skiping environment is maintained in the vertical context. + +\zdeclareeveryvcontext{\zvskenvvcontext} + +\def \zvskenvvcontext {% + \zsavevcontext{\zvskenvtype=\the\zvskenvtype + \zvskenvpen=\the\zvskenvpen + \zvskenvreq=\the\zvskenvreq + \zvskenvskip=\the\zvskenvskip}% + \zvskpar + \global\zvskenvtype = \zvskenvdiscard} + +% Base-to-Base Skiping +% ------------ ------- + + +\declareeverypar{\zvskpar} + +\def \zvskpar {% + \global\zvskenvtype = \zvskenvpar + \global\zvskenvpen = \zvskenvnopen + \global\zvskenvreq = \parskip \global\advance \zvskenvreq by \baselineskip + \global\zvskenvskip = 0pt} + + +%~ This command produces vertical space so that the base-to-base +%~ distance above the next element is equal to the *glue*. The +%~ space is preceded by the specified *penalty*. If there is a font +%~ change for the next element, it must be specified before this command. + +\def \bbskipabove #1#2{% {penalty}{glue} %^vspace + \if \neqlp{\zvskenvtype}{\zvskenvdiscard}% + {\zvskprevmath{\parskip}{\baselineskip}% + \zparseglue #2\zmark + \setflag \znosk = {\dimeqlp{\zskipa}{\noskip}}% + \vpenalty{#1}% + \ifcase \zvskenvtype + \relax + \or + \if \znosk \zskipa = \zvskenvreq \fi + \or + \zskipa = \zvskenvreq + \or + \if \dimlssp{\zskipa}{\zvskenvreq}\zskipa = \zvskenvreq \fi + \or + \if \dimlssp{\zskipa}{\zvskenvreq}\zskipa = \zvskenvreq \fi + \fi + \if \notp{\dimzerop{\zvskenvskip}}\vskip -\zvskenvskip \fi + \zskipb = \zskipa + \advance \zskipb by -\parskip + \advance \zskipb by -\baselineskip + \vskip \zskipb + \if \notp{\znosk}% + \global\zvskenvtype = \zvskenvabove + \global\zvskenvreq = \zskipa + \fi + \global\zvskenvskip = \zskipb}% + \fi} + +%~ This command produces vertical space so that the base-to-base +%~ distance below the current element is equal to the *glue*. The +%~ space is preceded by the specified *penalty*. + +\def \bbskipbelow #1#2{% {penalty}{glue} %^vspace + \zvskbelow{#1}{#2}{\parskip}{\baselineskip}} + +\def \bbskipbelowblock #1#2{% {penalty}{glue} + \zvskbelow{#1}{#2}{\enclosingparskip}{\enclosingbaselineskip}} + +% This macro "returns" a value in \parnext: +% \noindent if next token does not start a new paragraph. +% empty if next token starts a new paragraph. + +\def \bbskipbelowblockpar #1#2#3{% {token}{penalty}{glue} + {\setflag \znext = \false % Set \true if token starts new paragraph. + \ifcat \noexpand#1\relax \setflag \znext = \true \fi + \ifcat \noexpand#1\endgraf \setflag \znext = \true \fi + \ifcat \noexpand#1\egroup \setflag \znext = \true \fi + \ifcat \noexpand#1&\setflag \znext = \true \fi + \ifx #1\noindent \setflag \znext = \false \fi + \xdef \parnext {\if \znext \else \noindent \fi}% + \zskipa = #3\relax + \if \andp{\znext}{\dimneqlp{#3}{\noskip}}% + \tdimena = \zskipa + \advance \zskipa by -\tdimena + \advance \zskipa by \enclosingparskip + \advance \zskipa by \enclosingbaselineskip + \if \dimlssp{\zskipa}{#3}\zskipa = #3\fi + \fi + \zvskbelow{#2}{\zskipa}{\enclosingparskip}{\enclosingbaselineskip}}} + +\def \zvskbelow #1#2#3#4{% {penalty}{glue}{parskip}{baselineskip} + {\zvskprevmath{#3}{#4}% + \zparseglue #2\zmark + \setflag \znosk = {\dimeqlp{\zskipa}{\noskip}}% + \vpenalty{#1}% + \ifcase \zvskenvtype + \zzerror{Skiping type is discard}% + \or + \if \znosk \zskipa = #3 \advance \zskipa by #4\fi + \or + \error{skipab}{A `skip below' follows a `skip above'}% + \or + \if \znosk \zskipa = \zvskenvreq \fi + \or + \if \dimlssp{\zskipa}{\zvskenvreq}\zskipa = \zvskenvreq \fi + \fi + \if \notp{\dimzerop{\zvskenvskip}}\vskip -\zvskenvskip \fi + \zskipb = \zskipa + \advance \zskipb by -#3% + \advance \zskipb by -#4% + \vskip \zskipb + \if \notp{\znosk}% + \if \neqlp{\zvskenvtype}{\zvskenvmath}% % Stay as math type so + \global\zvskenvtype = \zvskenvbelow % subsequent below skip + \fi % won't override. + \global\zvskenvreq = \zskipa + \fi + \global\zvskenvskip = \zskipb}} + +\def \zvskprevmath #1#2{% {parskip}{baselineskip} + \if \eqlp{\mathdisplayprevgraf}{\prevgraf}% + \global\zvskenvtype = \zvskenvmath + \global\zvskenvpen = \mathdisplayprevpenalty + \global\zvskenvreq = \mathdisplayprevskip + \global\advance \zvskenvreq by #1 + \global\advance \zvskenvreq by #2 + \global\zvskenvskip = \mathdisplayprevskip + \global\mathdisplayprevgraf = -1\relax + \fi} + +%~ This command forces the next base-to-base skip command +%~ regardless of the relationship between the previous element +%~ and the next one. + +\def \forcenextbbskip {% %^vspace + \global\zvskenvtype = \zvskenvpar + \global\mathdisplayprevgraf = -1\relax} + +\definecount{\zvpen}{0} + +\def \vpenalty #1{% {penalty} + \zvpen = \if \emptyargp{#1}\breaknever \else #1\fi + \if \orp{\eqlp{\zvskenvpen}{\zvskenvnopen}} + {\eqlp{\zvpen}{\breaknever}}% + \columnbreak{\zvpen}% + \global\zvskenvpen = \zvpen\relax + \else \if \andp{\posp{\zvskenvpen}}{\gtrp{\zvpen}{\zvskenvpen}}% + \columnbreak{\zvpen}% + \global\zvskenvpen = \zvpen\relax + \fi\fi} + +\def \forcenextpenalty {% + \global\zvskenvpen = \zvskenvnopen} + +\def \repeatpenalty {% + \if \neqlp{\zvskenvpen}{\zvskenvnopen}% + \columnbreak{\zvskenvpen}% + \fi} + +%~ This command inserts the specified amount of extra vertical space +%~ between the previous element and the next one. + +\def \vspace #1{% {glue} %^vspace + \if \neqlp{\zvskenvtype}{\zvskenvdiscard}% + \zparseglue #1\zmark + \vskip \zskipa + \fi} + +%~ This command inserts extra vertical space between the previous element +%~ and the next one. The space is measured in lines; a fractional number +%~ is allowed. + +\def \linespace #1{\vspace{#1\baselineskip}}% {lines} %^vspace + +\def \zparseglue #1#2\zmark{% {token}{tokens...} + \def \znext {#1}% + \def \zskip {\skip}% + \if \tokeqlp{\znext}{\zskip}% + \setskip \zskipa = #2\relax + \else + \zskipa = #1#2\relax + \fi} + +% Top to Text Skipping +% --- -- ---- -------- + + +% These commands use \zskipb so as not to screw up \fakepar. + +\def \vsinkfromtypearea #1{% {sinkage} + \endgraf + \nobreak % So \fakepar can't break. + \fakepar % So \bbskipabove won't discard. + \vbox{}% % Force start of page if not already. + \kern -\pagetotal + \kern -\headerheight + \bbskipabove{\breaknever}{#1}} + +\let \vsink = \vsinkfromtypearea + +\def \vsinkfromtrim #1{% {sinkage} + \zskipb = #1\relax + \advance \zskipb by -\headmargin + \vsinkfromtypearea{\zskipb}} + +\def \vsinkfromtextarea #1{% {sinkage} + \zskipb = #1\relax + \advance \zskipb by \headerheight + \if \topdeltaadjustment + \advance \zskipb by \topdelta + \fi + \vsinkfromtypearea{\zskipb}} + +% Rules +% ----- + + +\def \parrule #1#2{% {shift}{dimensions} + \endgraf + {\if \notp{\baselinetoprules}\zadjrule{#2}\fi + \hfuzz = 100pc + \noindent \hspace{#1}\vbox{\hrule height 0pt depth 0pt #2}\endgraf}} + +\def \colorparrule #1#2#3{% {color}{shift}{dimensions} + \endgraf + {\if \notp{\baselinetoprules}\zadjrule{#3}\fi + \hfuzz = 100pc + \noindent \hspace{#2}% + \color{#1}\vbox{\hrule height 0pt depth 0pt #3}\endcolor \endgraf}} + +\def \scotchrule #1#2#3{% {shift}{width}{height,gap,...} + \endgraf + {\hfuzz = 100pc + \commalist{\zscotchlist}{#3}% + \tcounta = 1\relax + \maplist{\zscotchb{#1}{#2}{##1}}{\zscotchlist}}} + +\def \zscotchb #1#2#3{% {shift}{width}{dimension} + \if \andp{\eqlp{\tcounta}{1}}{\notp{\baselinetoprules}}% + \zadjrule{height #3 depth 0pt}% + \fi + \if \oddp{\tcounta} + \noindent \hspace{#1}\vbox{\hrule height #3 depth 0pt width #2}\endgraf + \parskip = 0pt + \else + \nobreak + \vspace{#3}% + \nointerlineskip + \fi + \increment \tcounta} + +\def \zadjrule #1{% {dimensions} + \if \notp{\innermodep}% + \fakepar + \tdimena = \baselineskip + \advance \tdimena by -\prevdepth + \setbox \zboxa = \hbox{\vrule #1}% + \advance \tdimena by -\ht\zboxa + \vskip \tdimena + \vskip \topskip + \rule{height 0pt depth 0pt width 0pt}% + \penalty \breaknever + \vskip -\topskip + \parskip = 0pt \baselineskip = \ht\zboxa + \fi} + +% Vertical Alignment +% -------- --------- + + +\def \bottomout {% + \hrule width 0pt height 0pt % Make sure \vskip isn't discarded. + \vskip 0pt plus 1filll} + +% Counting Lines +% -------- ----- + + +\definecount{\zlinect}{0} + + +\def \countlines #1#2#3#4{% {\count}{width}{font}{text} + \setbox\zboxa = \vbox{% + \hsize = #2% + #3% + #4\par}% + \global\zlinect = 0 + \setbox\zboxa = \vbox{\unvbox\zboxa \zscanvbox}% + #1=\zlinect} + +\def \zscanvbox {% + \loop + \setflag \zscanagain = \false + \setbox\zboxa = \lastbox + \if \hboxp{\zboxa}% + \global\increment \zlinect + \setflag \zscanagain = \true + \else\if \notp{\dimzerop{\lastskip}}% + \unskip + \setflag \zscanagain = \true + \else\if \notp{\dimzerop{\lastkern}}% + \unkern + \setflag \zscanagain = \true + \else\if \notp{\zerop{\lastpenalty}}% + \unpenalty + \setflag \zscanagain = \true + \fi\fi\fi\fi + \if \zscanagain \repeat} + +% Special Boxes +% ------- ----- + + +\definedimen{\zibprevdepth}{0pt} + + +\long\def \interjectbox #1#2{% {right-shift}{content} + {\zibprevdepth = \prevdepth + \penalty \breaknever + \nointerlineskip + \moveright #1 \vbox to 0pt{% + \zpushvcontext + #1\relax + \zpopvcontext}% + \prevdepth = \zibprevdepth}} + +\long\def \smashbox #1{% + \vbox to 0pt{% + #1\relax + \vss}}
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzxref.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzxref.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a0771f39105 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/plain/zztex/zzxref.tex @@ -0,0 +1,245 @@ +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% Module: ZzTeX Cross-Referencing Facilities +% +% Synopsis: +% +% Author: Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% Created: 19 September 1989 +% +% Copyright 1989--2020 by Paul C. Anagnostopoulos +% under The MIT License (opensource.org/licenses/MIT) +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Data Structures +% ---- ---------- + + +\definewrite{\zxrootfile} + +\definewrite{\zxdivfile} +\setflag \zxdivopen = \false + +\definewrite{\zxcompfile} +\setflag \zxcompavail = \false + +\chardef \xrefbadmode = 0 % Invalid mode. +\chardef \xrefrunmode = 1 % Normal running environment. +\chardef \xrefsnapmode = 2 % Taking a division snapshot. +\chardef \xrefcopymode = 3 % Copying cross-reference files. +\chardef \xrefloadmodes = 4 % Beginning of load modes: +\chardef \xrefloadtagmode = 5 % Load tag definitions. +\chardef \xrefloadtocmode = 6 % Load table of contents. +\chardef \xrefloadauxmode = 7 % Create BibTeX auxiliary file. +\chardef \xrefloadendmode = 8 % Load endnotes. +\chardef \xrefloadcitemode = 9 % Load citation folios. + +\let \xrefmode = \xrefbadmode % Default mode. + +% Comment Lines +% ------- ----- + + +{\catcode`\%=\catother +\gdef \zcomment {%\space} +} % \catcode + + +\def \zxwritecomment #1#2#3{% {file}{keyword}{values} + \immediate\write #1 {\zcomment #2: #3}} + +% Initialization +% -------------- + + +\def \zxrefinit {% + \zxcompinit + \zxopenroot + \let \xrefmode = \xrefrunmode} + +\def \zxcompinit {% + \checkfile{\zxcompavail}{\jobname.zzc}% + \if \zxcompavail + \zxloadcomp{\xrefloadtagmode}% + \else + \checkfile{\zxcompavail}{\jobname.zzx}% + \if \zxcompavail + \zxgencomp + \zxloadcomp{\xrefloadtagmode}% + \else + \remark{There is no cross-reference file available for this run.}% + \fi + \fi} + +\def \zxopenroot {% + \immediate\openout \zxrootfile = \jobname.zzx\relax + \zxwritecomment{\zxrootfile}{root}{\jobname}} + +% Division Handling +% -------- -------- + + +\def \zxdivinit #1#2{% {division-name}{setting-it?} + \immediate\write \zxrootfile {\noexpand\zinputzzx{#1}}% + \if #2% + \immediate\openout \zxdivfile = #1.zzx\relax + \global\setflag \zxdivopen = \true + \zxwritecomment{\zxdivfile}{division}{#1}% + \immediate\write \zxdivfile + {\noexpand\xref{div}{}{}{}{\the\divisionname}\zcomment}% + \fi} + +% There is nothing to do with each entry in the cross-reference file. + +\def \xrefdiv #1#2#3#4{} + + +\def \zxdivfinal #1{% + \if \zxdivopen + \ztakesnap + \zxwritecomment{\zxdivfile}{end}{#1}% + \immediate\closeout \zxdivfile + \global\setflag \zxdivopen = \false + \fi} + +% Finalization +% ------------ + + +\def \zxreffinal {% + \zxwritecomment{\zxrootfile}{end}{\jobname}% + \immediate\closeout \zxrootfile + \zxgencomp} + +% Generate Composite File +% -------- --------- ---- + + +\def \zxgencomp {% + \remark{Generating composite cross-reference file:}% + \immediate\openout \zxcompfile = \jobname.zzc\relax + \zxwriteinfo{\true}{jobname}{\jobname}{}% + \zxwriteinfo{\true}{time}{\number\year.\number\month.\number\day}{\formattime}% + \zxwriteinfo{\true}{version}{\ZzTeXversion}{}% + \zxwriteinfo{\true}{author}{\bookauthor}{}% + \zxwriteinfo{\true}{title}{\booktitle}{}% + \zxwriteinfo{\true}{publisher}{\bookpublisher}{}% + \zxwriteinfo{\true}{ISBN}{\bookISBN}{}% + \zxwriteinfo{\true}{art-root}{\zartroot}{}% + \zxwriteinfo{\true}{place-art}{\zplaceart}{}% + \zxwriteinfo{\true}{PDF-hyperlinks}{\PDFhyperlinks}{}% + \zxwriteinfo{\true}{proof}{\the\zproofid}{}% + \zxwriteinfo{\true}{compositor}{\ininame}{\iniorganization}% + \zxwriteinfo{\true}{trim}{\the\trimwidth}{\the\trimheight}% + \zxwriteinfo{\true}{head-margin}{\the\headmargin}{}% + \zxwriteinfo{\true}{inner-margin}{\the\eveninnermargin}{\the\oddinnermargin}% + \let \zxmodesave = \xrefmode + \let \xrefmode = \xrefcopymode + \input \jobname.zzx\relax + \let \xrefmode = \zxmodesave + \zxwritecomment{\zxcompfile}{end}{\jobname}% + \immediate\closeout \zxcompfile} + +% This macro writes an information entry in the composite cross-reference +% file. + +\def \zxwriteinfo #1#2#3#4{% {composite?}{key}{value1}{value2} + \if #1% + \immediate\write \zxcompfile {\noexpand\xref{info}{}{#2}{#3}{#4}\zcomment}% + \else + \zbeginhidewrite + \edef \znext {\noexpand\xref{info}{\noexpand\folio}% + {#2}% + {#3} + {#4}}% + \znext + \zendhidewrite + \fi} + +%%% \immediate\write #1{\noexpand\xref{info}{#2}{#3}{#4}{\noexpand\folio}\zcomment}} + +% There is nothing to do when info entries are executed. + +\def \xrefinfo #1#2#3#4{} + +% This macro is used in the root cross-reference file to suck in the +% division cross-reference files. + +\def \zinputzzx #1{% + \checkfile{\znext}{#1.zzx}% + \if \znext \input #1.zzx \fi} + +% Load Composite File +% ---- --------- ---- + + +\def \zxloadcomp #1{% {xref-mode} + \if \zxcompavail + \let \zxmodesave = \xrefmode + \let \xrefmode =#1% + \input \jobname.zzc\relax + \let \xrefmode = \zxmodesave + \fi} + +\def \zxloadothercomp #1#2{% {file}{xref-mode} + \let \zxmodesave = \xrefmode + \let \xrefmode = #2% + \input #1\relax + \let \xrefmode = \zxmodesave} + +\def \loadrelatedxref #1{% {file} + \zxloadothercomp{#1}{\xrefloadtagmode}} + +% Cross-Reference Macro +% --------------- ----- + + +% Here's how the arguments are treated in each of the modes: +% +% Mode type page arg3 title arg5 +% +% load expanded --- passed to appropriate \xrefxxx macro --- +% copy expanded expanded expanded unexpanded expanded +% run expanded unexpanded expanded unexpanded expanded +% snap expanded expanded expanded expanded expanded + +% This macro is written for speed. + +\long\def \xref #1#2#3#4#5{% {type}{page-number}{arg3}{title}{arg5} + \ifnum \xrefmode>\xrefloadmodes + \name{\xref#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \else\ifnum \xrefmode=\xrefcopymode + {\def \zxtitle {#4}% + \immediate\write \zxcompfile {\noexpand\xref{#1}{#2}{#3}% + {\expandafter\zdefof \meaning\zxtitle\zmark}{#5}\zcomment}}% + \name{\xref#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% In case they want to do something. + \else\ifnum \xrefmode=\xrefrunmode + {\def \zxtitle {#4}% + \edef \znext {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\xref + {#1}{\noexpand#2}{#3}% + {\expandafter\zdefof \meaning\zxtitle\zmark}{#5}}% + \expandafter\zxwrite\expandafter{\znext\zcomment}}% + \if \vmodep \repeatpenalty \fi % In case glue follows write. + \else\ifnum \xrefmode=\xrefsnapmode + \immediate\zxwrite{\noexpand\xref{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}\zcomment}% + \else + \zxnomode + \fi\fi\fi\fi} + +\def \zxwrite {% + \if \zxdivopen \write \zxdivfile \else \write \zxrootfile \fi} + +\def \zxnomode {% + \zzerror{No cross-reference mode is set}} + +% Page Hints +% ---- ----- + + +\def \pagehint #1{% + \xref{hint}{\noexpand\folio}{}{#1}{}} + +% There is nothing to do when hint entries are executed. + +\def \xrefhint #1#2#3#4{} diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check b/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check index b45b97d836f..c2602701cdd 100755 --- a/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check +++ b/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check @@ -822,7 +822,7 @@ my @TLP_working = qw( zhlineskip zhlipsum zhnumber zhmetrics zhmetrics-uptex zhspacing ziffer zlmtt zootaxa-bst zref zwgetfdate zwpagelayout - zxjafbfont zxjafont zxjatype + zxjafbfont zxjafont zxjatype zztex ); diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds b/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds index 1ed76054eed..ab0f1f7de7b 100755 --- a/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds +++ b/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds @@ -1422,6 +1422,7 @@ chomp (my $ctan_root = `tlpkginfo --ctan-root`); 'zhmetrics', "&MAKEcopy", 'zhmetrics-uptex', "&MAKEflatten", 'zwgetfdate', "&MAKEcopy", + 'zztex', "&MAKEflatten", ); @@ -2205,6 +2206,7 @@ $standardtex 'yax', '(t-)?yax\.(sty|tex)|' . $standardtex, 'yquant', '\.sty|yquant-.*[^c]\.tex', # not yquant-doc.{tex,pdf} 'zefonts', '\.sty|\.fd', + 'zztex', '\.tex', ); diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-plaingeneric.tlpsrc b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-plaingeneric.tlpsrc index 2564fbfcf0f..6bebddc8373 100644 --- a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-plaingeneric.tlpsrc +++ b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-plaingeneric.tlpsrc @@ -107,3 +107,4 @@ depend xii depend xii-lat depend xlop depend yax +depend zztex diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/zztex.tlpsrc b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/zztex.tlpsrc new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e69de29bb2d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/zztex.tlpsrc |